SERVICE MANUAL

FIELD SERVICE

2005.03 Ver. 1.0

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.

IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians. Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate. The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended. Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly. Keep this Service Manual also for future service.

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care. DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:

:Precaution when servicing the product. :Prohibition when servicing the product. :Direction when servicing the product.

General precaution General prohibition General instruction

Electric hazard High temperature

Do not touch with wet hand Unplug

Do not disassemble Ground/Earth

S-1

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.

Prohibited Actions

DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. • Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object. • Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. • Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT • Using parts not specified by KMBT

S-2

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.

Power Cord Set or Power Plug

WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria: - provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and - the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and - provided with three-conductor cable having enough current capacity, and - the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area. Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock. • Attach power plug which meets the following criteria: - having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and - the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and - meets regulatory requirements for the area. Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock. • Conductors in the power cable must be connected to terminals of the plug according to the following order: • Black or Brown: • White or Light Blue: • Green/Yellow: L (line) N (neutral) PE (earth)

kw

Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product, and results in fire or electric shock.

S-3

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks. 1. Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply

WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock. • Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation. • Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. • If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. • Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely. Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire. • Check whether the product is grounded properly. If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer electric shock while operating the product. Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.

kw

S-4

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord

WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product. When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire. • Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is damaged. If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock. • Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet. Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire. • Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand. The risk of electric shock exists. • When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable. The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

S-5

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Wiring

WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire. Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result. 2. Installation Requirements

Prohibited Installation Places

WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that may catch fire. A risk of fire exists. • Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain. A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

When not Using the Product for a long time

WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord. Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.

S-6

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Ventilation

CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b. When taking a lot of copies c. When using multiple products at the same time

Stability

CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers. In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to a injury.

Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation. If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break and a risk of injury or fire exists. • Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options. When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists. • The area around the fixing unit is hot. You may get burnt.

S-7

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Work Performed with the Product Powered On

WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury. • Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached. High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damage. The user or CE may be injured. • Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the product. They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire. • Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. • Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit. Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire. • Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

S-8

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. • Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. • Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. • When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority. Improper replacement can cause explosion. • After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state. A risk of fire exists. • Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly. If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam). • Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other pointed parts. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

S-9

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

Handling of Consumables

WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative. If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician. • Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire. You may be burned due to dust explosion.

Handling of Service Materials

CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists. • Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated. A risk of fire exists.

S-10

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Handling of Service Materials

CAUTION
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. • When using any solvent, ventilate the room well. Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.

S-11

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[4] Used Batteries Precautions
ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Germany VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. France ATTENTION Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. Denmark ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren. Finland, Sweden VAROlTUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. Norway ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.

S-12

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[5] FUSE
CAUTION Double pole / neutral fusing ATTENTION Double pôle / fusible sur le neutre.

[6] LED Radiation Safety
• This product is a copier which operates by means of a LED (light emitting diodes) exposure system. There is no possibility of danger from the LED optical radiation, because the LED optical radiation level dose not exceed the accessible radiation limit of class 1 under all conditions of operation, maintenance, service and failure.

S-13

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.

High voltage

High temperature

High voltage

High temperature

4037P0C501DA

S-14

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage High voltage High voltage 4037P0C502DA S-15 .

contact our Service Office. Do not remove caution labels.SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage 4037P0C503DA CAUTION: • You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch by any caution label. S-16 . If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read.

SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Main Unit 2005.0 . 1.03 Ver.

.

0 has been changed in Ver. 2. Therefore. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2005/03 Date 1. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision .0 only are shown with those for Ver. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. • When a page revised in Ver. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. • When a page revised in Ver. 3. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0 has not been changed in Ver.0 Service manual Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.After publication of this service manual. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 3. 2.0 deleted. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.0 are left as they are. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. • To indicate clearly a section revised. 2.

.

.................. 8 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 150...................................................000-print) ..................... 7 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) ............... 2005 CONTENTS General 1..........5 Maintenance parts ..........................5.....................................................................................................6 2........ 8 Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 200......................1 3............................................................................5.............................................................8 3.....................3.................... 3 Type ......................................5..................... 1 Product specifications ..............2 Periodical check ....................................................................... 9 Replacement parts................ 7 Maintenance items........4 3...........5..............000-print)....5....... 23 Cleaning of 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide .............. 7 Service schedule ...................................5... 3.....................7 System configuration...........2...................... 21 Cleaning of Registration Roller ....................................... 19 Replacing the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller ........................................................................ 17 Replacing the Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller ..................................... 4 Operating Environment ...3 3.........................................................000-print)....................5.....4 2....10 3..............................................................3 3...........................Field Service Ver............................................................................1 3.................................................... 3 Types of Paper ........................................ 8 Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 300.......... 4 Maintenance ...... 24 3........ 15 Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy ...............3.........................4 3..........................................................3 2......9 3........... 2.........................2 3................................1 3............5................6 3...... 23 Cleaning of Transport Roller ........................................................000-print)..................... 11 3........................................2.... 22 Paper Dust Remover.....................5......... 10 Cleaning parts...............5 3..........5........ 4 Machine Specifications ...............2 3......11 i .................. 1....... 10 Concept of parts life.......................................................5......................................... 2.......................................................... 12 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ................................................................................. 14 Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy..............2 2......5 3.. 17 Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller............2 3........0 Mar..................7 3..............................................................2.. 14 Replacing the Bypass Tray Paper Take-up Roller ............................................1 3.............2..........................................3 3.. 5 Built-in Controllers ..................2... 3 Functions ..........4 3...........................5 2..................................... 5 General Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance bizhub C450 Maintenance 3.................................................................................................................................1 2. 7 Maintenance call (per 60.................................................... 14 Replacing the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller ....................................

5.............................1................................. 36 Toner Cartridge Single Parts (T/C) ................ 36 Maintenance Kit ..1 Service tool ................................................2 Troubleshooting Firmware rewriting...............2. 34 3...1..15 3.................................................. 27 Replacement of the Dust Filter ...........6...1............................................................................................................................... 47 Cleaning parts list ..................2....... 49 IR Right Cover/Front Right Cover/Bypass Right & Left Cover ............1 5..4 Adjustment / Setting 5...3 Appendix Disassembly/Assembly procedure . 25 Replacing Ozone Filter ................................... 52 6..................................................................18 3..................... 37 Application to be used ....... 46 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items........................1........ 36 Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU) .........5....................................................................................................................................3 3...............................................6 Replacing the unit...............3....5.............................. 35 Copy materials .....2 6.. 31 Replacing the Fusing Unit................................ 24 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port ......................................................................................................5.............. 36 Waste Toner Box...... 28 Replacing the Imaging Unit (C.....................................................2 5......................2........................................ 37 Writing into the Compact flash.................................................................2..................................................................................6... 27 Image Transfer Belt Unit ......................... 27 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit ............................................................................16 3.3 4................ 51 Front Door/Panel Cover/Tray 1 Front Right Cover... 27 General 3......................2 4.................................................................................. 44 Action When Data Transfer Fails.2 4...................................3.... 46 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) .............................. 35 CE Tool list ......................13 3..................................3 ii ..................................5....0 Mar..........................1 3........12 bizhub C450 Replacing the Waste Toner Box................................................4 4....1 6......................................Field Service Ver...............1 6................................... 50 6.................... 5..................17 3....2 6.....1 Firmware upgrade..................2 Other ........................................... M.....1 6............2.................................................... Y............... 47 Disassembly/Assembly parts list .............................................6.....5................... 26 Replacement of the Deodorant Filter ............ 44 5.............................. 37 Preparations for Firmware rewriting .......................................2 6.....................2 3.........................5....................3.................. 25 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode............................................2...................................14 3............1 4. 50 Exit Tray/IR Left Cover/Rear Left Cover/Left Front Cover .....................................3 5................................. 1..............2....... 37 Installing the Cygwin................ 26 Cleaning LPH Assy.................................... 45 5.......... K) ....... 41 Updating method ......... 36 Maintenance 4................................. 37 Service environment ..................................... 6........ 4................................................................. 2005 3............1 5..................................2.....4 5.........6..............................................................

..3....... 69 High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) ...3........................ 1.........................3............................................................................ 53 Original Glass/IR Front Cover .................3.............21 6......24 6...........3....13 6.................... 87 PWB Unit ......33 6...........................3...............................3.........................................10 6...3......................... 77 LPH Unit........................................0 Mar................................4 6..........................................................................19 6..............................................................3.............3..................22 6...........................................................................3............................................ 82 Scanner Assy..3..............................11 6..................................... 66 Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) ..................... 73 Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z)........... 57 Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) ...27 6....16 6...3.....................3...................................... 58 Image Processing Board (PWB-C) .............................. 57 General Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance CCD Unit ..........................................................3.25 6.28 6......3.......... 75 Multi Bypass Unit ................................... 76 Toner Hopper Unit ......3........3..35 6...... 61 LAN Board (PWB-LAN)......38 6..................................................................................................3........... 67 High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) ................................................... 71 LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) ..23 6.......................................................................................................................3.......3..........................17 6.... 65 Control Board (PWB-MC) .................31 6.......... 62 Standard Memory (D_FILE0)........................7 6..........................3.............14 6.................................................................................................3............ 96 Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) ...........................39 6. 74 Inverter Board (PU201).8 6.....3....................................................... 54 Control Panel (UN201)............ 59 Copier Board (PWB-CF) ...............18 6..............3.....36 6................12 6.3.................................3....... 79 Scanner Motor (M201) ................................. 93 Main Motor (M1)................ 92 PWB Box..3.................. 64 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) ........3.................................... 96 Fusing Drive Motor (M2) ... 55 Tray 1 ..................... 63 Hard Disk Drive (HDD).............................................................3.....5 6.................................. 71 DC Power Supply (PU1).............................................................................. 52 IR Upper Front Cover/IR Upper Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover ....................... 2005 6.......26 6........................................15 6.....................................................................6 6........................................................................37 6................3. 85 Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables .....................29 6.........3.............................................................34 6...........3.................. 56 Tray 2 ............................ 97 iii bizhub C450 ................................................................32 6...................... 70 Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1).................30 6........20 6....................40 Lower Rear Cover/Tray 2 Rear Cover/Rear Cover/Rear Right Cover/ Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Wiring Cover ......3..........................................................................................3............3...........3.......................................................9 6................................ 74 Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2)........................................................................................... 84 Scanner Drive Cables ........... 63 Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES)................Field Service Ver......

..............48 General 6.... 124 Scanner Rail .......6.....4...............................2 (PC8/PC9)..............3..4 6......4...... 106 Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) .........................4.........................................3.................................................13 6..............................3 Cleaning procedure ....... 107 Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19) ...................................... 126 6..............................................................41 bizhub C450 Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) .. 122 Tray 2 Separation Roller ...................... 99 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103)...............5 6....... 129 Installation of The Counter/K ..................................... 105 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13)............................47 6................................9 6.....3...................................................3........ 112 IDC/Registration Sensor/1.... 1............54 Maintenance 6............ 100 Color PC Drum Motor (M5)...................1 How to use the adjustment section .........................4 6......1 6................4.. 101 Color Developing Motor (M6).. 115 TCR Sensor Y/M/C (PWB-N1/-N2/-N3) ................ 133 Utility Mode .. 121 Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller.........45 6.. 114 LPH............11 6....................................................4.......46 6.......................................................4...4................................................................................................................................ 2005 6.......4..51 6......................3..........................................3....................... 119 Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller..3................... 134 iv ....................4................50 6........................................................... 109 Cleaning Brush Motor (M22)............................................ 98 Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) .....1 6........................................................................ 134 Touch Panel Adj............ 127 Option counter..3..............10 Troubleshooting 6..................2 Appendix Adjustment/Setting 7....... 122 Tray 2 Transport Roller......................... 120 Tray 1 Separation Roller ...................................6 Mount the original size detecting sensor FD2 (PC204)......3........ 121 Bypass Tray Separation Roller....................................................................3............6. 122 Tray 2 Pick-up Roller ...................................... 103 K PC Motor (M7).............................................................................................................6 6...Field Service Ver.53 6..........3.............................................. 130 6...................................................................................3...............4................ 120 Adjustment / Setting 6..................42 6.................... 104 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) .........................................................................................................................................................................................................3.....3...0 Mar............52 6. 126 CCD Sensor...........43 6. 98 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) ........................................................44 6.................. 8.......................................4.........................4....................2 6.........49 6...................................................................................8 6...5 6....55 6......................... 120 Bypass Tray Paper Take-up Roller ...................... 125 Lens ...........................................12 6..... 124 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) ................................................................................ 8......................4...... 125 Original Glass ............................7 6........................................... 129 Installation method for the Key Counter...............................3..

...... 10....................... 135 Procedure ... 218 10................2 10...5..........................................3.........1 10..................... 158 Scanner Setting ..........................................................5..............................................4 8..... 183 User Authentication/Account Track .....................6........ 183 Adjustment / Setting Appendix Troubleshooting Maintenance General bizhub C450 Utility Mode function setting procedure................................1 10........Field Service Ver.... 222 10............................................................3 8.........1 8.........................3 Utility Mode function tree .......... 187 Network Setting..2 8.......... 149 Scan.......... 165 One-Touch Registration ............................... 212 Security Setting.....6 8........... 223 v ............................................ 151 User Box ..................................3 10....................................................5............................................................................... 165 Administrator/Machine Setting ............................... 153 Display Setting ........................................................ 149 Exiting ................................5 8................... 189 Copier Setting ..................................4 Machine ................................. 161 System Setting.....................5..........................................................2 8.............................0 Mar............3................... 153 Administrator Setting ................................................................ ..............................................................................................................................1 8....2 8...................................5 8...............................9 8.......3 8..............4...........6...6 8.....4.............................3.............. 1.......... 149 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions.......6 8..............................................3..................... 219 10......................................... 213 Adjustment item list ...................4 Date/Time Input mode screen..........................................10 9.......................... 158 Copier Setting .........................................4.....................8 8................... 152 System Setting............................. 222 Fusing Nip............................6.............................................1 8......................4...5................. 225 10............................................ 204 Printer Setting ........................................................................................................................... 149 8................................. 150 User Setting .... One-Touch Registration ........... 160 Printer Setting ..............5 8............................... 205 Fax Setting .3 Date/Time Input mode .................................................................. 150 Fax .............................3 8......................6.....................................2 Service Mode function tree....................................................................4 8........6.................... Detecting Sensor Adj............ 218 10................................................................................................................................................6..............................................................................5.......................4......6...................................... 155 Initial Setting .................... 223 Fusing Temperature ........4......4 8.................................................................................................................... 206 System Connection............... 224 Fusing Transport Speed...............6................. 225 Org.......1 Service Mode function setting procedure ............................................................................... 216 Service Mode ...............................................6.......1 8..........................................3 8........................................2 8...4.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2005 8..............................................................7 8.......6.........................2 8................

.......... 255 Detail on settings ............................. 242 TCR Level Setting.............7 10.........................8 10....................... 245 10...13 Cooling Fan Speed .................................. 1.........5 10..................... 255 List of the CS Remote Care error code ........4 10......6........................................1 10.............6 10...................10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care ......................4...............8 10............................................................ 247 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care...... 241 Auto Cleaning .....6 10...................................................................................................7 10..........................................4...........4...............................................................13 TCR Toner Supply .0 Mar...........................................................................6 Imaging Process Adjustment........ 226 Scan Area ....................................................8 Adjustment / Setting 10..Field Service Ver....................5 bizhub C450 Printer Area............................11 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment............................................... 234 LPH Rank .. 238 10.....................................7.............. 238 General 10....................... 237 10............................................ 258 Appendix 10...............................................6......6.......... 246 Troubleshooting 10............. 243 Maintenance 10................6........ 238 10......9 10...................5 Firmware Version.......... 238 10........................5 10...10 Stabilizer ..7................................................................ Bias Choice.... 247 Setting Up the CS Remote Care.................. 245 10..........................7................14 Monochrome Density Adjustment.........................7 CS Remote Care ........................ 259 10...........7.................2 10....6.................. 230 Printer Resist Loop .. 239 10... 236 10..................... 246 10...........................................................7......................................................4 10..............................................9 10............4.......6............................................ 241 IDC Table Revice ......10 LPH Chip Adjust ............12 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment ........ 260 vi ..................3 10..............7...................................................................6.......................................................................... 2005 10.......................... 242 Background Voltage Margin..............................4......... 244 10.......................... 254 Calling the Center from the Administrator...................................... 241 D Max Density ....................................8 System 1 ..............7 10...........7.............................11 Thick Paper Density Adjustment.....................................................6........4....12 Thin Paper Duplex Mode ................................................4........ 240 Cleaning Bias.........15 Dev..... 239 Transfer Belt.............................................. 254 Calling the Maintenance .................4................................................. 249 Setup confirmation........................................................................1 10... 247 10..................6.........7....................................................................................................................................................6.6..................................................................................................................................................4...................6..............7....................6 Outlines.9 10........7.............................2 10............................................................................................................... 245 10..................6...... 255 Checking the transmission log ........................6................................................................................................3 Gradation Adjust .....................................6... 233 Color Registration Adjustment ........................................................... 243 Transfer Adjust ..........................................

.............................................................................................10...................................... 260 Original Size Detection .... 269 10................................................................................. 272 10.............................. 269 10.....7 10.. 1........11.............................1 10............4 Service Parameter ...... 260 No Sleep ......... 265 10..........8.2 10................................................................................... 271 10.......................................................10........................................ 2005 10....9......................................................4 Service Call Counter ............................... 264 LCT Paper Size Setting...8.............................6 Maintenance ......................................................11.....11........................................................................................................11 List Output ..........10 Data Capture...........3 Jam .................. 264 Scan Caribration .............................................................9.......................................... 269 10.........................................9 System 2.................. 264 Software Switch Setting .......................................Field Service Ver.......................2 10..............10.............1 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................10 ADF Paper Pages ....6 10....................9...................10.......... 266 10.........................8......6 10............................ 261 Install Date .......................................................... 263 Option Board Status......... 272 10...........9.. 262 HDD ...................................8............10....9........9.................. 260 Serial Number ..5 Warning..............................................................12 Fax Connection failed............................... 263 Consumable Life Reminder....................................8..............................4 10........... 261 Foolscap Size Setting ........10............................. 272 10........................................7 Service Total .....................................................1 Machine Management List...........................8 10................................................ 262 Image Controller Setting ........................ 270 10..................................... 270 10...................................................5 10.......... 272 10...4 10.................................11..................................................................9 Service Call History (Data) ............ 271 10............10......................................................................................................9.................... 272 10..........................8.... 260 bizhub C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General Tel/Fax Number................8..10....................11 Paper Jam History........0 Mar............10................................ 270 10................................3 Parameter ........................................................................................................................10........... 271 10............................................................................................ 272 vii ...........................................................................................................2 Adjustment List ......................................................... 270 10................................................ 261 Initialization .............5 10...... 265 Line Mag Setting .................................................................................................3 10..9...... 262 10...........9 Marketing Area............................................................... 271 10....................................10......................7 10...................................10 Counter ..................9..10...1 10....11..............................................5 Protocol Trace ................... 264 Unit Change ................................................. 271 10.............3 10................8.........................................................8 Counter of Each Mode ................ 271 10.....2 Life ......................................9.........8 10..........................................

.....1............................13...13.............9 Running Mode ........................................................................12..3..... 283 10............................................8 Memory/HDD State ............3 11....................12..11 LPH Status....3..2 Enhanced Security Function Tree ...... 286 10............. 1....................................... 292 Appendix 11....................... 283 10.......3 Halftone Pattern........7 Memory / HDD Adj..........4 Lattice Pattern.............................12 Adjustment Data List................11........................................................12....1 Procedure for Test Pattern Output ............... 294 CE Authentication ........ 293 Administrator Password ...... 286 10...............13...................... 283 General 10........................................12..... 286 10.................................0 Mar...12..............................4 Level History2 .................................................................... 284 10...................................... 292 11.....................................................................8 LPH Pattern .........................................7 8 Color Solid Pattern.................................. 273 10................................3.......................13................................................ 282 10............. 291 10...................................................................................13....................1...........................................................................................13 Test Mode................................2 Procedure .............................16 Finisher...............................................................................................................1 11...................6 Color Sample ... 291 10.........................6 CCD Check .................2 Gradation Pattern ......................................5 Temp............................................................................................. & Humidity..................................3 Level History1 .............13..........................13..............................13............................. 272 bizhub C450 10......................... 289 10................................................. 293 11..12.......................... 291 11.................1 11................. 2005 10.................................................14 ADF ............ 287 10.............................1 Sensor Check ..............................................................3 Settings in the Enhanced Security ...........................................15 FAX............................12........................ 290 10.....12....................13.............. 273 10................13............................................................................................................12........................................................................................................................... Enhanced Security....................... 288 Adjustment / Setting 10.12 State Confirmation..................................................2 11.................................... 287 10...................................................... 292 Troubleshooting 11..................................... 290 10..........................12....................... 286 10................................................ 290 10..................6 Fax Setting List .............1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure.................................................................................................................................... 292 Exiting ...............Field Service Ver.................... 291 10............................................................................................ 283 10.................................2 Table Number ...............10 Fax Test ...................... 288 10............................................................................................... 286 Maintenance 10.........10 IU Lot No...4 CE Password ............................. 292 11...........5 Solid Pattern .........9 Color Regist .....12.............. 293 Administrator Feature Level ..................... 289 10................................3................................................................ 294 viii ........................................... 287 10........................12.........................................................................................................

...................................................................2 Billing Setting Function Tree ....................... 309 Malfunction code ........................................................................2 15...............................3............... 295 12..........................................................................................................................................3......2 Sensor layout ...................................................................... 300 14................................... 315 Duplex Transport Misfeed .... Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure . 299 13.........1 12................................................. 1.......2........ 308 Initial Check Items........... 306 System Mounted with PC-402.......3 Solution................................................................ 305 15............................ 301 14.........................................1 Trouble resetting .....1......5 12......................................................................................2.....................................3................................1 14.......................................................................3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section ........3............................8 16....1 Restarting ....... Multiple Bypass take-up...........................2 Scanner Position Adjustment..................................................................1 12.............. 299 14....................7 15................. 299 13......... 310 Tray 2 take-up....................................... 314 Tray 4 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC202) ......................3..............1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit ................................... 302 14......3 13.... 296 12... 302 Troubleshooting 15.............................. 318 ix ....................3............................... 295 12......3...............2 15. 2nd Image Transfer................ 311 LCT Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC-402).........................................1......................................................................................................................................2 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Belt ...................................................................................2 Contents to be cleared by Reset function................................ 316 Fusing/Exit Misfeed..........................................3........................................................1 Misfeed Display.............. Mechanical adjustment .....0 Mar....... 318 16...........................1 15............................................... 317 15.................................. 305 15....... 294 bizhub C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General Billing Setting .........3...........3.............................................1........1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section..... 295 Exiting .... 2005 11.3........................................................................4 15.............................. 307 System Mounted with PC-202.............................1.... 300 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit ..............3 Settings in the Billing Setting ............................. 309 Tray 1 take-up... 295 12...... Vertical Transport.5 15..... 313 Tray 3 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC-102/PC202)............................................. Counter Setting ................. 298 Procedure for Resetting .................................................................. 297 Coverage Rate Clear .......................... IU Life Stop Setting ...................... ..3 15............................. ................................... 296 Management Function Choice ...2 12........ 300 14.. 301 14..........1 15...........1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure ...2 Procedure ..... 295 12...6 15..................................... 307 15.......... Fusing Misfeed.................Field Service Ver............................................3.....1 15.....................................3......................................................1.. Jam Display.........................

....................15 C2254: Color PC Motor turning at abnormal timing............8 16........... 322 16........ 320 P-5: IDC Sensor (Front) failure ............................ 322 16....................6............... 346 C2151: 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure .................................................6.......................................................3...............8 16............................................................................5 C0204: Tray 2 Elevator failure ..............3 Solution ...............3........ 321 P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit failure ..................9 16................3...3 16.....7 16.......................... 320 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit failure ............... 348 Appendix 16....................3.......2 16..............2 Alert code ......................................................................6...................13 P-30: Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction ...................................3........ 346 C2152: Image Transfer Belt pressure/retraction failure.......... 320 P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure.. 323 16.... 318 bizhub C450 16........................3.6........................................................................................................ 345 C0301: Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn..............6....6...................................3 16....... 2005 16.......7 16.....6.............................................. 321 P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit failure ....6...12 P-29: 1st image transfer ATVC (Color) failure....................... 347 Adjustment / Setting Troubleshooting 16........3...6 16.............................. 349 16................6..............................11 C2164: PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction .6 Solution ........10 P-26: 1st image transfer ATVC (Black) failure................................3...4 Trouble code ................................................... 349 16................6....... 348 16..............17 C2256: Color Developing Motor turning at abnormal timing.......5 How to reset ..... 347 C2160: Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction ........................3..1 16.................... 347 16.. 347 16............4 16......... 348 16...........1 Trouble code list ................................3........................................14 C2253: Color PC Motor failure to turn ...................................... 323 16. 322 16.....................13 C2252: K PC Motor turning at abnormal timing.......6................................................3............................. 320 General 16......9 16............ 346 C0351: Paper Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn .........6......... 344 16............................................6.........1 16............................................................................................3.................................... 322 16...... 349 x ...................................... 345 16......... 321 P-21: Color Shift Test Pattern failure....4................. 321 16..........................2...................................10 C2163: Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction.....6 16....... 322 Maintenance 16....................................................... 319 S-1: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure.........................3.......4 16.....6......... 321 P-22: Color Shift Adjust failure.....3............ 321 P-9: Black Imaging Unit failure.............5 Alert list .....................................Field Service Ver..........2 16....................... 345 C0211: Manual Bypass Paper Lifting Failure... 347 C2162: Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction ...........................11 P-27: 2nd image transfer ATVC failure ....................................12 C2251: K PC Motor failure to turn..6.. 347 C2161: Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction ...............0 Mar.....6................................6.........1 16........16 C2255: Color Developing Motor failure to turn... 1.........................................14 P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction....................................................................

......... 351 16..................34 C255B: Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure ................... 358 16. 354 16......32 C2559: Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure .............44 C3101: Fusing Pressure Roller pressure/retraction failure ............................. 356 16......6..................................37 C2652: Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error ...... 355 16...................... 354 16.... 357 16...6..... /3’s failure to turn........41 C2656: Yellow LPH correction data download failure.47 C3301: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /1’s failure to turn.....22 C2451: New Transfer Cleaner Unit resetting failure ......6.........6..6................ 350 16..........40 C2655: Cyan LPH correction data download failure . 353 16...30 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor . 354 16.. 358 16.....6...............6.24 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor.......6.......6......................................6................... 355 16..6....................................6... 353 16...6....38 C2653: Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error .........35 C255C: Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure .6.....39 C2654: Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error ........6......... 352 16.45 C3201: Fusing Drive Motor’s failure to turn............... 354 16....... 355 16.......27 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor ........23 C3461: New Fusing Unit resetting failure.........36 C2651: Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error. 356 16.................... 2005 16....6.. 356 16.............43 C2658: Black LPH correction data download failure .53 C3851: Heating Roller abnormally low temperature ...........54 C3852: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature . 357 16..6...........6.33 C255A: Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure .........6..........31 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor...........29 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor ....................... 353 16........................ 352 16....................................6....26 C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor......21 C2352: Toner Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn............50 C3452: Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up failure .6....52 C3752: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high temperature ................. 357 16..51 C3751: Heating Roller abnormally high temperature.19 C2258: Cleaning Brush Motor Turning at abnormal timing . 358 xi ...................6................. 358 16....... 350 16......Field Service Ver.................................................20 C2351: Toner Suction Fan Motor/K's failure to turn ..........48 C3302: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2....6.........6.......6...............18 C2257: Cleaning Brush Motor's failure to turn .......... 356 16......49 C3451: Heating Roller warm-up failure ..42 C2657: Magenta LPH correction data download failure.............6.. 350 bizhub C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 16.......0 Mar....6.....................46 C3202: Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing ... 352 16. 351 16.....6.......6....6...............................................25 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor. 356 16......... 358 16...................6...... 353 16..............6..................... 358 16.............. 355 16.6...............28 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor ............... 1... 358 16....6...6... 355 16...........6................6................ 351 16..

..........6.............................. 362 Adjustment / Setting 16...........6..........6....................... 366 16.....................84 CC001: Vendor connection failure ..........................................80 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure..........................70 C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn .................. 365 16................6.....6............................ 1..89 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT)........................ 367 xii ................... 361 16.....................61 C4773: JBIG3 Error ......71 C5353: Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn ............6...........81 C9401: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON ............... 363 16.... 364 Troubleshooting 16...6...............62 C4780: Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure ....................Field Service Ver.................58 C4770: JBIG0 Error .................................................6..... 360 Maintenance 16.... 359 16......... 359 16.......................6...........................6......6...78 C6301: Scanner Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn ... 360 16............... 361 16....................86 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) ........74 C5356: Cooling Fan Motor/1’s failure to turn ............................ 365 16....................................................6........................................... 364 16.......6...................... 359 16......6..................56 C4761: Compression hardware timeout ..............75 C5370: MFP Control Board Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn..............67 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection....................6..... 366 16........ 363 16..........6...................................6........ 359 16.6..... 366 16..................55 C4705: Printer Time Out............................................. 359 16........68 C5102: Main Motor's failure to turn.............0 Mar...79 C6704: Scanner Time Out ................................69 C5103: Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing.................. 362 16................................................................. 359 16.........................6............... 359 16.... 363 16..82 C9402: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing....................... 359 16.............. 366 16..............6... 365 16...................... 2005 16........... 359 16...................................... 359 16......6.........91 CD004: Hard disk access error.....65 C4783: Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure . 361 16.............. 359 General 16...........6.....................6............. 366 16.....................................6..............6.......6.....................................................73 C5355: Cooling Fan Motor/3’s failure to turn ..6.....63 C4781: Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure ...............6...85 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)....................60 C4772: JBIG2 Error . 366 Appendix 16.......................... 362 16.......76 C6102: Scanner Home Sensor malfunction ........59 C4771: JBIG1 Error ..................72 C5354: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor’s failure to turn.......................................6....6..................................87 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) ......................6...........6.........57 C4765: Extraction hardware timeout ......................6.66 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure........................................................ 365 16............64 C4782: Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure ....6.........6....6........................................83 CA051: Standard Controller configuration failure .90 CD002: JOB RAM save error...... 359 16.............6..........77 C6103: Scanner overrun failure ..88 CC154: ROM contents error upon startup (LPH)..................... 359 bizhub C450 16.

.................... 369 16...............................6.......... Power supply trouble ....6....................99 CD00C: Hard Disk Error 8 ............... 372 17................................ 371 17.................................92 CD005: Hard Disk Error 1 ...................................................... 367 bizhub C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 16................94 CD007: Hard Disk Error 3 ............................6......... 368 16................................................ 2005 16..95 CD008: Hard Disk Error 4 ..........................6...................................6................. 371 17...................................6 Power is not Supplied to Option.................6..............................6.................. 372 17.......................... 373 Image quality problem ............ 368 16........107 CD201: File Memory mounting failure .......................6......................6..............102 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error..... 368 16....... 368 16...................3 Fusing Heaters do not Operate ........................2 18.....6.................115 CEEE3: Engine Section undefined malfunction...........................1 How to read Element date .....................2 18...............................................3 Table Number............. 1.............. 373 Finisher ...... 370 16......1..........1........................ 369 16...6..114 CEEE2: Scanner Section undefined malfunction..........................6...113 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring ...6.108 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy ................................................................................................................................... 371 17......6. Optional Paper Feed Cabinet............103 CD010: Hard disk unformat ... 369 16.......... 374 18.............98 CD00B: Hard Disk Error 7................................6.................................................6...................................... 367 16....................Field Service Ver..109 CD221: NVRAM initialization failure. 367 16.. 372 17..........6...........105 CD012: Encryption ASIC setting error .......97 CD00A: Hard Disk Error 6....6...................................6......... 367 16............................................. 367 16........ 369 16........................................................... 375 Level History 2 . 370 16....6.....................104 CD011: Hard disk specifications error .....................................................111 CD223: NVRAM initialization failure................................ 369 16.....110 CD222: NVRAM initialization failure............................112 CE002: Message and Method parameter failure .................................................................................106 CD013: Encryption ASIC mounting error .......................5 Power is not Supplied to Duplex .....................6....................... 367 16.......... 373 17....................................... 376 18......................................... 374 xiii ......................................................... 367 16.................................................................. 374 Level History 1 .... 367 16........0 Mar................................1 17.......6.....1............................100 CD00D: Hard Disk Error 9 ........................................................................................................................ 367 16. 367 16.........6......................................................................... 370 17..2 Control panel indicators do not light...............................6.....93 CD006: Hard Disk Error 2 ..........................101 CD00E: Hard Disk Error A ..........1 Machine is not Energized at All (PU1 Operation Check) ...........................................................................................................................................................................96 CD009: Hard Disk Error 5 ....................................................1 18.................6........ 367 16...4 Power is not Supplied to ADF ..................................................................6....... 369 16...... .................

.. white bands in Sub Scan Direction.3................... colored lines in Main Scan Direction................................. 389 18............. 406 18..........................0 Mar.............2 General 18...................3........................... 395 Troubleshooting 18.......... 377 bizhub C450 18........................ colored lines in Main Scan Direction.......... 382 Scanner System: blurred image......................3.......... 391 Adjustment / Setting 18....................3..... 403 18.............2........3 Solution ........................5-mm-pitch uneven image ........... 392 18........16 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction .....9 18................ 404 18...... white spots....27 Printer 4-Color: white lines in sub scan direction.3...............3 18. colored lines in Sub Scan Direction..........................................20 Printer Monocolor: void areas....... 385 Scanner System: skewed image...... colored bands in Main Scan Direction.............12 Scanner System: blank copy............................3.................. 397 18....... 381 Scanner System: fog ..........3............................................................14 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Sub Scan Direction.............. and colored bands in sub scan direction ......3.............................. white bands in Sub Scan Direction..3............3......4 18..26 Printer Monocolor: 94-mm-pitch uneven image.................................... 379 18...............................3...................................... sync shift (lines in main scan direction) ....18 Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure..................................22 Printer Monocolor: blurred image ............................3....................6 18............................7 Maintenance 18............ rough image ........3.... 393 18.........................25 Printer Monocolor: 2-mm-pitch uneven image ............3..3..... 394 18....... white bands in Main Scan Direction.........11 Scanner System: defective ACS .1 Initial Check Items ..3... 399 18.......13 Scanner System: abnormal image............................ 383 Scanner System: incorrect color image registration....5 18.............................. black copy . 380 Scanner System: color spots ..........................8 18....3.. 377 IR System: white lines in Sub Scan Direction.. 1............................3......... 407 18..................3.19 Printer Monocolor: foggy background ..............................................................................10 Scanner System: low image density............ 2005 18..........3...... 401 18.................Field Service Ver..................... colored lines in sub scan direction..... and colored bands in Sub Scan Direction .... white bands in Main Scan Direction........... black copy ............ 408 xiv ...... 386 Scanner System: distorted image............3.. 390 18......................15 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction .......3...........23 Printer Monocolor: blank copy................ blotchy image.................................... white lines in Main Scan Direction............. and colored bands in Main Scan Direction...................................3.................................................................................. 405 Appendix 18.....3.....................................3............................ 387 18.24 Printer Monocolor: 0...3............3....................................17 Printer Monocolor: low image density...... 388 18.......1 18.......................... 384 Scanner System: moire ......................................................21 Printer Monocolor: colored spots .................................................2 How to identify problematic part .... colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction............. white bands in sub scan direction........ 402 18........... 379 Scanner System: white lines in Main Scan Direction...............................

........................................................ 21............................................................................... 425 Tray 1 ............ 441 19.............................................. 424 Engine section ... 434 19.............................................38 Printer 4-Color: back marking .. white bands in main scan direction......................................3..................... 431 Tray 2 ............8 Horizontal Transport Unit .......... 447 21...................... 446 21.................................3...........3.............................................0 Mar................................ colored lines in main scan direction............... 420 18..... white spots .............................................2 19.............3............................................................................................................................7 PK-501 (Option)...................................................... Connector layout drawing...... 435 19.... 1.... 436 19..............39 Printer 4-Color: 204-mm-pitch uneven image ......... 438 19............. 446 21..............................................................................3......... 414 General Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance 18........................................................ 423 19.....2................................ 417 18.............................. 410 18..1 Main unit .29 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction.........40 Printer 4-Color: 94-mm-pitch uneven image ...........................................33 Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration ......................................................................................................................................................36 Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance...................1 19....37 Printer 4-Color: brush effect.............................................................................. 421 Appendix 19......3..................................................... 413 18.......... 451 xv bizhub C450 .1.4 19........................28 Printer 4-Color: white lines in main scan direction..................... 439 19.......30 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction...........6 FS-603 (Option) .....................5 JS-601 (Option) ............................................................................... 2005 18.3 PC-402 (Option)...........................31 Printer 4-Color: low image density ............... 447 Mixed original detection mode ................................. 419 18................. 443 Timing chart ................................................... 415 18......2 Automatic Document Feeder .............. 423 IR section ...... 442 20.. offset....................................3.........................................................34 Printer 4-Color: void areas. 409 18.......Field Service Ver.1..................................1.................2 PC102/PC202 (Option).....3............6 ADF section .........3 19............................... 423 19..2 1-sided mode ...............5 19..........................3...........................................................................................................3................. Parts layout drawing ........................3............................................................4 FS-507 (Option) ..................................1 Main unit .................................. 416 18............. 411 18...................................3.................... 412 18........................... 432 Duplex section.32 Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction..................................................................... 418 18.....35 Printer 4-Color: colored spots ............1.................... 433 19...................................1............................................................... blurred image.....................1 21..............................................1...........................................................2.............3......... and colored bands in main scan direction........

0 Mar. 2005 . 1.Appendix bizhub C450 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General xvi Blank Page Field Service Ver.

0 Mar.Field Service Ver. 1. System configuration General 1. 2005 1. System configuration 1/2 System Front View [2] bizhub C450 [1] [8] [3] [4] [5] [6] 4037F1C501DA [10] [9] [7] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Machine Working Table WT-501 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-202 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-102 Desk DK-501 [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Paper Feed Cabinet PC-402 Finisher FS-507 Job Separator JS-601 Finisher FS-603 Punch Kit PK-501 1 General .

2005 [10] [9] General [8] [7] [1] [2] [3] [4] [6] PC-102 PC-202 PC-402 DK-501 [5] 4037F1E503DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Machine Fax Kit FK-502 Mount Kit MK-703 Mount Kit MK-704 Dehumidifier Heater 1C [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Image Controller IC-402 Video Interface Kit VI-502 Local Interface Kit EK-702 Mechanical Counter MC-501 Key Counter Kit KIT-1 2 . 1. System configuration 2/2 System Rear View bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.1.0 Mar.

5 sec. Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch). ×0.0 Mar. ×0.5 sec. ×2. 2-sided: 31 copies/min.1 Type Product specifications Type Desktop-type printer integrated with scanner Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper Tandem-type indirect electrostatic recording system OPC (organic photo conductor) Equivalent to 600 dpi White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction × 1800 dpi in sub scanning direction Stationary (mirror scan) Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD (one-shot reading system) Rear left edge Multiple Bypass: 150 sheets Tray 1: 250 sheets Tray 2: 500 sheets Four-LED exposure HMT developing system DC comb electrode Scorotron system with electrode cleaning function (manual) Intermediate transfer belt system Copying System Printing Process PC Drum Type Scanning Density Exposure Lamp Print Density Platen Original Scanning Registration Paper Feeding System (Standard) Three-way system Exposure System Developing System Charging System Image Transfer System Paper Separating System Selecting either application of nonwoven fabric bias or resistor grounding + low-pressure paper separator claws Fusing System Belt fusing 2.647. full size) Monochrome print 5.001 increments Variable Zoom Ratios ×0.414. ×0.545. ×2..214.785 Metric Area: ×1. Product specifications 2.707. ×1.2 mm (3/16 inch). books.733.2 Functions Sheets.000 in 0.4° F and rated source voltage) Leading edge: 4. ×1. ×0.000 3 General bizhub C450 .816. Original Size Multiple Copies Warm-up Time Image Loss First Copy Time Copying Speed for Multicopy Cycle (A4. ×0. 2-sided: 37 copies/min. or less Color print 8. 2. and three-dimensional objects A3 or 11 × 17 1 to 999 99 sec.154.. ×1.224. 1.866 Inch Area: ×0. 8-1/2 × 11) Fixed Zoom Ratios Monochrome print 1-sided: 45 copies/min. Color print Full size Reduction Enlargement 1-sided: 35 copies/min.000 Inch Area: ×1. or less Types of Original Max.Field Service Ver. ×0.500.000 Metric Area: ×0. 2005 2.250 to ×4.294. A4.500. ×1. Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch) (Tray 1. or less (at ambient temperature of 23° C/73. Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch). ×1.

2.2 mm 12-1/4 × 18 inches – – 297 × 432 mm 11 × 17 inches ❍ (10 sheets or less) ❍ (20 sheets or less) 311. 120 V. 220-240 V 50/60 Hz ± 3.3 bizhub C450 Types of Paper Paper Source Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2 / 16 to 24 lb) Translucent paper OHP transparencies (crosswise feeding only) Tray 1 ❍ – Tray 2 ❍ – – Multiple Bypass ❍ – General Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2 / 24-1/4 to 40 lb) Copy paper type Thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2 / 40-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb) Thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2 / 55-3/4 to 68 lb) *1 Postcards Envelopes Labels Max. 1. 127 V.4 Maintenance 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. whichever is earlier Machine Durability 2.7 mm 3-1/2 × 5-1/2 inches 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 inches 3-1/2 × 5-1/2 inches *1: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used.0 Mar. 125 kg / 275-1/2 lb (without IU) Power Requirements Max Power Consumption Dimensions Space Requirements Mass *2: The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully extend the bypass tray. 2005 2.2 mm 12-1/4 × 18 inches Copy paper dimensions 140 × 182 mm 90 × 139.5 Machine Specifications Voltage: Frequency: AC 110 V. 4 .240 V. 8 A) 706 (W) × 765 (D) × 908 (H) mm 27-3/4 (W) × 30 (D) × 35-3/4 (H) inches 1014 (W) × 765 (D) mm *2 40 (W) × 30 (D) inches *2 Approx.000 prints or 5 years. 12 A / 220 . Optional Paper Feed Cabinet : Only the plain paper and thick paper 1 to 3 weighing 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) is reliably fed.000. 2. (width × length) ❍ (20 sheets or less) ❍ (20 sheets or less) ❍ (150 sheets or less) – ❍ (10 sheets or less) ❍ (20 sheets or less) 311.1 × 457. Automatic Duplex Unit : Only the plain paper and thick paper 1 to 3 weighing 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb) is reliably fed.1 × 457.7 mm 90 × 139.0 Hz Less than 1500 W (120 V. (width × length) Min.

USB 2. 2005 2.1) Emulation PostScript 3 Emulation (3011) bizhub C450 . 5 General Printer Driver PCL5e/c Emulation PCL6 (XL 2.1.0 Mar. Product specifications 2.0.Field Service Ver.3 OS Compatibility Client Interface Standard: Ethernet (10Base-T or 100Base-TX) Optional: USB 1. 2000. Windows 2000.0.6 Operating Environment 10 to 30 °C / 50 to 86° F (with a fluctuation of 10° C / 18° F or less per hour) 15 to 85 % (with a fluctuation of 20 %/h) Temperature Humidity 2. or IEEE 1284 NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. Windows XP. 1.0 (SP6a) MacOS 9. or Server 2003 Windows 98 Second Edition.2 or later or MacOS X 10.2 or 10. Windows Me. or Windows NT 4.7 Type CPU Built-in Controllers Built-in type controller PPC750 FX 600 MHz Scan Driver TWAIN driver Server Windows NT 4.

0 Mar. 2005 General bizhub C450 Blank Page 6 . Product specifications Field Service Ver. 1.2.

5 K 11.000-print Number × print 6 12 15 18 20 24 30 36 40 42 45 48 54 60 66 72 75 78 80 84 90 96 of times number Upon each call ● ● (60.000 300. 7 Maintenance PC-102 PC-202 300. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Maintenance items Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) Class Parts to be replaced Imaging Unit C/M/Y Imaging Unit K Dust filter Processing sections Comb electrode Toner cartridge: TC (TC Y/TC M/TC C) Toner cartridge: TC (TC K) Deodorant filter Image Transfer section LPH section Waste Toner Box LPH Assy Cycle 50 K 100 K 100 K When TC is replaced 11.000) 150. *2: The TC K and Deodorant filter are the Kit parts.000.000 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 16 6 4 3 3 Guarantee period (5-year or 1.5 K 11.1 Periodical check Service schedule Per cycle × 10.0 Mar.000 PC-402 bizhub C450 .2 3.1 No.000 200.Field Service Ver. 1.2. Periodical check Maintenance 3.5 K 30 K When IU is replaced ● ● ● ● ● ● *2 *2 Clean Replace Descriptions ● ● ● *1 *1 *1: The Imaging Unit K and Dust filter are the Kit parts. 3.000 prints) Main body FS-507 300. 2005 3.000 FS-603 3 3.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ADF section 12 13 Duplex section Transport section Field Service Ver.2. 2005 Maintenance call (per 60.3 No.2 bizhub C450 No.0 Mar.DescripNumber of Check Clean Replace personnel tion tions ● ● 1 1 1 ● ● ● ● Overall Transport section Processing section Paper Dust Remover 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit Ozone Filter 3.2. Periodical check 3. Roller and Roll DUP Roller Maintenance 3. 1.4 No.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Number of Lubrica.DescripCheck Clean Replace personnel tion tions ● ● 1 1 2 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● Overall Tray 1 Bypass Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Pick-up Roller ADF section Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller 8 .2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 200.3.DescripCheck Clean Replace personnel tion tions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Overall Image TransAround waste toner port fer section LPH section LPH Assy Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Transport Belt.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Registration Roller Paper Dust Remover Transport Roller 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide Number of Lubrica. 1 2 3 4 5 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 150.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Lubrica.

2005 3. Overall Image Trans.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● ● ● Number of LubriCheck Clean Replace Descriptions personnel cation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Replace those three parts at the same time. 1.Image Transfer Belt fer section Unit Fusing section Fusing Unit Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Paper Feed Roller.Field Service Ver. Guide Sensor PC-102 PC-202 10 PC-402 9 11 FS-507 12 FS-603 13 9 Maintenance bizhub C450 .2.5 No. Roll Transport route. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tray 2 3.0 Mar. Periodical check Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 300.

*2: Also replace the Dust filter packed in the black imaging unit at the same time when 100 K is reached. *1: Actual durable cycle is the Life counter value. • Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8. Standard mode and Low Power Mode OFF. *4: 220-240 V areas only.0 Mar.5 × 11. *6: 110 V areas only. 4021-3012-XX 4034-0151-XX 4131-3001-XX 4034-0151-XX 4030-3005-XX 4030-3005-XX 4030-0151-XX 1483-0762-XX 4049-411 4049-522 *4 4049-523 *5 4049-524 *6 ⎯ ⎯ Dust filter *2 Descriptions Ref.3 bizhub C450 Maintenance parts • To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life. *5: 120 V/127 V areas only. it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed.5 K is reached.3.1 Replacement parts A. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 10 . Main unit No. 3.5 K 300 K 30 K 200 K 200 K 200 K 12 Processing 13 section 14 15 Image transfer 16 section 17 18 19 ☞ ☞ ☞ 1483-0757-XX Deodorant filter *3 ☞ ⎯ ☞ 4049-212 4049-111 ☞ 24 4582-3022-XX Replace those 4582-3014-XX three parts at the ☞ ADF 4582-3047-XX same time. • Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter. 2005 3.Page in this manual 5 6 7 8 9 ☞ ☞ ☞ ☞ ☞ ☞ ☞ ☞ 14 14 15 17 21 19 17 23 Maintenance ☞ 27 ☞ 34 36 36 25 36 28 10 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 300 K 50 K 100 K 150 K 11. 1 2 3 4 Classification Tray 1 Bypass Parts name Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Pick-up Roller Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Transport 2nd Image Transfer section Roller Unit Fusing section Fusing Unit Imaging Unit C/M/Y Imaging Unit K Ozone Filter Toner Cartridge (YMCK) Image Transfer Belt Unit Waste Toner Box Pick-up Roller ADF section Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Paper Dust Remover Qua ntity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 200 K 200 K 200 K 200 K 300 K 300 K 300 K 150 K 150 K Parts No.3. 1. *3: Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the black toner cartridge at the same time when 11.

Page in this manual 4030-3005-XX Replace those 4030-3005-XX three parts at the *2 4030-0151-XX same time.2 Cleaning parts Classification Ref. *2: See each Option Service Manual. Periodical check Descriptions Ref. 2005 B. 1 2 3 Classification PC-102 PC-202 PC-402 Parts name Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Qua ntity 1 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 300 K 300 K 300 K Parts No.3. 3. 1 2 3 4 Parts name Registration Roller Actual cleaning cycle *1 Upon each call (60 K) Upon each call (60 K) Upon each call (60 K) Upon each call (60 K) Descriptions Transport Transport Roller section 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide Processing section Image transfer section LPH section Duplex section Comb Electrode ☞ 24 ☞ 26 ☞ 25 ☞ 26 *2 5 When TC is replaced (11. 1. Option No. *2: See Automatic Duplex Unit Service manual.Field Service Ver. 11 Maintenance Paper Dust Remover ☞ 22 ☞ 23 ☞ 23 bizhub C450 .0 Mar. *1: Actual durable cycle is the Life counter value.5 K) 6 Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port LPH Assy Paper Feed Roller Upon each call Upon each call or When IU is replaced Upon each call (60 K) 7 8 *1: Actual cleaning cycle is the Life counter value. 3.Page in this manual No.

000 * Fusing unit 300. * *: The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the maximum number of printed pages is reached.000 Transfer Belt Unit 300. the machine prohibits the initiation of any new print cycle. Periodical check Field Service Ver.4 bizhub C450 Concept of parts life Description A waste toner full condition is detected when about 8.) The number of copies made is counted.045 min.000 * Imaging Unit C/M/Y 2.137 min 4. 2005 3.) When printing prohibited is encountered.000 Ozone Filter 150. number of printed pages Waste Toner Bottle 30. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm. When printing prohibited is encountered. The number of hours through which the PC Drum has turned is compared with the number of hours through which the Developing Roller has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours through which the PC Drum has turned and the value.) The number of copies made is counted. * Imaging Unit K 4. is detected. whichever reaches the life specifications value. is detected. 1. whichever reaches the life specifications value.000 152. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm.3. 12 . Life value (Specification value) – Max. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm.000 152. 3.000 printed pages have been produced after a waste toner near full condition has been detected.) The number of copies made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the belt has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of copies made and the value.000 * Paper Dust Remover 150.000 402.220 min. the machine prohibits the initiation of any new print cycle.0 Mar.000 Maintenance 2nd Transfer Roller Unit 150. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm.928 min.000 152. The number of copies made is counted. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm. The number of copies made is counted.000 402.) The number of copies made is counted.

400 B/W = 5 % for each color. Imaging Unit /C. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user. make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value is reached. of Operating Days per Month Description Monochrome: Making 5 copies per job Color: Making 4 copies per job A4 Black to Color = 5:1 Black: 12. Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing event occurs in another part Purpose Target parts Fusing unit. Image Transfer Belt Unit. 1.000 / Color: 2. Periodical check Item Job Type Paper Size Color Ratio CV/M Original Density No. Imaging Unit /M. Imaging Unit /K 13 Maintenance In order to reduce the maintenance call times: when printing prohibiting is reached for any of the following parts. .0 Mar. 6 % for Monochrome 20 days (Main Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month) B.Field Service Ver. 2005 3. Conditions for Life Specifications Values • The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions (see the Table given below) are met. and replace those parts at the same time. bizhub C450 A. Imaging Unit /Y.

4.5. 2. 2005 3.0 Mar. one collar [5] and remove the Tray 1 Paper TakeUp Roller [6]. reverse the order of removal. Lock the Paper Lifting Plate [1] into position. Slide out the Tray 1. 1. 3.1 [3] Replacing the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller [2] 1.2 Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy 1. Periodical check Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1] and the Tray 1 Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy [2]. To reinstall. 7.3. 3. 6.5. Snap off the C-clip [2] from the Tray 1 Paper Take-Up Roller Assy [3].5 bizhub C450 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2. Snap off the C-clip [4]. Remove the shaft for the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller Assy [3] from the front Bushing. [1] Maintenance 4037F2C002DB [4] [6] [5] 4037F2C003DB 5. [1] [2] 4036fs2013c1 14 . Select “Service Mode”→ “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “1st. 3.” NOTE • Replace the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller and Tray 1 Separation Roller at the same time. Slide out the Tray 1.

2005 [6] 3.3 Replacing the Bypass Tray Paper Take-up Roller 1. Remove four screws [3]. Take off the rubber stopper [3]. [4] [3] 4037F2C517DA 15 Maintenance 4. Snap off the E-ring [8] and the Tray 1 Paper Separation Roller Assy [9]. reverse the order of removal. 5. 6. 1. and remove Bypass Paper Separation roller fixing bracket Assy [2]. Remove two screws [1]. spring [5]. ☞ 76 2. Periodical check 3.” NOTE • Replace the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller and Tray 1 Separation Roller at the same time. and remove the Frame [4]. [7] [3] [5] 4037F2C508DA [9] [8] 4037F2C509DA 3. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.5.0 Mar. Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “1st. To reinstall. bizhub C450 [4] . and guide plate [6] to remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [7]. shaft [4].Field Service Ver. [2] [1] 4037F2C515DA [3] 3.

and remove the Bypass Paper Take-up Roller [12]. 9.” NOTE • Replace the Bypass Paper Take-up Roller and the Bypass Separation Roller Assy at the same time. and remove the Frame [6] under the Bypass Unit.0 Mar. Snap off the C-clip [7]. and remove the Bypass Paper Feed Clutch [8]. Remove five screws [5].3. 16 . 8. Snap off the C-clip [9] for the Paper Take-up roller. and remove the shaft [10]. 6. reverse the order of removal. Maintenance [8] [10] 4037F2C519DA [11] [12] 4037F2C520DA 7. Snap off the C-clip [11]. To reinstall. Periodical check [5] [5] Field Service Ver. 2005 4. 1. bizhub C450 [6] [5] 4037F2C518DA [7] [9] 5. Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “Manual Tray.

2005 3. 2. Remove two screws [1]. Remove the Screw [1]. 5. [4] 4036fs2019c0 17 Maintenance bizhub C450 . Snap off the C-clip [3]. [1] [2] 4036fs2018c0 [3] 4. reverse the order of removal. Remove the Bypass Paper Separation Roller Assy [6]. Remove the Multi Bypass unit. ☞ 76 2. Periodical check [2] [1] 1. 3. Slide out the Tray 2. 5. Open the Vertical transport door. and remove the spring [4] and the guide plate [5]. To reinstall. and remove Bypass Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [2]. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.4 Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy 3.” NOTE • Replace the Bypass Paper Take-up Roller and the Bypass Separation Roller Assy at the same time. Remove two Claws [3] and the Vertical transport door [4]. 4. 4037F2C515DA [3] [5] [4] [6] 4037F2C522DA 3. 1.5. 3.Field Service Ver.5 Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller 1. Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “Manual Tray. and the Reinforcement plate [2].0 Mar.5.

Periodical check [6] bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Remove two Screws [5].0 Mar. 1. 4037F2C552DA 18 . Remove the C-ring [12] and Guide [13]. and remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller Assy [14]. 2005 6. Remove two Screws [7] and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy [8]. Remove two C-rings [9] and the Shaft [10]. [14] [13] [12] 9. Maintenance [7] 4036fs2021c1 [11] [9] [9] [10] 4037F2C551DA 8. and remove the Separation Roller fixing plate Assy [11]. and remove the Jam processing cover [6]. [5] [8] 4037F2C004DA 7.3. NOTE • Use care not to miss the Spring.

☞ See the procedures 1 to 7 in page 17 “Tray 2 Separation Roller. [6] [7] 4037F2C005DB [9] 5. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. Remove the Screw [1] and Wiring cover [2].5.6 Replacing the Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller 3. Remove two Screws [3] and Connector [4].” 2. Remove two Screws [8] and Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller cover [9]. [5] [4] 3. Periodical check [1] [2] 4036fs2023c0 1. [3] 4036fs2024c1 [6] 4.Field Service Ver. and remove the Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller Assy [5]. 2005 3.0 Mar. 1. Remove two Screws [6] and the Installation flame [7] of the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. [8] 4037F2C006DB 19 Maintenance bizhub C450 .

3. and remove the Tray 2 Pickup Roller fixing plate Assy [20].0 Mar. Remove two E-rings [18] and Bushing [19]. [19] 4036fs2595c0 20 . 2005 6. Periodical check Field Service Ver. Maintenance [14] [13] 4036fs2028c2 8. 1. Remove the C-ring [13] and Gear [14] while sliding out the Shaft Assy [12] in the direction indicated in left figure. Remove the C-ring [15] and Bushing [16]. and remove the Shaft Assy [17]. [16] [15] [17] [18] [20] [18] 4036fs2029c2 9. bizhub C450 [11] [10] 4036fs2027c0 [12] 7. Remove the C-ring [10] and Bushing [11].

” [22] 4036fs2596c0 3. ☞ See the procedures 1 to 7 in page 17 “Tray 2 Separation Roller. [3] 4036fs2024c1 [6] 4. Maintenance [1] [2] 4036fs2023c0 [5] [4] 3. 2005 [21] 3.” 2. Remove two Screws [3] and Connector [4].7 Replacing the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller 1. [6] [7] 4037F2C005DB 21 bizhub C450 . Periodical check 10.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. and remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy [7] together with Frame. 11. 1.5. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. Remove the C-ring [21] and Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller [22]. Remove the Screw [1] and Wiring cover [2]. and remove the Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller Assy [5]. Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “2nd. Remove two Screws [6].

and remove the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller Assy [12]. wipe the Registration Rollers [1] clean of dirt.8 Cleaning of Registration Roller 1. 1. bizhub C450 [9] [8] [10] 4037F2C006DB [12] [11] Maintenance [11] 4036fs2597c1 6. and remove the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller [14]. [1] 4036fs2502c0 22 .0 Mar. 3.3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove the Paper Dust Remover. Remove two C-rings [10] and two Bushings [11].5. 2005 5. Open the Right Door. [13] 7. ☞ See page 23 for Replacing the Paper Dust Remover. Remove two Screws [8] and Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller cover [9]. Snap off the C-ring [13]. [14] 4036fs2598c0 3. 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver.

5. 3. 2. Pushing the hook [1] with a blue label inward. 2005 3. whisk dust off the Paper Dust Remover [3]. remove the Paper Dust Remover [2]. wipe the Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt. ☞ 25 4.5. Replacing Procedure 1. [3] [2] [1] 4036fs2501c0 B.” 3. Periodical check A. 4036fs2501c0 3. Remove the Ozone Filter. remove the Paper Dust Remover [2].10 Cleaning of Transport Roller [1] 1.9 Paper Dust Remover [2] [1] 3.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Pushing the hook [1] with a blue label inward. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2. Open the Right Door. 2. Using a brush. Open the Right Door. Open the Right Door. 1. 4036fs2519c0 23 Maintenance bizhub C450 . Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “Paper Dust Remover/Ozone Filter. Cleaning Procedure 1.

2. Open the Left Door.5. 2. Remove the Waste Toner Box. 2005 Cleaning of 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide [1] 1. 4. Remove the Cover [2] of Waste Toner Box. 3. NOTE • Raise the waste toner box gently before removing it.5.11 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. • Do not leave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it. 3. do not tilt the waste toner bottle when removing it. [1] 4037F2C525DA 1. Open the Left Door. • When removing the Finishing Option. Wipe the 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide [1] clean of dirt using a soft cloth. and remove the waste toner box [1]. use care not to be hurt by the leading edge of the guide that is sharp.0 Mar. Periodical check 3.12 Replacing the Waste Toner Box Maintenance NOTE • If a Finishing Option is installed. 36 Remove two screws and slide the Transfer Belt Unit out halfway. 3.3. [2] 4036fs2615c1 24 . ☞ 28 5. Grasp the handle. ☞ 4. NOTE • When cleaning. • If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port. Turn OFF the main power switch. 4036fs2518c0 Open the Right Door. 1. and set it on the Collecting port. support the Horizontal Transport Unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping. remove if from the Main Unit before trying to replace the Waste Toner Bottle.

” [1] 4037F2C011DA 25 Maintenance bizhub C450 . 1.13 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port [1] 1. Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “Paper Dust Remover/Ozone Filter. Remove the Waste Toner Box [1]. ☞ 23 3. 2.5. 4036fs2509c0 3. and set the waste toner box in place. Holding onto the hook. Wipe the areas around the Waste Toner Collecting Port clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alcohol. remove the Ozone Filter [1]. 7. 4036fs2509c0 3. 2005 3.14 Replacing Ozone Filter 1. and remove the packing material. 6. Remove the waste toner box from its box. Open the Rear Left Cover. Grasp the handle. Remove the Paper Dust Remover. 4037F2C525DA 3.0 Mar.5. Close the Left Door. 2. 8. Periodical check 5.Field Service Ver. Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port.

0 Mar. Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever [1] In and Out several times. ☞ 3. 4036fs2514c0 26 . Affix a LED Cleaning Jig Pad [4] to the LED Cleaning Jig [3]. Open the Front Door. NOTE • Move the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever slowly forward and backward until it stops. [1] [4] 4036fs2512c1 4. as it may become damaged. Open the Front Door. [3] 4036fs2513c0 [5] [6] 5.15 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.5. Slide out the IU (C/M/Y/K). 2. NOTE • Use only the specified jig (LED Cleaning Jig) for cleaning. Periodical check 3. 2.16 Cleaning LPH Assy NOTE • After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit. 1. be sure to place it in the plastic bag (black) or wrap it in a light shielding cloth. Maintenance [2] 1. 4036fs2511c0 [1] 3. and store it in a dark place.5.3. 31 Remove the LED Cleaning Jig [1] and LED Cleaning Jig Pad [2]. Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time. 2005 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode 1. Clean the LED [5] of the LPH Assy by moving the LED Cleaning Jig [6] three reciprocating motions.

NOTE • The Dust Filter is supplied with the Imaging Unit (black).5. 4036fs2515c0 3.6. 1. bizhub C450 . remove if from the main unit before trying to replace the Waste Toner Bottle. [1] Removal Procedure Turn OFF the main power switch.6 3. Replace it when replacing the Imaging Unit (black). 2. 2005 3. take out the Deodorant Filter [1].1 Replacing the unit Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit NOTE • If a Finishing Option is installed. Holding onto the blue lock levers [1] (at two places). NOTE • The Deodorant Filter is supplied with the toner cartridge (black).Field Service Ver. remove the Dust Filter [1]. Periodical check 1. 3. • When removing the Finishing Option. remove the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit [2].17 Replacement of the Deodorant Filter [1] 3. 1.18 Replacement of the Dust Filter [1] 4037F2C012DB 3. 4. Holding onto the hook.5. Open the Right Door. support the horizontal transport unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping. Replace it when replacing the toner cartridge (black). Unlock the blue lock levers [1] (at two places).0 Mar. Grasping the hook. [2] A. [1] 4036fs2516c0 27 Maintenance 1.

Holding onto the blue lock levers [1] (at two places). Close the Right Door. Periodical check Field Service Ver. PPC Cleaner. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “Transfer Roller Unit. ethyl alcohol. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit. do not use the ones other than shown below: isopropyl alcohol. • Do not wipe out with water. Turn ON the Main Power Switch. Maintenance 28 .3. mount the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit [2]. NOTE • If it is difficult to clean with dried soft cloth. Sol mix AP-7 • After cleaned with the solvent. 1.0 Mar. wipe the Transfer belt [1]. make copies more than 28-piece of A3 white paper to eliminate the image noise.” bizhub C450 [2] [1] [1] 4036fs2517c0 3. 3. ☞ 28 2. 5. Using a dried soft cloth. NOTE • Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear. • When solvent is used to dampen a cloth. Cleaning Procedure 1. 2.6.2 Image Transfer Belt Unit [1] 4037F2C537DA A. dampen a soft cloth with a solvent. 4. Lock the blue lock levers [1](at two places). 2005 B.

support the horizontal transport unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping. 1. 6. [1] [2] 4037F2C013DA [3] 5. 2.Field Service Ver. • If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port. 4. do not tilt the waste toner box when removing it. NOTE • After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit. 1. Open the Left Door. as it may become damaged. be sure to place it in the plastic bag (black) or wrap it in a light shielding cloth. Replacing Procedure NOTE • If a Finishing Option is installed. Remove two Screws [1] and release the Lock of the Image Transfer Belt Unit [2]. • When removing the Finishing Option. Open the Right Door.0 Mar. 2005 3. and remove the waste toner box [3]. 4037F2C526DA 29 Maintenance 3. and store it in a dark place. bizhub C450 . Slide out the IU (C/M/Y/K). Grasp the handle. Periodical check B. remove if from the main unit before trying to replace the Transfer Belt Assembly. Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time. Turn OFF the main power switch. NOTE • Raise the waste toner box gently before removing it. • Do not leave the waste toner box in a tilted condition after removing it.

4037F2C528DA [2] 2. 2005 7. 4037F2C527DA C. NOTE • Insert the Transfer Belt Unit with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part.3. Reinstallation Procedure [1] Maintenance 1. Periodical check [4] bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Insert the Transfer Belt Unit [1]. Pull out the Image Transfer Belt Unit [4]. 1.0 Mar. 4037F2C014DA 30 . Install the Image Transfer Belt Unit with two Screws [2].

4037F2C529DA 3. 6. 2. 1.0 Mar. Select “Service Mode” → “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Gradation Adjust” and carry out Gradation Adjust. Open the Front Door. [1] 4036fs2578c0 5. Unplug the power cord. 5. ☞ 26 [2] 4036fs2579c0 31 Maintenance bizhub C450 . NOTE • Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear. 1. 6.Field Service Ver. 4. Y. Release the lock lever [1] of the Imaging Unit. Removal Procedure Turn OFF the Main Power Switch. K) A. M. Hold the handle and install the Waste Toner Box [3] in position. Periodical check 3. Close the Right Door. 4. and remove it from main body.6. Clean the LPH Assy. 2005 [3] 3. Close the Left Door. 7. Pull out the IU [2]. 3. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.3 Replacing the Imaging Unit (C.

keep it shielded from light up to the time it is installed. 1. Tilt the Imaging Unit [1] to the left and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice. 3. 2005 B. NOTE • Do not allow the Imaging Unit to become tilted while installing them into the Main Unit.3.0 Mar. • Insert the Imaging Unit until a click is heard. • If the Imaging Unit is packed in the plastic bag (black) again. bizhub C450 [1] 4036fs2580c0 Maintenance NOTE • When installing the Imaging Unit. 2. ensure that the color of the mounting guide of the Imaging Unit is the same as the color of the label at the mounting position on the main unit. Then. as damage to the PC Drum or the LED assembly can result. • Carefully unseal the plastic bag (black). tilt it to the right and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice. Keeping the Imaging Unit [2] in a level position. Periodical check Field Service Ver. NOTE • Since the Imaging Unit is highly susceptible to light. seal the package using tape or another means. [2] 4036fs2581c0 32 . insert the Imaging Unit [2] into the mounting position all the way until it is stopped. Remove the Imaging Unit from its plastic bag. Reinstallation Procedure 1.

Plug in the power cord. Select “Service Mode” → “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Gradation Adjust” and carry out Gradation Adjust. 33 Maintenance bizhub C450 .Field Service Ver. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.0 Mar. Periodical check 4. 8. Close the Imaging Unit Locking Lever [4] while pressing the IU. 7. Close the Front Door. NOTE • Place the IU Lock Lever into the locked position until a click is heard. [3] 4036fs2582c0 [4] 4036fs2583c1 5. 9. NOTE • Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet half way. 2005 3. and pull it down slantwise. 6. Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet [3] while pressing the IU. 1.

4036fs2048c1 [6] 7. Remove wire saddle and remove two Connectors [4] of Fusing unit. Maintenance 4037F2C015DA [4] [4] 5.0 Mar. and remove the Fusing unit [6]. ensure that it has had time to cool down.6. 4036fs2046c0 [2] [1] [3] 4. 2005 Replacing the Fusing Unit NOTE • Before replacing the Fusing Unit. and remove the Connector protective cover [2]. [5] 4036fs2049c0 34 . Turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Remove the Screw [1].3. then wait for about 20 minutes. 3.4 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Remove the Exit Tray. Remove two Screws [5]. 1. 2. ☞ 51 6. Open the Right Door. 1. Periodical check 3. Remove the Connector [3].

1 Service tool CE Tool list Tool name Shape Parts No. Service tool 4.Field Service Ver. 2005 4. 1.0 Mar. Personnel Remarks Scanner Drive Cable Holding Jig 4036fs2001c0 4581-7901-XX 2 LED Cleaning Jig 4004-7502-XX 1 4036fs2002c0 LED Cleaning Jig Pad 4004-7503-XX 1 4036fs2003c0 LPH Assy Mounting Jigs 4025-7901-XX 2 4036fs2004c0 Color chart 4036fs2577c0 ⎯ 1 Safety Switch Holding Jig 1174-7901-XX 1 4036fs2184c0 35 Maintenance bizhub C450 . 4.

Maintenance T/C Magenta T/C Cyan *1: Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 90% even with product-to-product variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration.3 Waste Toner Box Parts name Waste Toner Box Replacing period 30.1 Also replace the Dust filter packed in the Imaging Unit Black at the same time.000 copies ☞ For the predetermined conditions. Service tool Field Service Ver.4 Maintenance Kit There is no setting for the Maintenance Kit. see page 13.500 copies 11.0 Mar. see page 13. 1. when the T/C is used under the conditions of B/W ratio 5% for each color 4.500 copies Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the T/C Black at the same time.2.000 copies 50. 4.4.2 bizhub C450 Copy materials Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU) Parts name IU Black IU Yellow IU Magenta IU Cyan Replacing period 100.2.2.000 copies 4.000 copies 50. ☞ For the predetermined conditions. 36 .500 copies 11.2 Toner Cartridge Single Parts (T/C) Parts name T/C Black T/C Yellow Replacing period *1 11.500 copies 11. 2005 4.2.000 copies 50. 4.

and click [Next (N)].1 5. Firmware upgrade 5.exe] on CD-ROM in which Cygwin is stored. 5.1 Firmware upgrade Preparations for Firmware rewriting Service environment bizhub C450 4037F2C501DA 4037F2E545DA 4037F2E546DA • OS: Windows 2000 • Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash • Compact flash (with 128MB or more) 5.1.Field Service Ver. 2. Double click the [setup.3 Installing the Cygwin • The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC. 1. Click [Next (N)]. 2005 5. 3.0 Mar.1.1.2 Application to be used • Cygwin (Free software) 5. Select “Install from Local Directory”. 37 Maintenance . 1.

0 Mar. [C:\cygwin]. [C:\cygwin]. NOTE • Make sure to check that “Root Directory” is in default setting. (Described below is the sample procedure when CD-ROM drive is E-drive. For installing from CD-ROM. Specify the folder for installation. 2005 bizhub C450 4. Click [Next (N)].” 5. • Do not change the setting value except “Root Directory. 4037F2E548DA 38 .5.) 7. Maintenance 4037F2E547DA 6. 1. Check to make sure that “Root Directory” is in default setting. select the [cygwin] folder in CD-ROM drive. Specify the place of the data to be installed. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. Click [Next (N)].

Click the “New” in System Variable Setting. After installing. Click [Complete] to start installing. 4036fs2620e0 39 Maintenance bizhub C450 .0 Mar. Firmware upgrade 4037F2E549DA 9.Field Service Ver. 4037F2E550DA 10. 1. Click [Next (N)]. 5. and click the “Environmental Variable” of “Advanced” tab. 2005 8. open the Property of “My Computer”. 11.

0 Mar.5. 1. Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable. bizhub C450 Variable name CYGWIN HOME Variable value ntsec /home/username Maintenance 4036fs2621e0 40 . 2005 12. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver.

(C:\C450 in the below figure) .0 Mar. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. 1. Double-click the Firmware data. delete it before uncompressing.1. 2005 5. and then uncompress it.exe. Firmware upgrade NOTE • The file name of Firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****. 4037F2E542DA NOTE • When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed.” 2. 41 Maintenance 4037F2E541DA bizhub C450 1.4 Writing into the Compact flash 5.Field Service Ver. and specify the directory to be uncompressed.

1. 2005 bizhub C450 3. and check the Drive name.0 Mar. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. Mount the Compact flash on the PC. (F-drive in the following figure) 4036fs2623e0 4.5. 6. Click “Start” → “Program” → “Accessories” → “Command Prompt” to open the Command Prompt. which was recognized through the procedure 3.” (Input the C: \C450\card_work>mkcf f (Drive number): in the below figure. which was recognized in the Windows. 5.) Maintenance 4037F2E543DA 42 . and push the “Enter”. Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory. and execute the “mksf.bat. Specify the Drive of Compact flash.

data writing into the Compact flash is started. Firmware upgrade 4037F2E544DA 9. “VERIFY OK” appears.0 Mar. 43 Maintenance bizhub C450 7. 1. be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method.Field Service Ver. Once the “mkcf. Remove the Compact flash from PC. 8. . CHECKSUM is executed. Upon completion of writing. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched.bat” is executed. 2005 5. NOTE • When removing the Compact flash.

0 Mar. Insert the Compact Flash card into the slot. 1.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON. Plug the power cord into the power outlet and turn ON the main power switch. Maintenance [2] [1] 4037F2C016DA 3. 2. Remove the screw [1] and the metal Blanking Plate [2]. With the main power switch in the OFF position. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 5. 1.2. [3] 4037F2C017DA 4.5. 4037F2J517DA 44 . Up to six types of F/W will be displayed on the control panel. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. 5. 6. unplug the power cord from the power outlet. 2005 5.2 bizhub C450 Firmware rewriting • The F/W is updated using the Compact flash.

Unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated. the Start key starts blinking red. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated. 1. 45 Maintenance bizhub C450 .Field Service Ver. 12. 10. indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red). change the board that has caused “NG” and carry out data rewriting procedure. change the memory card for a new one and try another rewriting sequence. Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly (“Downloading Completed”). Perform the data rewriting procedure again.) 8. Plug the power cord and turn ON the main power switch. Select “Firmware Version”. Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot. 11. 13. MFP Controller Scanner Printer LPH Fax Board Controller1 Fax Board Controller2 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Control Board (PWB-MC) LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) Fax Board *1 Not Used *1: The Optional FAX kit is necessary for the above procedure.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails • If “NG” appears on the Touch Panel.0 Mar. 1. Check also the Check Sum value (“Check Sum XXXX”) shown on the Touch Panel. take the following steps. (At this time. If the procedure is abnormally terminated. 2.2. (The Start key blinks green. Press the Start key. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2005 5.) 9. 5. Firmware upgrade 7. Turn OFF the main power switch. 3. 15. 14.

B. D. Other Field Service Ver. or removed in the field. • Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.6. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions. only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. you should make adjustment. the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. 46 . be sure to ground your body. Removal of PWBs NOTE • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. • Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Paint-locked Screws NOTE • Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted. set.1 A. 1. Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment. 2005 6. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.0 Mar. Maintenance C. bizhub C450 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items 6. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. Red Painted Screws NOTE • When the screws are removed.

Page ☞ 54 ☞ 53 ☞ 55 ☞ 54 ☞ 53 ☞ 51 ☞ 53 ☞ 53 ☞ 50 ☞ 51 ☞ 52 ☞ 52 ☞ 51 ☞ 50 ☞ 52 ☞ 52 ☞ 51 ☞ 56 ☞ 57 ☞ 52 ☞ 52 ☞ 52 ☞ 51 ☞ 50 ☞ 50 47 Maintenance bizhub C450 .0 Mar.2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Original Glass IR Upper Right Cover Control Panel IR Front Cover IR Upper Front Cover IR Left Cover IR Upper Left Cover IR Upper Rear Cover IR Right Cover Rear Left Cover Panel Cover Front Door Exterior parts Front Left Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Rear Right Cover Exit Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 1 Front right cover Lower Rear Cover Tray 2 Rear Cover Tray 2 Rear Right Cover Multi Bypass Right Cover Multi Bypass Left Cover Part name Ref. 1. 2005 6. Other 6.Field Service Ver.2 6.1 No.

Page bizhub C450 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ☞ 57 ☞ 58 ☞ 59 ☞ 61 ☞ 62 ☞ 63 ☞ 63 ☞ 64 ☞ 65 ☞ 66 ☞ 67 ☞ 69 ☞ 70 ☞ 71 ☞ 71 ☞ 73 ☞ 74 ☞ 74 ☞ 75 ☞ 76 ☞ 77 ☞ 79 ☞ 82 ☞ 84 ☞ 85 Maintenance 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 48 . Other No. 1. Electronic Sorting Board MFP Control Board Control Board Slide Interface Board High Voltage Unit/1 High Voltage Unit/2 Tray 1 Paper Size Board DC Power Supply LED Drive Board Board and etc.6. 2005 Ref.0 Mar. Section Part name Scanner Motor Drive Board CCD Unit Image Processing Board Copier Board LAN Board Standard Memory Hard Disk Drive Board and etc. Tray 2 Board Tray 2 Paper Size Board Inverter Board Multi Bypass Unit Unit Hopper Unit LPH Unit Scanner Motor IR Scanner Assy Scanner Wire Field Service Ver.

1.0 Mar.2.2 No.Page ☞ 120 ☞ 120 ☞ 121 ☞ 121 ☞ 122 ☞ 122 ☞ 122 ☞ 124 ☞ 124 ☞ 125 ☞ 125 ☞ 126 ☞ 126 Bypass 49 Maintenance bizhub C450 ☞ 92 .Page ☞ 93 ☞ 96 ☞ 96 ☞ 97 ☞ 98 ☞ 98 ☞ 99 ☞ 100 ☞ 101 ☞ 103 ☞ 104 ☞ 105 ☞ 106 ☞ 109 ☞ 112 ☞ 114 ☞ 115 ☞ 119 ☞ 107 6.2 LPH Assy ATDC Sensor Y/M/C Part name 6. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Cleaning parts list Section Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Paper Take-up Roller Tray 2 Pick-up Roller Separation Roller Transport Roller Scanner Rail Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) IR Lens Original Glass CCD Sensor Part name Ref. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Others Section PWB Unit PWB Box Main Motor Fusing Drive Motor Toner Supply Motor C/K Toner Supply Motor Y/M Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor Color PC Drum Motor Color Developing Motor K PC Motor 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor Intermediate Transport Motor Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor Cleaning Brush Motor IDC/Registration Sensor/1. 2005 No. Other Ref.Field Service Ver.

Remove the Screw [7]. 50 . Other Field Service Ver. 2005 6. 4. 5. 2. Remove the Panel Cover. and remove the Bypass Right Cover [6].0 Mar.3 bizhub C450 Disassembly/Assembly procedure IR Right Cover/Front Right Cover/Bypass Right & Left Cover [1] [2] 6.6. Remove two Screws [5]. and remove the Front Right Cover [4]. Remove four Screws [1]. 1. 52 Remove the Screw [3]. ☞ 3. and remove the IR Right Cover [2]. and remove the Bypass Left Cover [8].1 [6] [4] [5] [3] Maintenance [8] [7] 4037F2C018DB 1.3.

Remove four Screws [6]. 2. Remove four Screws [4]. [9] 4037F2C020DA [10] 7.Field Service Ver. and remove the Exit Tray [3]. 2005 6. and remove the IR Left Cover [5]. Open the Front Door [1]. and remove the Rear Left Cover [8]. [11] 4037F2C021DA 51 Maintenance bizhub C450 .2 Exit Tray/IR Left Cover/Rear Left Cover/Left Front Cover 6.3. Open the Left Door [7]. Other [5] [4] [1] [6] [8] [6] [3] [2] [7] 4037F2C019DB 1. Remove the Screw [9]. 1. Remove Connectors [10] and the Left Front Cover [11]. 5.0 Mar. 3. 4. Remove two Screws [2]. 6.

5. Lower Rear Cover/Tray 2 Rear Cover/Rear Cover/Rear Right Cover/Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Wiring Cover 6. and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover [6]. Remove the Screw [2]. 3.3. 4. Remove two Screws [5]. 1. Remove the Screw [7]. 2005 Front Door/Panel Cover/Tray 1 Front Right Cover [3] [2] [1] [5] [4] Maintenance [6] 4037F2C022DB 1. and remove the Lower Rear Cover [2]. Remove four Screws [3]. Pick up the Front Door [1] and remove it.0 Mar. 2.3.4 [7] [1] [8] [2] [3] [5] [6] [3] [4] 4037F2C023DB 1. 3. and remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover [4].6. and remove the Panel Cover [3]. 52 . 2.3 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 4. and remove the Wiring Cover [8]. Pull out the Tray 1 [4]. Remove six Screws [1]. Open the Front Door [1]. and remove the Tray 1 Front Right Cover [6]. Other 6. Remove two Screws [5].

0 Mar. 6. and remove the IR Upper Rear Cover [8]. 7. Remove four Screws [11]. 1. and remove the Rear Right Cover [13].5 IR Upper Front Cover/IR Upper Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover [6] [5] [4] [1] [3] [8] [7] [6] [2] 4037F2C025DB 1. Remove two Shoulder Screws [1] and a Screw [2].3. Open the Right Door [12]. and remove the Rear Cover [10]. 3.Field Service Ver. Remove four Screws [9]. Remove four Shoulder Screws [6] and three Screws [7]. Other [11] [10] [13] [11] [9] 4037F2C024DB 6. Remove three Screws [4]. and remove the IR Upper Right Cover [5]. 2005 6. 53 Maintenance 5. and remove the IR Upper Front Cover [3]. bizhub C450 [12] [9] . 2.

1. 53 5.0 Mar.6. Remove the Original Glass [3]. 54 . Remove each Screw [1]. Remove the IR Upper Right Cover. ☞ 51 6. Remove the IR Right Cover and IR Upper Front Cover. and remove the Original Glass fixing bracket (near side/ inmost side) [2].3.6 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. ☞ 50. 2005 Original Glass/IR Front Cover [5] [3] [2] [4] Maintenance [1] 4037F2C026DB 1. Remove the IR Left Cover. 3. and remove the IR Front Cover [5]. 4. Other 6. ☞ 53 2. Remove five Screws [4].

0 Mar. Other 1.7 Control Panel (UN201) 6.3. [1] [1] 4037F2C027DB 2. Remove four caps [1] at both ends of Control Panel.Field Service Ver. Remove four Screws [2]. 2005 6. [2] [2] 4037F2C028DB 55 Maintenance bizhub C450 . 1.

Slide out the Tray 1 [1]. 4.0 Mar. Other Field Service Ver. Remove the Flat Cable [3].3. Slide out the Tray 1 [3] while pressing the Slide Locks [2] at both ends. 1. [3] [2] [2] [3] 4037F2C030DB 56 .6.8 Tray 1 1. 2005 3. [1] Maintenance 4036fs163c0 2. bizhub C450 [4] [3] 4037F2C029DA 6. Remove the Control Panel [4].

0 Mar.3. Slide out the Tray 2 [1]. Remove one Screw [2]. Slide out the Tray 2 while pressing the Slide Locks [4]. [2] 4036fs2142c1 57 bizhub C450 . 3. ☞ 53 2. Remove three Connectors [1] and four Board Supports [2]. 2005 6. [2] Maintenance [4] 4037F2C031DB 6. 4036fs165c0 [3] 2.9 Tray 2 [1] 6. Other 1. 1. 3.10 [1] Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) [3] 1.Field Service Ver. Remove the IR Upper Rear Cover.3. Remove the Scanner Motor Drive Board [3]. and remove the Stopper [3].

3. and remove the CCD Unit [5].0 Mar. Align the CCD Unit with the center of the graduations as illustrated on the left and then tighten the four screws. 2005 CCD Unit [2] [1] A. and remove the CCD Unit Cover [2].11 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. ☞ 2.3. Turn ON the main power switch. Removal Procedure Remove the Original Glass. [5] [4] Maintenance [3] 4037F2C032DA B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. 1.6. Reinstall the Original Glass. 58 . [1] 4037F2C009DA [3] 3. 4037F2C033DA 2. 54 Remove seven Screws [1]. 1. Other 6. Remove four Screws [3] and Flat Cable [4].

Field Service Ver.3. Remove the CCD Unit Cover.12 Image Processing Board (PWB-C) [1] 4037F2C034DA 4. ☞ 232 NOTE • Hold the CCD Unit by hand when moving it. Remove six screws [5]. ☞ 52 2. bizhub C450 . If the specifications are not met. Remove three screws [3]. NEVER use a screwdriver or similar tool to tap to move it. 1. Other 4. 2005 6. 3. and remove the Board cover [6]. and remove the Original Size Detection Sensor Assy [4]. [5] [6] [5] 4037F2C036DA 59 Maintenance [2] 1. Remove four Screws [1]. “Scan Calibration” and “Line Mag” Setting under System 2 available in Service Mode should be OFF. as a varied distance between the CCD sensor and lens results. and remove the IR Frame Protective Cover [2]. Remove the Rear Cover and IR Right Cover.0 Mar. ☞ Refer to the step1 on page 126. 6. loosen the CCD Unit mounting screws and move the CCD Unit in the sub scan direction as necessary. [3] [4] [3] 4037F2C035DA [5] 5. • When CCD unit is replaced. Carry out the Cross Direction Adjustment.

and remove the Image Processing Board [11]. Remove six Screws [9] and two Bolts [10]. 4037F2C038DA 8. NOTE • When the Image Processing Board is to be replaced. 1.0 Mar. rewriting the Firmware to the latest one. 2005 6. Remove two connectors [7]. [10] [11] [9] 4037F2C039DB 60 . Remove all the Connectors and Flat Cables on the Image Processing Board [8].6. Other Field Service Ver. bizhub C450 [7] [7] 4037F2C037DA [8] Maintenance 7.

[2] [3] 4037F2C041DA [3] 4.13 Copier Board (PWB-CF) 1.0 Mar. Loosen two screws [2]. 1. Other [1] 4037F2C040DA 3. Remove three screws [4] and two hex-head screws [5]. [4] 4037F2C042DA 61 Maintenance bizhub C450 . Remove the connector [1]. Remove the right rear cover ☞ 52 2. 6.3. 2005 6.Field Service Ver. and pull out the Copier Board Assy [3].

☞ 2. Remove the Interface connector [5] and LAN Board [6]. 1. Remove four screws [4].14 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.3. Remove four screws [1] and two hexhead screws [2]. 3. Remove the Interface Cover [3]. 92 Pull out the Copier Board. [3] Remove the PWB Unit. 2005 LAN Board (PWB-LAN) 1. Maintenance [4] 4037F2C044DA 5. Other 6. [2] [1] 4037F2C043DA 4. [5] [6] 4037F2C045DA 62 .6.0 Mar.

0 Mar. Remove two Standard memories [1]. Other 1.15 Standard Memory (D_FILE0) [1] 6.16 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) [1] [1] 4037F2C539DA [3] 3. Remove the PWB Unit. 1. Remove four screws [1]. Remove the Flat cable [2] and the Hard Disk Drive Assy [3]. ☞ 92 2. ☞ 92 2.3. Remove the PWB Unit. 2005 6.Field Service Ver. bizhub C450 . 4037F2C538DA 6. [2] 4037F2C540DA 63 Maintenance 1.3.

Remove three screws [1] and the Electronic sorting Board [2].0 Mar.6. NOTE • When the Hard Disk is replaced. 2005 4. ☞ 92 2. Remove four screws [4] and the Flat cable [5]. select “State Confirmation” → “Memory/HDD Adj. Other [6] bizhub C450 [4] Field Service Ver.3. [2] Maintenance [1] 4037F2C046DA 64 . Remove the PWB Unit. Remove the Hard Disk Drive [6]. [4] [5] 4037F2C541DA 6.17 Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES) 1.” → “HDD Format” in Service Mode for Logical format. 1.

4037F2C049DA 4.Field Service Ver. [4] [4] [3] 4037F2C047DA 65 Maintenance bizhub C450 . ☞ 64 3. 1. 2005 6. Remove three screws [3] and seven shoulder screws [4]. Remove the work memory [1] on the MFP Control Board. Remove the Electronic sorting Board. Remove the NVRAM [2] on the MFP Control Board.3. ☞ 92 2. Remove the PWB Unit.18 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) 6. [2] 4037F2C050DA [3] 5.0 Mar. Other [1] 1.

3. Remove three Interface connectors [5] and the MFP Control Board [6]. Remove the Lower Rear Cover. • When the MFP Control Board is replaced. NOTE • When the Control Board is to be replaced. bizhub C450 [5] [6] 4037F2C048DA 6. 2005 6. ☞ 52 2. and remove the Control Board [2]. mount the removed Backup RAM to the new MFP Control Board. Note on replacing the MFP Control Board • When the MFP Control Board is replaced. Other Field Service Ver. Remove all the Connectors on the Control Board.19 Control Board (PWB-MC) 1.6. Maintenance 4037F2C051DB [2] 3. rewriting the Firmware to the latest one. Remove eight Screws [1]. make sure to update the firmware. [1] [1] 4037F2C052DA 66 . 1.0 Mar.

A 4037F2C534DA 6. 2005 6. Remove the PWB Box. [2] [1] 4037F2C054DA 67 Maintenance bizhub C450 Cautions in replacing the Control Board: • When Control Board (PWB-MC) is replaced.20 Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) [1] 1. Mount the Parameter Chip (IC40) of old Control Board onto the new Control Board.3. 1.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. precisely fit the directions of each “A”. . Other 4037F2C053DB A NOTE • When the Parameter Chip (IC40) is mounted. relocate the Parameter Chip (IC40). Remove seven screws [1] and the Board Unit [2]. ☞ 93 2.

2005 3. Other Field Service Ver.0 Mar. bizhub C450 [3] [4] 4037F2C055DA [5] [5] 4.6. Remove fifteen screws [5] and the Control Board Assy [6]. Maintenance [6] [5] [5] 4037F2C056DA [7] 5. 1. Remove the Slide Interface Board [9]. Remove four screws [3] and the cover [4]. Remove seven screws [7] and the Flat cable [8]. [7] [8] [9] 4037F2C057DA 68 .

21 High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) [2] 6.0 Mar. Other [3] [1] 1.Field Service Ver. and remove two Harness Holder [3]. ☞ 93 2. 2005 6. 1. Remove all the Connectors on the High Voltage Unit/1 [4]. Remove the PWB Box. [1] 4037F2C058DA 3. Remove four Screws [1] and eight Connectors [2]. [6] [5] 4036fs2067c2 69 bizhub C450 . [4] Maintenance 4036fs2066c1 [5] 4. and remove the High Voltage Unit/1 [6]. Remove 9 Screws [5].3.

2005 High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) 1. Remove two Screws [2]. Remove six Screws [4].6. 1.0 Mar. [5] [4] 4036fs2070c1 70 . and remove the High Voltage Unit/2 Assy [3]. Other 6. [1] 4037F2C059DA [2] 3. Remove the PWB Box. Remove all the Connectors on the High Voltage Unit/2 [1]. Maintenance [3] 4037F2C060DA [4] 4. ☞ 93 2.3. and remove the High Voltage Unit/2 [5].22 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.

[6] Maintenance [5] 4036fs2072c1 6.0 Mar. Other 1.3. Remove six Screws [1]. ☞ 51 2. 93 Remove the Connector [1] on the High Voltage Unit/2. 2005 6. Remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board [6]. 2. and remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board Assy [4]. Remove the Lever [5]. ☞ 3. 6. [4] [3] [1] Slide out the Tray 1. 4.Field Service Ver. 4036fs2071c1 5. Remove two Screws [2] and Connector [3].23 Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) [2] 6. Remove the PWB Box. and remove the Board Cover [2].24 DC Power Supply (PU1) 1.3. Remove the Exit Tray. 1. [1] [1] [2] 4036fs2073c0 71 bizhub C450 .

0 Mar.6. Remove four Screws [5]. and remove the DC Power Supply Assy [4]. Unplug all connectors from the DC Power Supply. Maintenance bizhub C450 4036fs2074c1 [3] [3] [4] 5. [3] [3] [5] 4036fs2075c1 6. Remove the Harness from thirteen wire saddles. 2005 3. and remove the Protective Cover [6]. 4. 1. Remove seven Screws [3]. [6] 4036fs2076c1 72 . Other Field Service Ver.

☞ 79 2.3. unplug the connector [2] each. 1. Remove two screws [1]. unplug two connectors [6]. bizhub C450 . Remove eight screws [5]. [7] [6] [5] 4036fs2143c1 73 Maintenance 1. 4036fs2546c1 [5] [5] 4.Field Service Ver. Other 7. 2005 6. and remove each guide Assy. [7] [8] [7] 4036fs2077c1 6. Remove 12 Screws [7]. and remove the LED Drive Board [7]. Remove the LPH Unit.0 Mar. and remove the DC power Supply [8]. Remove the flat cables [4] (eight).25 LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) [3] [2] [1] 4036fs2545c0 [4] [4] 3.

and remove the Tray 2 Board [2]. 4.0 Mar. 4037F2C061DA [1] [2] Maintenance 3. ☞ 52 2. Remove all the Connectors on the Tray 2 Board. Remove three Screws [3]. 2. 1. Other 6.3. ☞ 3. 4036fs2148c0 6. Remove four Screws [1]. [1] [4] [3] [2] 4037F2C062DA 74 . 2005 Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) 1.6.26 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 52 Remove the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1]. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. Slide out the Tray 2. and remove the Tray 2 Board Fixing Bracket [4].27 Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2) 1. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover.3.

and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board [9]. [9] 4037F2C533DA 6. 1. 2005 6.3. Flat Cable [2] and Connector [3]. Remove the Lever [8].0 Mar.28 Inverter Board (PU201) 1. [5] [6] [7] 4037F2C063DA [8] 6. ☞ 84 2.Field Service Ver. Remove the Scanner Assy. [2] [4] [1] [1] [3] 4036fs2152c0 75 Maintenance bizhub C450 . and remove the Inverter Board [4]. and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board Assy [7]. Remove four Screws [1]. Other 5. Remove two Claws [5] and Connector [6].

Remove four Screws [6]. Remove two Screws [1].29 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.0 Mar.3. 1. Other 6. [1] 4036fs2078c1 2. 2005 Multi Bypass Unit [2] 1. Remove three Connectors [3]. and remove the Multi Bypass Unit [7].6. [3] Maintenance 4036fs2079c1 3. NOTE • The earth terminal will be screwed with one of four screws. [5] [6] [4] 4036fs2080c1 [6] 4. and remove the Bypass Left Cover [5]. and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover [2]. [7] 4036fs2081c1 76 . Remove the Screw [4].

3. 4. 2005 6. 2.Field Service Ver.30 Toner Hopper Unit 6. . K). K). DO NOT leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it will become damaged. 1. Remove two screws [3] and the Front Door Switch cover [4]. Y. Open the Front Door.0 Mar. NOTE • For installation of Hopper Unit. Remove the Left Front Cover and Panel Cover. Remove the Toner Cartridge (C. [3] 4037F2C064DA 7. ☞ 51 5. connect the Terminals in the sequence of blue and then white from upper. 3. Remove the IU (C. Other NOTE • After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. Remove two Terminals [5]. M. [5] 4037F2C065DA 77 Maintenance bizhub C450 1. M. and remove the Front Right Cover [2]. [2] [1] 4036fs2082c0 [4] 6. Y. Remove two Screws [1].

Maintenance [8] [7] 4036fs2086c2 78 .0 Mar.6. Disconnect five connectors [6]. Other Field Service Ver. Remove five screws [7] and the Toner Hopper Unit [8]. 1. bizhub C450 [6] 4037F2C066DA [7] 9. 2005 8.

. 28 Remove the Rear Right Cover.3. ☞ Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit. K). Remove two screws [1] and the lattice connector fixing bracket [2]. 1. Y.Field Service Ver. make sure that the Toner supply shutter is opened if the Imaging Unit Lower Cover is not used. When installing the Imaging Unit into the main unit. place the IU lock lever back into the locked position. 2.0 Mar. Open the Left Door. 3. ☞ 4. 2005 6.31 LPH Unit 6. 50 5. Slide out the IU (C. 7. Remove four Screws [3]. [3] [3] 4037F2C068DA 79 Maintenance [1] bizhub C450 1. [2] 4037F2C067DA [4] 6. M. Other NOTE • After the IU has been pulled out. Open the Front Door. Rear Left Cover and Rear Cover. and remove the Harness Protective Cover [4].

[5] 4037F2C069DB 9. Remove the Screw [7] and Connector [8]. Maintenance [6] 4037F2C070DA [7] 10. 1. Remove five Connectors [5] on the Control Board. [8] 4037F2C071DA 80 . Other [5] bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 2005 8. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [6].0 Mar.6.

0 Mar. NOTE • During the locking procedure. clean it with the LED Cleaning Jig. necessary if the IU is replaced at the same time. NOTE • When the LPH Unit is to be replaced. see page 119. 2005 11. use care not to touch the LED surface. remove the TCR Sensor from the old LPH Unit and remount it on the new one. bizhub C450 . • Should the LED surface be touched. Turning the IU (C. 81 Maintenance 12. push it into the locked position (at four places). Y. 1. 6. This step is not. ☞ For replacement of TCR Sensor. M.Field Service Ver. however. Remove four screws [11] and slide out the LPH Unit [12]. Other [9] 4037F2C072DA [10] 4037F2C073DA [12] [11] [11] 4037F2C074DA 13. K) drive hub [10]. Remove the Connector [9].

6. 4. • When the LPH Unit has been reinstalled. be sure to run “Stabilizer” available from “Image Adjust” of the Service Mode. • For installation of the LPH Unit. thus damaging the Drive hub. [2] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] 4037F2C076DB [3] 5.0 Mar. ☞ 3. Maintenance Scanner Motor (M201) Removal Procedure Remove the ADF. Remove the Rear Cover and IR Upper Rear Cover.32 A. 2005 NOTE • After replacing the LPH Unit. be sure to turn four Drive Hubs [13] to release locking. Other Field Service Ver. lock four Drive hubs again before installation. Remove the tension spring [3] for the Scanner Motor belt. 1. Proceeding with job while still being locked may unintentionally release the locking condition. bizhub C450 [13] 4037F2C075DA 6. 4036fs2091c0 82 . 2. 52 Remove 16 screws [1]. 1.3. Remove the Connector and the reinforcement frame [2].

83 Maintenance bizhub C450 . slide the Scanner Motor Assy to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring. Perform this step three times. [4] [4] [7] [8] 4036fs2523c0 7. Hook the spring [3]. [9] [6] 4036fs2524c1 [1] [3] [2] 4036fs2525c0 B. 3. With the Scanner drive gear set screw located on the right-hand side as shown on the left. Other 6. Securely tighten the three screws to fix the Scanner Motor Assy [2] into position. 4. Remove two screws [6]. 2005 [5] [4] 6.0 Mar. Remove three screws [4] and the Scanner Motor Assy [5]. 1. Reinstallation Procedure 1. 2. Temporarily secure the Scanner Motor Assy [2] using three screws [1]. damper [8] and the Scanner Motor [9]. set screw [7].Field Service Ver.

3.0 Mar. Move the Scanner Assy [1] to the location shown and remove one mounting screw each at the front and rear end. ☞ 54 2. 1. Take out the Scanner Assy [3] by turning it in the direction of the arrow shown. [2] 4036fs2526c0 [3] 3. Other 6. Remove the Original Glass. 2005 Scanner Assy 1.6. [1] Maintenance 4037F2C077DA NOTE • Do not remove the Scanner Positioning Screws (red-painted) [2].33 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 4036fs2527c0 84 .

one each at the front and in the rear. [5] [4] [6] [7] 4037F2C078DA 6. Remove four screws [2] and the control panel base [3]. A. ☞ 2. 4036fs2095c1 [3] [3] 6. Remove the IR Front Cover. ☞ 8. ☞ 54 5. Other 4. 84 Unhook the springs [3] of the Scanner Drive Cables on the hook side. 1. 52 Remove the Control Panel.3. 54 Remove the Scanner Assy. 4036fs2547c0 85 Maintenance bizhub C450 . Remove the Scanner Assy [7].Field Service Ver. 6. 55 Remove four Presser Bars [1] of Flat Cable. Remove the Rear Cover. Removal Procedure [1] [1] 4036fs2094c0 [2] [3] 4. Remove the Original Glass. Remove the screw [4] and the holder [5]. Remove the flat cable [6]. 2005 6. ☞ 7.34 Scanner Drive Cables 1.0 Mar. 5. ☞ 3.

remove the front and rear pulleys [13]. and slide the Wire Pulley [7] (Rear side) in the direction of front side. Remove the screw [4] and then slide the front pulley [5] toward the front. 4036fs2550c0 13. 4036fs2548c0 [6] 11. 4036fs2552c0 86 .6. Other [4] bizhub C450 [5] Field Service Ver. 15. Remove the Screw [6]. Then. [11] [10] 4036fs2551c0 [12] [13] 14. Remove the Scanner Drive Cables. Snap off the C-clip [10] and remove the bushing [11] (front). 1. Slide the shaft [12] toward the rear and lift it. [7] Maintenance 4036fs2549c0 [8] [9] 12. 2005 9. Remove the Scanner Motor Assy. Remove the screw [8] and the Scanner drive gear [9].0 Mar. ☞ 82 10.

4036fs2555c0 87 Maintenance bizhub C450 <Overall figure> .Field Service Ver. Other 4036fs2553c0 A. Reinstallation Procedure [1] [2] <Front> 1. from the rear toward the front side.35 Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables 6.0 Mar. Position the round bead [1] of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [2] as shown. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. 1.3. 4036fs2554c0 2. 2005 6. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clockwise. NOTE • Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley.

NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. Position the round bead [4] of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [5] as shown. from the front toward the rear side. from the front toward the rear side. 4036fs2559c0 7. 1. 4036fs2556c0 bizhub C450 [3] 4. Maintenance 4036fs2558c0 6. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clockwise. 4036fs2560c0 88 . 2005 3. Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counterclockwise. 4036fs2557c0 [4] [5] <Rear> 5.0 Mar. NOTE • Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley. from the rear toward the front side. Other Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counterclockwise. Slip the Cable Holding Jig [3] onto the pulley to secure the cable in position.6.

Install the front and rear pulleys [7] and bushings [8] onto the shaft [9] and fit the C-clip [10].1 mm between the Scanner drive gear and bushing. Secure the front and rear pulleys [14] using the screw [15] each. [8] [10] 4036fs2562c0 [12] 0.0 Mar. 4036fs2564c0 89 Maintenance [13] 10.Field Service Ver. Other 8. 4036fs2561c0 [9] [7] 9. 2005 6. Mount the Scanner drive gear [11] on the shaft [12] and secure it using the screw [13]. NOTE • Apply the Screw lock on the Screw.1 mm [11] 4036fs2563c0 [14] [15] [15] [14] 11. Slip the Cable Holding Jig [6] onto the pulley to secure the cable in position. 1. bizhub C450 [6] . NOTE • Allow a clearance of about 0.

☞ 82 <Front> 13. Fit the hook end of the cable [27] to the spring [28] and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame.9 mm or less: Retry to put the spring on the catch C.1 mm or more: Retry to put the spring on the catch B. • In case of 61. <When out of the given range> • In case of 64. Wind the bead end of the cable [19] around pulley C [20] and pulley B [21].0 Mar. 2005 NOTE • Mount the Screw [16] in the direction that is opposite against the direction for which Scanner Drive Gear [17] and Screw [18] are screwed together as shown in the left figure. 16. [26] [24] [25] 4036fs2566c0 A B C 15. Mount the Scanner Motor Assy. 4036fs2584c0 bizhub C450 [18] [16] 12. and check if its length is within the range of 63. 1. Measure the Spring length. Other [17] Field Service Ver. then hook the bead [22] onto the Adjustable Anchor [23].6. [19] [20] [21] [22] Maintenance [23] 4036fs2565c0 14. Wind the hook end of the cable [24] around pulley A [25] and pulley B [26].0 mm ± 1 mm. [28] [27] 4036fs2567c0 90 .

Other <Rear> 17. [34] 4036fs2569c0 A B C 19. be sure to carry out the “Feed Direction Adjustment” procedure. and check if its length is within the range of 63.Field Service Ver. [37] [38] 4036fs2570c0 21. then hook the bead [32] onto the Adjustable Anchor [33]. ☞ Remove the Cable Holding Jigs from the front and rear pulleys. Wind the bead end of the cable [29] around pulley F [30] and pulley E [31]. [31] [32] [30] [33] 4036fs2568c0 [36] [35] 18. 22. 301 Adjust the position of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.9 mm or less: Retry to put the spring on the catch C. ☞ 233 91 Maintenance bizhub C450 [29] . 301 NOTE • Whenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed. Fit the hook end of the cable [37] to the spring [38] and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame. Adjust the focus positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit. 20. Measure the Spring length.1 mm or more: Retry to put the spring on the catch B.0 mm ± 1 mm. • In case of 61. <When out of the given range> • In case of 64. Wind the hook end of the cable [34] around pulley D [35] and pulley E [36]. 1. ☞ 23.0 Mar. 2005 6.

Remove the Right Rear Cover. [1] 4037F2C040DA 3.3. ☞ 52 2. 2005 PWB Unit 1. Remove eight screws [2].0 Mar. Maintenance [2] [2] 4037F2C079DB 4. 1. Other 6.6. Remove the PWB Unit [3]. [3] 4037F2C080DA 92 . Disconnect the connector [1].36 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.

3. Right Rear Cover. Other [1] [2] 1.37 PWB Box 6. and IR Left Cover. Maintenance [3] [3] 4037F2C068DA [5] [6] 6. Remove the Rear Cover. 2005 6. 5. 1. 4037F2C081DB 93 bizhub C450 . Remove two screws [1] and the lattice connector fixing bracket [2].Field Service Ver. Left Rear Cover. ☞ 50 3.0 Mar. Lower Rear Cover. Remove all the connectors on the Mechanical Control Board [5]. Open the Left door. 4037F2C067DA [4] 4. Remove four screws [3] and the Harness Protective Cover [4]. ☞ 25 2. NOTE • Do not remove the Flat cable [6]. Remove the Ozone filter.

6. [8] 4037F2C083DB [9] 9. Remove two connectors [8]. 1. 4037F2C084DA 94 . 2005 7. Remove the connector set screw [9].0 Mar. [7] bizhub C450 [7] [7] [7] Maintenance 4037F2C082DB [8] 8. Remove the Harness from fourteen wire saddles [7]. Other Field Service Ver.

[11] [10] 4037F2C085DA 11. 2005 6. Remove six connectors [11] connected to the Slide Interface Board [10].Field Service Ver. [13] [13] [13] 4037F2C087DC 95 Maintenance bizhub C450 .0 Mar. Remove the connector [12]. 1. Other 10. [12] 4037F2C086DA 12. Remove eleven screws [13].

3. 4036fs2100c0 6.39 [1] Fusing Drive Motor (M2) [3] 1.6. 3. 1. Other Field Service Ver. bizhub C450 [15] [14] [14] Maintenance 4037F2C088DB 6. and remove the Main Motor [3]. Remove three screws [3] and the Fan Motor Assy/1 [4]. Remove two connectors [1]. Remove the Connector [1] and three Screws [2]. ☞ 93 2. [2] [4] 4037F2C090DA 96 .3.0 Mar. and remove the Harness from two wire saddles [2]. 2005 13.38 [2] Main Motor (M1) [3] [1] 1. Remove two claws [14] and the Board Box [15]. Remove the PWB Box. Remove the PWB Box. ☞ 93 2.

Remove two shoulder screws [7] and the Fan Motor Assy[8]. and remove the Harness from three wire saddles [6]. Remove two connectors [5]. [2] [1] 4036fs2082c0 [5] [6] [4] 3. Remove the Panel Cover. 4. and remove the Front Right Cover [2]. 2005 6. Remove the Harness for the Toner Supply Motor C/K [3] from the wire saddle [4].3. and remove the Toner Supply Motor C/K [3]. [5] [7] [8] [6] 4037F2C091DA 6.Field Service Ver. and remove the Fusing Drive Motor [11]. [3] 4037F2C093DA 97 Maintenance bizhub C450 [5] [7] [6] . 5. Remove two Screws [5] and Connector [6]. ☞ 52 2. Remove two Screws [1]. [9] [9] [11] [10] 4037F2C092DA 6. Other 4. Remove four Screws [9] and Connector [10]. 1.0 Mar.40 Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) 1.

Remove the Connector [3]. Remove the Toner Hopper.6. [1] [2] 4036fs2529c1 3.3. 4037F2C094DA 98 . 1. [4] 4036fs2530c1 6. [2] [3] Pull out the Tray 2. 2. ☞ 3. Then. turn the Toner Replenishing Motor Y/M [5] counterclockwise and take it off the machine. 2005 bizhub C450 6.42 Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) [1] 1. Remove two screws [4]. Remove the screw [1] and the gear [2]. ☞ 77 2.3.41 Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) 1. Other Field Service Ver. 52 Remove the connector [1]. Remove three screws [2] and the Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor [3].0 Mar. 4. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. [3] Maintenance 4036fs2105c0 [5] 4.

☞ 3. 2005 6. Pull out the Tray 2.3. and remove Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor [7]. Remove two screws [4] and the Motor Assy [5]. [7] 4037F2C097DA 99 Maintenance bizhub C450 . 1. [5] [4] 4037F2C096DA [6] 6.43 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) [3] [2] 6. 2. 4. Other 1. Remove two screws [6]. 52 Remove the Harness for the Motor Assy [2] from four wire saddles [1]. [1] 4037F2C095DA 5. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover.0 Mar. Remove two connectors [3].Field Service Ver.

Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. 4. 2005 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) [3] [2] 1. Remove two screws [4] and the Motor Assy [5]. [7] 4037F2C098DB 100 . [1] 4037F2C095DA 5. Pull out the Tray 2.3. Maintenance [5] [4] 4037F2C096DA [6] 6. ☞ 3. Other 6.44 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Remove two connectors [3].0 Mar. 1. 2.6. Remove two screws [6] and the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor [7]. 52 Remove the Harness Assy [2] from four wire saddles [1].

1. ☞ 93 2. 3. Remove four Screws (Red-painted) [4] and Connector [5]. Other 1. Maintenance 101 bizhub C450 . and remove the Harness Holder [3].45 Color PC Drum Motor (M5) [1] 6. Remove four Connectors [1] on the High Voltage Unit/1. 2005 6.3. [3] [2] 4037F2C089DA [4] [4] [6] [5] 4036fs2106c2 4. Remove the PWB Box.Field Service Ver. Remove two Screws [2].0 Mar. and remove the Color PC Drum Motor [6].

be sure to check the assembled position of PC Gear. Adjusting method [1] [4] 1. A. and fit the hole A [3] and B [4] with the Gear holes as shown on the above figure. 2. 3. Remove seven Screws and Upper Frame Assy. 2005 bizhub C450 Cautions when mounting the Color PC Drum Motor: • Before mounting the Color PC Drum Motor. Fix the PC Gear/1 [1]. and fit the hole A [2] with the PC Gear/1 [1] hole while visually checking. make positioning adjustment. 5. If its position is improper. [2] [3] 4036fs2173c1 4. Checking method [1] [3] [4] [2] 4036fs2170c1 Maintenance 1.0 Mar.6. Visually check if the hole A [3] and B [4] are fit with each Gear hole at the same time. Reinstall the Upper Frame Assy. Slowly turn the PC Gear/1 [1]. Mount the Color PC Drum Motor [5] while two hole positions are well set. and then fit the hole B [3] with the PC Gear/2 [4] hole while visually checking. B. 2. Turn the PC Gear/1 [1]. 1. [5] 4036fs2171c1 102 . Other Field Service Ver.

1.3. 103 bizhub C450 . A. Remove eight Connectors [1] on the High Voltage Unit/1. Checking method [2] [3] 1. 3. and remove the Harness Holder [3]. ☞ 93 2.0 Mar. 2005 6. Remove four Screws [4] and Connector [5].46 Color Developing Motor (M6) [1] 6. Other [3] 1. Remove the PWB Box. be sure to check the assembled position of PC Gear. and remove the Color Developing Motor [6]. 2. Maintenance [1] [4] 4036fs2638c0 [4] Cautions when mounting the Color Developing Motor: • Before mounting the Color Developing Motor. make positioning adjustment. Remove two Screws [2]. and fit the hole A [3] and B [4] with the Gear holes as shown on the above figure. Visually check if the hole A [3] and B [4] are fit with each Gear hole at the same time. If its position is improper. [2] 4037F2C099DA [4] [6] [5] 4036fs2108c1 4.Field Service Ver. Slowly turn the PC Gear/1 [1].

Maintenance [5] 4036fs2640c0 6. Mount the Color Developing Motor [5] while two hole positions are well set. 1. Remove four Screws [1] and Connector [2]. Turn the PC Gear/3 [1]. 2. [2] [3] 4036fs22639c0 4. ☞ 93 2. Reinstall the Upper Frame Assy.0 Mar. 2005 B.6. Remove seven Screws and the Upper Frame Assy. Adjusting method bizhub C450 [1] [4] 1. [3] [1] 4037F2C100DA 104 . 3.47 K PC Motor (M7) [2] 1. and then fit the hole B [3] with the PC Gear/2 [4] hole while visually checking.3. 5. Fix the PC Gear/3 [1]. Other Field Service Ver. and fit the hole C [2] with the PC Gear/3 [1] hole while visually checking. Remove the PWB Box. and remove the K PC Motor [3].

and remove the High Voltage Unit/1 Fixing plate [5]. ☞ 69 5. 2005 6. Remove two connectors [1]. 105 Maintenance [4] 4. Remove the High Voltage Unit/1. 1. Remove two Screws [6] and Connector [7].3. and remove the Harness from two wire saddles [2].48 [1] 6.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. [2] [4] 4037F2C090DA [5] 4037F2C101DA [7] [6] [8] 4036fs2112c1 6. 3. and remove the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor [8]. bizhub C450 . ☞ 93 2. Remove the PWB Box. Remove two Screws [4]. Remove three screws [3] and the Fan Motor Assy/1 [4]. Other 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) [3] 1.

[2] Maintenance [4] 4036fs2531c0 4. Open the Right Door. 4037F2C510DA [2] [3] [5] 3. and remove the gear Assy [4] and motor Assy [5].49 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 1. [7] [6] 4036fs2532c0 106 . 2. Unlock the tab and remove the Transport Unit Assy [1].0 Mar.6. unplug the connector [3]. Remove four screws [2]. 2005 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) [1] 1. Remove two screws [6] and the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor [7]. Other 6.3.

and remove the Holder [7]. Maintenance [4] [3] 4036fs2113c1 4. Remove the Lock claw to make free conditions of Transport section Assy [1]. Remove six Connectors [3] and Earth [4].Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Other 1. Open the Right Door. 1. Remove the C-ring [8]. 2005 6. 2. [6] [7] 4036fs2114c0 [8] 5. [9] 4036fs2115c0 107 bizhub C450 . and remove the Transport section Assy [5]. Remove three Screws [6].3. 4037F2C510DA [3] [5] 3.50 Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) [1] 6. and remove the Gear 1 [9].

6. 4036fs2119c1 [19] [18] 4036fs2120c0 10. Remove the C-ring [10]. Remove the Screw [16].0 Mar. Remove two Screws [18]. and remove the Intermediate Transport Motor [19]. 1. Remove the C-ring [12]. and remove the Mounting plate [15]. Other Field Service Ver. and remove the Gear 3 [13]. bizhub C450 [10] [11] 4036fs2116c0 7. 2005 6. NOTE • Remove the Intermediate Transport Motor while its Harness is well fit with the groove. 108 . [13] [12] 4036fs2117c0 Maintenance 8. and remove the Gear 2 [11]. [14] [15] 4036fs2118c0 [17] [16] 9. • Use care on the harness not to be bitten. Remove two Screws [14]. and remove the Sensor Assy [17].

51 [1] 6. Remove two shoulder screws [7] and the Fan Motor Assy/2 [8]. 5. and remove the Harness Guide [9]. [7] 4037F2C102DA [8] 10. and remove the Rear Handle Assy [7]. 1. 3. See the procedure 2 of page 19 “Replacing of Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller”. Remove three screws [3] and the Fan Motor Assy/1 [4].Field Service Ver. and remove the Harness from two wire saddles [2]. 9.3. bizhub C450 . ☞ 93 2. Remove the PWB Box. 34 Remove the Wiring Cover. [2] [4] 4037F2C090DA [5] [7] [6] [5] [7] [8] [6] 4037F2C091DA 6. Other Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19) [3] 1. Remove two Screws [8]. 2005 6. 7. Remove the Fusing Unit. ☞ 8.0 Mar. Remove eight Screws [6]. ☞ [6] [6] Open the Right Door. Remove two connectors [5]. and remove the Harness from three wire saddles [6]. Remove two connectors [1]. [9] 4036fs2122c1 109 Maintenance 4.

Remove six Connectors [11]. Remove four Screws [10]. Other Field Service Ver. 1. Remove the Gear [12].0 Mar. 2005 11.6. Maintenance [11] [11] [11] 4036fs2123c1 13. bizhub C450 [10] [10] 4036fs2124c1 12. [12] 4036fs2125c1 110 .

Other 14. [18] 4036fs2129c1 [19] [21] [20] 18. Remove the E-ring [13]. 4036fs2128c1 17. Remove the E-ring [19] and Shaft [20]. [17] 16. 1. Remove the Screw [15]. NOTE • Use care not to miss the Shaft. 2005 6. NOTE • Use care not to hurt the Right Door wire and Harness around. [14] [13] 4036fs2126c1 [15] [16] 4036fs2127c1 15. Remove the Fusing Drive Gear Assy [17]. and remove the Wire Rail [16].Field Service Ver. and remove the Gear [21]. NOTE • Close the Right Door when removing to prevent the wire from damaging. and remove the Gear [14].0 Mar. 4036fs2130c1 111 Maintenance bizhub C450 . Remove four Screws [18].

and remove the IR Left Frame [2].6. ☞ See the procedures 1 to 4 of page 105 “1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor”. Remove the High Voltage Unit/1 mounting plate. [26] 4036fs2133c1 6. Other Field Service Ver.0 Mar. [23] bizhub C450 [22] 4036fs2131c1 [25] [24] 20. 2005 19. Remove the E-ring [24]. and remove the Gear [25]. 1.3. Remove the two Screws [26]. and remove the Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor [27]. [1] [1] [2] [1] 4037F2C103DA 112 . and remove the Cover [23].52 Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) 1. Remove two E-rings [22]. 2. Remove ten screws [1]. 4036fs2132c1 Maintenance [27] 21.

1.Field Service Ver. 2005 6. and remove the Harness Holder [7].0 Mar. [7] 4037F2C106DA 113 Maintenance bizhub C450 [3] . [3] [4] 4037F2C104DA 4. Remove the connector [5]. Other 3. Remove two Screws [6]. [5] 4037F2C105DA [6] 5. Remove four screws [3] and the wiring guide plate [4].

1.0 Mar. 2005 6. Other Field Service Ver. Open the Front Door. Remove the Panel Cover. 2.6. [3] 4037F2C108DA [5] [4] [4] 5.2 (PC8/PC9) 1. Remove four Screws [8]. and remove the Cleaning Brush Motor [9]. Remove four screws [4] and the Registration Roller entrance guide [5].53 IDC/Registration Sensor/1. 6. 52 Remove two Screws [1]. Open the Right Door. and remove the Front Right Cover [2].3. Remove the Connector [3]. bizhub C450 [9] [8] [8] 4037F2C107DA 6. 4037F2C109DA 114 . ☞ 3. Maintenance [2] [1] 4036fs2082c0 4.

Remove two Screws [9] and Connector [10]. Remove three Screws [6] and Connector [7]. Clean the LED. Removal Procedure Remove the LPH Unit. if touched by hand. ☞ 2. • If the LPH Assy comes off position when the Lock is unlocked. NOTE • Whenever the IDC/Registration Sensor/1. bizhub C450 . • Be careful about the spring that can spring off when the LPH Assy is unlocked.Field Service Ver. the LPH Assy must be installed using the LPH Assy mounting jig. using the LED cleaning jig. NOTE • Do not touch the LED by hand. 1. unlock [2] it. 4036fs2627c0 [1] [2] 115 Maintenance 8. 2005 6. 79 Holding the LPH Assy [1] with hands. Other 7.54 LPH A. and remove the IDC/Registration Sensor/2 [11].0 Mar.3. [8] [6] [7] 4037F2C110DA [10] [11] [9] 4037F2C111DA 6. be sure to replace the Image Transfer Belt Unit. 1.2 have been replaced. and remove the IDC/Registration Sensor/1 [8].

M.6. Peel off the seal [4]. make sure of the type of the LPH. <Check method> Determine the type of LPH using the marking on the side face of the LPH. Remove the three LPH mounting screws [3]. The markings are: LPH for black: BLACK LPH for color: COLOR 4037F2C524DA 116 . unlock [5] the LPH Assy. 5. and C). 4036fs2628c0 [4] [6] [5] Maintenance 4. and remove the flat cable [6]. Other [3] bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Perform the same procedure for each of different colors of LPH. Reinstallation Procedure NOTE • The LPH comes in two types. 2005 3. whether it is for black or color. At replacement. 6.0 Mar. 1. [7] 4036fs2629c0 B. Remove the LPH [7]. one for black and the other for color (common to Y.

0 Mar. 4036fs2533c1 117 Maintenance bizhub C450 . NOTE • Failure to affix the seal could cause the flat cable to come off the LPH Assy. 2. Remove two screws [4] and the Guide [5].Field Service Ver. Insert the flat cable [2] into the LPH [1] and lock the LPH [1]. [5] [4] 4036fs2631c0 [6] [8] [7] 4. Remove two Screws [6] and Connector [7]. 2005 [3] [2] 6. Other 1. Affix the seal [3] that comes with the LPH Assy to the location shown on the left. 1. and remove the guide Assy [8]. [1] 4036fs2630c0 3.

Align the markings [9] on the flat cable with the positions shown in the photo. 2005 5. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the flat cable is wedged in mechanisms or bent. Install the two screws [13] to secure the guide Assy [14]. Connect the connector [15].6. Other <LPH C/Bk> bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 6. 10. Install the Guide. • Make sure that the flat cable is aligned with the groove in the Guide Assy. [10] 4036fs2632c0 [12] [12] 8. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the flat cable is wedged in mechanisms or bent. [9] [9] <LPH Y/M> [9] 4036fs2634c0 [11] Maintenance 7. Push the slack portion in the flat cable [12] into the inside of the machine.0 Mar. 1. 4036fs2635c0 [13] [14] [13] [15] 4036fs2543c0 9. Secure the LPH [10] using three screws [11]. 118 .

Remove two screws [1]. 119 Maintenance bizhub C450 . NOTE • When the TCR Sensor has been reinstalled.3. Other 11. be sure to run “Stabilizer” available from “Image Process Adjustment” of the Service Mode. • When the LPH Unit has been reinstalled. 2005 6. Press the LPH Assy [16] down into the locked position. 4036fs2633c0 [16] 6. unplug the connector [2].Field Service Ver.55 TCR Sensor Y/M/C (PWB-N1/-N2/-N3) [1] [3] [2] 4036fs2544c0 1. and remove the TCR Sensor. Remove the LPH Unit. ☞ 79 2. NOTE • Select “Service Mode” → “Machine” → “LPH Rank” and change the value of “LPH Rank” to “1”. 1.0 Mar. be sure to run “Stabilizer” available from “Image Process Adjustment” of the Service Mode.

2 Tray 1 Separation Roller 1.4. Remove two screws [1] and the Tray 1 Paper Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy [2].4 bizhub C450 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. 6.0 Mar. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2005 6. 2. Other Field Service Ver.4.6. [1] [2] 4036fs2013c1 3. wipe the Tray 1 Separation Roller [3] clean of dirt. 2. 4037F2C001DA Maintenance 6. 1. Slide out the Tray 1. Slide out the Tray 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. [3] 4036fs2014c1 120 . wipe the Tray 1 Paper TakeUp Roller [1] clean of dirt.1 Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller [1] 1.

Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.Field Service Ver. ☞ 76 2. 1. [2] [1] 4037F2C515DA 121 bizhub C450 .4 Bypass Tray Separation Roller 1.0 Mar. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit. Maintenance [3] 4037F2C516DA 6. wipe the Bypass Paper Take-up Roller [3].3 Bypass Tray Paper Take-up Roller 6. 4037F2C515DA 3. and remove the Bypass Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [2]. 2005 6.4. Other [2] [1] 1. and remove the Bypass Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [2]. Remove two screws [1]. ☞ 76 2. Remove two screws [1]. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.4.

and the Reinforcement plate [2].” 2. wipe the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller [1]. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the Tray 2 Paper Takeup Roller [1]. ☞ See the procedures 1 to 7 in page 122 “Cleaning of Tray 2 Separation Roller.6 Tray 2 Pick-up Roller 1.4. bizhub C450 [3] 4037F2C521DA 6. 2. 1. ☞ See the procedures 1 to 7 in page 122 “Cleaning of Tray 2 Separation Roller.4.” 2.4. 2005 3. Maintenance [1] 4036fs2022c1 6.5 Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller 1. Remove the Screw [1]. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.7 Tray 2 Separation Roller 1. Slide out the Tray 2. Using the soft cloth dampened with alcohol. [1] 4036fs2030c1 6.6. [1] [2] 4036fs2018c0 122 .0 Mar. Remove the Multi Bypass unit. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. wipe the Bypass Paper Separation Roller [3]. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. 3. Other Field Service Ver.

Field Service Ver. Remove two Claws [3] and the Vertical transport door [4]. and remove the Jam processing cover [6]. Remove two Screws [7] and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy [8]. Remove two Screws [5].0 Mar. 4036fs2592c0 123 Maintenance bizhub C450 . [3] [4] 4036fs2019c0 [6] 6. 5. Open the Vertical transport door. 2005 6. wipe the Tray 2 Separation Roller [9]. Other 4. 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. [5] [8] 4037F2C004DA 7. [7] 4036fs2021c1 [9] 8.

4. [1] 4036fs2033c1 6. Remove two screws [3] and two Original Glass fixing brackets [4] (at the front and rear). NOTE • Apply lubricant after cleaning.6. wipe the Tray 2 Transport Roller [1]. Remove the Original Glass [5].0 Mar. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Maintenance [1] 4036fs2504c0 [3] 2.9 [2] Scanner Rail 1. 1. [5] [4] 4036fs2505c0 [6] 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 3. 4036fs2506c1 124 . Remove three screws [1] and the IR Upper Right Cover [2].8 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 2005 Tray 2 Transport Roller 1. Other 6. wipe the Scanner Rails [6] clean of dirt.4. 2. Open the Vertical transport door.

Remove the Original Glass. [3] 4037F2C008DA 125 Maintenance bizhub C450 .4.10 [2] 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2005 6. Remove the Original Glass. ☞ 54 2. wipe the Lens [3] clean of dirt. Remove two Screws [1] and Lens cover [2].0 Mar.11 Lens [2] 1. 4036fs2507c0 6. [1] [1] 4037F2C007DA 3. wipe the Mirror 1 [1] and Mirror 2/3 [2].Field Service Ver. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.4. ☞ 54 2. Other Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) [1] 1. 1.

6.12 bizhub C450 [1] Field Service Ver.13 CCD Sensor [2] [1] Maintenance 1.0 Mar. wipe the CCD Sensor [5] clean of dirt. [1] 4037F2C009DA [3] [4] [3] 3. Other 6. Remove two hooks [3] and the lens cover [4]. wipe the Original Glass [1] clean of dirt. 2005 Original Glass 1. 4037F2C010DA [5] 4.4.4. Remove seven Screws [1] and CCD Unit protective cover [2]. Remove the Original Glass. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol. 4036fs2508c0 6. 4036fs2044c1 126 . ☞ 54 2. 1.

0 Mar.Field Service Ver. Other 6. mount the Original Size Detection Sensor FD2 (PC204) [1] and fix it. 2. Remove the Original glass. 1. 2005 6. Using the screw [2]. bizhub C450 Maintenance 4037F2C114DB [1] [2] 4037F2C113DB <How to set the Harness> PC203 PC204 127 .5 Mount the original size detecting sensor FD2 (PC204) 1.

and set the Original Glass to “Table2.0 Mar.” ☞ 225 5. Select “Service Mode” → “Machine” → “Org. Select Service Mode -> System 1 -> Original Size Detection.6. Check to make sure that the “Org. 2005 3. Other Field Service Ver. Size Detecting Sensor Adj. 4037F2E531DA 128 .” bizhub C450 4037F2E530DA Maintenance 4. 1. Size Detecting Sensor (Option): Set” is displayed on the Original Size Detection Sensor Adjustment screen.

1 Option counter Installation of The Counter/K 1. 4036fs2572c0 5. 2. [1] 4036fs2571c0 [2] Open the Front Door. Cut out the knockout [4] in the Front Right Cover [3]. Remove the Panel Cover. [6] [5] 4036fs2573c0 6.6. Other 6. [9] [7] [8] 4036fs2574c0 129 Maintenance bizhub C450 . Install the Mounting plate [7] on the Counter/K [9] with the Screw [8]. ☞ 3. Remove two screws [5] and the Right Front Cover [6]. 2005 6. 52 Remove the Screw [1]. and remove the Front Right Cover [2].0 Mar. [4] [3] 4.Field Service Ver.6 6. 1.

4036fs2576c0 Maintenance 6. [11] [10] 4036fs2575c0 bizhub C450 [12] [13] 8.0 Mar. Reinstall the Rear Cover. 2005 7. [5] 4036fs2586c0 130 . 2. Secure the counter cable [5] and cable holder [6] with one screw [7]. Mount the Connector [4]. Mount the Connector [12] of Counter/K on the Relay Connector [13] at main body side. Remove two Screws [1].6. Other Field Service Ver.6. Pass the Key Counter Harness [3] through the hole. Remove the Lower Rear Cover. [4] [3] 4037F2C532DA [7] [6] 5.2 Installation method for the Key Counter 1. 4. Secure the Counter/K [11] with the screw [10]. 6. ☞ 52 [2] [1] 4036fs2585c1 3. 1. and remove the Cover [2].

4036fs2589c0 [15] 11.” Press “Set”. Fix the harness [16] with the cable clamp [15] as shown in the left figure. Using four screws [9]. NOTE • Secure the Counter Mounting Bracket passing the connector into the bracket. Using two screws [14]. [11] [12] [10] 4036fs2588c0 [13] [14] 10. and set Color Mode and Message. 9. use the short screws (9646-0408-14: M4x8).Field Service Ver. secure the counter socket [11]. secure the Key Counter Cover [13]. 12. When installing the Key Counter to the other products. Connect the Key Counter Socket connector [10]. 8. see “Adjustment/Setting. ☞ For details on setting.” [16] 4036fs2626c0 131 Maintenance bizhub C450 . 2005 6.0 Mar. Using two screws [12]. 1. Select Service Mode → “Billing Setting” → “Management Function Choice” → “Key Counter. secure the Counter Mounting Bracket [8]. • Use the four long screws (96460418-14: M4x18) in the Key Counter Kit to secure the Counter Mounting Bracket. Other [8] [9] 4036fs2587c1 7.

Other Field Service Ver. 1. 2005 Maintenance bizhub C450 Blank Page 132 .0 Mar.6.

or related part is dirty. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. bizhub C450 Adjustment / Setting 133 . Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting. To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. Toner is not running out. direct sunlight. etc. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). high humidity. the following advance checks must be made. A. parts. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. B. 2. ventilation. Correct paper is being used for printing. etc. slit glass. 2005 7.0 Mar. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting 7. levelness of the installation site. 10. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. 3. 3.. 1.g.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 7. PC Drum. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 5. 4. 6. The power supply is properly grounded. The units. 4. and supplies used for printing (developer. 5.” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. 8.. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. The density is properly selected. Check to see if: 1. 6. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 2. The Original Glass. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.Field Service Ver. 9.

8. Press the Start key. but be sure to touch the center of each cross. 8. Press the Accessibility key.” 3. touch the four crosses (+) on the screen in sequence.1 Functions Use Adjustment Procedure 4037F3E512DA Adjustment / Setting 4. bizhub C450 Utility Mode Touch Panel Adj. 2005 8. • These crosses may be touched in any order. Touch “Touch Panel Adj. 1. • Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen. • To adjust the position of the Touch Panel display • Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action. Using the tip of a pen or similar object. 2. 1. 5.0 Mar. 134 . Utility Mode Field Service Ver. • Use during the setup procedure. Touching all four crosses will turn the Start key ON in green.

see 214 “Administrator Security Level. • For displaying the keys with *.Field Service Ver. see 294 “Administrator Feature Level.” • For displaying the keys with *** marks. 2005 8. Utility Mode 8.0 Mar. 1.” Utility/Counter One-Touch Registration Scan Address Book E-Mail FTP Group Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) SMB User Box Subject Text Address Book Group Fax Abbr. NOTE • Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting. Dial E-Mail Program User Box Subject/Text (for E-mail) User Box Public/Personal User Box Subject Text Bulletin Board User Box User Setting System Setting Language Selection Measurement Unit Setting Paper Tray Setting Auto Tray Select Setting Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF 135 .2 Utility Mode function tree bizhub C450 Adjustment / Setting * The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. ** marks.

0 Mar. 2005 No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Print Lists Reset Setting System Auto Reset Auto Reset When Account is changed When Original is set on ADF Low Power Mode Setting* When NEXT JOB is selected Staple Setting Original Set/ Bind Direction Print** Reset Data After Job bizhub C450 User Setting System Setting Paper Tray Setting Job Reset Auto Color Level Adjustment Power Save Setting* Sleep Mode Setting* Output Setting** Print/Fax Output Setting** Exit Tray Setting** Data & Time Setting** Daylight Savings Time Setting** AE Level Adjustment** Display Setting Sub Screen Display ON/ OFF Scan Basic Screen Default Seeing Adjustment / Setting Fax** Default Tab Program Default 136 .8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 1.

Display Copy Screen Copy Operating Screen TX Display RX Display Initial Setting Auto Paper Select for Small Original Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Zoom for Combine/ Booklet Sort/Group Auto Change Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)* Copier Setting 137 Adjustment / Setting Fax Active Screen bizhub C450 User Setting Display Setting Address Book Default Index . of Characters for Dest.Field Service Ver. 1. Utility Mode Address Type Symbol Display Fax Basic Screen Default Setting Default Tab Default Program Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display No. 2005 Scan Basic Screen Default Seeing 8.0 Mar.

1.0 Mar.8. 2005 bizhub C450 User Setting Copier Setting Print Jobs During Copy Operation** Scanner Setting JPEG Compression Level Black Compression Level TWAIN Lock Time Printer Setting Basic Setting PDL Setting Adjustment / Setting Number of Sets Original Direction Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch Paper Setting Paper Tray Default Paper Size 2-Sided Print Bind Direction Staple 138 . Utility Mode Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)* Specify Default Tray when APS Off* Select Tray for Insert Sheet* Field Service Ver.

1.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. Utility Mode Typeface Symbol Set Font Size Line/Page CR/LF Mapping PS Setting PS Error Print Configuration Page Demo Page PCL Font List PS Font List Administrator Setting System Setting Low Power Mode Setting Sleep Mode Setting Power Save Key Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) Output Setting Date/Time Setting Daylight Savings Time Setting Print/Fax Output Settings Exit Tray Setting Printer Print Reports Power Save Fax 139 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 User Setting Hole-Punch . 2005 Printer Setting Paper Setting PCL Setting 8.

8.0 Mar. Utility Mode Administrator Setting System Setting Weekly Timer Setting Field Service Ver. 2005 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting bizhub C450 Time Setting Date Setting Select Time for Power Save Password for Non-Business Hours Restrict User Access Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs Delete Saved Program Jobs Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Deleting Other User’s Jobs Adjustment / Setting Registering and Changing Addresses Expert Adjustment AE Level Adjustment Printer Adjustment Changing Zoom Ratio Leading Edge Adjustment Centering Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) Vertical Adjustment *** Erase Leading Edge *** Finisher Adjustment Center Staple Position 140 . 1.

1. Utility Mode Density Adjustment Printer (Gradation) Printer (Resolution) Scanner Adjustment *** Leading Edge Adjustment *** Centering *** Horizontal Adjustment *** 141 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 2005 Administrator Setting System Setting Expert Adjustment Finisher Adjustment Half-Fold Position Thick Paper Image Density–Yellow Thick Paper Image Density–Magenta Thick Paper Image Density–Cyan Image Stabilization Thin Paper Duplex Mode Color Registration Adjust Thick Paper Image Density–Black Black Image Density Color Registration Adjust (Yellow) Color Registration Adjust (Magenta) Color Registration Adjust (Cyan) Color Registration Adjust (Black) Gradation Adjustment Copy 8.Field Service Ver.0 Mar.

Utility Mode Administrator Setting System Setting Expert Adjustment Field Service Ver. Dial E-Mail 142 . of Stop Position*** List/Counter Management List Paper Size/ Type Counter Standard Size Setting*** Original Glass Original Size Detect*** Foolscap Size Setting*** Job Settings List Adjustment / Setting Administrator/Machine Setting Administrator Registration Input Machine Address One-Touch Registration Scan Address Book E-Mail FTP Group Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) SMB User Box Subject Text Fax Address Book Group Addr.8.0 Mar. 1. 2005 Scanner Adjustment *** ADF Adjustment *** Vertical Adjustment *** Centering*** bizhub C450 Original Stop Position*** Centering Auto Adjustment*** Auto Adj.

2005 8.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. 1. Utility Mode Subject/Text (for E-mail) Public/Personal User Box Bulletin Board User Box One-Touch Registration List Address Book List Subject User Box Text Group List Program List E-Mail Subject/Text List User Authentication/Account Track General Settings User Authentication Setting Administrative Setting User Registration User Counter Account Track Setting Print without Authentication Counter List Network Setting TCP/IP Setting NetWare Setting IPP Setting Account Track Registration Account Track Counter User Name List Default Function Permission 143 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 Administrator Setting One-Touch Registration Fax Program User Box .

Utility Mode Administrator Setting Network Setting Field Service Ver. 1. 2005 FTP Setting bizhub C450 SMB Setting AppleTalk Setting LDAP Setting Enabling LDAP Setting Up LDAP E-Mail Setting E-Mail TX (SMTP) E-Mail RX (POP) Detail Setting Device Setting Time Adjustment Setting Status Notification Setting PING Confirmation PSWC Setting SLP Setting LPD Setting SNMP Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting ON/OFF Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting Notification Address Setting Notification Item Setting Notification Time Setting Adjustment / Setting Copier Setting Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) 144 .0 Mar.8.

1. 2005 Select Tray when APS OFF Select Tray for Insert Sheet 8.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Utility Mode Print Jobs During Copy Operation Printer Setting Local I/F Timeout Parallel I/F IEEE 1284/ USB Fax Setting Header Information Header/Footer Position Header Position Footer Position Telephone Line Settings Dialing Method Receive Mode Number of RX Call Rings Number of Redials Redial interval Line Monitor Sound Line Monitor Sound Volume TX/RX Setting Duplex Print (RX) Print Paper Selection 145 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 Administrator Setting Copier Setting .

8. Entry Fax Setting bizhub C450 Tray Selection for RX Print Min. 1.0 Mar. 2005 Print Paper Size Incorrect User Box No. Utility Mode Administrator Setting TX/RX Setting Field Service Ver. Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages File After Polling TX Function Setting Function ON/ OFF Setting Memory RX F Code TX Closed Network RX Forward TX Setting Confidential RX Password Check Fax RX Setting PBX CN Set TSI User Box Setting Activity Report TX Report Sequential TX Report Timer Reservation TX Report Confidential RX Report Adjustment / Setting Report Settings 146 .

Utility Mode Paper Tray for Reports Job Settings List System Connection Security Setting IS OpenAPI Setting Administrator Password User Box Admin. Setting Administrator Security Level Security Details TX Result Report Check Access Setting Port No. SSL Authentication Password Rules Manual Destination Input Print Data Capture HDD Setting Check HDD Capacity Delete Unused User Box Delete Secure Documents Overwrite All Data HDD Lock Password Check Consumable Life Meter Count Details Print 147 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 Fax Setting . 1.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. 2005 Administrator Setting Report Settings Bulletin TX Report Broadcast Result Report 8.

1. Utility Mode Toner Coverage Copy Print Scan/Fax Other Field Service Ver. 2005 Meter Count Details Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 148 .0 Mar.8.

Utility Mode 8.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions 149 Adjustment / Setting • Use the +/. first press the Clear key before making an entry. • Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value.key to enter or change the setting value.3. 2005 8.3.) .Field Service Ver.3. 8. (To change the setting value.3 8.2 Exiting • Touch the “Close” key. 8. The Utility mode screen will appear.0 Mar. Press the Utility/Counter key. 1. 2.1 Utility Mode function setting procedure Procedure bizhub C450 4037F3E522DA 1.

• A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. change or delete the setting. (4) User Box Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Box address when storing the scanned data in the box in the hard disk in the main unit. change or delete the setting. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. (3) SMB Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change SMB address to send scanned data.1 A. C. 2005 8. • Select any displayed address to check. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. • At least one address must be registered for registering a new group. Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Scan Program. • Select any displayed address to check. B. Address Book (1) E-Mail Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change e-mail address to send scanned data. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. change or delete the setting. • Select any displayed group to check. • Select any program No. or delete the setting.4. change or delete the setting.8. • Select any displayed address to check. 150 . to register. change. check. (2) FTP Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change FTP address to send scanned data.0 Mar. Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change a group to send scanned data simultaneously. change or delete them. 1. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. • Select any displayed address to check.4 bizhub C450 One-Touch Registration Scan 8.

4. • Select any displayed address to check. change or delete the setting. • Select any displayed group to check. • Select any displayed address to check. change or delete the setting. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. • Select any displayed address to check. (2) E-Mail • To register/change the e-mail address when transmitting the Fax data. Use Setting/ Procedure (3) User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Box address when storing the Fax original in the box of the hard disk in the machine. change or delete the setting. 8. Dial Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Fax numbers. • Select any displayed address to check. Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change a group of addresses to send Fax data simultaneously. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. 8. • At least one address should be registered in order to register the group.Field Service Ver. 1. Subject/Text (for E-mail) (1) Subject Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the scanned data. change or delete the setting. 151 Adjustment / Setting Functions bizhub C450 .0 Mar.2 Fax A. change or delete the setting. Utility Mode (2) Text Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data. Address Book (1) Abbr. change or delete the setting. B. 2005 D. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. • A new group can be registered by touching “New” key. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. • A new address can be registered by touching “New” key. • Select any displayed address to check.

• A new message can be registered by touching “New” key. check. Subject/Text (for E-mail) (1) Subject Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the Fax original.3 User Box A. • A new box can be registered by touching “New” key. • Shared or personal box can be registered according to its intended use. (2) Text Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message when transmitting the Fax original.0 Mar. Public/Personal User Box Functions • To register/change the box for storing text data in the hard disk of the machine. D. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure B. • A new subject can be registered by touching “New” key. 2005 • Select any program No. • A new box can be registered by touching “New” key. Program bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Fax program. 1. change or delete the setting.8. Field Service Ver. Utility Mode C. 152 . 8. • Select any displayed message to check.4. change or delete the setting. to register. change or delete the setting. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. • Select any displayed subject to check. Bulletin Board User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Bulletin Board User Box. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it.

• The language options depend on the marketing area selected in “Marketing Area” available from “System 1” under Service Mode. (2) Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically switch to another Tray with same size paper when the Paper Take-up Tray runs out of paper during printing. Measurement Unit Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the unit displayed on the LCD display. Paper Tray Setting (1) Auto Tray Select Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Tray for automatic selection when APS is being set. “Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)” Switch Trays (Tray Priority) Setting/ Procedure 153 Adjustment / Setting . • To establish the priority for switching the Tray when ATS is being set. 2005 8. • To switch the Paper Take-up Tray automatically. • To establish the priority of the Tray when ATS is being set.5.1 User Setting System Setting bizhub C450 inch (Fraction) “Restrict” A.Field Service Ver. 1. • To specify the Tray to be used when APS is being set. • To change the unit displayed on the control panel. B. • The default setting is Restrict. • Select the Tray on the Auto Tray Select screen. • The default setting varies depending on the marketing area mm (Numerical Value) inch (Numerical Value) C. Switch Trays (Tray Priority): To switch to another Tray with the specified paper and print when the Tray is out of paper • The default setting is Stop Printing (Tray Fixed). Utility Mode 8. Allow (3) No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Functions Use • To set whether to switch to another Tray automatically when the specified Tray runs out of paper during printing.0 Mar.5 8. Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) : It stops printing when the specified Tray runs out of paper. • Set the priority on the Tray priority screen. Language Selection Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the language on the LCD display • To change the language on the control panel to another language.

” (1 to 9. Reset Setting (1) System Auto Reset Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the period of time until System Auto Reset stars functioning. OFF) Scan Fax (2) Auto Reset Functions • To set the period of time until Auto Reset starts functioning in “Copier”. • The default setting is “Tray 1. “Reset” Do Not Reset Use Setting/ Procedure <When Original is set on ADF> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to set the copy mode to the default setting when the original is set to ADF. • To change the period of time until System Auto Reset starts functioning. and the Fax. Utility Mode (4) Print Lists bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • The default setting is Do Not Reset. OFF) Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure (3) Job Reset <When Account is changed> Functions • To select whether to reset the copying mode functions to the default ones when the Key Counter is unplugged. • The default setting is Copy. and the “Fax. “Scanner”.” • To change the period of time until Auto Reset starts functioning.8. Reset “Do Not Reset” 154 . • The default setting is 1 min. a magnetic card is pulled out.” (1 to 9. User Authentication/Volume Track is set. 1.0 Mar. “1 min. Scanner. • To reset the copy mode to the default setting when the original is set to ADF. • To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed through the use of a data management device. “1 min. <Priority Mode> • To set the functions displayed during System Auto Reset from Copier. • The default setting is Reset. 2005 • To set the Paper Take-up Tray for output the list for the Meter count or the Unit check.” D. “Copy” <System Auto Reset Time> • The default setting is 1 min.

Black 1 Standard “3” Full Color 4 5 2 8.5.0 Mar. 2005 <When NEXT JOB is selected: Staple Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. Setting Value : An illustration of the selected key will be displayed Job List : The list of job which are being executed will be displayed • The default setting is Setting Value. 1. ON “OFF” E. • The default setting is OFF. Auto Color Level Adjustment Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black-andwhite original in the Auto Color mode • To change the criterion level for the partly colored image to be taken as a black-andwhite original • Five levels are available to choose from and the default setting is 3. • The default setting is OFF. • To change the Sub Screen Display. making the next job setting available. (The address will be cleared even when “OFF” is selected. “Setting Value” Job List Setting/ Procedure 155 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . ON “OFF” <When NEXT JOB is selected: Original Set / Bind Direction> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to cancel the Original Set/Bind direction when the job (which original set/bind direction is set) started and the next job setting has become available.Field Service Ver. Utility Mode • To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the Staple setting job started and the next job setting has become available. ON “OFF” <When NEXT JOB is selected: Reset Data After Job> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting Fax when the scanning is finished or Fax is transmitted.2 Display Setting A. Sub Screen Display ON/OFF Functions Use • To set the Sub Screen Display on the control panel.) • The default setting is OFF.

• The default setting is ON. “Program” Group Address Book Direct Input (2) Default Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default display for the program screen during Fax mode. • The default setting is PAGE 1. “Program” Group Address Book Direct Input (2) Program Default Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default display for the program screen during Scanner mode. • The default setting is Program.8. 1. • To change the Basic Screen display in Scanner mode. • To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during Fax mode.0 Mar. 2005 bizhub C450 • To set the Basic Screen display in Scanner mode. • To keep the default display instead of search string on the Address Book which frequently changes during Scanner mode. • To cancel displaying the Address Type Symbol on the address key. Fax Basic Screen Default Setting (1) Default Tab Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the basic screen display during Fax mode. Temporary One-Touch / “PAGE1” to PAGE27 156 . Utility Mode B. • The default setting is Main. • The default setting is Program. “Main” /ABC to WXYZ / etc (4) Address Type Symbol Display Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display the Address Type Symbol on each address key when selecting the address to transmit scanned data. • To change the basic screen display during Fax mode. Temporary One-Touch/ “PAGE1” to PAGE27 (3) Address Book Default Index Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default display for the Address Book screen during Scanner mode. “ON” OFF C. Scan Basic Screen Default Seeing (1) Default Tab Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during scanner mode • The default setting is PAGE 1.

2005 (3) Address Book Default Index Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8.” 24 char. • To keep the default display instead of abbreviations/address search string which frequently changes during Fax mode. Fax Active Screen (1) TX Display Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the screen display for the control panel when transmitting Fax. 1. “14 char. “ON” OFF (5) No. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF” Setting/ Procedure E.0 Mar. Display Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of characters for the address displayed on the address key when selecting the address to transmit Fax. • To display “Sending” on the screen when transmitting Fax. Functions Use • To set the display on the control panel screen during printing. • To display the screen to indicate printing when printing is being carried out. The copy reservation is available. ON : The screen shows that the printing is being carried out. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is 14 char. The job can be reserved with “Program Next Job” key. OFF: The screen does not indicate the printing being carried out. Utility Mode • To set the default display for abbreviation/address screen during Fax mode. Copy Screen (1) Copy Operating Screen bizhub C450 . • The default setting is Main. “Main” / ABC to WXYZ / etc (4) Address Type Symbol Display Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display the Address Type symbol on each address key when selecting the address to transmit Fax. of Characters for Dest. ON “OFF” 157 Adjustment / Setting D. • To display the whole address which consists of over fifteen characters. • To cancel displaying the Address Type symbol on each address key.Field Service Ver. The normal Copy setting screen will be displayed. • The default setting is ON.

Copy on A4/Letter : Copies on A4 or Letter size paper. the Scanner mode function. Adjustment / Setting 8. Copy on Small Size Copy on A4/Letter “Prohibit Copy” Setting/ Procedure 158 . • Panel is reset. • To copy the original such as business cards with which the Original detection is not effective. • To display “Receiving” on the screen when receiving the Fax. • In an Interrupt mode. * The machine is initialized at the following timings: • The main power switch is turned ON. scanner mode. Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the Initial mode setting to meet the user's need.8. and the Fax mode function. or no original is being set.4 Copier Setting A. <Current Setting> • To register the Copy mode. Copy on Small Size : Copies on A5 paper. • Carry out this setting after the necessary setting for each mode. <Factory Default> • Mode set prior to the shipping. or Fax mode set on the panel. Prohibit Copy : Does not copy since the original size cannot be detected. Auto Paper Select for Small Original Functions Use • To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small. • The default setting is Prohibit Copy. ON “OFF” 8. Paper Take-up Tray needs to be selected prior to pressing the Start key. • Application is changed.5. • The corresponding setting will be the one which has been set prior to the shipping by carrying out this setting from each mode screen. • The password entry screen for account Track is changed. • The default setting is OFF. Utility Mode (2) RX Display bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver.0 Mar. • Auto Clear.5.3 Functions Initial Setting • To register the default setting for the Copy mode function. 2005 • To set the screen display on the control panel when receiving Fax. 1.

• To cancel selecting the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is selected during Auto Paper Select. • To set the Tray for the initial setting when APS is cancelled. • The default setting is OFF.Field Service Ver. ON “OFF” Use Setting/ Procedure F. “ON” OFF Use Setting/ Procedure G. “Tray Before APS ON” Default Tray 159 Adjustment / Setting E. • The default setting is Auto Select Booklet. “Auto Display Zoom Ratio” OFF D. Auto Magnification Selection (Platen) bizhub C450 . Utility Mode • To set whether to set the Auto Booklet when Fold & Staple is selected. • To cancel setting the Auto Booklet when Fold & Staple is selected.0 Mar. Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. Sort/Group Auto Change Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically switch Sort/Group according to the number of originals and the copies. 2005 B. • The default setting is Auto Display Zoom Ratio. • To automatically set the Auto Magnification when Paper Take-up Tray is selected. • To automatically set the Auto magnification while the Paper Take-up Tray is selected. Auto Magnification Selection (ADF) Functions • To set whether to automatically set the Auto magnification when the original is detected to be set to ADF while Paper Take-up Tray is selected (except Auto Paper Select). Specify Default Tray when APS Off Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled. “Auto Select Booklet” OFF C. • The default setting is ON. • To cancel the function to automatically sort two originals or more when they are set to ADF. “ON” OFF Functions • To set whether to automatically set the magnification or not when the original is detected to be set on the original glass while the Paper Take-up Tray is selected (except Auto Paper Select). • The default setting is ON. Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is selected during Auto Paper Select. • The default setting is Tray Before APS ON. 1.

• The default setting is Tray 2. • The default setting is Accept. 120 sec. MH “MMR” C. • To change the compression rate when JPEG scanning.8. Black Compression Level Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the monochrome compression method for scanning in the monochrome mode while in Scanner mode. High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning. (30 to 300) 160 . 2005 bizhub C450 H.0 Mar. Print Jobs During Copy Operation • To set whether to accept the printing job for Print data or Fax data during copy operation. 1. High Quality “Standard” High Compression Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure B. • The default setting is 120 sec.5. • The default setting is Standard. “Accept” Receive Only Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. Select Tray for Insert Sheet Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the default setting of the Tray for Cover sheet paper.5 Scanner Setting A. • To be used when changing the monochrome mode while in Scanner mode. • To refuse Print data or Fax data during copy operation. Standard : Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning. Receive Only : Print data or Fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished. I. Accept : Receives the Print data or Fax data to print. TWAIN Lock Time Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the period of time for unlocking the operation panel while in TWAIN scanning. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. High Compression: Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering the data volume while scanning. JPEG Compression Level Functions Use • To set the JPEG Compression method when scanning with JPEG while in Scanner mode. • The default setting is MMR.

NOTE • When switching the size. 2005 8. Utility Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the PDL (Page Description Laguage) for PC printing.6 Printer Setting 8.0 Mar. • The default setting is Portrait. ON “OFF” 161 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 A. “Portrait” Landscape (4) Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to store the print data to HDD when receiving the next job during Rip process of the current job. “Auto” PCL PS (2) Number of Sets Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. It usually switches automatically. and A3 size document to Ledger size. and Ledger size document to A3 size. • The default setting is OFF. 1. ON “OFF” (5) A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch Functions Use • To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter size paper. • The default setting is 1. and A3 and Ledger size paper in reading. • The default setting is Auto. • To output Letter size document to A4 size. • The image will not be reduced when there is image deficiency. • To fix the PDL as necessary.5.Field Service Ver. Basic Setting (1) PDL Setting . etc. “1” (1 to 999) (3) Original Direction Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printing. • To use when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF. the image will be printed in the same magnification. • To output A4 size document to Letter size.

(2) Default Paper Size Functions Use • To set the paper size when not specified by the printer diver during printing. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is Left Bind. ON “OFF” (4) Bind Direction Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. etc. • To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by Windows DOS. • To use when the paper size cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS. • To use hen staple is not specified by the printer driver during printing by the Windows DOS. • To use when 2-sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing by Windows DOS. • The default setting is Auto. Paper Setting (1) Paper Tray Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • To use when Paper Take-up Tray cannot be specified by the printer driver when printing from Windows DOS. 2005 bizhub C450 • To set the Paper Take-up Tray when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.0 Mar. 1 Position 2 Positions “OFF” 162 . etc. • The default setting is OFF. Utility Mode B. 1. Top Bind “Left Bind” Right Bind (5) Staple Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to staple or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. etc. etc. etc. (3) 2-Sided Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the printer driver.8.

00 points Bitmap Font : 10. (2) Symbol Set Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Font Symbol Set when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • The default setting is 60 or 64 lines. • The default setting is Scalable Font : 12. • To change the number of lines per page for printing the text data. • The default setting is Roman-8 or PC8. PCL Setting (1) Typeface Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS. etc. 2005 (6) Hole-Punch Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. ON “OFF” C. etc. etc.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. • To use when the Font Symbol Set cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS. etc. Code Page 437. Utility Mode • To select whether to make punch-holes or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. “60 or 64 lines” (5 to 128) 163 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . (3) Font Size Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. 1. • The default setting is OFF. • To use when the printer driver cannot specify punching during printing from Windows DOS. • The default setting is Courier. • To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS.00 points (4) Line/Page Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data.

8. • To print the information concerning the PostScript error. 2005 • To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data.0 Mar. The types of report available for output are as follows. Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 “OFF” Setting/ Procedure D. Touch “User Setting” → “Printer Setting” → “Print Reports” key. 164 . • To check the setting concerning the printer. : PS Font List will be output. ON “OFF” E. Adjustment / Setting 1. : The test page will be output. • To change the mode for replacing data when printing the text data. 1. Utility Mode (5) CR/LF Mapping bizhub C450 Functions Use Field Service Ver. Configuration Page Demo Page PCL Font List PS Font List Setting/ Procedure : The list of printer setting will be output. 2. 3. Select the report to be output. : PCL Font List will be output. Print Reports Functions Use • To output the report or Demo Page concerning the print setting. Mode 1 : Replacing CR with CR-LF Mode 2 : Replacing LF with CR-LF Mode 3 : Replacing with CR-LF OFF : Does not replace • The default setting is OFF. Select the Paper Take-up Tray and press the Start key. PS Setting (1) PS Error Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print or not the error information when an error occurred during PS rasterizing. • The default setting is OFF.

6 Administrator Setting bizhub C450 Adjustment / Setting • The Administrator setting will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the administrator setting.Field Service Ver. “30 min. and lower the power consumption. 1.” (15 to 240) / OFF Use Setting/ Procedure (3) Power Save Key Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the type of the Power Save Mode which starts by pressing the Power Save Key. • To change the time until the Sleep Mode starts. • Use the 10-Key Pad for setting.1 System Setting A. “15 min. • The default setting is 30 min. • To immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of receiving the Fax during Power Save Mode. Utility Mode 8.” (10 to 240) Use Setting/ Procedure (2) Sleep Mode Setting Functions • To set the time until Sleep Mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • The default setting is 15 min. • Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for Control. • The default setting is Normal. Normal : Switches to the Power Save Mode according to the normal Power Save Mode after the printing. 2005 8. (The administrator password is initially set to “12345678. “Normal” Immediately Setting/ Procedure 165 .”) 8.6. “Low Power” Sleep (4) Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) Functions Use • To set whether to immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of receiving the Fax during Power Save Mode.0 Mar. • To change the Power Save function which starts by pressing the Power Save key. • Low Power: To turn LED and LCD OFF. Power Save (1) Low Power Mode Setting Functions • To set the time until Low Power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • The default setting is Low Power. • “OFF” will only be displayed when “No Sleep” in Service Mode is set. • Use the 10-Key Pad for setting. Immediately : Switches to the Power Save Mode immediately after the printing. • To change the time until Low Power starts.

ON “OFF” 166 . Date/Time Setting Functions • To set the date/time and the time zone to start the clock. Printer. set the time difference to move up. • To set the daylight saving time. • Setting range for the time zone: -12:00 to +12:00 (by 30 minutes) Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure D. “60 min. 2005 bizhub C450 • To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or Fax received. Daylight Saving Time Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to set the daylight saving time. • To set the Weekly Timer. Output Setting (1) Print/Fax Output Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • For time zone. Weekly Timer Setting (1) Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use or not to use the Weekly Timer. ON “OFF” • When setting to ON.” (1 to 150) E. Copy :2 Print :2 Fax :3 Reports : 3 C. * This setting is available only when FS-507 is mounted. • The default settings are as follows. <Fax> • The default setting is Batch Print. • The default setting is OFF.8. • The default setting is OFF. set the time difference with the world standard time. • To change settings concerning the date/time. (2) Exit Tray Setting Functions • To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print. 1. • This setting should be carried out for set up. • To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time. Fax and Print Reports). Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the output tray according to the application. Batch Print : Starts printing when all data are received Page Print : Starts printing every time data for each page are received <Printer> • The default setting is Page Print.0 Mar. Utility Mode B.

0 Mar. enter the password (eight digits). For canceling the setting. input the time to turn OFF and to turn back ON again. 2. • To turn power OFF for a certain period of time when the Weekly Timer is set. Check to make sure that the set key of the day is highlighted. ON “OFF” (5) Password for Non-Business Hours Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to input the password before using when the Weekly Timer is set. ON “OFF” • When setting to ON. • The default setting is OFF. For setting by the day of the week. 2. 1. 167 Adjustment / Setting <Set Time for Power Save> • Using the 10-Key Pad. (3) Date Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the date or the day of the week for the Weekly Timer to function. Utility Mode • To set the time to turn ON/OFF the Weekly Timer for each day of the week. F. (4) Select Time for Power Save Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time to turn power OFF/ON when the Weekly Timer is set and the power is ON. Restrict User Access (1) Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the prohibition for modifying the registered Copy program. Touch the key for the appropriate Copy program. press Clear key. Select the Year/Month with +/. • The default setting is OFF. and touch “OK” key. 2. touch the appropriate key of the week by “Daily Setting.” 4. Using the 10-Key Pad. touch the appropriate key of the day. input the ON time and the OFF time. bizhub C450 .Field Service Ver. • To set the password for turning the power ON temporarily when the Weekly Timer is set. 2005 (2) Time Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. Touch “OK” key. 1. 1. • To be used when prohibiting the user from changing the Copy program. 3. 1. Touch the key of the day to be set. For setting by the date.keys. 3.

3. • To prohibit the change on registered magnification. 2. “Allow” Restrict <Deleting Other User’s Jobs> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict Job delete by other users when the user is authenticated. • The default setting is Allow. • The default setting is Allow. (3) Restrict Access to Job Settings <Changing Job Priority> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the print priority for the Job.0 Mar. “Allow” Restrict <Changing Zoom Ratio> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification. Touch “Delete” key. 2005 1. • To Restrict the change on the print priority for the Job. 1.8. Touch the appropriate Program Job. Touch “Yes” key on the Check screen to delete the Program Job. • To delete the registered Program Job. “2” (0 to 4) 168 . Allow “Restrict” <Registering and Changing Addresses> Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address. Expert Adjustment (1) AE Level Adjustment Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) The larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be. • The default setting is Restrict. “Allow” Restrict G. Field Service Ver. To make the background level foggier: Increase the setting value To make the background level less foggy: Decrease the setting value • The default setting is 2. • To prohibit the change on the registered address. • The default setting is Allow. • To allow other users to delete the Job when the user is authenticated. Utility Mode (2) Delete Saved Program Jobs bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the registered Program Job.

7. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Printer Adjustment” → “Leading Edge Adjustment. If width A falls outside the specified range. OHP.0 to 7. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. and envelope. Adjustment Procedure 169 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 1. Width A Specifications: 4. • • • • The LPH Unit has been replaced. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 9.If width A falls within the specified range.0 mm Setting Range: -3.” 4. adjust for Thick 1 to 3. 8. 2.Field Service Ver.2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification 4036fs3009c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. touch “OK. 1. 6. change the setting again and make a check again. 2005 (2) Printer Adjustment <Leading Edge Adjustment> Functions Use 8.” 11. change the setting using the +/.0 mm to +3. If width A is outside the specified range. 5. Select the “Normal. A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. make the setting value greater than the current one. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 10. make the setting value smaller than the current one. The paper type has been changed.” 3. Utility Mode • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in Tray 1. If width A is shorter than the specifications. The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction.0 mm (in 0.key. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.0 Mar.Following the same procedure.

5 mm Setting Range: -3. • A paper feed unit has been added. If width A is outside the specified range. change the setting using the +/. 7. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.If width A falls within the specified range.Following the same procedure. Utility Mode <Centering> bizhub C450 Functions Use Field Service Ver. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.0 ± 0.) Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting 170 .2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification 4036fs3010c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. 8. • The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction. Select the paper source to be adjusted. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. If width A is shorter than the specifications. adjust for all other paper sources.8. 1. touch “END.” 11. 4. 2005 • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. 5. 6. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Printer Adjustment” → “Centeringt. make the setting value smaller than the current one.0 mm (in 0.0 mm to +3. • The LPH Unit has been replaced. 9. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range.key. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. make the setting value greater than the current one. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the Bypass. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern.” 3.0 Mar. 2. 1. 10. Specifications: 3. change the setting again and make a check again.

Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. 8. 2.0 mm to +3. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy. touch “END.If width A falls within the specified range.) Adjustment Procedure 171 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 1. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.” 3. change the setting using the +/. 4. change the setting again and make a check again. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray.Field Service Ver. 9.2 mm increments) 4036fs3010c0 Adjustment Instructions • If width A is longer than the specifications.” 11. Backside Specifications: 3.0 ± 0. adjust for all other paper sources. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern.Following the same procedure. 1.key. make the setting value greater than the current one. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 6. Utility Mode • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. 10. make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A falls outside the specified range.5 mm Setting Range: -3. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Printer Adjustment” → “Centering (Duplex 2nd Side). • If width A is shorter than the specifications.0 mm (in 0. •For measurement.0 Mar. 7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Select the paper source to be adjusted. 5. If width A is outside the specified range. 2005 <Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)> Functions Use Adjustment Specification 8.

If width A or B falls within the specified range. Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges.” “CD Width:6. make the setting value greater than the current one. If width A or B is shorter than the specifications.” “FD Width:6.1 to 392. Call the Service Mode to the screen.” “SINGLE.” 9. B: -10 to +10 Adjustment Specification A 4036fs3017c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A or B is longer than the specifications. 7. Width A: equivalent to one grid Width B: equivalent to 48 grids B Specifications A: 7. Utility Mode <Vertical Adjustment> bizhub C450 Functions Use Field Service Ver. • When the image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction. change the setting value and make a check again. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.” 5. 3. 6. adjust for “Thick 1 to 3.9 to 8. If width of A or B falls outside the specified range.” and “Envelope.” “OHP. “4 mm” 5 mm 7 mm 172 . make the setting value smaller than the current one.1 Setting Range A. • The image on the copy distorts (stretched.” “Density:255. Load Tray 1 with A3 or 11 × 17 plain paper.Following the same procedure. 13. 1. 4.If width A or B falls outside the specified range. • The default setting is “4 mm”. change the setting using the Up/ Down keys.Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern. 1. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.” and “Normal.8.” 14. 2. 12.Check width A and width B on the test pattern. 8. • To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper.” Select “Black. 11. • The l adjustment becomes necessary. 2005 • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. touch “OK. 10. shrunk).”) Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting <Erase Leading Edge> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.0 Mar. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Printer Adjustment” → “Vertical Adjustment.3 B: 389. Touch these keys in this order: “Test Mode” → “Lattice Pattern.” “FEET.” (Check width A only for “OHP” and “Envelope.

Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. (4) Density Adjustment <Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow. (5 steps) Dark color: Touch the Lighter key. 2005 (3) Finisher Adjustment <Center Staple Position> Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To adjust the positions of center staple for the Finisher.0 Mar. Black> Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transparencies.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). “Std”. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density. (5 steps) bizhub C450 . Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density. • Use when the center folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Fold function. 1. 173 Adjustment / Setting Light color: Touch the Darker key. Utility Mode • Use when the center staple positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Staple function.” 6. Magenta. • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies • The fine-adjustment can be made over a range of a total of five steps. two darker levels and two lighter levels around the standard central level. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Density Adjustment” → “Black Image Density. If the black is dark. Darker (2 steps) If the black is light.Field Service Ver. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Density Adjustment” → “Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black. touch the Darker key. Cyan.0 mm to +7. 8. • Center staple position: The adjustment range is -7. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 2. touch the Lighter key. 5.” 3. 4. <Black Image Density> Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy • To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy Lighter (2 steps). • Fold position: The adjustment range is -7.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). <Half-Fold Position> Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To adjust the positions of folding for the Finisher.0 mm to +7. 1.

1. 1. • Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Image Stabilization has been executed. Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting (6) Thin Paper Duplex Mode Functions • Turn this function ON when thin paper (64 g/m2) is used in an ambience of high temperature and high humidity in the 2-sided mode. • Use when a paper misfeed occurs when thin paper is used. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. 2. Adjustment Procedure <Initialize+Image Stabilization> Functions Use • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized. • The default setting is OFF. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer.0 Mar. 4. • When D Max Density and Background Voltage Margin of Service mode are changed. 1. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. 2. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed.” 3. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. ON “OFF” Use Setting/ Procedure 174 .” 3. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Image Stabilization” → “Image Stabilization Only.8. Utility Mode (5) Image Stabilization <Image Stabilization Only> Functions Use Field Service Ver. • It decreases the transfer output value so as to prevent a paper misfeed from occurring. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 4. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Image Stabilization” → “Initialize+Image Stabilization. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green. 2005 bizhub C450 • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control.

Press the Start key. Direction of D Direction of C 4036fs3007c0 4036fs3008c0 175 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . Utility Mode • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Color Registration Adjust. 6. 1. On the test pattern produced. 1.Field Service Ver. 7. increase the setting. Select the color to be adjusted. 5. decrease the setting. Y 4036fs3004c0 Adjustment for X direction: Check point X Direction of C If the cross deviates in the direction of C.key. be sure to perform Color Registration Adjust (Black). Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 3. decrease the setting. 9.0 Mar. decrease the setting. Magenta. 4. 2005 (7) Color Registration Adjust <Color Registration Adjust (Yellow. • To correct any color shift “0” (-6 to +6 dot) If the cross deviates in the direction of C. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Check Procedure Check point X. change the setting value as necessary.) Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation. Select the paper type. Cyan)> Functions 8. increase the setting. check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y. 8. • Before making this adjustment. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. increase the setting. only the line of the selected color moves. Direction of D 4036fs3005c0 4036fs3006c0 Adjustment for Y direction: Check point Y If the cross deviates in the direction of C. 2. (At this time. Using the +/.” Load Tray 1 with A3/11x17 or A4/8 1/2x11 paper (Normal or Thick 1 to 3).

Change the setting value using the +/. 1. 7. 6. 8. magenta. and yellow) after this adjustment has been made. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D. Check Procedure Check point A. Load Tray 1 with A3 or A4 paper (plain or thick). 5. Utility Mode <Color Registration Adjust (Black)> bizhub C450 Functions Field Service Ver.key as necessary. Fold the printed test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation (the image on the inside). 2. 9. B Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting A B 4036fs3001c0 If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C. “0” (-10 to +10 dot) If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C. Check deviation between black lines A and B. if it occurs with plain or thick paper. increase the setting value. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 10. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Color Registration Adjust” → “Color Registration Adjust (Black). decrease the setting value. decrease the setting value.8. Direction of C Direction of D A A B B 4036fs3002c0 4036fs3003c0 176 . 1. 4. if it occurs • The LPH Assy (K) has been replaced. • Make Color Registration Adjust (cyan. Select black. • To correct black color shift.0 Mar. Press the Start key.” 3. 2005 • To correct black color shift.Produce another test pattern and check for deviation. Select the paper type. increase the setting value.

Max: 0 ± 100 and Highlight: 0 ± 60: It completes the adjustment procedure. Utility Mode • To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner • Color reproduction performance becomes poor.) Touch “OK” and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice (a total of three times). 177 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 2. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Gradation Adjustment. ✽ The closer the Conv. Value to 0. • Printer (Gradation) • Printer (Resolution) • Copy : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image as it adjusts. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. In this case.Field Service Ver. 3. • The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced. 9. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern. 7. Value. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass. perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems. check the image. 6. Press the Start key. 4. Touch “Gradation Adjust” to display the Adj. • If the image is faulty. Values of each color (C. If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps from 2 to 6. ✽ The Adj. Values of Max. : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts. 5. Conv. Values and Conv.Use the following procedures to check the Conv. • If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max Density. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.” Select the appropriate mode for the Gradation Adjustment.0 Mar. : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters and lines as it adjusts. the more ideal the image. 1. “0” is displayed for all values. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover. • If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the specified range. • If a fault is detected. M. 10. Value shows the difference from the ideal image density. and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen represent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. 8. Y and K) for Max and Highlight. turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch and perform Gradation Adjust once again. Adjustment Specification Adjustment Procedure Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight: 0 ± 60 1. 2005 (8) Gradation Adjustment Functions Use 8. • The IU has been replaced.

Press the Start key to make a copy. 7. increase the setting value. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. •Adjust so that width B on the sample copy made falls within the specified range. 2. If the image falls outside the specified range. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Leading Edge Adjustment” of the Printer Adjustment. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. 8.5 mm (10 ± 0. Use Adjustment Specification Adjustment / Setting B 4036fs3020c0 178 . Check point B on the image of the copy. 9. 2005 bizhub C450 (9) Scanner Adjustment • Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section. • • • • A: Centering B: Leading Edge Adjustment C: Horizontal Adjustment D: Vertical Adjustment C B A Original Reference D 4036fs3018c0 <Leading Edge Adjustment> Functions • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sensor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Scanner Adjustment” → “Leading Edge Adjustment.8. a scale may be used instead. When the Original Width Scale is replaced.0 (in 0. 1. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 1.” 3. Specifications B: 7 ± 0. 5. 4. • If the Color Chart is not available.0 to +5. change the setting using the +/.key.0 Mar. When the Original Glass is replaced. decrease the setting value. Utility Mode Field Service Ver.5 mm if a scale is used) Setting Range -5. 6.5 mm. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. Press the Start key to make another copy.5 mm.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If width B on the copy is less than 6. If width B on the copy is more than 7.

1 mm increments) Adjustment Specification A 4036fs3019c0 Adjustment Instructions If the 0-mm position on the sample copy is on the right side of the correct 0-mm position perpendicularly to the feeding direction (less than -1 mm). increase the setting.0 Mar.Field Service Ver.” 3. Utility Mode • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Leading Edge Adjustment” of the Printer Adjustment. Check point A on the image of the copy. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. change the setting using the +/. If the image falls outside the specified range. 2005 <Centering> Functions Use 8. Press the Start key to make a copy. 7. If the 0-mm position on the sample copy is on the left side of the correct 0-mm position perpendicularly to the feeding direction (exceeding 1 mm). • When the CCD Unit is replaced. 1. 5.key. Specifications A: 10 ± 1. 2. Adjustment Procedure 179 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . decrease the setting. • When the Original Glass is replaced. 1. • The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Scanner Adjustment” → “Centering. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.0 mm Setting Range -10.0 (in 0. Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 8. •Adjust so that width A on the sample copy made falls within the specified range.0 to +10. 6. 4. 9. Press the Start key to make a copy.

If the image falls outside the specified range.0 mm Setting Range 0. decrease the setting. Check the C width on the image of the copy. If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart. Specifications C: ± 1.key. Press the Start key to make another copy. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. 5. 2. 1. Adjustment / Setting 180 . change the setting using the +/. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Vertical Adjustment” of the Printer Adjustment.0 Mar. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 6. 1. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4.8. 9. increase the setting.010 (in 0.” 3. 2005 • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section • The CCD Unit has been replaced. Press the Start key to make a copy.990 to 1. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Scanner Adjustment” → “Horizontal Adjustment. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. 7.001 increments) C 4036fs3021c0 Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. •Measure C width on the color chart and on the sample copy. Utility Mode <Horizontal Adjustment> bizhub C450 Functions Use Adjustment Specification Field Service Ver. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 8.

<Original Stop Position> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in each of the ADF modes. 5. increase the setting. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. 4036fs3022c0 Adjustment Specification D Specifications D: ± 1. decrease the setting. Check the D width on the image of the copy.” 3.010 (in 0. (10) ADF Adjustment <Centering> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To make a manual adjustment of the document centering position in each of the ADF modes. Utility Mode • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section • The Scanner Assy has been replaced.001 increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. If the image falls outside the specified range. • When “Auto Adjust Stop Position” is NG. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Vertical Adjustment” of the Printer Adjustment. 4. 181 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . ☞ See Automatic Document Feeder Service Manual. ☞ See Automatic Document Feeder Service Manual.key. 2005 <Vertical Adjustment> Functions Use 8. 1. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. 2. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. of Stop Position” is NG. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met.0 Mar. 6. •Measure D width on the color chart and on the sample copy. Press the Start key to make a copy.990 to 1. 1. • The Scanner Motor has been replaced. • When “Auto Adj. 9. Touch “System Setting” → “Expert Adjustment” → “Scanner Adjustment” → “Vertical Adjustment. 7. Press the Start key to make another copy. change the setting using the +/. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart. 8. • The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced.Field Service Ver.5 mm Setting Range 0.

3. of Stop Position: Front> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the document stop position for the first side. Standard Size Setting (1) Original Glass Original Size Detect Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the document size detection table. 2005 ☞ See Automatic Document Feeder Service Manual. Select the Paper Take-up tray and press the Start key. and to set the count. List/Counter (1) Management List Functions Use • To output the value set by the setting menu. Touch “Job Settings List” key. of Stop Position: Back> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the document stop position for the second side. • Use to change the setting for the document size detection table. I. H. 1. 1. • Upon setup of the ADF ☞ See Automatic Document Feeder Service Manual. <Auto Adj. • Upon setup of the ADF ☞ See Automatic Document Feeder Service Manual. • Check for skew. Select the paper type.” “Table1” Table2 182 .0 Mar. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure (2) Paper Size/Type Count Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the combination of the specific paper size and the paper type. Utility Mode <Centering Auto Adjustment> bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the start position for image scanning • Upon setup of the ADF Field Service Ver. Touch the paper size key to select the paper size. 2. • The default setting is “Table1. 2. Press a key out of 1 to 10 registration keys. <Auto Adj.8. 1.

• Select any displayed address to check. Touch “Name” key. • Select the size from among the following four.2 Administrator/Machine Setting A. Input Machine Address Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the name of the Machine and E-mail address. 1. Using the 10-Key Pad. It can also be used as one of the From addresses for the scanner job. 8. 183 bizhub C450 . • The registered address will be used to receive e-mail in the box in the machine. <FTP> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP. 2. Touch “E-mail” key. Scan (1) Address Book <E-Mail> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the e-mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. B. and input the address. • Touch “New” key to register the new address. change. 220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 8. 2. • Upon setup. Administrator Registration Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the information on Administrator and the From address for e-mail transmission. • Touch “New” key to register the new address.6. • To change the size for Foolscap paper.Field Service Ver.6. • Touch “New” key to register the new address.3 One-Touch Registration Adjustment / Setting A.0 Mar. or delete the setting. or delete the setting. 1. change. <SMB> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the SMB address for transmitting the scanned data by SMB. 1. • Select any displayed address to check. Utility Mode 8 x 13 8. Touch “Machine Name” key and input the name. enter the Extension No. or delete the setting. 2005 (2) Foolscap Size Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the size for Foolscap paper. change. • Select any displayed address to check. “E-Mail Address” key to input them.

• Touch “New” key to register the new address. • Select any program No. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure <Text> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. change.0 Mar. Dial> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Fax number for transmitting the Fax. change. B. or delete the setting. and to check. • elect any displayed group to check. (3) Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Scan Program. change. change or delete the setting. or delete the setting. change. 2005 • To register or change the Box address for storing the scanned data to the Box in the hard disk of the Machine. or delete the setting. or delete the setting. • At least one address must be registered in order to register the group. • Select any displayed address to check.8. • Touch “New” key to register the new group. • Select any displayed subject to check. • Touch “New” key to register the new address. • Touch “New” key to register the new message. or delete the setting. (4) Subject/Text (for E-mail) <Subject> Functions • To register the e-mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. • Select any displayed message to check. change. Utility Mode <User Box> bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. 184 . (1) Address Book <Addr. • Select any displayed address to check. Fax • Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. 1. to register. • Touch “New” key to register the new subject. (2) Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit data simultaneously.

• Touch “New” key to register the new address. 1. • Select any displayed subject to check. • Select any displayed group to check. • Select any displayed message to check. (2) Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit the Fax data simultaneously. • Select any displayed address to check. (4) Subject/Text (for E-mail) <Subject> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail Subject for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail. <Text> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail. change. • Touch “New” key to register the new address. change. • At least one address of the group must be registered in order to register the group. to register. change.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. • Touch “New” key to register the new message. (3) Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Fax Program. or delete the setting. or delete the setting. • Touch “New” key to register the new subject. or delete the setting. • Select any displayed address to check. • Select any Program No. Utility Mode • To register or change the e-mail address for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail. • Touch “New” key to register the new address. 185 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . change. <User Box> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Box address in the hard disk of the machine when storing the Fax data in the Box. 2005 <E-Mail> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. and to check. or delete the setting. or delete the setting. or delete the setting. change. change.

Select the Destination Type to be output. • To print out the list of the Program addresses which are registered. 3. 2. Press the Start key to output the list of the addresses of the group. 2005 bizhub C450 • To register or change the Box for storing the text data in the hard disk of the machine. Press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.0 Mar. 1. Specify the Registration No. 2. 186 . range to be output. • To print out the E-mail Subject/Text List which are registered. • To print the list of abbreviated addresses which are registered. 3. and select the Paper Take-up Tray. D. 1. 1. Select the Destination Type to be output. 1. 2. Utility Mode C. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. Touch “Print” key. Press the Start key to output the Subject/Text List. Specify the Registration No. range to be output. • Touch “New” key to register the new box. (2) Group List Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the Group List. and select the Paper Take-up Tray. Touch “Print” key. • Touch “New” key to register the new box. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. and output the list of Program. Press the Start key. range to be output. Specify the Registration No. (4) E-Mail Subject/Text List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the Subject or the Text list. • To register the shared or personal box for any purpose. Select the Paper Take-up Tray. (2) Bulletin Board User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Bulletin Board User Box. (3) Program List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the Program List. Touch “Print” key. One-Touch Registration List (1) Address Book List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the Address Book List. 4. User Box (1) Public/Personal User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver.8. and select the Paper Take-up Tray. • To print out the list of addresses of the group which are registered. 2. 3. 4. 1.

• To stop the machine when the number of printed pages reach the upper limit set by the User authentication and the Account Track. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is Account Name & Password. “OFF” ON (External Server) ON (MFP) (2) Public User Access Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when User authentication has been set. when reaching to the upper limit for the number of printed pages set by the User Authentication and the Account Track. • The default setting is Restrict. • The default setting is Skip Job. • To select whether to authenticate the user by the External Server or MFP. “OFF” ON (4) Account Track Input Method Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Authentication method for the Account Track. 2005 8. “Restrict” Allow NOTE • This setting is not available without User Authentication. General Settings (1) User Authentication . • To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name & password. “Account Name & Password” Password Only NOTE • This setting is not available without the Account Track. 1. (5) When # of Jobs Reach Maximum Functions • To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job. or to stop the machine. Utility Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the User Authentication method.4 User Authentication/Account Track 8. • The default setting is OFF.6.Field Service Ver. (3) Account Track Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable the Account Track function or not. • To enable the Account Track function. “Skip Job” Stop Job Use Setting/ Procedure NOTE • This setting is available only with User authentication and the Account Track.0 Mar. 187 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 A.

“Synchronize” Do not synchronize NOTE • The setting is available only when carrying out the User Authentication and Account Track. 2005 (6) Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to synchronize the User Authentication and Account Track. • To be used when not to synchronize the User Authentication and Account Track. User Password. B. Input the User Name. User Authentication Setting (1) Administrative Setting <User Name List> Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display or not the list key for User names on User Authentication screen. Select the user (001 to 1000). “Allow” Restrict” Setting/ Procedure (2) User Registration Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the user. and Function Permission. and User Box operation • The default settings are Allow. • Items available for setting: Copy operation. 1. • To register or change the user for authentication. 188 . (7) # of Counters Assigned for Users Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number available to be assigned for the User registration and Account registration. and E-Mail address. ON “OFF” <Default Function Permission> Functions Use • To set the default value for the Function Permission in User Authentication by the External Server. • The default setting is 500. • The total number to be registered for the User Authentication and Account Track is 1000. • The default setting is Synchronize. • To display the list key for User names on User Authentication screen • The default setting is OFF. Scan operation. • To change the number available to be assigned for the User registration and Account registration. Utility Mode Field Service Ver.0 Mar.8. and touch “OK” key. the number available for Account Track will be 950. 3. Fax operation. The number for the User registration will be set. Max Allowance Set. • When setting the “# of Counters Assigned for Users” to 50. and printing. 2. 1. • To set the function which authenticated user can use when initially authenticating the user by the External Server. Set the Output Permission.

printer. and Fax for each account. and Fax for each user. Touch “Counter List” key. • To disable TCP/IP setting.5 Network Setting A. Select the account. Counter List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To print out the User counter and the account counter. scanner. 1. Account Track Setting (1) Account Track Registration Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register and change the Account. and Max. Print without Authentication Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the print which user and account are not specified. scanner. (001 to 500). scanner. Select the Paper Take-up Tray.0 Mar. and touch “OK” key. • The default setting is ON. 3. touch “Clear Counter” key. 3. 1. 189 bizhub C450 . Allowance Set. 1.Field Service Ver. “ON” OFF NOTE • When the setting is changed. C. 2. • To register and change the account for Account Track. For clearing the counter. 3. 1. (2) Account Track Counter Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the status of use of the copier. TCP/IP Setting (1) TCP/IP Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP setting. Allow “Restrict” E. and Fax for each account. • The default setting is Restrict.6. 2. 1. Select the user. Select the key to check to see the status of use. Input the Account Name and the Password. Utility Mode • To display the status of use of the copier. printer. touch “Clear Counter” key. Select the proper Account. Select the key for the item to be checked. D. printer. Press the Start key. and Fax for each user. • To output the user counter and account counter to be checked. 2005 (3) User Counter Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. 2. • To check the status of use of the copier. 3. printer. scanner. turn main power switch OFF and ON again. • To allow or restrict printing which user and account are not specified. • To check the status of use of the copier. Set the Output Permission. For clearing the counter. 2. 8.

[0 to 255] (7) Substitute 1/2 DNS Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Substitute DNS Server. • To enter the subnet mask of the machine. • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . • The default setting is ON. [0 to 255] 190 . Utility Mode (2) IP Address bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] (5) DHCP Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set DHCP for the network. • To enter the Substitute DNS Server.8. [0 to 255] .0 Mar. • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . • To enter Priority DNS Server. • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . • To use DHCP. [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . • To enter the IP address of the machine. 1. [0 to 255] . “ON” OFF Adjustment / Setting (6) Priority DNS Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Priority DNS Server. • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . • To enter the gateway address of the machine. [0 to 255] (3) Subnet Mask Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the subnet mask of the device used in the network. [0 to 255] (4) Default Gateway Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the gateway address of the device used in the network. [0 to 255] . 2005 • To set the IP address of the device used in the network. [0 to 255] .

0 Mar. • To use NetWare setting. press the Clear key to clear the value. Touch “OK” key. Touch “Deny Access” key. 2.Field Service Ver. 1. and input address using the 10-Key Pad. <Deny Access> 1. 1.” 3. (9) RAW Port No. and enter the RAW port number using the 10-Key Pad. Select Enable or Disable on “Permit Access. Utility Mode • To set whether to receive IP address within the specified range of the value. Touch “DNS Domain Name” key. • To enter the DNS Domain name. B. 4. Select to use or not to use. <Permit Access> 1. 1. (11) DNS Domain Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the DNS Domain name. (10) DNS Host Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the DNS Host name. When using the selected port. Touch “OK” key. Touch “OK” key. 2. 8.” 2. NetWare Setting (1) NetWare Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To enable or disable the NetWare setting. • To enter the DNS Host name. 2005 (8) IP Filtering Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the IP Filtering. 1. and enter address using the 10-Key Pad. 4. ON “OFF” 191 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . Select range Set 1 to Set 5. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the RAW port No. and touch “OK” key. • To set the RAW port number for the printer. 3. • The default setting is OFF. Enter the DNS Domain name using the keyboard on the screen. Select Enable or Disable on “Deny Access. 3. and touch “OK” key. Enter the DNS Host name on the screen key board. Select the necessary port number. 2. Touch “DNS Host Name” key. 2. Select range Set 1 to Set 5.

2 802. Check the NetWare status.3 Field Service Ver. 1. Touch UP/Down arrow keys to select the server to check. • To enable the Bindery service. • The default setting is PServer. Touch “Print Server name” key or “Print Server Password” key. (7) NDS/Bindery Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the Bindery setting when using NetWare4. 3. • To specify the Frame type for transmission. Enter the Print server name or the Print server password (up to 63 characters) using the on-screen keyboard. 1.2SNAP (3) Operation Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Operation Mode. 2. 2. 1. Utility Mode (2) Ethernet Frame Type bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Ethernet Frame Type. (5) Print Server Name/Print Server Password Functions • To set the Print server name and Print server password. Enter the Polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. • To enter the print server name or the print server password. • The default setting is Auto Detect.0 Mar. 1. “NDS” NDS&Bindery 192 . “Auto Detect” 802. and touch “OK” key. • To set the interval to search the print queue. • To check NetWare status. “PServer” Nprinter/Rprinter (4) Status Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display NetWare Status. Touch “Status” key. • The default setting is NDS. 2. 2005 Ethernet II 802.X model and after. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure (6) Polling Interval Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Polling interval. Press the Clear key. • To change the Operation Mode.8.

• To set the NDS Tree name. 2. Touch “Printer Name” key. 1. 8. 2. Enter the File server name (up to 47 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • To disable IPP setting. 1. • To set the Printer Name. (9) NDS Context Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NDS Context name. • To set the NDS Context name. 2. Utility Mode 1. and touch “OK” key. 2. “ON” OFF 193 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .Field Service Ver. • The default setting is ON. Press the Clear key. • To set the Printer number. Enter the NDS Context name (up to 191 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 2. 2005 (8) File Server Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the File server name. and touch “OK” key. Touch “NDS Tree Name” key. • To set the Full server name for the print server to logon. and touch “OK” key. (12) Printer Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Printer number. Enter the number between 0 and 254 using the 10-Key Pad. Touch “NDS Context name” key. 1. C. (11) Printer Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Printer Name. Enter the NDS Tree name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Touch “File Server Name” key. Enter the Printer Name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. and touch “OK” key. IPP Setting (1) IPP Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable IPP setting. 1. 1. (10) NDS Tree Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NDS Tree name.0 Mar.

2. 3. “ON” OFF Field Service Ver. 2. Touch “Input” key.0 Mar. Touch “Printer Information” key. • To enter the Proxy server address. 2. Set ON or OFF for each item. • Press the Clear key. D. Enter the Proxy Server Port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay Pad. 1. • Enter the Proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. • For the response setting to see if IPP transmission supports each function. • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . FTP Setting (1) Proxy Server Address Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Proxy server address. 1. Press the Clear key. • To enter the Proxy server port number. Touch “Print URI” key to check the Printer URI information. Touch “Host Address” key. • To set the Printer information. 2. [0 to 255] 1. (4) Printer Information Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Printer information. [0 to 255] . (3) Port No.8. [0 to 255] . 194 . Utility Mode (2) Accept IPP job bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the IPP job. Enter the Printer Name. 3. 3. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port number to be used for transmission with FTP server. 1. (2) Proxy Port Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Proxy server port number. Printer Location. • To enter the Port number to be used for transmission with FTP server. 1. Select “Host Name Input” to enter the Host name. Select “IP Address Input” to enter the IP Address. and Printer Information on the on-screen keyboard. 2005 (3) Support Operation Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Operation support information. Touch “Support Operation” key. • To restrict the IPP job • The default setting is ON.

Enter the NetBIOS name (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. • To change the timeout period for connecting. 3. Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-Key Pad. • Not to use SMB port in Printer mode. 2. 2. and touch “OK” key. “ON” OFF (3) NetBIOS Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set NetBIOS name. SMB Setting (1) Scan Setting Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SMB or not in Scan mode (Scan to PC). • The default setting is ON. • Not to use “Scan to FTP (FTP transmission). • Not to use FTP server. Touch “Input” key. • Not to use SMB in Scan mode (Scan to PC). • The default setting is ON. 1. 1. Touch “NetBIOS Name” key.” • The default setting is ON. 2005 (4) Connection Timeout Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for connecting to FTP server. 195 bizhub C450 . “ON” OFF E. Utility Mode 1. 8. “ON” OFF (6) FTP Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use FTP server or not. “ON” OFF (2) Print Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SMB port or not in Printer mode. (5) FTP Client Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use “Scan to FTP (FTP transmission)” or not. Press the Clear key. • To set NetBIOS name. • The default setting is ON.

and touch “OK” key. ON “OFF” (2) Printer Name Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network. Touch “Zone Name” key. 2. • To set the Print service name. Touch “Printer Name” key. 2. and touch “OK” key. and touch “OK” key. (5) Workgroup Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Workgroup. (4) Current Zone Functions Use • To display the current zone on AppleTalk network. • To set the Printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network. 2. 1.0 Mar. F. • The default setting is OFF. (3) Zone Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Zone name connected with AppleTalk network.8. 1. • To use AppleTalk setting. 2. and touch “OK” key. • To check the current zone on the AppleTalk network. 196 . 1. • To set the Zone name connected with AppleTalk network. AppleTalk Setting (1) AppleTalk Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the AppleTalk setting. • To set the Workgroup. Field Service Ver. Enter the Printer name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Enter the Workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 1. Enter the Zone name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Touch “Print Service Name” key. Enter the Print Service name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 2005 1. Touch “Workgroup” key. Utility Mode (4) Print Service Name bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Print service name.

0 Mar. timeout period for LDAP search. Touch “Search Base” key. 197 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 2. results of address for LDAP search • To change the Max. 1. • To enter LDAP server address. results of address for LDAP search 1. LDAP Setting (1) Enabling LDAP <LDAP Function> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the LDAP function. • IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . • To use LDAP function. (2) Setting Up LDAP <Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the LDAP server address. Enter the Search Base (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Search result numbers between 5 and 1000 using the 10-Key Pad. and select the condition. • The default setting is OFF. Enter the timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-Key Pad. 1. timeout period for LDAP search. ON “OFF” 8. 3. [0 to 255] . 2. Search Results> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Max. 2005 G. • To enter the Directory Path for LDAP server. and touch “OK” key.Field Service Ver. Touch “Initial Setting for Search Details” key. Touch “Condition” key for each search item. <Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Max. • To change the Max. • To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search. 1. Utility Mode <Max. Search Results” key. Touch “Timeout” key. Touch “Max. Enter the Max. 2. <Initial Setting for Search Details> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search. 1. Press the Clear key. 3. Press the Clear key. [0 to 255] <Search Base> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Directory Path for LDAP server. 2.

When failing to authenticate with Digest-MD5. • To set the logon name to connect to LDAP server. 2005 • To set whether to use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server. <General Settings> Functions Use • To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay Pad. • To use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server. Touch “Login Name” key. <Password> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the password for connecting to LDAP server. 198 . • Enter the password (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • The default setting is OFF. 2. “anonymous” Simple Digest-MD5 GSS-SPNEGO Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure <Login Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Logon name to connect to LDAP server. • Touch “Password” key.> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the LDAP server port number. and touch “OK” key. • The default setting is anonymous. • To change the authentication method to logon to LDAP server. Utility Mode <Enable SSL> bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver.8. ON “OFF” <Port No. anonymous : User name and password are not necessary Simple : Simple method which needs the user name and the password Digest-MD5 : Method available with normal LDAP server. Press the Clear key.0 Mar. • To set the password for connecting to LDAP server. and touch “OK” key. 2. 1. NOTE • The setting is not available when Authentication method is set to anonymous. NOTE • The setting is not available when Authentication method is set to anonymous. 1. GSS-SPNEGO : Method available with Window's Active Directory (Kerberos authentication). 1. it automatically switches to CRAM-MD5. Enter the logon name (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • To enter the LDAP server port number.

1. Utility Mode 1. • To set the Domain Name for connecting to LDAP server. 2. • To disable the E-mail transmission setting. 8. • SMP Server Address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . “ON” OFF <SMTP Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the SMTP server address.” H. Touch “Domain Name” key. 3. and enter IP Address. and enter the host name. • The default setting is Disable. “ON” OFF 199 bizhub C450 . [0 to 255] . • The default setting is ON.Field Service Ver. • To enter the SMTP server address. Enter the domain name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 2. Select “IP Address Input”. [0 to 255] 1. • To enable the Dynamic Authentication. Enable “Disable” <Reset All Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the shipping. <Dynamic Authentication> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the Dynamic Authentication. E-Mail Setting (1) E-Mail TX (SMTP) <E-Mail TX Setting> Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the E-mail transmission setting. 1. Check the message and touch “Yes.0 Mar. 2. <Binary Division> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out Binary division for data to be transmitted • Not to carry out Binary division for data to be transmitted • The default setting is ON. and touch “OK” key. Select “Host Name Input”. Touch “Host Address” key. 2005 <Domain Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Domain Name for connecting to LDAP server. [0 to 255] . Touch “Reset All Settings” key.

• The default setting is OFF. 3. • The default setting is No Limit. 1. Enter the time for POP Before SMTP between 0 and 60 using the 10-Key Pad. Press the Clear key. Press the Clear key. • To enter the port number for transmission with SMTP server. 2. Enter the dividing mail size between 100 and 15000 using the 10-Key Pad. Touch “Input” key. • To change the Authentication method to logon to SMTP server. “OFF” POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication • When selecting SMTP Authentication. 1. “No Limit” (1 to 100) <Detail Setting: Port No. • To change the dividing size of the data. 2. Touch “Input” key.> Functions Use • To set the Port number for transmission with SMTP server. 1. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive. 1. <Detail Setting: POP Before SMTP Time> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time necessary for POP Before SMTP Authentication. • To change the Max. and the Domain name. 2005 • To set the dividing size when carrying out the Binary division for data to be transmitted. • Select the timeout period using +/. Utility Mode <Divided Mail Size> bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • To change the time necessary for POP Before SMTP Authentication. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. the password. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure <Detail Setting: Authentication Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Authentication method to logon to SMTP server. enter the User ID. 3. 200 . <Server Capacity> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Max. 2.0 Mar. • To change the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server. Press the Clear key. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive.8.keys. <Connection Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server.

• Select the timeout period of connection using +30/-30 keys. • The default setting is ON. Select “IP Address Input”. and enter the IP address. • To set the timeout period of connection in receiving e-mail to POP server. for transmitting with POP server. between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. [0 to 255] . 2. Enter the Login Name. <Detail Setting: Port No. Press the Clear key. “ON” OFF 8. 1. [0 to 255] 1. 1. Enter the Port No. Detail Setting (1) Device Setting <MAC Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the MAC address of the machine. Enter the password. <Detail Setting: APOP Authentication> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use APOP Authentication • To use APOP Authentication • The default setting is OFF. I. • To enter the Port No. [0 to 255] . 4.> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port No. 2005 (2) E-Mail RX (POP) <E-Mail RX Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail reception setting. • SMTP Server Address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . and touch “OK” key. <Detail Setting: Connection Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server. Touch “Host Address” key. • To disable the e-mail reception setting. Select “Host Name Input” to enter the host name. 201 Adjustment / Setting ON “OFF” bizhub C450 . Utility Mode <POP Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the POP Server Address. • To enter the POP Server Address.Field Service Ver. for transmitting with POP server. 2. • The address cannot be changed. • To check the MAC address of the machine.0 Mar. 5. 3.

Touch “Host Address” key. [0 to 255] 1. and enter the host name. • To synchronize the time between the server and the client. [0 to 255] . • The default setting is Auto. • To enter the NTP server address. • To set the specific network speed. Select “IP Address Input”. Enter the password (up to 320 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 1. 202 . Press the Clear key. (3) Status Notification Setting <Notification Address Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the e-mail address for notifying the machine condition. and touch “OK” key. 3. and enter the IP address. • To set the e-mail address for notifying the machine condition. 2. Utility Mode <Network Speed> bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Network speed.0 Mar. Select “Host name Input”. • The default setting is OFF. • IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . • To enter the Port No. (2) Time Adjustment Setting <NTP Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the NTP setting. for transmitting with NTP server.8.> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port No. Adjustment / Setting <Port No. ON “OFF” <NTP Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NTP server address. Touch “E-mail Address Edit” key. [0 to 255] . Enter the Port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. for transmitting with NTP server. 2. 2005 “Auto” 10Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex NOTE • Make sure to turn the main power switch OFF and ON again after changing the network speed. Field Service Ver. 1. 2. 1.

Select “IP Address Input” to enter IP address. 2. • To set the item for notifying the machine condition with e-mail. 3. Select the item to be notified and touch “ON” key. “Enable” Disable (6) SLP Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SLP or not. 2. • The default setting is Enable. 4. Touch “Check Connection” key to check the connection. (4) PING Confirmation Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING. • The default setting is Enable. “Enable” Disable 203 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .Field Service Ver. • To check the condition of TCP/IP network. 1. 2005 <Notification Item Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the item for notifying the machine condition with e-mail. 8. Utility Mode <Notification Time Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time necessary for notifying the machine condition by e-mail. “Enable” Disable (7) LPD Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use LPD during printing or not. • To change the time necessary for notifying the machine condition by e-mail.0 Mar. Enter the time for notifying between 1 and 10 using the 10-Key Pad. Select “Host Name Input” to enter the host name. (5) PSWC Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the PageScope Web Connection. 1. • Not to use SLP. • Not to use LPD during printing. 1. • Not to use the PageScope Web Connection. Touch “OK” key. Press the Clear key. 2. • The default setting is Enable. 1. Touch “Host Address” key for PING transmission.

Auto Zoom (ADF) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically set the Auto Zoom when the original is detected to be set on ADF while the Paper Take-up Tray is selected (except APF). Write Community Name: Enter the Write Community Name. ON “OFF” B. 1. • To automatically set the Auto Zoom when the Paper Take-up Tray is selected. “ON” OFF Field Service Ver. ON “OFF” <Prefix/Suffix Setting> Functions • To register or change the Prefix or Suffix.8. Prefix: Letters added to the top of the text (Header part) Suffix: Letters added to the bottom of the text (Footer part) • To register or change the address displayed for Prefix or Suffix. • Not to use SNMP. Utility Mode (8) SNMP Setting bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SNMP or not. (9) Prefix/Suffix Setting <ON/OFF Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to add Prefix or Suffix to the address when calling or entering an address. • To add Prefix or Suffix to the address. 2005 Read Community name: Enter the Read Community name. “ON” OFF 204 .6. • The default setting is ON.0 Mar. • The default setting is ON. • To automatically set the Auto Zoom when the Paper Take-up Tray is selected. • The default setting is OFF. • Prefix can be registered with up to 20 letters • Suffix can be registered with up to 64 letters Use Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 8.6 Copier Setting A. • Eight types of Prefix and Suffix can be added. • The default setting is OFF. Auto Zoom (Platen) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically set the Auto Zoom when the original is detected to be set on the original glass while the Paper Take-up Tray is selected (except APF).

“Tray Before APS ON” Default Tray 8. Select Tray when APS OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled. • To restrict receiving printing jobs for Print data or Fax data during copy operation. • The default setting is Tray Before APS ON. IEEE1284 “USB” 205 Adjustment / Setting 8.0 Mar. “Accept” Receive Only Setting/ Procedure A. Select Tray for Insert Sheet Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the initial value for the Tray for the Cover sheet paper. USB. Parallel I/F Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the two-way communication method for Parallel interface. Compatible Nibble “ECP” C.7 Printer Setting bizhub C450 . Local I/F Timeout Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for I/F transmission. 1. • To make the timeout period longer according to the network condition. and Network. Print Jobs During Copy Operation Functions Use • To set whether to receive printing jobs for Print data or Fax data during copy operation. • To be used when using the Parallel interface.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is ECP. • Settings have to be done separately for IEEE1284. • To set the Tray for the default setting when canceling APS. E. • The default setting is USB. “60 sec” (10 to 1000) B. • The default setting is Tray 2. • The default settings are 60 sec. • To change the two-way communication method for Parallel interface. IEEE 1284/USB Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the interface to be used when mounting the local I/F kit.6. Accept : Receives the Print data or Fax data and print Receive Only : Print data or Fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished • The default setting is Accept. Utility Mode D. 2005 C.

“PB” 10 pps NOTE • The displays are different depending on the country. Header/Footer Position (1) Header Position Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the position to print the header when transmitting Fax. (2) Receive Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Fax reception mode.6. Telephone Line Settings (1) Dialing Method Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Dialing method. Touch “Sender Name” Key and enter the name of the sender (up to 30 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • The default setting is OFF. • The displays are different depending on the country. • To change to manual reception when using the remote reception function.0 Mar. when connected to the external telephone. Inside Body Text “Outside Body Text” OFF (2) Footer Position Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print the Footer when transmitting Fax. 2005 Fax Setting • Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. Inside Body Text Outside Body Text “OFF” Adjustment / Setting C. Utility Mode 8. • To print the Footer when transmitting Fax. • To register or change the name of the sender and Fax ID 1. • The default setting is PB. “Auto RX” Manual RX 206 .8. • The default setting is Auto RX. • To change the dialing method. Header Information Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the name of the sender and Fax ID which will be printed when transmitting Fax.8 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. A. • To change the position to print the Header • The default setting is Outside Body Text. B. etc. 1.

• To carry out the Duplex print for the received original. • The default setting is 3 min. (5) Redial Interval Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the interval for redialing.Field Service Ver. etc. ON “OFF” 207 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . “3 X” (0 to 7) NOTE • The line which can be set up is different depending on the country. D. “2 X” (0 to 15) (4) Number of Redials Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of redials. TX/RX Setting (1) Duplex Print (RX) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out the Duplex print for the received original when receiving Fax. “3 min” (1 to 15) (6) Line Monitor Sound Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to output the Line monitor sound from the speaker or not.0 Mar. • To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy. 1. ON “OFF” (7) Line Monitor Sound Volume Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the volume of the speaker. • The default setting is 2 X. • To change the interval for redialing. • The default setting is OFF. • Change the volume by touching the “Lower” or “Higher” keys. • To change the volume of the speaker. • The default setting is 3 X. • The line which can be set up is different depending on the country. 2005 (3) Number of RX Call Rings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of times to receive call rings. Utility Mode • To change the number of times of the fake RingBack tone after it starts calling until it starts receiving. 8. • The default setting is OFF.

Fixed Size : Printed only on the fixed size. “Print” Show Error Message Auto Create User Box Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure (5) Tray Selection for RX Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the Paper Tray to be fixed when printing the received text. • To change the operation when the unregistered box number is entered. • To make the setting of “Print Paper Size” enable. • The displays are different depending on the country.8. it will be printed on the closest Size. (4) Incorrect User Box No. set “Tray Selection for RX Print” to “Auto. Auto select : Selected automatically Priority Size : Printed on size with priority. 1. • The default setting is Auto. • To fix the Paper tray when printing the received text. “Auto Select” Fixed Size Priority Size Setting/ Procedure (3) Print Paper Size Functions Use • To set the paper size to print the text when receiving Fax. When the size is not set.0 Mar. • The default setting is Auto Select. • To change the paper size for printing the received text. Entry Functions • To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered. “Auto” Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 208 . A3 B4 “A4” Setting/ Procedure NOTE • The displays are different depending on the country. 2005 • To set the priority for Paper Take-up Tray when receiving Fax. • To change the priority for Paper Take-up Tray when receiving Fax. • Items available for selection are different depending on the Paper feed option mounted. Utility Mode (2) Print Paper Selection bizhub C450 Functions Use Field Service Ver. • The default setting is Print.” • The initial setting is A4.

Utility Mode (7) Print Separate Fax Pages Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size. • To cancel the F Code transmission. • The default setting is OFF. Reduction for RX Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the print magnification for received text. • The default setting is ON. • The default setting is 96. ON “OFF” • Enter the password (up to 8 digits) for printing when set to ON. • To change the print magnification for received text. and print it out when ordered. “Delete” Save Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the F Code transmission. • The default setting is OFF. 209 Adjustment / Setting E. 1. • The default setting is Delete. • To divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size. ON “OFF” (8) File After Polling TX Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to delete the original which Polling transmission has been completed.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. “96” (87 to 96) 8. “ON” OFF (2) Memory RX Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the forced memory RX function. • For not deleting the original which polling transmission has been completed. • To store the received text in the hard disk without printing. Function Setting (1) Function ON/OFF Setting <F Code TX> bizhub C450 . 2005 (6) Min.

• The default setting is OFF. set the address to forward to. set the reception box to receive data 210 . • The default setting is OFF. 2005 • To set whether to use the closed network function. specify the address to store the file. ON “OFF” • When set to ON.0 Mar. 1. ON “OFF” • When set to ON. (5) Confidential RX Password Check Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To check the password set in the confidential box. • To receive data only from the device which password matches. and print all out Forward & Print (If TX Fails): Forward the received text. • The default setting is OFF. (4) Forward TX Setting Functions Use • To set whether to use the Forward Fax function. enter the password (up to 4 digits) to be used. Utility Mode (3) Closed Network RX bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Adjustment / Setting (6) Fax RX Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the PC-FAX reception function. • To forward the received text to the receiver which has been specified. • To use TSI distribution. and prints out only when fails to be forwarded • The default setting is OFF.8. Forward & Print : Forward the received text. (7) TSI User Box Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use TSI distribution or not. “OFF” Forward & Print Forward & Print (If TX Fails) Setting/ Procedure • When set to ON. • To store the received text file in the box in the hard disk. ON “OFF” • When set to ON.

ON “OFF” 211 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .0 Mar. ON If TX Fails “OFF” (3) Sequential TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Sequential TX Report or not. and also the timing for printing. 1. G. ON “OFF” 8. PBX CN Set Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not. ON “OFF” (5) Confidential RX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Confidential RX Report. Report Settings (1) Activity Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Activity Report or not. 100/ Daily (2) TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the TX Report. • The default setting is OFF. • This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line. • To print out the TX Report. ON “OFF” (4) Timer Reservation TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the reservation TX or not. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is OFF. enter the external number between 0 and 9999. and also the timing for printing. • To print out the Activity Report. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is OFF. • To print out the Confidential RX Report. “OFF” Daily Every 100 Comm. • To print out the Sequential TX Report. • To print out the reservation TX. • The default setting is OFF. 2005 F.Field Service Ver. Utility Mode • When set to ON.

1. at a time Setting/ Procedure (8) Paper Tray for Reports Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Paper Take-up Tray to output reports. 1. 2.” 1 Dest. : Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses 1 Dest.0 Mar. ON “OFF” (7) Broadcast Result Report Functions Use • To set the format to output the Broadcast Result Report.6. • To print out the Broadcast Result Report All Dest. Utility Mode (6) Bulletin TX Report bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. “Allow” Restrict 212 . Bypass Tray Tray 1 “Tray 2” Tray 3 Tray 4 (9) TX Result Report Check Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display the TX Result Report screen. • Items available to be selected are different depending on Paper feed option mounted. ON “OFF” H. • The default setting is Allow. OpenAPI Setting (1) Access Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To allow or restrict the access from other systems with IS OpenAPI when using Page Scope Data Administrator. • The default setting is OFF.8. • The default setting is Tray 2. 8. “All Dest. Select the Paper Take-up Tray and press the Start key. • The default setting is OFF.9 System Connection A. Job Settings List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • The set value list of the fax set up into this machine can be printed. 2005 • To set whether to print out the Bulletin TX Report or not. • To print out the Bulletin TX Report. • To restrict access from other systems with IS OpenAPI. • To display the TX Result Report screen. at a time : Outputs a report after each transmission • The default setting is All Dest. Touch “Administrator Setting” → “Fax Setting” → “Job Settings List” key.

Press the Clear key. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. • To change the Administrator Password. 2. or Port Number (SSL). When the CS Remote Care setup is complete. • To set authentication of the access from other systems using OpenAPI. • To change the access port number for other systems with IS OpenAPI. 3. Current Password : Enter the current Administrator password New Password : Enter the new Administrator password to be used Re-Input Password : Reenter the new Administrator password NOTE • When selecting Utility → “Administrator Setting” → “Security Setting” → “Security Details” leads to “Password Rules” being ON. (3) SSL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to encrypt access from other systems by SSL when using Page Scope Data Administrator. Admin. ☞ For details. transmission Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To call the CS Remote Care Center from the Administrator.0 Mar. • Enter the Administrator password on the on-screen keyboard. Administrator Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set/change the Administrator Password. ON “OFF” (4) Authentication Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to authenticate access of other systems which uses OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator. • To encrypt access by SSL from other systems using IS OpenAPI. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. see page 247 “CS Remote Care. ON “OFF” • When setting to ON. 213 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 1. Select Port No. • The default setting is OFF.” 8. and touch “Input” key.6. enter the Login Name and the Password to be set. B.Field Service Ver. Utility Mode • To set the access port for other systems with IS OpenAPI when using Page Scope Data Administrator. 1.10 Security Setting A. 2005 (2) Port No. • The default setting is OFF. the password with same characters and the same password with the one prior to change will not be changed.

“Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)”. Allow “Restrict” C. “Daylight Savings Time Setting”.8. “Output Setting”.0 Mar. “Allow” Restrict 214 . the password cannot be changed or registered unless it follows the above conditions. Box transmission password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. • Passwords to be covered: Password for CE. and “Select Tray for Insert Sheet” are available to users. Administrator Security Level Functions Use • To set the level for Administrator setting item open to the user. and Box transmission • Details of the Password Rules: Password except User password. Administrator. When the password rule is set to ON. Level 1 Level 2 “Prohibit” Setting/ Procedure D. Level 1 : “Power Save Setting”. “Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)”. “Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)”. ON “OFF” (2) Manual Destination Input Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or prohibit to manually enter the destination address on the Destination Input screen. Prohibit : Not to allow the user to set neither Level 1 nor Level 2 • The default setting is Prohibit. “Specify Default Tray when APS Off”. and “Print Jobs During Copy Operation” are available to users. • The default setting is Allow. • To apply the password rule to enhance security. Box user authentication. • The default setting is Restrict. Utility Mode B. Setting bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Level 2 :“Power Save Setting”. “Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)”. • To prohibit entering the destination address manually. • To make part of the Administrator setting items open to the user. Password same with the one prior to change is prohibited. “Specify Default Tray when APS Off”. (Case-sensitive) Box transmission password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. (Case-sensitive) User password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. Classified document. • To allow the Box Administrator to use the system. “Select Tray for Insert Sheet”. “Date/Time Setting”. User authentication. 2005 • To set whether to allow or restrict the Box Administrator to use the system. 1. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF. Password with only the same letter is prohibited. User Box Admin. “AE Level Adjustment”. Security Details (1) Password Rules Adjustment / Setting Functions Use • To set whether to apply the Password rules. Fax confidential print.

Touch “HDD Lock Password” key. Touch “Yes” key on the Check screen. 1.Field Service Ver. 2005 (3) Print Data Capture Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the Print Job Data. 2. Touch “Yes” key on the Check screen. (5) HDD Lock Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Lock Password for the hard disk. total space capacity. • The default setting is Allow. 1. 3. 1. • To enter the Lock Password for the hard disk. 2.0 Mar. 4. • To check the capacity and the status of use of the hard disk (2) Delete Unused User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the unnecessary box without data. Touch “Overwrite All Data” key. Turn main power switch OFF and ON again. 2. 215 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . Touch “Delete Unused User Box” key. Enter the password (up to 20 on-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. (3) Delete Secure Documents Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the whole classified documents in the hard disk. 3. 8. and the remaining capacity of the hard disk. Utility Mode • To be used when carrying out Service Mode → System 2 → Data capture. and touch “OK” key. Touch “Overwrite” key. 1. Reenter the password to confirm. 1. “Allow” Restrict E. Touch the “Yes” key on the Check screen. 2. (4) Overwrite All Data Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting. HDD Setting (1) Check HDD Capacity Functions Use • To display the used space capacity. Touch “Delete Secure Documents” key.

Adjustment item list Field Service Ver. Serial Number 2 Scan calibration Line Mag Setting Counter Life Counter Clear Gradation Adjust Image Process Adjustment Re-entry of Utility settings Re-entry of Enhanced Security settings Parallel adjustment of Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Exposure Unit Scanner Motor belt adjustment F/W upgrading Installation of Original Size Sensor Remounting of Parameter Chip (Control Board) Remounting of NVRAM (MFP Control Board) Replace Image Transfer Belt Unit No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ❍ ❍ (3) (3) (5) (4) ❍ Adjustment / Setting Firmware Version (1) (2) ❍ ❍ ❍ 21 ❍ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 216 Replace IU . bizhub C450 Adjustment item list Change Paper (1st Drawer) Kind Replace Image Transfer Belt Unit Replacement Part/Service Job Replace Paper Take-Up Roller Replace Paper Separator Roll Assy Change Marketing Area Install Paper Feed Unit Replace Mirror Unit (4) (1) (2) Replace CCD Unit Adjustment/Setting Items Print Positioning: Leading Edge Printer Area Print Positioning: Side Edge Dup Print Positioning: Side Paper Feed Direction Adj.9.0 Mar. Detecting Sensor Adj. Touch Panel Adjust State Confirmation HDD R/W Check Memory/ HDD Adjust HDD Format Table Number Reentry of Setting Values System1. LPH Chip Adjust Machine LPH Rank (Changes to 1) Image position: Leading Edge Scan Area Service Mode Image position: Side Edge Cross Direction Adjustment Feed Direction Adjustment Org. 1. 2005 9.

1.2 (1) (2) Replace Hard Disk Add Key Counter D-103 (3) (4) (6) (2) Execute Memory Clear Execute Add. 2005 ✽ This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced.0 Mar. Priority order. Adjustment item list ❍ 217 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . if applicable. 32 29 27 26 25 (1) (3) (2) (1) (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) ❍ (1) ❍ (1) ❍ (5) 9. Option Execute F/W update Add FAX Board (1) (1) (2) (2) (4) (4) (3) (3) ❍ (4) (2) (2) (5) (3) (3) ❍ ❍ ❍ 28 12 11 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 31 No Field Service Ver.9 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 10 14 13 30 ❍ Replace Image Transfer Roller Unit Replace Paper Dust Remover (3) (2) Replace Original Size Detecting Sensor Replace LPH Assy Replace LPH Unit Wind Scanner Drive Cables Replace Scanner Motor Replace Scanner Assy Replace Scanner Home Sensor Replace Control Board Replace MFP Control Board Replace Image Processing Board (1) (2) Replace Original Glass Replace IDC/Registration Sensor/1. during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the parentheses.

Press the following keys in this order. C.) 218 . 1. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs. • Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. A. ☞ 292 B. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3. and ON again. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 NOTES • When selecting “CE Authentication” under “Enhanced Securiy” available from Service Mode. Procedure Press the Utility/Counter key. The Service Mode menu will appear. Adjustment / Setting 4037F3E502DA NOTE • Be sure to change the CE Password from its default value.key to enter or change the setting value. The machine will not enter Service Mode unless the CE password is entered correctly. see the Enhanced Security.”) • If a wrong CE password is entered. Touch “Details” on “Meter Count” display. authentication by CE password is necessary. 2. 1. To return to the Basic screen.0 Mar. (To change the setting value. Changing the Setting Value in Service Mode Functions • Use the +/. Enter the 8 digits CE password.” 4. re-enter the right password. 2005 10. Service Mode bizhub C450 10. Exiting • Touch the “Exit” key.10. turn Main Power Switch OFF. • For the procedure to change the CE Password. (The initial setting for CE password is “92729272. first press the Clear key before making an entry. and touch “OK” key.1 Service Mode function setting procedure NOTE • Ensure appropriate security for Service mode function setting procedures. • The service code entered is displayed as “✽.

Detecting Sensor Adj.2 Service Mode function tree ✽ The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.0 Mar. Black Firmware Version Adjustment / Setting Imaging Process Adjustment Gradation Adjust Transfer Belt D Max Density TCR Level Setting Background Voltage Margin Transfer Adjust Stabilizer Thick Paper Density Adjustment Thin Paper Duplex Mode TCR Toner Supply Monochrome Density Adjustment Dev. 1. Magenta. Service Mode Print Positioning: Leading Edge Print Positioning: Side Edge Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge Paper Feed Direction Adj. Service Mode 10. Yellow. 2005 10. Printer Area Scan Area Printer Resist Loop Color Registration Adjustment LPH Rank LPH Chip Adjust Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment Lead Edge Erase Adjustment Cooling Fan Speed Machine Image Position: Leading Edge Image Position: Side Edge Cross Direction Adjustment Feed Direction Adjustment Cyan.Field Service Ver. Fusing Nip Fusing Temperature Fusing Transport speed Org. Bias Choice CS Remote Care Next Page 219 bizhub C450 .

& Humidity CCD Check Memory/HDD Adj.0 Mar. Service Mode Field Service Ver. LPH Status Adjustment Data List 220 . Memory/HDD State Color Regist IU Lot No.10. 2005 Service Mode bizhub C450 System 1 Marketing Area Tel/Fax Number Serial Number No Sleep Foolscap Size Setting Original Size Detection Install date Initialization System 2 HDD Image Controller Setting Option Board Status Consumable Life Rminder Unit Change Software Switch Setting Scan Calibration LCT Paper Size Setting Line Mag Setting Data Capture Counter List Output Life Jam Service Call Counter Warning Maintenance Service Total Counter Of Each Mode Service Call History (Data) ADF Paper Pages Paper Jam History Fax Connection Error Counter Reset Adjustment / Setting State Confirmation Next Page Sensor Check Table Number Level History1 Level History2 Temp. 1.

0 Mar. 1. Auto Stop Position Adjustment Paper Passage Sensor Check Original Tray Width Sensor Auto Adjust FAX * Modem/ECU Network System Fax File Format Communication List Output Function Parameter Initialization * Settings are available only when the Optional FAX Kit (FK-502) is mounted. Service Mode Service Mode Gradation Pattern Halftone Pattern Lattice Pattern Solid Pattern Color Sample 8 Color Solid Pattern LPH Pattern Running Mode Fax Test bizhub C450 Test Mode ADF Original Stop Position Registration Loop Adj. 2005 10.Field Service Ver. Finisher 221 Adjustment / Setting .

Service Mode Field Service Ver. from 10-key Pad. Enter year.0 Mar.” 5. and minute. month. in that order.3. 2. Stop → 1 → 1 → 4 → 4 → Clear 3. day.10. 1. enter “0” first if the data one digit. Touch “END” key to return to the Service Mode. 4. Press the following keys in this order. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch “Entry. day. hour.1 Date/Time Input mode screen 4037F3E504DA A. 10. 222 . 2005 10. hour. Call the Service Mode to the screen. or minute. (Year 4 digits → Month 2 digits → Day 2 digits → Hour 2 digits → Minute 2 digits) Adjustment / Setting NOTE • When setting the month.3 Date/Time Input mode bizhub C450 • This mode is used to set time-of-day and date. Date/Time input mode setting procedure <Procedure> 1.

Field Service Ver.1 Functions Use Check Range Fusing Nip • To check the Fusing Roller nip width. 223 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . • When a fusing failure occurs.4 Machine 10. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Fusing Nip” Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 3. 2.4. 4. Call the Service Mode to the screen. A A: 9 ± 0.0 Mar.5 mm. 4036fs3032c0 Adjustment Procedure 1. • When a blurred image or brush effect occurs. Service Mode 10. 1. 2005 10. Check the fusing roller nip width.

do not adjust the fusing temperature on the pressure application side.... 6. 1. Wait a while before performing the subsequent steps.. others Pressure Roller : -20 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C).. thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions...10.. or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper is changed or environmental conditions change.... Heating Roller : -10 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C).... 8.. Service Mode 10. 2005 Fusing Temperature • To adjust individually the temperature of the Heating Roller and the Fusing Pressure Roller for each type of paper. Heating Roller Plain paper OHP film Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 Envelope 195 °C 190 °C 175 °C 185 °C 185 °C 185 °C Pressure Roller 145 °C 170 °C 130 °C 130 °C 130 °C 130 °C Use Adjustment Range • When fusing performance is poor.......key Pad. • As a general rule... increase the setting. The temperature does not change immediately when the setting is change.... Envelope : -20 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C)... * Though all temperatures shown on the screen are 0 °C... Check the copy image for any image problem....0 Mar. Touch “END” to validate the adjustment value.. others If fusing performance is poor... 1.... 2. they represent the following specific temperatures. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Fusing Temperature. decrease the setting. OHP film : -5 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C)...4... Plain paper : -5 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C). 4... 3.. Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting 224 ..” Select the paper type and Fusing Roller type.... If offset is poor... 5... If wax streaks occur..... decrease the setting.2 bizhub C450 Functions Field Service Ver.. 7. Enter the new setting from the +/.. Make the adjustment for each type of paper.

Touch “END” to validate the adjustment value. check the optional Original Size Sensors for correct installation and change the defective sensor or harness. -2 % to +2 % (in 0.” 3. color 4. vary the setting value and check for image. When an erroneous original size detection is made. When an optional sensor has been added. decrease the setting. OHP film. Transport speed 215 mm/s 165 mm/s 60 mm/s Paper Setting Plain paper: monochrome Plain paper: color Thick paper. Detecting Sensor Adj. Call the Service Mode to the screen.4. Envelope. If a blurred image occurs. 3. 10. Labels: monochrome. • • • • When the sensor is replaced with a new one. 1.4 Functions Use Org. 225 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . • Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental conditions or degraded durability. Postcard. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Fusing Transport Speed. 5. 1. 2. If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful. 6. ✽ Make the adjustment for each paper type.” 4. Detecting Sensor Adj. Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 × 17 paper on the Original Glass and lower the Original Cover. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Org. 2. it completes the adjustment procedure.3 Functions Use Variable Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10. 1. Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the adjustment has been successfully made.0 Mar.4.1 % increments) If brush effect is evident. Service Mode Fusing Transport Speed • To adjust the speed of the Fusing Drive Motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed. Press the Start key. at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. • To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the Original Size Sensor. Check the copy image for any image problem. When the marketing area setting is changed. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2005 10.Field Service Ver. Select the transport speed.

3. make the setting value smaller than the current one. 9.” Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Touch “Machine” → “Printer Area” → “Print Positioning: Leading Edge. Width A Specifications: 4.2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification 4036fs3009c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. make the setting value greater than the current one. and Env. change the setting again and make a check again. 1. 10. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Print Positioning: Leading Edge Functions Use • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in Tray 1.If width A falls within the specified range. 1. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.0 mm (in 0. Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting 226 . Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A is shorter than the specifications.” Select the “Plain Paper. adjust for Thick 1 to 3. 8. 6. change the setting using the +/. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 5. If width A is outside the specified range.key. 2.0 mm Setting Range: -3. If width A falls outside the specified range. 2005 Printer Area A. 7.4. touch “END.5 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction. • • • • The LPH Unit has been replaced. Service Mode 10.” 11.10. 4. The paper type has been changed.0 mm to +3.0 Mar.Following the same procedure.0 to 7. OHP Film.

Service Mode • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. 2. If width A falls outside the specified range.) Adjustment Procedure 227 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . Call the Service Mode to the screen. 10. 8. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 9. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.0 ± 0. • The LPH Unit has been replaced. make the setting value greater than the current one.2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification 4036fs3010c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. make the setting value smaller than the current one.5 mm Setting Range: -3. Touch “Machine” → “Printer Area” → “Print Positioning: Side Edge. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.” 11. change the setting using the +/. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the Bypass.0 mm to +3. 6. Specifications: 3. adjust for all other paper sources. 7. 2005 B. change the setting again and make a check again. • A paper feed unit has been added. 5. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 4.Following the same procedure. 1. Print Positioning: Side Edge Functions Use 10. If width A is outside the specified range. • The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction.Field Service Ver. 3. 1. If width A is shorter than the specifications. touch “END.” Select the paper source to be adjusted.If width A falls within the specified range.key.0 Mar.0 mm (in 0.

6.If width A falls within the specified range.10. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. touch “END. • If width A is shorter than the specifications.key. 4. 9. Service Mode C.0 mm (in 0. Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. change the setting using the +/.2 mm increments) 4036fs3010c0 Adjustment Instructions • If width A is longer than the specifications. If width A is outside the specified range.0 Mar. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge bizhub C450 Functions Use Adjustment Specification Field Service Ver. •For measurement.0 mm to +3. change the setting again and make a check again. 5.) Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting 228 .Following the same procedure. make the setting value smaller than the current one. 8. 1.5 mm Setting Range: -3. 1.0 ± 0. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy. 7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range.” Select the paper source to be adjusted. 2005 • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. make the setting value greater than the current one. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray. use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern. 10. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Touch “Machine” → “Printer Area” → “Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge. 3.” 11. adjust for all other paper sources. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction. 2. Backside Specifications: 3.

Functions Use 10. 2. change the setting value and make a check again.Field Service Ver. Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges. Width A: equivalent to one grid Width B: equivalent to 48 grids B Specifications A: 7. • The image on the copy distorts (stretched. • When the image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.If width A or B falls outside the specified range. Call the Service Mode to the screen.3 B: 389. Touch these keys in this order: “Test Mode” → “Lattice Pattern.Check width A and width B on the test pattern.0 Mar.”) Adjustment Procedure 229 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .If width A or B falls within the specified range. If width of A or B falls outside the specified range.9 to 8. make the setting value greater than the current one. If width A or B is shorter than the specifications. shrunk). 11. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern.” Select “Black.” 13. make the setting value smaller than the current one. B: -10 to +10 Adjustment Specification A 4036fs3017c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A or B is longer than the specifications.1 to 392. 3.” “SINGLE.” and “Normal.” “FEET.” 5.Following the same procedure. 10. 7. 4. • Feed Direction Adjustment becomes necessary. 6. 1. 12.1 Setting Range A.” and “Env.” “OHP Film.” 8. 2005 D. Service Mode • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed.” “FD Width:6. adjust for “Thick 1 to 3. change the setting using the Up/ Down keys. 9. touch “END. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Printer Area” → “Paper Feed Direction Adj. 1. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.” “Density:255. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Load Tray 1 with A3 or 11 × 17 plain paper. Paper Feed Direction Adj.” (Check width A only for “OHP Film” and “Env.” “CD Width:6.

a scale may be used instead.4. When the Original Glass is replaced.5 mm.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If width B on the copy is less than 6. 2. Press the Start key to make a copy. • • • • A: Image Position: Side Edge B: Image Position: Leading Edge C: Cross Direction Adjustment D: Feed Direction Adjustment C B A Original Reference D 4036fs3018c0 A. 9. Service Mode 10.5 mm if a scale is used) Setting Range -5. 6. When the Original Width Scale is replaced. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. • If the Color Chart is not available. Check point B on the image of the copy.5 mm (10 ± 0. change the setting using the +/.” 3. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Print Positioning: Leading Edge” of Printer Area. Specifications B: 7 ± 0. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Scan Area” → “Image Position: Leading Edge. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2005 Scan Area • Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. increase the setting value.0 Mar.5 mm.key. Press the Start key to make another copy. 4. Use Adjustment Specification Adjustment / Setting B 4036fs3020c0 230 . 1. Image Position: Leading Edge Functions • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sensor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.6 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.0 to +5. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. •Adjust so that width B on the sample copy made falls within the specified range. 7. If width B on the copy falls outside the specified range. 5.10.0 (in 0. 1. decrease the setting value. If width B on the copy is more than 7. 8.

• When the Original Glass is replaced. increase the setting. Call the Service Mode to the screen.” 3. 4.0 to +10. 2. If the image falls outside the specified range. Check point A on the image of the copy. change the setting using the +/. 1. 8. 9. Specifications A: 10 ± 1. • When the CCD Unit is replaced. Press the Start key to make a copy. 7. 1.key. 5. 2005 B.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. •Adjust so that width A on the sample copy made falls within the specified range. Adjustment Procedure 231 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .0 mm Setting Range -10.0 (in 0. decrease the setting. Image Position: Side Edge Functions Use 10. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. If the 0-mm position on the sample copy is on the left side of the correct 0-mm position perpendicularly to the feeding direction (exceeding 1 mm). Press the Start key to make a copy. 6.1 mm increments) Adjustment Specification A 4036fs3019c0 Adjustment Instructions If the 0-mm position on the sample copy is on the right side of the correct 0-mm position perpendicularly to the feeding direction (less than -1 mm). Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. • The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. Service Mode • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Scan Area” → “Image Position: Side Edge. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Print Positioning: Side Edge” of Printer Area.

990 to 1. 2005 • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section • The CCD Unit has been replaced.010 (in 0.key. 1.0 Mar. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 2.0 mm Setting Range 0. If the image falls outside the specified range. 1. 4. 5.10. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. increase the setting. Press the Start key to make another copy. 8. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. Service Mode C. Adjustment / Setting 232 . 7. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Paper Feed Direction Adj. Press the Start key to make a copy. If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart. •Measure C width on the color chart and on the sample copy.” of Printer Area. decrease the setting. 6.” 3. Specifications C: ± 1.001 increments) C 4036fs3021c0 Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. 9. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Scan Area” → “Cross Direction Adjustment. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. change the setting using the +/. Cross Direction Adjustment bizhub C450 Functions Use Adjustment Specification Field Service Ver. Check the C width on the image of the copy.

Make adjustments until the specifications are met. 7. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Paper Feed Direction Adj.” 3. If the image falls outside the specified range. 1. 1. • The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced.Field Service Ver. 2. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Scan Area” → “Feed Direction Adjustment. increase the setting. 6.” Select the transport speed. If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart. 4. 5. Press the Start key to make another copy. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 8.5 mm Setting Range 0. Service Mode • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section • The Scanner Assy has been replaced. 9. Check the D width on the image of the copy.key.010 (in 0. 215 mm/s : -6 to +6 165 mm/s : -10 to +10 60 mm/s : -15 to +15 1.0 Mar.4. Press the Start key to make a copy. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.001 increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. 2005 D. •Measure D width on the color chart and on the sample copy. Feed Direction Adjustment Functions Use 10. 4. • Use “Paper Passage” for paper passage check. When a paper skew occurs. 4036fs3022c0 Adjustment Specification D Specifications D: ± 1. • To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the Registration Rollers. • The Scanner Motor has been replaced.990 to 1. Bypass. When a paper misfeed occurs. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Procedure 233 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 3. 2. Different setting ranges are set for different transport speeds. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Printer Resist Loop. change the setting using the +/. 10.” of Printer Area. Call the Service Mode to the screen. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.7 Functions Printer Resist Loop • To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each process speed of Tray 1 to Tray 4. decrease the setting. and Duplex.

Black Functions • To correct black color shift. if it occurs with plain or thick paper. decrease the setting value. 2005 Color Registration Adjustment A. increase the setting value. 5.” Load Tray 1 with A3 or A4 paper (plain or thick). if it occurs • The LPH Assy (K) has been replaced. 4.10. Check Procedure Check point A. decrease the setting value. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D. 6. increase the setting value. 10. Service Mode 10.8 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. • To correct black color shift. and yellow) after this adjustment has been made. Fold the printed test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation (the image on the inside). 8. 2. Check deviation between black lines A and B. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D.key as necessary. • Make Color Registration Adjustment (cyan.0 Mar. Press the Start key. 1. 9. Change the setting value using the +/. Call the Service Mode to the screen.4. Select black. “0” (-10 to +10 dot) If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C. B Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting A B 4036fs3001c0 If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C. 1. Direction of C Direction of D A A B B 4036fs3002c0 4036fs3003c0 234 . Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Color Registration Adjustment. 3.Produce another test pattern and check for deviation. Select the paper type. 7. magenta.

5. 2005 B. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Check Procedure Check point X.key. 1. increase the setting. 4.Field Service Ver. increase the setting. Using the +/. Press the Start key. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. Direction of D Direction of C 4036fs3007c0 4036fs3008c0 235 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . Yellow Functions 10. 3.” Load Tray 1 with A3 or A4 paper (plain or thick). Select the color to be adjusted. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. 7. 6. Y 4036fs3004c0 Adjustment for X direction: Check point X Direction of C If the cross deviates in the direction of C. On the test pattern produced. 9. 2. decrease the setting. be sure to perform Color Registration Adjustment (Black). increase the setting. Magenta.0 Mar. Service Mode • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. decrease the setting. only the line of the selected color moves. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Color Registration Adjustment. Direction of D 4036fs3005c0 4036fs3006c0 Adjustment for Y direction: Check point Y If the cross deviates in the direction of C. • Before making this adjustment. check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y. • To correct any color shift “0” (-6 to +6 dot) If the cross deviates in the direction of C. decrease the setting. 8. Select the paper type. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1. Cyan. (At this time. change the setting value as necessary.) Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.

set “1. ✽ Select Yellow if green on the test pattern develops uneven image. LPH Pattern Green (yellow) Black Cyan Magenta 4036fs3048c0 Adjustment Range Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting 6.4. 2.10. Black) that develops uneven image. • When the LPH Unit has been replaced • When the LPH Assy has been replaced “1” (1 to 5) * 0 is not used.” 9. Yellow. at which uneven image occurs. Identify the spot. Service Mode 10.” enter 2.” Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Touch “Machine” → “LPH Rank. 1.Repeat steps 1 through 8 until the uneven image is gone. ✽ If Rank is “1. 7. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 4. 236 . Let the machine produce another test pattern and check for uneven image. 2005 LPH Rank • To correct uneven LPH image by producing an output of the LPH Pattern of Test Print • When an uneven image occurs and is not eliminated even after other troubleshooting procedures have been carried out. ✽ If “0” is set for Rank.” Do not use “0. Magenta. Using the 10-Key Pad. 10. 5. 8. Select the color (Cyan. 3. 1.9 bizhub C450 Functions Use Field Service Ver.” Return the Rank settings for all four colors back to “1. Load Tray 1 with A3 plain paper. enter a value of the Rank value shown on the screen plus one.0 Mar.

Select HYPER and color. Fold the test pattern in half.10 Functions Use 10. Touch these keys in this order: “Test Mode” → “LPH Pattern. select Y.Change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad.” • White line or color line or black line occurs in the sub scan direction. 2005 10. • The LPH Unit has been replaced. corrections can be made for up to eight locations. corrections can therefore be made in the field for three to eight locations. 13. ✽ If the lines occur only in green on the test pattern. (It is then highlighted and the setting value is displayed besides the highlighted number. Check the test pattern for the location. (with the pattern face on the outside) Adjustment Procedure 4036fs3023c0 8. 1. Starting here count out to each side of the paper to identify each location 1 20 39 4036fs3024c0 4037F3E513DA 9. 1.” and “Border Line: ON. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “LPH Chip Adjust. 5.) 12. • The LPH Assy has been replaced. The chip boundary line on the crease (the center) of the test pattern corresponds to “20” on the panel. If white lines or black lines in sub scan direction occur.” Select “SINGLE. or K) in which white lines or black lines in sub scan direction occur. Call the Service Mode to the screen.” “HYPER.” “Gradation. Find the number on the panel. 14. 6. 2.” Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. therefore. 10.Touch the corresponding number on the panel. 4.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. to which the location of white lines or black lines in sub scan direction checked in step 5 corresponds.4. ✽ When a new LPH Unit has been installed. 237 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .” 7. Y. Service Mode LPH Chip Adjust • To correct chips of locations where sub scan direction white lines or black lines occur in the LPH Pattern produced using “Test Print. at which white lines or color or black lines in sub scan direction occur.Select the color (C.Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern and check for lines. 11. M. 3. ✽ Corrections for up to five locations can be made through factory adjustments.

4. Width. Touch “Max. “4 mm” 5 mm 7 mm 10. • When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced. 1.” 7. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Mode1.” 4. 6.” 3.13 Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Cooling Fan Speed • To set the Cooling Fan Speed. 238 .5 Firmware Version Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check the Firmware version. Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 89 mm. “Mode1” Mode2 10. Width.0 Mar. Select the appropriate key from 1 to 3 to check the Firmware Version. Service Mode 10. 2. Adjustment Procedure 10. 2. • Use when the firmware is upgraded. 5. 2005 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment • To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the Manual Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Manual Bypass Guide • Use when the Manual Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Manual Bypass Guide has been changed.4. rotate the fan at half speed. Press the Start key and check that the results are OK. • To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper • The default setting is 4 mm. Mode1: When the system speed is 60 mm/s (using the gloss paper or paper type other than plain paper). rotate the fan at full peed. Touch these keys in this order: “Machine” → “Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment” 3.11 bizhub C450 Functions Use Field Service Ver. ✽ Make the adjustment again if the results are NG. Mode2: The fan will be operated at full speed regardless of the system speed. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. When the system speed is 215 mm/sec or 165 mm/sec. Touch “Firmware Version. 1. Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 301 mm.4. 8. Press the Start key and check that the results are OK. • Use when a false paper size is displayed when the manual Bypass is used.10. • Use when operating the Paper Cooling Fan Motor at full speed regardless of the paper type. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch “Min.12 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Lead Edge Erase Adjustment • To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.

• Gradation Mode : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image as it adjusts. the more ideal the image.1 Functions Use Gradation Adjust • To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner • Color reproduction performance becomes poor. Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Y and K) for Max and Highlight. 8. In this case. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover. Values of each color (C. turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch and perform Gradation Adjust once again. Service Mode 10. • The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced. check the image. 1.0 Mar.6. • The IU has been replaced. Touch “Gradation Adjust” to display the Adj. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern. and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen represent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. ✽ The closer the Conv. Values of Max. • If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max Density.6 Imaging Process Adjustment 10. Value to 0. M. Adjustment Specification Adjustment Procedure Max : 0 ± 100 Highlight : 0 ± 60 1. 5. If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps from 2 to 6. Max: 0 ± 100 and Highlight: 0 ± 60: It completes the adjustment procedure.Field Service Ver. Value. 239 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . “0” is displayed for all values. 2005 10. Press the Start key. perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems. Touch “Gradation Adjust. Value shows the difference from the ideal image density. • If the image is faulty. 7. Values and Conv. • Resolution Mode : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters and lines as it adjusts. • If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the specified range. ✽ The Adj. • If a fault is detected. 6. 3. • High Compression Mode : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass.” Select the appropriate mode for the gradation adjustment. 2.) Touch “OK” and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice (a total of three times). 9. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Conv. 4.

6. Filming 4036fs3100c0 Setting/ Procedure 1. After about 5 min. Safety Switch Holding Jig Adjustment / Setting 3. 4. Service Mode 10.6. Open the Left Door and. turn ON the Left Door Switch.2 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Remove the Safety Switch Holding Jig.. the Transfer Belt refresh sequence will be completed. 2005 Transfer Belt A. From the Service mode. Refresh Functions Use • To turn the Transfer Belt idly • To refresh the surface of the Transfer Belt when filming occurs on the Transfer Belt. enter the Transfer Belt Refresh mode. using the Safety Switch Holding Jig. Press the Start key. Wait until predrive is completed. 7. Screw 5.10. 2. 1. Tighten one screw and retract the Belt Refresh Pad from the Transfer Belt. 240 .0 Mar. Loosen one screw completely and press the Belt Refresh Pad up against the Transfer Belt. 8.

bizhub C450 .0 Mar. “Mode1” Mode2 Mode3 Mode4 <Not Print> • The default setting is Mode1.6. “Mode1” Mode2 Mode3 Mode4 10. it strengthen the Transfer Belt cleaning bias in order to make the cleaner more effective. 2005 10. Service Mode Cleaning Bias • To set the strength of the Transfer Belt cleaning bias • When the image pattern is not completely removed.6. • The strength of the bias increases as changing the mode as follows.5 Functions IDC Table Revice • To set the upper limit value of Vdc during the execution of the image stabilization sequence. carrying out the image stabilization. Mode1 → Mode2 → Mode3 → Mode4 Setting/ Procedure <Print> • The default setting is Mode1.3 Functions Use 10. Not Print : To set the cleaning bias value in situations such as being recovered from the paper jam. “Enable” • Enable: Sets the upper limit value for Vdc • Disable: Does not set the upper limit value for Vdc Disable Use Setting/ Procedure 241 Adjustment / Setting • The default setting is Enable.6.Field Service Ver.000 printed pages (sub scan direction: 216 mm or less) after the power has been turned ON • To select “Disable” for Transfer Belt Auto Cleaning if the wait time of 1-min. Print : To set the cleaning bias value for printing. cleaning sequence is to be eliminated “Enable” Disable 10. or cleaning the 2nd image transfer roller. 1. cleaning sequence for every 1. thereby preventing part of the Photo Conductor surface from being left uncleaned due to filming • To select “Disable” for IDC Table Correction if a higher density image is desired • The default setting is Enable.4 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Auto Cleaning • To carry out a 1-min.

6. Touch “Stabilizer Mode. NOTE • If the setting value has been changed. To increase T/C. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. Adjustment / Setting Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 242 .Check the copy image for any image problem.” 9. Call the Service Mode to the screen. To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking. 1. 1. 1.6 bizhub C450 Functions Field Service Ver.7 Functions TCR Level Setting • To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and carrier due to an environmental change. 3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.” 4. 10.6. 2. Touch “END” to return to the “Process” menu screen.” Select the color to be adjusted. To decrease T/C. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. decrease the setting value. • An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value. increase the setting value. 5. color. “0” (-10 to +10) To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking. 2005 D Max Density • To adjust gradation. Touch these keys in this order: “Process” → “TCR Level Setting. increase the setting value. decrease the setting value. 2. • Use when T/C changes due to changes in environmental conditions of the user site “0” (-3 to +3) The central value of 0 corresponds to 7 % of T/C (in 1. Check the copy image for any image problem.” 8. 7. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “D Max Density.0 Mar.” 3. Select the color to be adjusted. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10.0 % increments). and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of gamma of each color after Gradation Adjust. 6. Select “COPY” or “Printer. 5. Touch “END” to validate the adjustment value. 6. Touch “Stabilizer.10. Service Mode 10. be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value. 4.

0 Mar. 2nd Transfer Adjust Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. 4. 2. 10.” 3. on which the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Adjustment Procedure 243 Adjustment / Setting • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Background Voltage Margin. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch “END” to return to the “Image Adjust” menu screen. bizhub C450 .8 Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10. Select the paper type with the transfer failure at the trailing edge. Touch “Stabilization Only. decrease the setting value. Service Mode Background Voltage Margin • To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of γ of each color after Gradation Adjust.” 8.9 Transfer Adjust A. Touch “END” to validate the adjustment value. increase the setting value. 6. increase the setting value. “0” (-5 to +5) To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image). Select the color to be adjusted. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Transfer Adjust. 6. 2. 9. Touch “Stabilizer. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. NOTE • If the setting value has been changed.” 3. • Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem “0” (-5 to +5) To make the background level foggier. 5. Check the copy image for any image problem. 1. decrease the setting value.6.” 7. Check the copy image for any image problem. Select the side of the image (First side or Second side).6. 7. To make the background level less foggy. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. 4.Field Service Ver. 2005 10. To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image). be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value. 1. 5. 1.

2. 2. Initialize+Image Stabilization Functions Use • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized. NOTE • PC Drum memory (94mm pitch) may occur by taking measure to white spots occurred by increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust it. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1. 2. 10.” 5. • The value for the 1st image transfer adjustment will be reset when the new transfer belt unit is detected. “0” (-5 to +5) Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by. adjust with the following procedure. • When D Max Density and Background Voltage Margin of Service mode are changed.0 Mar. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green. 4. Service Mode B. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. 7. 1. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Initialize+Image Stabilization. Call the Service Mode to the screen. • To use when white spots appeared. When the test pattern image has white spots. 4. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. Select color/black. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Stabilization Only. Select “Test Mode” → “Halftone Pattern” to output the red or green test pattern.” 3. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Transfer Adjust.” 3. 6.10. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. Call the Service Mode to the screen. ☞ 288 3. 1. • Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Stabilizer Mode has been executed. Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting. Increasing it: Increase the setting value (white spots will decrease) Decreasing it: Decrease the setting value 1.10 Adjustment / Setting Stabilizer A. Stabilization Only Functions Use • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. 1st Transfer Adjust bizhub C450 Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Field Service Ver. 4. Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while checking the test pattern. Touch “OK” key to set the adjustment value. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. Change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad.6. Adjustment Procedure B. Adjustment Procedure 244 . 2005 • Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green. The value will be 0. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence.

Use Adjustment Procedure 245 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .13 Functions TCR Toner Supply • To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of copies have been made of originals having a high image density. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Thick Paper Density Adjustment.0 Mar. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. only a developer agitation sequence is carried out. • When there is a drop in T/C. if the density is lower than a reference value. 4. • It decreases the transfer output value so as to prevent a paper misfeed from occurring.” 3. These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density reaches the reference value. 2. • Use when a paper misfeed occurs when thin paper is used.12 Functions Thin Paper Duplex Mode • Turn this function ON when thin paper (64 g/m2) is used in an ambience of high temperature and high humidity in the 2-sided mode. Call the Service Mode to the screen.6. If the toner density is found to be higher than the reference value. Dark color: Touch the Lighter key. a toner replenishing sequence and then a developer agitation sequence are run.6.11 Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density. Light color: Touch the Darker key. 2. ON “OFF” Use Setting/ Procedure 10. two darker levels and two lighter levels around the standard central level. Select the color. 2005 10. • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies • The fine-adjustment can be made over a range of a total of five steps. Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and. 10.Field Service Ver. 1. 1. for which supply of toner is to be replenished.6. 1. Service Mode Thick Paper Density Adjustment • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transparencies. • The default setting is OFF.” 3. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “TCR Toner Supply.

6. • The default setting is OFF. Darker (2 steps) If the black is light. touch the Darker key. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density. such as in high altitudes.6. 2005 Monochrome Density Adjustment • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy • To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy Lighter (2 steps). it decreases the developing bias voltage.” 3. 1. thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring. 10. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Service Mode 10. If the black is dark. Touch these keys in this order: “Imaging Process Adjustment” → “Monochrome Density Adjustment.14 bizhub C450 Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Field Service Ver. ON “OFF” Use Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting 246 . “Std”. 2.10. 1. Bias Choice • To change the setting of the developing bias voltage • When this function is turned ON. • Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric pressure.0 Mar. touch the Lighter key.15 Functions Dev.

b. see the manual for the modem. and touch “Detail Setting” key. a.2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care bizhub C450 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up. and touch “ID Code” key again. see 256. Connect the modem and the wall jack with a modular cable. skip this step and proceed to Step 3. Data on setting 10. Data on adjustment d. Touch “RAM Clear” key. and input the Center ID (five digits). 2005 10. 3. and touch “ID Code” key. clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting. * For connecting the modular cable. The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered. Select Set.7 CS Remote Care 10.0 Mar. Inputting the ID Code 1. Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how often errors occur. 2. Connect the machine and the modem with a modem cable. and touch “Modem” key. and touch “OK.) Step 0 Procedure Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care Center. 3.7. Touch “Date & Time Setting” key.7. ☞ 256 1 2 4 5 6 247 . Select Service Mode → CS Remote Care. and touch “Set” key. Service Mode 10. 2. • CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble occurs. and touch “Detail Setting” key. (For recommended modem.” ☞ 256 NOTE • When Detail Setting key is not displayed. and touch “Detail Setting” key. Select Service Mode → CS Remove Care. 1. Input the seven digits ID of the service person. • When using the telephone line for connection. 3 Selecting the CS Remote Care function Select Service Mode → CS Remove Care → System Selection. use the recommended modem. Touch Machine Setting → Center ID.1 Outlines • CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone line in order to control the machine. It also enables the computer at the center to contact the machine for the necessary data. Connecting the modem Turn the power for the modem OFF. c. 2. Select Service Mode → CS Remote Care. time and the time zone using the 10-Key Pad.Field Service Ver. Select Service Mode → CS Remote Care → ID Code. Input the date. • Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups. ☞ For clearing the RAM. contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA. 2. Clearing the RAM 1. ☞ 256 Setting the Center ID 1. Data which show the status of use of the machine such as Total count. ☞ 255 Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care 1. PM count.

0 Mar.keys. NOTE • Change this Command only when it is necessary. Touch Machine Setting → Center Telephone Number key. Input AT Command. 1. Select Service Mode → CS Remote Care. 2. Telephone number of the Center and the Device telephone number have been input. When the machine is properly connected with the Center. 3. . Executing the initial transmission 1. ☞ 255 8 9 10 11 Adjustment / Setting 12 248 . Touch “initial transmission” key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission. 2. 3. W. Touch “AT Command” key. ☞ 256 Setting the telephone number of the Center 1. NOTE • The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the Center ID. Select Service Mode → CS Remote Care → and touch “Detail Setting” key. W. and input Device ID (nine digits). 2. 3. Touch Machine Setting → Device ID. Touch Machine Setting → Device Telephone Number key. Input the Device telephone number using the 10-Key Pad and P. and touch “Detail Setting” key. Service Mode Step Procedure Field Service Ver. Input the telephone number of the Center using the 10-Keys Pad and P. 2. Select Service Mode → CS Remote Care. T. the Device ID.10. T. (They do not need to be changed in normal condition. ☞ 256 Inputting the Device telephone number 1. 2.keys. Select Service Mode → CS Remote Care. CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed. and touch “Detail Setting” key. and touch “Detail Setting” key. Select Service Mode → CS Remote Care. Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition. 3. see the manual for the modem. ☞ 256 Inputting the AT command for initializing the modem 1.) • For details on AT Command. ☞ 257 Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care NOTE • This setting is not normally necessary. and touch “Detail Setting” key. . 2005 bizhub C450 7 Setting the Device ID 1.

List of software SW for CS Remote Care.7.” key.Field Service Ver. Touch “Switch No.0 Mar. (For setting by hexadecimal numbers. Touch “Fix” key. SW No. 2005 10. Input procedure 1. . Touch “Bit Assignment”. be sure to restore the previous state. see to “B. In case you changed bit data by accident. SW 01 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 03 0 1 2 3 Auto call on SC occurrence Auto call on date specification Auto call on the part replacement Auto call on the drum replacement Auto call on the periodic maintenance (PM) Auto call on the IU Life Auto call of the IR shortage Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed parts replacement. and input 0 or 1 using the 10-Key Pad.) 4. List of software SW for CS Remote Care NOTE • Do not change any bit not described on this table. Reservation Auto call on the toner supply Reservation Auto call on the waste toner bottle full Dial Mode Line for send only Reservation Reservation Baud rate Functions 0 Pulse No — — *1 *1 *1 *1 Do not call Do not call Do not call Do not call Do not call Do not call Do not call Do not call — Do not call — Do not call — — 1 Tone Yes — — *1 *1 *1 *1 Call Call Call Call Call Call Call Call — Call — Call — — Default 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 4 to 7 Reservation SW 04 0 to 7 Reservation 249 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 NOTE • SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. Service Mode A.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care 10. and input using the 1-Key Pad or A to F keys. and select SW bit number using the arrow keys.” B. NOTE • About functions of each switch. 2. and input the SW number (two digits) using the 10-Key Pad. touch “HEX Assignment” key. and touch “Software Switch Setting” key. 3. 1. Select Service Mode → “CS Remote Care” → “Detail Setting”.

Service Mode SW No. 2005 0 *2 *2 *2 *2 — *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 — Do not redial — *4 *4 *4 *4 — *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 Reservation — — *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 1 *2 *2 *2 *2 — *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 — Redial — *4 *4 *4 *4 — *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 — — *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 Default 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 bizhub C450 SW 05 1 to 7 Reserved SW 08 0 1 2 3 4 to 7 Reservation SW 09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 10 SW 11 Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error Adjustment / Setting 0 to 7 Reservation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Timer 1 RING reception → CONNECT reception 250 . Bit 0 1 2 3 4 to 7 Reservation SW 06 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 07 0 Reservation Redial for response time out Modem redial times Functions Modem redial interval Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar.10.

1.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. 2005 SW No. SW 12 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 13 SW 14 0 to 7 Reservation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 16 SW 17 SW 18 0 to 7 Reservation 0 to 7 Reservation 0 Attention display Timer 5 Wait time for other side's response Timer 4 Line connection → Start request telegram delivery Functions Timer 2 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception 0 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 — *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 — — Do not call — — 10. Service Mode 1 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 — *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 — — Call — — Default 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 to 7 Reservation SW 19 to SW 40 0 to 7 Reservation 251 Adjustment / Setting 1 bizhub C450 0 .

Service Mode *1: Baud rate bizhub C450 Mode 9600 bps 19200 bps “38400 bps” 01-7 0 0 1 01-6 1 1 0 Field Service Ver.0 Mar.10. 2005 01-5 1 1 0 01-4 0 1 0 *2: Modem redial interval Mode 1 minute 2 minutes “3 minutes” 4 minutes 5 minutes 6 minutes 7 minutes 8 minutes 9 minutes 10 minutes 05-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 05-2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 05-1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 05-0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 *3: Modem redial times Mode 06-6 06-5 06-4 06-3 06-2 06-1 06-0 Adjustment / Setting 0 to 9 times “10 times” 11 to 99 times 0 0 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 1 0 1 0 000 1011 to 110 0011 *4: Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error Mode 0 minute 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 40 minutes 50 minutes “60 minutes” 70 minutes 80 minutes 90 minutes 100 minutes 110 minutes 120 minutes 08-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 08-2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 08-1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 08-0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 252 . 1.

Field Service Ver.0 Mar. 1. 2005 *5: Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error Mode 0 to 9 times “10 times” 11 to 99 times 0 0 09-6 09-5 09-4 09-3 09-2 10. Service Mode 09-1 09-0 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 1 0 1 0 000 1011 to 110 0011 *6: Timer 1 (RING reception → CONNECT reception) Mode 0 to 31 sec “32 sec” 33 to 255 sec 0 0 1 11-7 11-6 11-5 11-4 11-3 11-2 11-1 11-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 0 0 0 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 *7: Timer 2 (Dial request completed → CONNECT reception) Mode 0 to 63 sec “64 sec” 65 to 255 sec 0 1 0 12-7 12-6 12-5 12-4 12-3 12-2 12-1 12-0 0000 0000 to 0011 1111 0 0 0 0 0 0100 0001 to 1111 1111 *8: Timer 4 (Line connection → Start request telegram delivery) Mode 0 to 31 (x 100 msec) “32 (x 100 msec)” 33 to 255 (x 100 msec) 0 0 1 14-7 14-6 14-5 14-4 14-3 14-2 14-1 14-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 *9: Timer 5 (Wait time for other side’s response) Mode 0 to 29 sec “30 sec” 31 to 255 sec 0 0 0 15-7 15-6 15-5 15-4 15-3 15-2 15-1 15-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1101 1 1 1 1 0 0001 1111 to 1111 1111 253 Adjustment / Setting 0 0 0 0 0 bizhub C450 .

Select Service Mode and touch “CS Remote Care” key. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. 1.10. and input ID Code. 1. 1.4 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. When finishing the Maintenance 1. inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which CE can identify.0 Mar. Touch “Maintenance Complete” key. 2. Service Mode 10. 2005 Setup confirmation • Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set up. Check to make sure that only selected item is displayed. 3. 3. When the maintenance is finished.7. Touch “ID Coke” key. When starting the Maintenance Select Service Mode and touch “CS Remote Care” key. 10. Touch “CS Remote Care” key. 2.) will transmit the information to the Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. They are controlled by the distributor. * The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.5 Calling the Maintenance • When CE starts maintenance. Touch “ID Code” key.7. B. A. Adjustment / Setting 254 . touching “Maintenance Complete” key will transmit the information to the Center and tells that it is finished.

3. or Fax. and the transmission is not available. • Use to newly build or change the system. Touch “Admin.Field Service Ver. 3. Modem. NOTE • For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date and time. and touch “Detail setting” key. Press the Start key. 4.0 Mar. (0000001 to 9999999) <Registration> • Touch ID Code and enter the Service ID. 2. 255 bizhub C450 • When the CS Remote Care setup is complete. Press the Start key to output transmission log. the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center. transmission” key. • Touch “ID code” key to register the ID. 1. • Select E-Mail.8 Detail on settings A. Touch “Communication Log Print” key. • The “Detail Setting” key will appear when the ID has been registered. 10. When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out.7. System Selection Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the system type for remote diagnosis. ID Code Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the Service ID. Load Tray 1 or Bypass tray with A4R paper. • Use when registering and changing Service ID. the Admin. 10. Select Service Mode → “CS Remote Care”. E-Mail (Not Used) Modem Fax (Not Used) B. Service Mode 1. and touch “System Connection” key. 2.7. • Fax is available only when the optional Fax kit is being installed.7.6 Calling the Center from the Administrator 10.7 Checking the transmission log • The transmission log list will be output to be checked. 1. 2005 10. Select “Administrator Setting”. transmission key will not be displayed. • Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-Key Pad. . refer to the manual for CS Remote Care Center.

Touch “SET” to start the clock. 4. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure (3) RAM Clear Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To clear the following data at the Center ID Code.) (2) Date/Time Input Functions • To set the data and time-of-day • Use to set or change the date and time-of-day. 3.0 Mar. Field Service Ver. Detail Setting (1) Machine Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Execute the primary setting. 1. • Use to clear various types of data of the Center.10. Enter the date (month.” 3. (Only when the Modem or Fax is selected on the system Input. Device ID. day and year). • When the system is selected to E-Mail.[#] : To be used as necessary Initial Transmission • Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care Center to register the machine. 2. 10-Keys and keys on the screen have following meanings. Touching the “Detail Setting” will display the primary setting. and the time zone from the 10Key Pad.” Enable “Disable” 256 . Call the Service Mode to the screen. • To be used for resetting CS Remote Care. • The default setting is “Disable. Primary Setting • Set the Center ID. Touch “CS Remote Care. time-of-day. 1. and Common DT.” Touch “Detail Setting” to access Date/Time Input. Service Mode C. Date/Time Input. the phone No. 2005 bizhub C450 • Use to change the set contents. Primary Setting. Touch “CS Remote Care. • Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care Center. Call the Service Mode to the screen. * When entering the phone No. will be the mail address. 5. 2. [-] Pose : Waits to start transmitting after dialing [W] Wait : Detects the dial tone of the other end [T] Tone dial : Carry out tone dialing [P] Pulse dial : Carry out pulse dialing [*]. and the phone No. 1.

Load Tray 1 or Bypass Tray with A4R paper. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 5. 4. E. D. 10. see 249.Field Service Ver. 1. • To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization. 2005 (4) Communication Log Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To print out the Communication Log. Touch “CS Remote Care. 1. • This setting is available only when “Modem” is selected for the system setting. • Enter the command and touch “SET” to register.0 Mar. 2. • To change the settings for CS Remote Care as necessary. Press Start key to print out the Communication Log. • Use to output and use the Communication Log. Server set Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Not Used. 3. 257 bizhub C450 . ☞ For procedures on settings. Service Mode (5) Software SW Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the CS Remote Care settings. AT Command Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization.” Touch “Detail Setting” to access Communication Log Print. (6) Response Time Out Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Not Used.

Redial. Error on sending a message. NO ANSWER detected in the modem. Telegram error (irregular telegram received in response to the telegram you sent). tion (after the start telegram shuttled). Confirm the serial number. - K01_00 K01_01 K01_02 K01_03 K01_04 K01_05 DSR turned OFF or remains turned OFF. - K02_01 Modem initialization NG. and line disconnected. Could not be written in non-volatile memory. Error on creating a message queue.0 Mar.7. and redial. Redial. no start telegram Redial and wait for re-reception. Confirm the center ID. Errors not defined in the above -00 to 15 (last 2 digits). Redial. Adjustment / Setting K00_11 K00_12 K00_13 K00_14 K00_15 K00_16 K00_17 Redial. Service Mode 10. Error on receiving a message. Unread item error. Dialtone (NO DIALTONE) detected in the modem. Solution Redial and wait for re-reception.10. Center ID mismatch. Serial number mismatch. Received a write order for an unwritable item. - 258 . Telephone number you must call was not registered. from the center detected). Error code K00_00 K00_01 K00_02 K00_03 K00_04 K00_05 K00_06 K00_07 K00_08 K00_09 K00_10 Error Connection NG (Cannot connect from the modem. Retry standard times. Redial. Redial. 2005 List of the CS Remote Care error code NOTE • Error codes in the shaded region may occur when transmitting from the machine to the center. Copying. timed out). Busy signal (BUSY) detected in the modem. No response (After connection. Already registered serial number. 1. Communication error occurred because of the carrier OFF (NO CARRIER detected in the modem). Grammar error (when receiving undefined commands or parameters).9 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Received an error (NG) from the timer task. Error on generating a task. Serial number not registered in the center (4 x 40 telegrams received). - Signal reception time out after a response detecRedial.

In the auto transmission. retry when the machine is idling. check the following. In the manual transmission. Check if there is no fault in the network environment and the network settings. an automatic retry is performed after 1 minute. 1.Field Service Ver. unable to secure enough area for sending a mail. In the auto transmission. In the auto transmission. • The power for the modem is ON.0 Mar. • The phone line is properly connected. 2005 Error code K03_00 Error Center call evacuation buffer is full. K05_94 Machine in operation: unable to send a mail because the machine is in operation. K05_93 Mail sending error: an error was returned on sending a mail. an automatic retry is performed after 1 minute. Service Mode Solution K05_92 Controller in operation: unable to send a mail because the controller is in operation.7. In the manual transmission. - 10.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care If the transmission is not normal when using the modem. an automatic retry is performed after the specified time. retry when the controller is idling. Adjustment / Setting 259 bizhub C450 . 10. K05_90 Because of memory shortage. Cannot evacuate any more.

10. Service Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

10.8 System 1
bizhub C450

10.8.1
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Marketing Area
• To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to the applicable marketing area. • Upon setup. <Marketing Area> • Select the applicable marketing area and touch “END” to set the marketing area. JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 ✽ These are the languages that can be selected on the Utility screen according to different marketing area settings: Japan US Europe Others1, Others2 Others3 English, Japanese English, French, Spanish, Japanese German, English, French, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish, Swedish, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, Finnish, Czech, Hungarian, Japanese

<Fax Target> 1. Touch the Fax Target key. 2. Select the applicable marketing area using + and - keys, and touch “END.”

10.8.2
Adjustment / Setting
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Tel/Fax Number
• To enter the TEL/FAX number of the service contact that will appear on the Touch Panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine. • Upon setup. • Enter the TEL/FAX number (19 digits) from the 10-Key Pad. • Use Interrupt key to enter “-.”

10.8.3
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Serial Number
• To register the serial numbers of the machine and options. • The numbers will be printed on the list output. • Upon setup. • Type the serial numbers. 9 digits (0 to 9) Printer, Scanner, ADF, LCT, Sorter/FN, Duplex, Vender, Fax1

10.8.4
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

No Sleep
• To display the option of “OFF” for the Sleep Mode Setting screen available from Administrator Setting. • To display the option of “OFF” for the Sleep Mode Setting. • The default setting is “Prohibit.” Permit “Prohibit”

260

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 10.8.5
Functions Use

10. Service Mode

Original Size Detection
• To change the document size detection table. • Use to change the setting for the document size detection table. Copy Glass : To change the size detection table for the document glass. ADF : To set whether or not to detect 18k/16k while using ADF (only when marketing area is Europe)

Setting/ Procedure

<Copy Glass> • The default setting is “Table1.” “Table1” Table2

NOTE • Table 2 can be set only when Original Size Detection Sensor FD2 is being mounted. <ADF> • The default setting is “Disable.” Enable “Disable”

10.8.6
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Foolscap Size Setting
• To set the size for Foolscap paper. • Upon setup. • To change the size for Foolscap paper. • Select the size from among the following five.

10.8.7

Initialization

A. Data Clear
Functions Use • To initialize the setting data. • To clears the setting data. ☞ For details on items to be cleared, see page 299 “Contents to be cleared by Reset function.” NOTE • When removing or installing the hard disk after registering the data below, be sure to clear the data. Referring data: One-Touch Registration, User Authentication/Account Track. Setting/ Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 2. Select the key as follows. “System 1” → “Initialization” → “Data clear.” 3. Press the Start key. 4. When “OK” is displayed, turn the main power switch OFF, and ON again.

261

Adjustment / Setting

220 x 330 mm

81/2 x 13

81/4 x 13

81/8 x 131/4

8 x 13

bizhub C450

10. Service Mode B. System Error Clear
bizhub C450
Functions Use • To reset the trouble data.

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

• Use to clear the “Jam”, “Trouble”, “Error” displays, and other improper displays.

☞ For details on items to be cleared, see page 299 “Contents to be cleared by Reset
function.” Setting/Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 2. Select the key as follows. “System 1” → “Initialization” → “System Error Clear.” 3. Press the Start key. 4. When “OK” is displayed, turn the main power switch OFF, and ON again.

10.8.8
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Install Date
• To register the date the main unit was installed. • Upon setup. 1. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 2. Select the key as follows. “System 1” → “Install Date.” 3. Enter the date (Year 4 digit → Month 2 digit → date 2 digit) from the 10-Key Pad. 4. Touch “Entry” key to set the date of installation.

10.9 System 2
10.9.1
Adjustment / Setting
Functions Use Setting/Procedure • Not Used.

HDD

262

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 10.9.2
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

10. Service Mode

Image Controller Setting
• To set the type of the controller. • “Peripheral Mode” appears when “Others” is selected. • When setting up the controller. Image Controller Setting • Select the controller to be used. “Controller 0” : The standard controller is used. Controller 1 : Fiery Controller 2 : An external controller is used. Controller 3 : An external controller is used. Others : An external controller is used. ☞ See the Setup Instructions for the Controller. Peripheral Mode • Select the operating mode of the Scanner. Mode 1: Not use Mode 2: Not use Mode 3: Not use NOTE • When the setting has been changed, turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. Note on returning the setting from “Controller 1” to “Controller 0”. • Selecting “Controller 0” will initialize the following settings made while “Controller 1” was selected. Reset the following items as necessary when using the Internal Standard Controller. <Control Panel on the machine> • Setting items included in [Network Setting] available from [Administrator Setting]. (Except [Status Notification Setting] and [Prefix/Suffix Setting] available from the following setting. [Administrator Setting] - [Network Setting] - [Detail Setting].) • The following setting [Administrator Setting] - [User Authentication /Account Track] - [General Settings] [External Server] • The following setting [Administrator Setting] - [System Connection] - [IS OpenAPI Setting] <Page Scope Web Connection> • SSL/TLS

10.9.3
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Option Board Status
• To set when the Optional Fax Mount Kit, Local Interface Kit is mounted. • Use when setting up the Optional Fax Mount Kit, Local Interface Kit is mounted. • Setting modes are Fax (Main) and local I/F. • The default setting is “Unset.” Fax (Main) Fax (Sub) local I/F JPEG :Set “Unset” :Not Used :Set “Unset” :Not Used

NOTE • When the setting has been changed, turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch.

263

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C450

10. Service Mode 10.9.4
bizhub C450
Functions

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

Consumable Life Reminder
• To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime PM parts lifetime display: An entire screen warning is given when the service life of a specific unit has been reached, prompting the user to replace the part. • Applicable units: Transfer Belt Unit, Fusing Unit, Paper Dust Remover/Ozone Filter, Transfer Roller Unit, IU (C, M, Y, K) • Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime. • The default setting is “Yes.” “Yes” No

Use Setting/ Procedure

10.9.5
Functions

Unit Change
• To select who is to replace a unit. • When the unit life arrives, the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit. When “User” is selected : Copying is inhibited. When “Service” is selected : Life warning. • Upon setup • The following are the default settings: US, Japan, Others 4 : “User” Service : User “Service” : User “Service” : User “Service” Europe, Others1/2/3 “User” Service “User” Service “User” Service “User” Service

Use Setting/ Procedure

Adjustment / Setting

Toner Cartridge Imaging Unit Waste Toner Box Punch Dust Box

10.9.6
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Software Switch Setting

• Not Used

10.9.7
Functions Use

Scan Caribration
• To set whether to use the calibration adjustment value set prior to the shipping. • To be used when CCD unit has bee changed. After replacing the CCD unit, the default value needs to be set since the calibration value set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD). • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF

Setting/ Procedure

NOTE • When the setting is changed, the function becomes available by turning the auxiliary power button OFF and ON again.

264

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 10.9.8
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

10. Service Mode

LCT Paper Size Setting
• To set the paper size for the LCT • Use to change the paper size for the LCT. The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area. A4 81/2 x 11

10.9.9
Functions Use

Line Mag Setting
• To set whether t use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping. • To be used after replacing the CCD unit. After replacing the CCD unit, the default value needs to be set since the magnification offset value between the lines set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD). • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF

Setting/ Procedure

NOTE • When the setting is changed, the function becomes valid by turning the auxiliary power button OFF and ON again.

265

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C450

10. Service Mode 10.9.10
bizhub C450
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

Data Capture
• When an error occurs, it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the error. • When an error occurs, this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to the print job data. NOTE • The following conditions are necessary for this function. When selecting “Security Setting” → “Security Details” → “Print Data Capture” in Administrator Setting, “Allow” must be set. • The hard disk must be mounted to the machine. • When selecting “Administrator Setting” → “Network Setting” → “FTP Setting”, “FTP Server: ON” must be set. • This function is not available when using the optional L-controller (IC-402). 1. Select Service Mode → “System 2”, and touch “Data Capture. Select “ON.” (While the Data Capture setting is “ON”, the print job data from the PC will be stored in the hard disk.) 2. Check the IP address of the machine. 3. Connect the PC (Windows) and the machine with Ethernet cable. 4. Start the DOS command prompt of the PC, and specify the IP address of the machine to start FTP.

Adjustment / Setting

4037F3E538DA

5. Input the user name and the password. User name: capture Password: sysadm

4037F3E539DA

266

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

10. Service Mode

6. Using the “ls” command, display the list of the file available for capture.

4037F3E540DA

7. Using the “binary” command, set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer.

4037F3E541DA

267

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C450

10. Service Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

8. Using the “get” command, transfer the data for capture to PC.

bizhub C450

4037F3E542DA

9. Finish the command prompt. NOTE • When the data capture is set to “ON”, all print job data will be stored in the hard disk. • After receiving capture data, select “Administrator Setting” → “Security Setting” → “Security Detail”, and select “Restrict” for Print Data Capture in order to delete the job data stored in the hard disk.

Adjustment / Setting

268

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

10. Service Mode

10.10 Counter
• The Counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the Technical Representative to check or set as necessary. 10.10.1 Procedure
bizhub C450 Adjustment / Setting

1. Touch “Counter” to show the Counter menu. 2. Select the specific counter to be displayed. 3. To clear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at once, touch “Counter Reset,” select the specific counters to be cleared, and touch “END.” Two or more counters can be selected. 10.10.2
Functions

Life
• To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been used. • To clear the count of each counter. • When each of the maintenance parts is replaced. • To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation. • It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the Fusing Unit, Transfer Belt Unit, and IU, which are provided with a new unit detection function. <1> • Fusing Unit • Transfer Roller Unit • Transfer Belt Unit • Paper Dust Remover/ Ozone Filter • 1st. • 2nd. • 3rd. • 4th. • Manual Tray <2> • Cyan IU • Magenta IU • • • • • •

Use Setting/ Procedure

: Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 1 : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 2 : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 3 : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 4 : Number of sheets of paper fed from the Bypass

: Period of time over which the Cyan Developing Unit has been used. : Period of time over which the Magenta Developing Unit has been used. Yellow IU : Period of time over which the Yellow Developing Unit has been used. Black IU : Period of time over which the Black Developing Unit has been used. LCT Parts : Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT ADF Feed : Number of sheets of paper fed through the take-up section of the ADF ADF Reverse : Number of sheets of paper fed through the turnover unit of the ADF Sorter/Finisher : Number of sheets of paper fed out of the Sorter/Finisher

269

10. Service Mode 10.10.3
bizhub C450
Functions

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

Jam
• To check the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the machine. • To clear the count of each counter. • To check the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred • To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.

Use Setting/ Procedure

10.10.4
Functions

Service Call Counter
• To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different locations in the machine • To clear the count of each counter. • To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred • To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.

Use Setting/ Procedure

10.10.5
Functions Use

Warning
• To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type • To clear the count of each counter. • To check the number of warning conditions that have been detected • To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation. • When a warning condition occurs, an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the Basic screen. • Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen.

Adjustment / Setting

Setting/ Procedure

10.10.6
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Maintenance
• To set a count value for maintenance of any given part. • When any given part is replaced. Maint.-Set • Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-Key Pad. Maint.-Count • Counts up when a sheet of paper is fed through the machine. • Pressing the Clear key will clear the count. • If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.

270

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 10.10.7
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

10. Service Mode

Service Total
• To display the count value for the service total counter. • Use to check the total No. of printed pages including the ones printed by the Service Mode. Service Total : No. of pages printed by User mode and Service Mode. Service Total (Duplex) : No. of pages printed by User mode and Service Mode in Duplex.

10.10.8
Functions Use

Counter of Each Mode
• To display the printed pages in the following specified modes; Copy, Printer, Scanner, and Fax. It also displays the count value of using the specified mode. • Use to check the printed pages in the following specified modes; Copy, Printer, Scanner, and Fax, as well as No. of times each mode was used, in order to know the using condition.

10.10.9
Functions Use

Service Call History (Data)
• To display the trouble history in chronological order. • Use to check the trouble history in chronological order.

10.10.10 ADF Paper Pages
Functions Use • To display the No. of pages fed to the Automatic Document Feeder. • Use to check the No. of pages fed to the Automatic Document Feeder.

10.10.11 Paper Jam History
Functions Use • To display the jam history in chronological order. • Use to check the jam history in chronological order.

10.10.12 Fax Connection failed
Functions Use • To display the No. of Fax transmission errors occurred. • Use to check the No. of Fax transmission errors occurred.

271

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C450

10. Service Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

10.11 List Output
bizhub C450

10.11.1
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Machine Management List
• To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, Total Counter values, and others. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. • • • • Load the A4R plain paper to a paper source. Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list. Data printed is in English (alphanumeric characters). The time-of-day and date will also be printed.

10.11.2
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Adjustment List
• To output the adjustment list for machine adjustment, process adjustment, etc. in Service Mode. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. • • • • Load the A4R plain paper to a paper source. Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list. Data printed is in English (alphanumeric characters). The time-of-day and date will also be printed.

10.11.3 ☞

Parameter

For details, see FK-502 Service Manual. Service Parameter

10.11.4
Adjustment / Setting

For details, see FK-502 Service Manual. Protocol Trace

10.11.5 ☞

For details, see FK-502 Service Manual. Fax Setting List

10.11.6 ☞

For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.

272

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

10. Service Mode

10.12 State Confirmation
10.12.1
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Sensor Check
• To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary. • Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs. • The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time basis. • It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a cover is open.

A. Electrical Components Check Procedure Through Input Data Check Example • When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper take-up section of the machine, the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor is considered to be responsible for it. 1. Remove the sheet of paper misfed. 2. From the Sensor Check List that follows, check the panel display of the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor. For the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor, you check the data of “Take-Up” of “Tray 2.” 3. Call the Service mode to the screen. 4. Select “State Confirmation” → “Sensor Check” and then select the screen that contains “Take-Up” under “Tray 2.” For “Take-Up” under “Tray 2,” select “1” on the left-hand side of the screen. 5. Check that the data for “Take-Up” under “Tray 2” is “0” (sensor blocked). 6. Move the actuator to unblock the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor. 7. Check that the data for “Take-Up” under “Tray 2” changes from “0” to “1” on the screen. 8. If the input data is “0,” change the sensor.

273

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C450

10. Service Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C450

B. Sensor Check Screens • These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each individual machine.

4037F3E506DA

274

PC-202) Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name 10.Field Service Ver. Service Mode Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position PC14 PC2 PC13 PC1 PC103 PC106 PC104 PC108 PC107 PC105 PC112-PF PC115-PF PC113-PF PC117-PF PC116-PF PC114-PF PC121-PF PC124-PF PC122-PF PC126-PF PC125-PF PC123-PF Tray 1 Device Detection Paper Empty Near Empty Chain Feed Tray 2 Device Detection Paper Empty Near Empty Vertical Transport Take-Up Upper Limit Tray 3 Device Detection Paper Empty Near Empty Vertical Transport Take-Up Upper Limit Tray 4 Device Detection Paper Empty Near Empty Vertical Transport Take-Up Upper Limit Tray 1 Set Sensor Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor Tray 1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor Tray 2 Set Sensor Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Tray 2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor Tray 3 Set Sensor Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Tray 3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray 3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor Tray 4 Set Sensor Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Tray 4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray 4 Lift-Up Sensor In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position 275 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 1. 2005 C. PC-102.0 Mar. Sensor Check List (1) Sensors 1 (Main Unit.

2005 Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Not at raised position Paper present Paper not present Paper not present Not OHP Loop not present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked bizhub C450 PC111 PC112 PC113 PC114 PC115 PC110 PC28 PC30 PC27 PC4 PC10 PC35 PC11 PC36 Manual Multi FD Size1 Multi FD Size2 Multi FD Size3 Multi FD Size4 Lift-Up Position Sensor Paper Empty Paper Registration Pas.Roller sage Exit OHP Detect Fusing Loop Detect PC Color PC Drive Drive Main Sensor Detect Color PC Drive Sub Sensor Black PC Drive Main Sensor Black PC Drive Sub Sensor Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 Bypass Lift-Up Sensor Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Registration Roller Sensor Exit Sensor OHP Sensor Fusing Paper Loop Sensor Color PC Drum Main Sensor Color PC Drum Sub Sensor K PC Drum Main Sensor K PC Drum Sub Sensor ON ON ON ON At raised position Paper not present Paper present Paper present OHP Loop present Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Adjustment / Setting 276 .0 Mar.10. 1. Service Mode Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name Field Service Ver.

2005 D.Field Service Ver. Paper Detect Unit Reverse Sensor Paper Sensor Turnover Empty Sensor 277 Adjustment / Setting Out of home bizhub C450 . Sensors 2 (Main Unit. Service Mode Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 Not at raised position PC4-LCT PC13-LCT PC12-LCT PC11-LCT PC1-LCT PC2-LCT PWBELCT PC3-LCT PC9-LCT PC7-LCT UN1-LCT PC14-LCT PC6-LCT PC8-LCT PC10-LCT PI2-DU PI1-DU PC1-DU PC1-HO PC6-HO LCT Lift-Up Upper Lift-Up Lower Shift Tray Home Shift Tray Stop Take-Up Vertical Transport Paper Empty Tray Upper Limit Sensor Tray Lower Position Sensor Shifter Home Position Sensor Shifter Return Position Sensor Paper Feed Sensor LCT Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Empty Board At raised position At lower limit Not at lower limit At home At stop position Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Malfunction ON At home In position Blocked Blocked Close Paper present Paper present Paper not present Paper present Out of home Not at stop position Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Operational OFF Main Tray Empty Upper Paper Empty Sensor Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Lower Over Run Lower Limit Sensor Manual Button Down Division Board Position Cassette Open Paper Descent Key Shift Gate Home Position Sensor Tray Set Sensor Out of position Unblocked Unblocked Open Paper not present Paper not present Paper present Paper not present Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Duplex Set Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Paper Passage1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper Passage2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Hori.0 Mar. 1.Horizontal zontal Transport Trans. PC-402) Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name 10.

Retraction fer Belt Waste Toner Full Toner Toner Box Set Fusing Set Unit Fuser Roller Retraction Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/C Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/M Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Y Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/K Toner Set Sensor/C Toner Set Sensor/M Toner Set Sensor/Y Toner Set Sensor/K 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Sensor 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor Waste Toner Full Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Fusing Unit In-Position Detection Signal Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor Toner not present Toner not present Toner not present Toner not present Out of position Out of position Out of position Out of position Not Retracted Not Retracted Blocked In position In position Not Retracted PC12 PC31 Retracted Unblocked Out of position Out of position Retracted Adjustment / Setting PC32 – PC33 278 .0 Mar. Service Mode Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name Field Service Ver.10.C Toner Empty oping M Toner Empty Y Toner Empty K Toner Empty C Toner Set M Toner Set Y Toner Set K Toner Set 2nd Retraction Transfer Trans. 1. 2005 Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 Toner present Toner present Toner present Toner present In position In position In position In position Retracted bizhub C450 PC17 PC16 PC15 PC18 PC19 PC26 PC25 PC20 PC29 Devel.

) Empty (Elev. Sensors 3 (FS-507. JS-601) 10. 1.Field Service Ver. Tray) Empty (Finisher) Surface (Elev.0 Mar. 2005 E. Service Mode Symbol PC1-FN Panel Display Part/Signal Name 1st Tray Exit Sensor Job Tray Exit Sensor Storage Sensor Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Multi Exit (Non-sort1) Staple PC19-FN Finisher Exit (Non-sort3) PC3-FN PC4-FN PC2-FN PC6-FN PC20-FN PC7-FN PC5-FN PWB-D FN PC8-FN PC9-FN PC14-FN PC12-FN PC13-FN Exit (Finisher) Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Blocked Paper present Blocked Paper present Paper present Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Upper Paper Pass Upper Entrance Sensor Transport Lower Full (Non-sort1) Full (Non-sort3) Full (Elev.) Home (CD-Align) Staple Standby Home (Store roller) Home (Exit roller) Punch2/3 Position SW Punch Speed Lower Entrance Sensor 1st Tray Full Sensor Job Tray Full Sensor Elevator Tray Full Sensor Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor Elevator Tray Paper Sensor CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Exit Roller Home Position Sensor PC11-FN S2-FN S3-FN PC10-FN Stapler 1 Shift Speed Elevate Tray Raised/Lowered Home (Shift) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch Shift Home Position Sensor Unblocked ON Blocked Blocked OFF Unblocked - Home Staple Empty Self Priming Staple Home 1 Staple Empty 1 Staple Self Priming 1 Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked - Stapler 2 Home Staple Empty Self Priming Staple Home 2 Staple Empty 2 Staple Self Priming 2 Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked 279 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .

Shift Upper Limit Sensor Shift Lower Limit Sensor Shift Motor Clock Sensor — Slide Home Position Sensor Staple Drive Home Position Sensor Staple Detecting Sensor — Paper full HP HP Staples loaded No staple loaded Stapler connection detected Open READY Open Open MS3-FN MS4-FN PI21-FN PI22-FN PI23-FN Stapler Safety SW Staple Safety Switch (Rear) Staple Safety Switch (Front) Self Prime Front Door Upper Cover Self-Priming Sensor Front Door Open Sensor Upper Cover Open Sensor 280 . 1.Entrance dle Stitch Paddle Home Finisher Bundle Roller Home Front Align Back Align Alignment Tray Home (Exit Belt) Crease Position Crease Tray Crease Home Crease Roller Home Crease Clock Paper Paper Surface Part/Signal Name Entrance Sensor Paddle Home Position Sensor Swing Guide Home Position Sensor Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Finisher Tray Sensor Exit Belt Home Position Sensor Folding Position Sensor Saddle Tray Sensor Folding Home Position Sensor Folding Roller Home Position Sensor Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor Exit Tray Sensor Exit Tray Home Position Sensor Paper present HP HP HP HP Paper present HP Paper present Paper present HP HP Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Adjustment / Setting PI8-FN PI9-FN Paper present Paper surface detected Upper limit Lower limit Paper not present PI15-FN PI16-FN PI17-FN — PI18-FN PI19-FN PI20-FN — Lift Raised Position Lift Lowered Position Lift Clock Lift Middle Slide Home Stapler Home Staple Stapler Connect. bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Service Mode F. 2005 Sensors 4 (FS-603.10.0 Mar. PK-501) Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Paper not present Symbol PI1-FN PI2-FN PI3-FN PI4-FN PI5-FN PI6-FN PI7-FN PI10-FN PI13-FN PI11-FN PI12-FN PI14-FN Panel Display Sad.

Field Service Ver. side Open MS1-FN — MS2-FN — — — — — — PI3P-PK PI1P-PK PI2P-PK PC6-HO Saddle Stitch Finisher Front Door SW Remain in Reverse Section Joint SW Front Door Open Sensor — Joint Open Sensor — — — — — — Punch Motor Clock Sensor Punch Home Position Sensor Side Registration Home Sensor Horizontal Unit Door Sensor Blocked HP HP Blocked Punch trash full Punch Punch Depth1 Unit Punch Depth2 Punch Depth3 Punch Depth4 Punch Dust Punch Timing Punch Motor Clock Punch (Home) Punch Depth Home Horizontal Transport Door Unblocked 281 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name .0 Mar. Service Mode Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 0 Open Paper horiz. 2005 10. 1.

Use Setting/ Procedure 282 . 1.not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded.10. correct so that the image density becomes high. Vg: around 550 V • Used for troubleshooting of image problems.not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded.not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded. Service Mode G. Y K Vdc: around 390 V. 2005 Operation Characteristics/Panel Display 1 At home Lowered Less than 20° 0 Out of home Raised 20° or more Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Original Original not loaded. Sensors 5 (Main Unit) bizhub C450 Symbol Panel Display PC201 SW201 PC202 PC203 Scan. not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded.0 Mar. • If the value is high. • If the value is low.2 Functions Table Number • To display the Vg/Vdc output values calculated for the image density of the test pattern (amount of toner sticking) produced on the Transfer Belt during an AIDC detection sequence.12. Original Cover Detecti 20 Degree ng Sensor Original Size Detection 1 Original Size Detection 2 Original Size Detection 3 Original Size Detection 4 Original Size Detection 5 Original Size Detection 6 Original Size Detection 7 Original Size Detection 8 Part/Signal Name Scanner Home Sensor Size Reset Switch Original Cover Angle Sensor Field Service Ver.not loaded mounted PC204 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 PC204 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 PC205 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 PC205 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 PC206 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 Adjustment / Setting PC206 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 PC207 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 10. M.Home Sensor ner Org.not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded. correct so that the image density becomes low.not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded.not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded. • Reference values: C.

12. and BO and BE should be within 30.12. G. • ATVC (2nd) : Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 V to 5000 V). GAIN : The difference from the CLAMP values (R.6 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure CCD Check • To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R. The difference between each pair of RO and RE. Service Mode Level History1 • To display TCR (T/C ratio). 1.Field Service Ver.12. Temp-Press. • Used for troubleshooting of image problems. and min. CLAMP: The difference between the max.0 Mar.3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. • • • • • Machine interior temperature Temperature on Fusing Belt side Temperature on fusing pressure side Machine interior humidity Absolute humidity : 0 to 100 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 100 % in 1 % increments : 0 to 100 in 1 increments 10. • Used for troubleshooting for the CCD Sensor. IDC1/IDC2 : Shows the latest IDC data. • • • • TCR-C/-M/-Y/-K: Shows the T/C output reading taken last. GO and GE. 10. • IDC Sensor: Shows the intensity adjustment value (0 to 255) of the IDC Sensor. 10. IDC/Regist Sensor output values. output values should be within ±100. • Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values.12. “Reading taken last” means • Density of toner of the latest image • When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while Level History 1 is being displayed. and fusing temperature. B) should be within (90 for R and B. K): Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 V to 3000 V). and B. M. The difference from the CLAMP value (G) should be within ±50 for G. 283 bizhub C450 . : Shows the latest Fusing Pressure Roller temperature data. Temp-Belt : Shows the latest Heating Roller temperature data.5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Temp. 2005 10. • Used for troubleshooting of image problems. Y.4 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Level History2 • IDC Sensor (Transfer Belt bare surface level) as adjusted through the image stabilization sequence and ATVC value. • Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs. & Humidity Adjustment / Setting • To display the temperature and humidity of a specific location (AIDC Sensor portion) inside the machine and fusing temperature. • ATVC (C.

Service Mode 10. the results are shown on the screen. 2005 Memory / HDD Adj.” 3. 1. ✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. 2. 1.0 Mar. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 4. and from memory to printer. 2. either Rough Check or Detail Check. Select the desired type of check. Touch these keys in this order: “State Confirmation” → “Memory / HDD Adj. Use Adjustment Procedure • If the copy image is faulty. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decompression check sequence. 1. 4. “OK” or “NG. check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one.” → “Memory Bus Check.” → “Compress / Decompression Check. If the check results are NG. When the check procedure is completed.12. Adjustment / Setting Use Adjustment Procedure C. The check result will be displayed. • The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automatically. A. Touch these keys in this order: “State Confirmation” → “Memory / HDD Adj. • If the copy image is faulty. Press the Start key to start the check procedure. Memory Check Functions • To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write/read check.” → “Memory Check.” “Memory → PRT. Detail Check • A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made at the addresses and buses in all areas. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1. 5.7 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 4. • If the copy image is faulty.” or both. Rough Check • A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very limited area. Touch these keys in this order: “State Confirmation” → “Memory / HDD Adj. Compress / Decompression Check Functions • To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly.” 284 .” 3. 2.” 3. 5. ✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. Memory Bus Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory. Select either “Scanner → Memory. The check result will be displayed.10. (Only Rough Check) B.

Use Adjustment Procedure 285 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 2. Touch these keys in this order: “State Confirmation” → “Memory / HDD Adj.0 Mar. Work Memory In/Out Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure 10. “OK” or “NG. the malfunction code “C-D010” will appear. HDD Format Functions • To format the hard disk • The function proceeds in the order of Physical Format to Logical Format. 4. 2. 4. 2.” ✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. Touch “Logical Format. 5. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.” (1) Physical Format 1. • When the hard disk is mounted. Call the Service Mode to the screen.” → “Work Memory In/Out Check. 2005 D.” → “HDD Format. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed. ✽ Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it. Call the Service Mode to the screen. The check result will be displayed. • If the print image is faulty. 3. 1. Select either “Input Check. Service Mode • To check to see if input and output of image data of work memory are correctly performed. Touch these keys in this order: “State Confirmation” → “Memory / HDD Adj. 4.Field Service Ver.” 2.” “Output Check. • When the hard disk is to be initialized. (2) Logical Format (Only when initial is set up) 1.” 2. F. Turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. • When the hard disk is mounted. HDD R/W Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly.” ✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. • If the hard disk is yet to be formatted. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed. 1. Pressing the Start key will start the work memory input/output operation check sequence and be terminated automatically. and if read/write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed. “OK” or “NG. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Ignore this code and continue with the formatting procedure. The check result will be displayed.” 3. E.” 3.” → “HDD R/W Check. Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R/W check sequence and be terminated automatically. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence. 1. 3. Touch “Physical Format. (Physical Format to Logical Format) 1. Turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. 4.” or both. Touch these keys in this order: “State Confirmation” → “Memory / HDD Adj.

) Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 10. M. Y. and Y. however. Use Setting/ Procedure 10. (The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the Front Door is closed. 2005 Memory/HDD State • To display the condition and amount of the memory and Hard disk. • Display unit: dots • The shift amount is displayed with reference to K for C. • The IU lot number is displayed even with the Front Door opened. 10. Functions Use • To display the 10-digit lot number for each of C.11 LPH Status Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To check various information on each of the C.12 Adjustment Data List Functions Use • To display the adjustment and setting value set in the main unit. M. M.: LPH lot number (8 digits) Average Exposure: Average light intensity X: Print width accuracy Y: Linearity accuracy Z: Focus accuracy FFT Rank: Print width rank LPH Rank: 0 to 5 • If any one change is made from the default value as a result of LPH chip-to-chip corrections. 286 . • Use to check the condition and amount of the memory and Hard disk. since the machine is unable to read the lot number when the Main Power Switch is turned ON with the Front Door open. Nonetheless. and K) on the screen. M. M.12. and K LPHs • Use for checking the LPH Status. 10. the lot number will be displayed when the Front Door is closed. • Use for check when color shift is evident.8 bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Service Mode 10. • For each of C. • • • • • • • LPH Lot No.0 Mar.12. Y. an asterisk “✻” is displayed beside the color identification (C. • When an add-on memory is mounted.9 Functions Color Regist • To check each of C. • Use to check the adjustment and setting value set in the main unit. Y. • The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU. • Use for checking the IU Lot No.12. Y. the machine automatically recognizes it and displays its capacity.12.12. the color shift amount (in X and Y directions) at two locations (one at the front and the other in the rear) and the difference in color shift amount between the front and rear (X and Y directions) are displayed.10 IU Lot No. and K IUs.10. the display is blank. and K. and that for K is displayed with reference to an ideal position. Y. M. 1. • The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjustment has been completed. and K for color shift amount.

“Cyan”.1 Procedure for Test Pattern Output bizhub C450 Adjustment / Setting 1. Select FEET or “HYPER”.13. 4036fs3042c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).13 Test Mode • To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern. Set up the desired functions and press the Start key.2 Functions Use Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Gradation Pattern • To produce a gradation pattern. Tray 3. Touch the desired test pattern key. • The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of Tray 2. Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. 287 . CMYK. 2005 10. as well as the Fax transmission. Black (4PC). • Black (1PC): Uses one color of black. Select the color mode. 8Color. 3. 2.Field Service Ver. Yellow. Black (1PC) • Black (4PC): Uses four colors. 10. and Tray 1 for paper of the maximum size for printing. 10. Magenta. 1.13. Tray 4.0 Mar. Touch “Test Mode” to display the Test Mode menu. • Used for checking gradation reproducibility. It also tests the printing operation in running mode. 4Color. Service Mode 10.

Red. • Type the density level (0 to “255”). Black (4PC). Select the color mode. 4 Color. 3 Color.4 Functions Use Lattice Pattern • To produce a lattice pattern.13. Black (1PC). SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density: 255 4036fs3043c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). CMYK. Select Gradation or Resolution. Black (1PC) • Enter CD width and FD width (0 to 191 dots). Blue. Service Mode 10. 3 Color.10. • Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density. “Cyan”.0 Mar. • Select “Normal” or Reverse. Red. Select FEET or “HYPER. Yellow. 10.13. Black (4PC). • Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise. 2005 Halftone Pattern • To produce a solid halftone pattern. Blue. SINGLE FEET Cyan CD Width: 5 FD Width: 5 Density: 255 Normal 4036fs3044c0 Adjustment / Setting Pattern Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select “FEET” or HYPER. Magenta. CMYK. Green.3 bizhub C450 Functions Use Pattern Field Service Ver.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. 1. 288 . (Only select HYPER) Select the color mode. • A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a solid background. Magenta. 4 Color. “Cyan”. MIX • Type the density level (0 to “255”). Green. Yellow.

Y.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. M. M. K.0 Mar. Select FEET or “HYPER.5 Functions Use Pattern K Y 10. • Used for checking reproducibility of each of the different colors. Service Mode Solid Pattern • To produce each of the C.13. Select FEET or “HYPER. Produce 12-gradation-level patches of C. 1. and a patch of each of the 12 reference colors in the hue circle with lightness and saturation corrected. 4036fs3046c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 M C 4036fs3045c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).Field Service Ver. Type the density level (0 to “255”). and B. R. 289 Adjustment / Setting SINGLE HYPER Gradation bizhub C450 .13. 2005 10. G. 10. • Used for checking reproducibility of image density.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Y.6 Functions Use Pattern Color Sample • To produce a color sample. and K solid patterns.

3.10. • Use to check the printing operation in Running Mode from each paper source. 6. SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 4036fs3047c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). • Used for LPH chip-to-chip correction Adjustment / Setting SINGLE HYPER Gradation Border: OFF 4036fs3048c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select to turn ON or “OFF” the Border Line.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. • Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color. 10.7 bizhub C450 Functions Use Pattern Field Service Ver. Select the paper type. 2005 8 Color Solid Pattern • To produce an 8-color solid pattern.0 Mar. Select FEET or “HYPER.9 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Running Mode • To test the printing operation in Running Mode. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 290 . 1.13. Press the Start key to start the Running Mode. Bypass only). 5. 4. 2. Touch these keys in this order: “Test Mode” → “Running Mode.8 Functions Use Pattern LPH Pattern • To produce an LPH pattern. 1. Pressing the Stop key will stop operation. Select FEET or “HYPER. 10. Service Mode 10.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected.” Select the paper size (Tray 1.13. Type the density level (0 to “255”).13.

see DF-601 Service Manual. • Center staple position: The adjustment range is -7. 10. 291 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 ☞ For details.10 Fax Test 10. • Fold position: The adjustment range is -7. see FK-502 Service Manual. Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To adjust the positions of center staple and folding for the Finisher. • Use when the center staple and folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Fold & Staple function.0 Mar. see FK-502 Service Manual. 2005 10.15 FAX ☞ For details. Service Mode 10.0 mm to +7.0 mm (in 1-mm increments).0 mm (in 1-mm increments). 10. 1.13.Field Service Ver. see the Service Manual for Option FS-603.14 ADF ☞ For details.0 mm to +7. .16 Finisher ☞ For details on adjustment.

2005 11. 4037F3E508DA 11. Press the following keys in this order.1. Enhanced Security menu will appear. Stop → 0→ Clear 3. 1.11. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. Adjustment / Setting 11.0 Mar.2 Exiting • Touch the “Exit” key.1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure 11.1 Procedure 1. 2.1. Enhanced Security bizhub C450 11.2 Enhanced Security Function Tree Service Mode Enhanced Security CE Password Administrator Password Administrator Feature Level CE Authentication IU Life Stop Setting 292 .

“Administrator Setting” → “Security Setting” • NEVER forget the CE password.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security 11.Field Service Ver.” New Password : Enter the new Administrator Password. call responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA. Enhanced Security 11. the password with the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous one cannot be changed.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Administrator Password • To set and change the Administrator Password.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure CE Password • To set and change the CE Password. “Administrator Setting” → “Security Setting” 293 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . • Use to change the Administrator Password. Re-Input Password: Enter the new CE Password again. 11.” Current Password : Enter the currently using CE Password. 1. • The initial setting is “92729272. • The initial setting is “12345678.0 Mar. 2005 11. NOTE • When the following setting leads to the Password Rules “ON”. • Use to change the CE Password.3.3. • Enter the CE Password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard. Re-Input Password: Enter the new Administrator Password again. New Password : Enter the new CE Password. the password with the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous one cannot be changed. When forgetting the CE password. • Enter the Administrator Password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard. NOTE • When the following setting leads to the Password Rules “ON”.

Administrator Setting Function Printer Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Erase Leading Edge Leading Edge Adjustment System Setting → Expert Setting Scanner Adjustment Centering Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Centering ADF Adjust. • Use when authenticating CE Password as entering Service Mode.3 bizhub C450 Functions Use Field Service Ver.5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure IU Life Stop Setting • To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life • Use to select not to stop the print cycle when the IU reaches its service life.Original Stop Position ment Centering Auto Adjustment Auto Adj. 2005 Administrator Feature Level • To set which Modes to be allowed for the Administrator to use in Service Mode. ON “OFF” 11. • The default setting is OFF. Enhanced Security 11. 1. • The Modes allowed for the Administrator to use in each setting are as follows. “Level1” Level2 Prohibit 11.3.0 Mar.3. “Stop” Not Stop 294 .3.11. The default setting is Stop. of Stop Position Standard Size Setting Original Glass Original Size Detect Foolscap Size Setting Level 1 Level 2 Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Level1.4 Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure CE Authentication • To determine whether or not to authenticate CE Password as entering Service Mode. • Use when allowing the Administrator to use some Modes in Service Mode.

Press the following keys in this order.0 Mar. Billing Setting 12.1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure 12. 2005 12. 1. Billing Setting menu will appear.1. Billing Setting 12.Field Service Ver. Adjustment / Setting 12. bizhub C450 4037F3E510DA 12.1 Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.1.2 Billing Setting Function Tree Service mode Billing Setting Counter Setting Management Function Choice Coverage rate Clear 295 .2 Exiting • Touch the “Exit” key. Stop → 9 3.

1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Counter Setting • To set the counting method for the Total Counter and Size Counter.3 Settings in the Billing Setting bizhub C450 12.0 Mar. Japan) Mode 2: Double count-up according to paper size and copying mode (Default: Europe. and 81/2 × 14 (Default: Europe. Japan) • A3 and 11 × 17 • A3. 11 × 14.12. B4. 1: 1 count. Total Counter Mode 1: 1 Count per 1 copy cycle (Default: US. B4. 11 × 17.3. Others 2. 1. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 4: 4 counts 296 . Others 4. 2005 12. Others 4. 3: 3 counts. 2: 2 counts. and 81/2 × 14 ✽ Count-up Table Copying Size Mode 1-Sided Sizes other than those specified Mode 1 Total Size 1 0 0 2 1 0 0 Specified sizes Mode 1 1 1 0 2 2 1 0 2-Sided Sizes other than those specified Mode 1 2 0 1 2 2 0 1 Specified sizes Mode 1 2 2 1 2 4 2 1 Adjustment / Setting 2-sided Total 0: No count. Foolscap. Others 3) Size Counter • Not counted (Default: US. Others 2. Others 1. • Use to change the counting method for the counters. Others 3) • A3. 11 × 17. Others 1.

✽ Color Mode • If “Mode 1” is selected for “Total Counter” Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle • If “Mode 2” is selected for “Total Counter.Field Service Ver. Unit (Data Controller) • Default setting: Unset Vendor • Default setting: Unset • Select “Interface” and “Message” when the vendor is mounted. and Vendor are installed. Billing Setting Management Function Choice • To set whether or not the Key Counter. 1. Key Counter • Default setting: Unset • Select “Color Mode” and “Message” when the Key Counter is mounted.0 Mar. Data Controller.” and the paper used is the specified size or one other than those specified Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle ✽ Message Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted.3. Type 1: Message for Coin Vendor Type 2: Message for Card Keeper Type 3: Message common to Coin Vendor and Card Keeper 297 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 .” “Sizes other than those specified” is selected for “Size Counter. ✽ Interface Select the interface type when the vendor is mounted. Type 1: Message for Key Counter Type 2: Message for Card scanning Type 3: Message for ID management Type 4: Message for Remote SW Admin.” and the paper used is the specified size or one other than those specified Mode 1: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 6 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 8 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 10 counts per 1 copy cycle • If “Mode 2” is selected for “Total Counter. 2005 12. Type 1: Coin Vendor is set Type 2: Not used ✽ Message Select the message type when the vendor is mounted. • Use to change the counting method for the administrative units.” “Sizes other than those specified” is selected for “Size Counter.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 12.

3 bizhub C450 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Set • Touching “END” key will clear the coverage rate. 2005 Coverage Rate Clear • To clear the coverage rate • Use to clear the coverage rate • The default setting is Unset. 1.0 Mar. “Unset” Adjustment / Setting 298 . Billing Setting 12.12.3.

1. 2005 13. 2. • To be used when the status would not be cleared by turning power OFF and ON again. clear the status of the machine. or opening and closing the front door. 5. 4. or opening and closing the front door in case of a trouble.) Service Mode (System 1/2) Billing Setting Counter Setting Adjustment of the touch panel position - - - - - - - *1 - : Will be cleared (initialized) -: Will not be cleared *1: Items to be cleared Marketing Area (Fax Target Only) Foolscap Size Setting System 1 Install Date Tel/Fax Number No Sleep Original Size Detection System 2 HDD 299 Adjustment / Setting CC151 - - - - bizhub C450 .2 Contents to be cleared by Reset function Items for clearing Contents to be cleared Jam display Fusing Malfunction display Optical Scanner Front Door Open/Close Trouble resetting Initialization System Error Clear Data Clear Main power switch Off/On - Others Erratic operation / display Utility Mode (Except items on Expert adjustment.0 Mar. 1. Check to make sure that “OK” is displayed and the it has been reset. 3. Procedure for Resetting 13. Turn main power switch ON while pressing the Utility/Counter key. Touch “Trouble Reset” key. and make sure that the machine properly starts.1 Trouble resetting Functions • If the trouble occurs and the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again.Field Service Ver. Use Setting/ Procedure 13. Procedure for Resetting 13. Turn main power switch OFF and ON again. Turn main power switch OFF.

Loosen the three screws that secure the Scanner Motor mounting bracket [1].1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Belt This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Motor Assy has been removed. 2005 14. 4036fs3036c0 [2] [4] [2] [3] [2] 4. • The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound. Mechanical adjustment bizhub C450 14. 4036fs3037c0 300 .14. 5. slide the Scanner Motor Assy [3] to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring [4]. 1. 2. 1. Remove the IR Rear Cover. With the Scanner drive gear set screw [2] located on the right-hand side as shown on the left.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 14. Remove 16 screws and the reinforcement frame.1. Perform this step three times.0 Mar. [2] [1] [1] [1] [1] Adjustment / Setting [1] [1] [1] 4037F2C076DB [1] 3. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. Tighten the three screws [2] to fix the Scanner Motor Assy into position.

1. 118 mm 4036fs3041c0 301 . Slide the Mirrors Unit [1] to the center until it is pressed up against the cutouts in the rails [2]. Slide the Mirrors Unit [1] to the position shown on the left. If the Mirrors Unit is not pressed up against the cutouts. 1.2 Scanner Position Adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound. [2] [1] 4036fs3038c0 [3] 2.2 14. Mechanical adjustment Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit bizhub C450 Adjustment / Setting This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound [2] [1] 1.Field Service Ver. loosen the adjusting screw (to which red paint is applied) [3] of the Mirrors Unit and press the carriage up against the cutouts. tighten the adjusting screw. 2005 14. Then. [1] 1. 4036fs3049c0 14.0 Mar. • Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit must be completed.

Secure the Scanner [2] in the position shown on the left using the two Scanner positioning screws [3]. ☞ 233 30 mm [3] 4036fs3040c0 14. Mechanical adjustment [3] bizhub C450 [2] Field Service Ver.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section 14. 3. Make the Feed Direction Adjustment. 2005 2.0 Mar. Install the gear so that the protrusion of the gear [1] and the mark [3] on the Bypass Guide Rack Gear [2] are aligned in a straight line.1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Bypass Paper Size Unit has been removed.14. 1. Adjustment / Setting [2] [3] [2] 4036fs3050c0 302 .3. [3] [1] 1.

check that the lever of the Bypass Paper Size Unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the Bypass Guide. 5. align the lever position of the Bypass Paper Size Unit with the tab at the center in a straight line. Call the Service Mode to the screen and select “Machine” → “Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment. Install the Bypass Unit Cover so that part A (edge) [2] of the Rack Gear [1] for the Bypass Paper Size Unit and part B [3] of the Bypass Unit Cover are aligned in a straight line. 4036fs3052c0 4. [3] [2] 4036fs3051c0 3.” Then. Mechanical adjustment 2.” ☞ 238 303 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C450 . 2005 [1] 14.Field Service Ver. After the Bypass Paper Size Unit base has been mounted.0 Mar. carry out “Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment. When the Bypass Paper Size Unit base is mounted. 1.

14. 1. 2005 bizhub C450 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 304 .0 Mar. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.

2005 15.0 Mar. Jam Display Troubleshooting 15.Field Service Ver. Jam Display 15. the misfeed message. and paper location are displayed on the Touch Panel of the machine. misfeed location.1 Misfeed Display • When a paper misfeed occurs. [11] [9] [8] [7] [1] [2] [1] [2] [3] [3] [10] [5] [4] bizhub C450 [5] [6] [6] 4037F4C501DA [9] [10] 305 Troubleshooting . 1.

2005 misfeed processing location Right Door Tray 2 Right Door Manual Bypass Slide Board LCT Right Door Action bizhub C450 [1] ☞ 310 ☞ 311 ☞ 313 ☞ 316 ☞ 314 Duplex Unit Right Door Paper Feed Unit Right Door ☞ 315 ☞ 317 ☞ FS-507 ☞ FS-603 ☞ FS-507 Right Door Horizontal transport cover [9] Finisher FS-507 / Job Separator JS-601 Finisher Door [10] Finisher FS-603 Finisher Door ☞ FS-603 [11] ⎯ ADF Document Feeder Door ⎯ ☞ Duplex ⎯ System Control Jam 15.0 Mar. clear the sheet of paper misfeed. and close the door. 1.15.1. 306 . Jam Display Display Code 1101 3001 1201 [2] 2001 1001 [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] 1501 2001 9301 9201 1301 2001 1401 2001 3201 7403 7401 7402 7404 7405 7406 7401 7403 7404 7405 7407 6401 6402 6403 6404 9901 Misfeed Location Tray 1 take-up 2nd Image Transfer Tray 2 take-up Vertical Transport Manual Bypass take-up LCT take-up Vertical Transport Duplex Unit transport Duplex Unit pre-registration Tray 3 take-up Vertical Transport Tray 4 take-up Vertical Transport Exit Horizontal transport Field Service Ver.1 Troubleshooting Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure • Open the corresponding door.

Field Service Ver.2 Sensor layout 15.0 Mar.2. bizhub C450 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] 4037F4C506DA [1] [2] [3]*1 [3]*1 [4] Exit Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Registration Roller Sensor OHP Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC30 PI1-DU PC28 PC27 PC1-DU [5] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 [6] Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor [7] Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor [8] LCT Vertical Transport Sensor [9] LCT Paper Feed Sensor PC1 PC107 PC2-LCT PC1-LCT *1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3].1 System Mounted with PC-402. 2005 15. Jam Display 15. 1. 307 Troubleshooting .

15.0 Mar. Jam Display 15.2. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] 4037F4C507DA [1] [2] Exit Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC30 PI1-DU PC28 PC27 PC1-DU PC108 [6] [7] [8] [9] Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC1 PC107 [3]*1 Registration Roller Sensor Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117-PF Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC116-PF Troubleshooting [3]*1 OHP Sensor [4] [5] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor [10] Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126-PF [11] Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC125-PF *1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3]. 1. 308 . 2005 System Mounted with PC-202.2 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.

deformed. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. paper path deformed or worn? Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty. 1. wavy.3 Solution 15. deformed. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. first make checks of the following initial check items Check Item Does paper meet product specifications? Is paper curled. Clean or change the defective roll/roller. 309 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 . Change paper.3. Instruct user in correct paper storage. Correct or change the defective actuator. or damp.0 Mar. Change paper. or is the Clean or change the paper path.1 Initial Check Items • When a paper misfeed occurs. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct position to accommodate paper? Are actuators found operational as checked for correct operation? Clean or change the defective Paper Separator Finger. Jam Display 15. 2005 15.Field Service Ver. Set as necessary.

or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.2 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Sensor check CL3 operation check CL1 operation check Change PWB-MC 310 .3. Fusing Misfeed Type Description A. Sensor check PC27 I/O check. Sensor check PC28 I/O check. Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. 2nd Image Transfer. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. energized. (When the system speed is 215 mm/s) Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor The Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.15. Tray 1 take-up mis. (When the system speed is 215 mm/s) The Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. The OHP Sensor (PC27) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Fusing misfeed The Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a detection given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. 1. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. (When the system speed is 60/mms or 165 mm/s) The OHP sensor (PC27) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC27 has been blocked by the paper. 2005 Tray 1 take-up. a door or cover is opened and closed. Detection of paper left in 2nd Image Transfer Detection of paper left in Tray 1 B.0 Mar.(When the system speed is 60 mm/s or 165 mm/s) feed detection The leading edge of the paper does not block the OHP Sensor (PC27) after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) has been energized. a door or cover is opened and closed. Detection Timing The leading edge of the paper does not block the Exit Sensor (PC30) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Registration Roller Clutch has been 2nd Image Transfer. (Except when feeding the paper from Tray 1) The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) has been energized. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) Exit Sensor (PC30) OHP Sensor (PC27) Control Board (PWB-MC) Registration Roller Clutch (CL3) Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Troubleshooting WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — PWB-MC PJ22MC-8 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-6 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-12 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-2 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-14 (ON) PWB-MC PJ14MC-3 (ON) — Location (Electrical Component) — C to D-5 C to D-3 C to D-4 C to D-3 C to D-4 C to D-5 to 6 — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Initial check items PC1 I/O check. Jam Display 15. a door or cover is opened and closed. Sensor check PC30 I/O check.

0 Mar. Paper left at Tray 2 or Bypass Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Sensor check PC28 I/O check. 2005 15. Detection Timing . Sensor check PC108 I/O check. a door or cover is opened and closed.3. Paper left at Tray 2 Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor B. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.3 Tray 2 take-up. Vertical Transport. Sensor check M102 operation check Change PWB-Z 311 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Jam Display Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 2 Paper Feed Tray 2 take-up. The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. a door or cover is opened and closed. Ver. Action Tray 2 take-up. Multiple Bypass take-up 15. Vertical Transport Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — PWB-Z PJ6Z-8 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-6 (ON) PWB-Z PJ5Z-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical Component) — T to U-26 T to U-27 C to D-3 T to U-22 — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC107 I/O check. The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC108) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Bypass Paper Bypass Feed Clutch has been energized. tical Transport misThe Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a feed detection given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108).Field Service Ver. 1.Motor has been energized.

2005 Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ7Z<B>-14 (ON) — Location (Electrical Component) — T to U-27 T to U-24 — 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC108 I/O check. Sensor check CL101 operation check Change PWB-Z Troubleshooting 312 .15.0 Mar. Jam Display Manual Bypass take-up bizhub C450 Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) Field Service Ver. 1.

Jam Display Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the LCT Transport Roller Motor (PC2Misfeed detected LCT) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paper Feed Motor has at LCT take-up or been energized. a door or cover is opened and closed. Paper left at LCT Misfeed detected as a result of The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not unblocked even after the lapse delayed deactiof a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. 1.0 Mar. 2005 15. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Detection Timing .4 LCT Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC-402) 15. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-2 PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-5 PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) Location (Electrical Component) — PC-402 C-7 to 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC1-LCT I/O check. a door or cover is opened and closed. vation of sensor B. Sensor check M1-LCT operation check Change PWB-C1 LCT T to U-27 PWB-C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT-1 to 4 PC-402 C-8 — — 313 Troubleshooting PC-402 C-7 bizhub C450 A. Sensor check PC108 I/O check.Field Service Ver.3. The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Vertical TransThe Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse of a port Section given period of time after the paper has blocked the LCT Transport Roller Motor (PC2-LCT). Sensor check PC2-LCT I/O check.

3. Detection Timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC117-PF) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 3 Paper Feed Motor has been energized. Jam Display 15. The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Sensor check PC108 I/O check. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.15. Tray 3 take-up or Vertical Transport The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse Section of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF). Sensor check M122-PF operation check Change PWB-C2 PF Troubleshooting 3 4 5 6 314 . Paper left at Tray 3 Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor B. a door or cover is opened and closed. 1. The Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON.0 Mar. Sensor check PC117-PF I/O check. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. 2005 Tray 3 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC-102/PC202) A. a door or cover is opened and closed.5 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray 3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2PF-8 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2PF-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ5C2PF-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical Component) — PC-202 C-4 PC-202 C-4 T to U-27 PC-202 C-4 — 1 2 Initial check items PC116-PF I/O check. The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.

Sensor check PC117-PF I/O check.6 Tray 4 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC202) 15. Paper left at Tray 4 Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor B. Sensor check PC126-PF I/O check. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. a door or cover is opened and closed. The Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. 2005 15. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.Field Service Ver. Tray 4 take-up or Vertical Transport The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not blocked even after the Section lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF). a door or cover is opened and closed. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray 4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2PF-8 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2PF-2 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2PF-11 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ9C2PF-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical Component) — PC-202 G-6 PC-202 G-6 PC-202 C-4 PC-202 G to H-6 to 7 — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC125-PF I/O check.3.0 Mar. Jam Display Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC126-PF) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 4 Paper Feed Motor has been energized. Detection Timing . The Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. The Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Sensor check M123-PF operation check Change PWB-C2 PF 315 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. 1.

a door or cover is Transport Section opened and closed. B. 1.15. Jam Display 15. Sensor check PC1-DU I/O check. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Duplex Transport Section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper left at Duplex (PC1-DU) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Sensor check M1-DU operation check M2-DU operation check Change PWB-A DU Change PWB-MC Troubleshooting 5 6 7 8 316 . Detection Timing Type Description The Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a Duplex paper take-up sequence has been started.3.0 Mar. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not blocked even after the lapse Misfeed detected at of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU). Sensor check PI1-DU I/O check. 2005 Duplex Transport Misfeed A.7 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) — — PWB-A DU PJ3A-1 to 4 PWB-A DU PJ2A-1 to 4 — — Location (Electrical Component) — T to U-27 Duplex Unit E-6 Duplex Unit C-6 Duplex Unit C-5 Duplex Unit C-5 — — 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC28 I/O check. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.

or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.3. Sensor check PI1 I/O check.8 Fusing/Exit Misfeed 15. a door or cover is opened and closed. 2005 15. Jam Display Type Description PC30 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Exit Sensor (PC30).0 Mar.Field Service Ver. Sensor check Change PWB-MC 317 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Misfeed detected at Fusing/Exit Section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Exit Sensor (PC30) has been unblocked by the paper during a switchback sequence. B. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Sensor (PC30) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — PWB-MC PJ24MC-12 (ON) — — Location (Electrical Component) — C∼D-4 Duplex Unit E-6 — 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC30 I/O check. Paper left at Exit Section Exit Sensor (PC30) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. 1. Detection Timing .

gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel.1 Restarting • This machine automatically performs a restarting sequence if a minor fault that would not damage the machine occurs during operation. 1. • On completing the restarting sequence. the machine restores its operation to its ordinary condition.0 Mar.16. 2005 16. Malfunction code bizhub C450 16.2 Alert code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. • No screen information is given for the restarting sequence. 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. Maintenance call mark Troubleshooting 4037F4E503DA 318 . • Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the State Confirm screen. on detecting a malfunction.

• The output from the Color PC Drum Main and Sub Sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1.5 g/m2 (IDC Sensor photoreceiver output) or less during max. 2005 16.0 V or less after the adjustment has been completed.2. bizhub C450 • If an image stabilization or Scanner fault occurs. the corresponding warning code appears. • The output from the photoreceiver of the IDC Sensor that takes a reading of a point in a toner pattern on the Transfer Belt is 1.0 Mar. 1.1 Alert list 16. P-30 Color PC Drum Main Sensor malfunction P-31 K PC Drum Main Sensor malfunction 319 Troubleshooting • An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the second image transfer ATVC value. IDC Sensor (Front) failure • The output from the photoreceiver of the IDC Sensor that takes a reading of a point of a bare surface on the Transfer Belt is 4. • The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during sub scan direction registration correction. • The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during main scan direction registration correction. • The output from the Color PC Drum Main and Sub Sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1.000 ms while the Color PC Drum Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0). P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure P-6 P-7 P-8 P-9 Cyan Imaging Unit failure Magenta Imaging Unit failure Yellow Imaging Unit failure Black Imaging Unit failure P-21 Color Shift Test Pattern failure P-22 Color Shift Test Pattern failure P-26 ATVC (K) failure P-27 ATVC (2nd) failure P-29 ATVC (color) failure • An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of color. density adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment). • All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the Transfer Belt are 0. Malfunction code Code S-1 P-5 Item Description • It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment CCD clamp gain adjustment failure value is faulty.Field Service Ver. • An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of Black.3 V or more during an adjustment of the IDC Sensor. • The number of points detected in the Sub Scan Direction is more or less than the specified value during sub scan direction registration correction. . • The skew correction amount is greater than the specified value.000 ms while the K PC Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0). • The number of points detected in the main scan direction is more or less than the specified value during main scan direction registration correction.

2 16. Clean the lens.3 Solution bizhub C450 16. or change Scanner. 16.0 V or less. change PC8 or PC9. Change PWB-A. 2005 16.3. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary.3. CCD surface. IDC1: PC8. run an image stabilization sequence. and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. Change PWB-C.3.1 S-1: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Action Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Correct the harness connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty.16. Change PWB-MC Troubleshooting 320 . if it is dirty Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged. 1. Clean PC8 or PC9 if it is dirty Open and close the Left Door. and select “State Confirmation” → “Level History 1” to check the IDC value. mirrors. Reinstall or reconnect PC8 or PC9 if it is installed or connected improperly. IDC2: PC9 If the value is 1.0 Mar.3 P-5: IDC Sensor (Front) failure P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure Relevant Electrical Parts IDC / Registration Sensor /1 (PC8) IDC / Registration Sensor /2 (PC9) Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Control Board (PWB-MC) Image Transfer Belt Unit Action Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth.

Reinstall or reconnect PC8 or PC9 if it is installed or connected improperly. Check the Vertical Transport Guide for installed position and correct as necessary.3. Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit. readjust. if it is dirty Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged.6 16. 2005 16. 321 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit failure .5 16.3.9 P-22: Color Shift Adjust failure Relevant Electrical Parts IDC / Registration Sensor /1 (PC8) Step 1 2 3 IDC / Registration Sensor /2 (PC9) Action Check the LED retraction lever for locked position and. Clean the IDC Sensor window if dirty Clean the contact of the Imaging Unit connector if dirty Change Imaging Unit.3. 1. 16.0 Mar. if the setting value is negative. Malfunction code P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit failure P-9: Black Imaging Unit failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit K Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Image Transfer Belt Unit Action Select “Image Process Adjustment” → “D Max Density” and.Field Service Ver. if there is any faulty condition evident. slide out the Imaging Unit and reinstall it in position. 16.8 P-21: Color Shift Test Pattern failure Relevant Electrical Parts Image Transfer Belt Unit Step 1 2 Action Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth.3.4 16. Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary.7 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit failure 16.3.3.

3. 2. If P-30 occurs again.14 P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts K PC Drum Main Sensor (PC11) K PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC36) Control Board (PWB-MC) Troubleshooting Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Perform the faulty sensor check procedure *1. for installed position and proper connector connection. Call the “Sensor Check” screen to the screen by way of Service Mode.11 16. *1: Faulty sensor check procedure 1. Clean PC10 or PC35 if it is dirty Open and close the Left Door to reset the fault. Change PWB-MC. 2005 P-26: 1st image transfer ATVC (Black) failure P-27: 2nd image transfer ATVC failure P-29: 1st image transfer ATVC (Color) failure Relevant Electrical Parts 16.3. for which a faulty condition has been checked. Close the Front Door and start “Stabilizer.3.13 P-30: Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Main Sensor (PC10) Color PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC35) Step 1 2 3 4 5 Control Board (PWB-MC) Action Reinstall or reconnect PC10 or PC35 if it is installed or connected improperly.12 High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) Control Board (PWB-MC) Step 1 2 3 4 Image Transfer Belt Unit Action Check the contact of the Transfer Belt Unit and that of HV2 for connection and clean or correct the contact as necessary.3. 5. 322 . A sensor is faulty if its value does not change. change the sensor which was found faulty. Wipe the sensor. Change PWB-MC. During the Stabilizer sequence.” 4.10 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Malfunction code 16. Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change HV2. check to see if the values of the phase detection sensors (Color PC Drum Main/Sub and K PC Drum Main/Sub Sensors) change. Open the Front Door and turn ON the Main Power Switch of the machine.3.0 Mar. for which a faulty condition has been checked. 1. Check the sensor. If P-31 persists. Change PWB-MC. clean of dirt if any. change PC10 or PC35. 16.16.3. 16.

bizhub C450 Troubleshooting 4037F4E505DA 16. B B • The Bypass Lift-up Sensor is not blocked even when the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the standby position to the take-up position was started. B B B B 323 .Field Service Ver.4. see the Service Manual for the corresponding option. 2005 16. B C0212 LCT Shift Motor malfunction C0213 LCT shifting failure C0214 LCT ejection failure C0215 LCT Shift Gate malfunction ☞ See PC-402 Service Manual.0 Mar. Code Item Description Rank B B • The Lift-up Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started.4 Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. • The Bypass Lift-up Sensor is not unblocked even when the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the take-up position to the standby position was started. on detecting a malfunction. gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel. 1. C0001 LCT communications error C0102 LCT Vertical Transport Motor malfunction C0204 Tray 2 Elevator failure ☞ See PC-402 Service Manual.1 Trouble code list * For the details of the malfunction codes of the options. Malfunction code 16. B B B C0206 Tray 3 Elevator failure C0208 Tray 4 Elevator failure C0209 LCT Elevator Motor malfunction (Elevator malfunction) C0210 LCT ascent motion failure C0211 Bypass lifting motion failure ☞ ☞ See PC-102/PC-202 Service Manual. See PC-402 Service Manual.

• The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. 2005 Description • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. Rank B bizhub C450 C0301 Suction Fan Motor's failure to turn C0351 Paper Cooling Fan Motor's failure to turn C1180 Finishing option transport system malfunction C1181 Finishing option Paddle Motor malfunction C1182 Finishing option Shift Motor mechanism malfunction C1183 Finishing option Elevator drive malfunction C1190 Finishing option Aligning Bar moving mechanism malfunction C1192 Finishing option Front Aligning Motor malfunction C1193 Finishing option Rear Aligning Motor malfunction C11A1 Finishing option Exit Roller pressure/retraction failure C11A2 Finishing option Storage Roller pressure/retraction failure C11A4 Finishing option Exit Motor malfunction C11B0 Finishing option Stapler Unit CD drive failure C11B1 Finishing option Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunction C11B2 Finishing option stapling mechanism malfunction 1 C11B3 Finishing option stapling mechanism malfunction 2 C11B4 Finishing option Staple/Folding Motor malfunction C11C0 Punch Motor malfunction C11C1 Finishing option Punch Cam Motor drive failure C11C2 Finishing option Punch Unit Board malfunction C11C3 Finishing option Punch Side Registration Motor malfunction C11C4 Finishing option Punch Motor malfunction C11C5 Finishing option Punch Sensor malfunction B ☞ See FS-507or FS-603 Service Manual.0 Mar.16. B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B C C C C C Troubleshooting 324 . 1. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver.

• The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning.0 Mar. B C2152 Image Transfer Belt pressure/ retraction failure B C2160 Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction • An output is automatically produced from the PC Drum Charge Corona of each color when the malfunction resetting procedure is performed after C2161 Magenta PC Drum Charge C2164 (PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction) Corona malfunction has been detected. • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. The SCD signal is detected C2162 Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona for a continuous 0.Field Service Ver. • The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor is not deactivated (pressed position) within 2 sec. malfunction C2163 Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2164 PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2251 K PC Motor's failure to turn • The SCD signal is detected for a continuous 0. C2254 Color PC Drum Motor's turning at abnormal timing • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the Transfer Belt's pressing motion. period at this time. Malfunction code Rank B C2151 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure • The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor is not activated (retracted position) within 2 sec. B B B B B B C2252 K PC Motor's turning at abnormal timing B C2253 Color PC Drum Motor's failure to • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeturn termined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. 2005 Code Item Description 16. • The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor is not deactivated (pressed position) within 1 sec. period while the PC Drum Charge Corona is being energized. 1. C2256 Color Developing Motor's turning • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predeat abnormal timing termined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor is not activated (retracted position) within 5 sec.5sec. after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller's retracting motion. B B 325 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 C1401 Finishing option Backup RAM failure ☞ See FS-507or FS-603 Service Manual. BB B C2255 Color Developing Motor's failure • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeto turn termined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the Transfer Belt's retracting motion. after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller's pressing motion.5-sec. .

16. 2005 Description • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. • T/C 3 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.0 Mar. • T/C 0. 1. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver. • T/C 15.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. • T/C 0. • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. • T/C 12 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. B C2451 New Transfer Belt Unit resetting failure C2551 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor B B C2552 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor B C2553 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor B C2554 Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor B C2555 Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor B Troubleshooting C2556 Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor B C2557 Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor C2558 Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor B B 326 . • T/C 0. • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a Rank B bizhub C450 C2257 Cleaning Brush Motor failure to turn C2258 Cleaning Brush Motor's turning at abnormal timing C2351 Toner Suction Fan Motor/K’s failure to turn C2352 Toner Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn B B predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • T/C 15. • A new installation is not detected when a new Transfer Cleaner Unit (Image Transfer Belt Unit) is installed. • T/C 15.

C2652 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2653 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2654 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2655 Cyan LPH correction data download failure C2656 Magenta LPH correction data download failure C2657 Yellow LPH correction data download failure C2658 Black LPH correction data download failure C3101 Fusing Pressure Roller pressure/retraction failure C2651 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error B C3201 Fusing Drive Motor’s failure to turn C3202 Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing C3301 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 failure to turn B B B 327 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 C2559 Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure • TCR Sensor automatic adjustment does not function properly. C255A Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255B Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255C Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure • A condition of “EEPROM is not connected” or “There is an access error” is detected in EEPROM of the Imaging Unit. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • No change is observed in the encoder sensor pulse even after the lapse of 0.0 Mar. Malfunction code Rank B B B B C C C C • An error is detected while the LPH correction data is being downloaded from EEPROM of LPH to PWB-MFPC when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Roller’s pressing motion. 2005 Code Item Description 16. • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.5 sec. after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Roller’s retracting motion. C C C C • No change is observed in the encoder sensor pulse even after the lapse of 0. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The Fusing Pressure Position Sensor is not activated (pressed position) even when 30 encoder sensor pulses are counted after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Roller’s pressing motion. .5 sec.Field Service Ver. 1. failing to adjust to an appropriate value.

16. • A temperature of 120 °C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. • The voltage of the Heating Roller Thermistor does not increase by five steps within 20 sec. A temperature of 80 °C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. • A temperature of 120 °C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. or more.0 Mar. C3751 Heating Roller abnormally high temperature C3752 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high temperature • A temperature of 225 °C or more of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. • No zero cross signal is detected even with the lapse of 1 sec. 2005 Description • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. or more during a standby state. • A temperature of 80 °C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during Power Save. • . • A temperature of 70 °C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. Rank B bizhub C450 C3302 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 or Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 failure to turn C3451 Heating Roller warm-up failure A C3452 Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up • The voltage of the Fusing Pressure Roller Therfailure mistor does not increase by five steps within 20 sec. A B A A C3851 Heating Roller abnormally low temperature Troubleshooting A C3852 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature A 328 . C3461 New Fusing Unit resetting failure • A new installation is not detected when a new Fusing Unit is installed. • A temperature of 215 °C or more of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. or Power Save. or more after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. after the predrive of the Fusing Roller has been started during a warm-up cycle. • No zero cross signal is detected even with the lapse of 1 sec. print cycle. or more during a print cycle. • The temperature of the Heating Roller does not reach 100 °C and that of the Fusing Pressure Roller does not reach 195 °C within 200 sec. or more during a standby state. 1. • A temperature of 80 °C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during a print cycle. or more before the start of the heater temperature control. • A temperature of 190 °C or more of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during Power Save. or more after the start of the heater temperature control. or more during a standby state. • The temperature of the Heating Roller does not reach 100 °C within 50 sec.

C C C C • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. Malfunction code Rank C C4761 Compression hardware timeout • The hardware involved with the compression function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC) does not respond. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. 1. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The hardware involved with the extraction function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC) does not respond. C C4765 Extraction hardware timeout C C C C C C4770 JBIG0 Error C4771 JBIG1 Error C4772 JBIG2 Error C4773 JBIG3 Error C4780 Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure C4781 Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure C4782 Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure C4783 Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure C5102 Main Motor's failure to turn • The MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) is faulty. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. 2005 Code Item Description 16.0 Mar. C 329 Troubleshooting B bizhub C450 C4705 Printer Time Out • No image data is output from the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). B C5103 Main Motor turning at abnormal timing C5351 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor's failure to turn C5353 Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn C5354 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor's failure to turn C5355 Cooling Fan Motor 3’s failure to turn C5356 Cooling Fan Motor 1’s failure to turn B B B B B C5370 MFP Control Board Cooling Fan • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeterMotor’s failure to turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. . • Memory of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) is faulty.Field Service Ver. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.

Release Error ☞ See FK-502 Service Manual. at which it blocks the Scanner Home Sensor. • The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect a Scanner even when the Scanner Motor has been driven to move the Scanner over the maximum traveling distance.0 Mar. • The output from the CCD Sensor is a predetermined value or less during CCD Sensor gain adjustment. • The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner when the Scanner has moved 5 mm from the position. • Image data is not input from the Image Processing Board (PWB-C) to the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). 1. Rank bizhub C450 C6102 Scanner Home Sensor malfunction B C6103 Scanner overrun failure B C6301 Scanner Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn C6704 Scanner Time Out B C C6751 CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure B C9401 Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON C9402 Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing A A CA051 Standard controller configuration • The controller of the MFP Control Board (PWBfailure MFPC) is faulty. 2005 Description • The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect the Scanner located at its home position. • A controller start failure is detected in the controller interface. • The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD clamp adjustment. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The average output value of the CCD Sensor with the Scanner at its standby position is a predetermined value or more at the end of a scan job. CA052 Controller hardware error • A controller hardware error is detected in the network I/F. C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CA053 Controller start failure CB001 FAX Board Error 1 CB002 FAX Board Error 2 CB003 FAX Board Error 3 CB051 FAX Board mount failure 1 CB052 FAX Board mount failure 2 CB110 FAX Driver Error: Instance Generation Error or Observer Registration Error CB111 FAX Driver Error: Configuration Space Initialization NG CB112 FAX Driver Error: Semaphore Acquisition. C C 330 . • The peak value of the output data is 64 or less during a CCD gain adjustment.16. • The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner at its home position during a period of time that begins with the time when a prescan command and a scan preparation command are executed and ends when a home return command is executed. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver.

Field Service Ver. 2005 Code Item Description 16. Malfunction code Rank C C CB114 FAX Driver Error: Message Queue Control Error CB115 FAX Driver Error: Main Body Sequence Error among FAX Boards CB116 FAX Driver Error: FAX Board Nonresponse (Nonresponse after Initialization) CB117 FAX Driver Error: ACK Waiting Timeout Error CB118 FAX Driver Error: Receiving Undefined Frame CB119 FAX Driver Error: DMA Transfer Error CB120 JC Soft Error CB122 Device Error (GA LOCAL SRAM) CB123 Device Error (DRAM) CB125 Device Error (GA) CB126 Timeout Error due to Nonresponse from DC during Suspension Process CB127 Timeout Error due to Nonresponse from CC during Suspension Process CB128 Timeout Error due to Nonresponse from LINE during Suspension Process CB129 Timeout Error due to Nonresponse from File System/File Driver during Suspension Process CB130 MIF Driver Error: Driver Soft Error CB131 MIF Driver Error: Reception Frame Length Error from Main CB132 MIF Driver Error: Reception Frame Header Error from Main CB133 MIF Driver Error: 232C i/f Sequence Error CB134 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM i/f Sequence Error CB135 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM CTL/ STL Register Error CB136 MIF Driver Error: AKC Waiting Timeout C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 331 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 CB113 FAX Driver Error: Sequence Error among Main Body Tasks ☞ See FK-502 Service Manual. . 1.0 Mar.

0 Mar.16. 1. C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CB163 1 Destination Control: Message Que Control Error CB164 1 Destination Control: Semaphore Acquisition Release Error CB165 1 Destination Control: Observer Registration Error CB166 1 Destination Control: Reception Resource Check Error CB167 1 Destination Control: Deployment Error of Sending Image Information CB168 1 Destination Control: Serialization Error of Receiving Image CB169 1 Destination Control: Access Error to Quick Memory Data C C C 332 . Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver. 2005 Description Rank C C C C C C C C C bizhub C450 CB137 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM RESET Reception CB140 MSG I/F Error with JC CB141 I/F Error with Main: I/F Error with Driver CB142 I/F Error with Main: Undefined Command Reception CB143 I/F Error with Main: Command Frame Length Error CB144 I/F Error with Main: Command Parameter Length Error CB145 I/F Error with Main: Undefined Parameter CB146 I/F Error with Main: Command/ Response Sequence Error CB150 Line Control: External Class Instance Acquisition Error CB151 Line Control: Job Start Error (Starting Job Parameter Error/ Child Job Generation Error) CB152 Line Control: Doc Access Error (Report Buf Access Error) CB153 Line Control: Response Wait Timeout from External Task CB154 Line Control: Internal Que Table Control Error (create/enque/ deque) CB160 1 Destination Control: Instance Generation Error CB161 1 Destination Control: Timeout Error CB162 1 Destination Control: Interface Error ☞ See FK-502 Service Manual.

C C C C C C C C C C C C C CC151 ROM contents error upon startup (MSC) CC152 ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) CC153 ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) CC154 ROM contents error upon startup (LPH) CC163 ROM contents error (PRT) C C C C C CD002 JOB RAM save error CD004 Hard disk access error C C 333 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 CB170 Page Control: Internal Que Table ☞ See FK-502 Service Manual. • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the Control Board during starting.Field Service Ver. • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the LPH Board during starting. 2005 Code Item Description 16. 1. • The wrong model of firmware is detected in the engine during the initial connection to the engine is being checked. Malfunction code Rank C CB171 Page Control: Instance Generation Error CB172 Page Control: Timeout Error CB173 Page Control: Interface Error CB174 Page Control: Semaphore Acquisition Release Error CB175 Page Control: Observer Registration Error CB176 Page Control: Unable to Check TTI Domain CB177 Page Control: Error Return from TTI Rasterizer CB178 Page Control: Receiving Job Generation Error CB185 Page Control: Receiving Data Size Logic Error (Receiving Data are not Multiples of DotLine) CB186 Page Control: ImageBuf Acquisition (alloc) Error CB187 Page Control: Error Return from Compressor CB188 Page Control: BandBuf Control Error (newInstance/get/free) CC001 Vendor connection failure • It is detected that communications with the vendor are interrupted for a given period of time or more with “Installed” selected for the setting of vendor installation. Control Error (create/enque/ deque) .0 Mar. • Unable to communicate between the hard disk and MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). • The error in save of JOB data to the Memory/ Hard Disk and its read error are detected. • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the MSC (PWB-MFPC) during starting • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the PWB-C during starting.

C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CDCXX • Call responsible person of Konicaminolta. • Initialization error of the encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting. • The capacity of the File Memory mounted on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) is short. 334 . • An undefined malfunction occurs in the Scanner Section.16. • The hardware involved with the BTC compression function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC) does not respond.0 Mar. Rank C C C C C C C C C C • Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty. CD201 File Memory mounting error CD202 Memory capacity discrepancy CD211 PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure CD212 Compression/extraction timeout detection CD221 NVRAM initialization failure CD222 CD223 • The File Memory mounted on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) is faulty. • A hard disk that falls outside the specifications is connected. • The hardware involved with image transfer in the memory of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) does not respond. C C C bizhub C450 CD005 Hard Disk Error 1 CD006 Hard Disk Error 2 CD007 Hard Disk Error 3 CD008 Hard Disk Error 4 CD009 Hard Disk Error 5 CD00A Hard Disk Error 6 CD00B Hard Disk Error 7 CD00C Hard Disk Error 8 CD00D Hard Disk Error 9 CD00E Hard Disk Error A CD00F Hard disk data transfer error CD010 Hard disk unformat CD011 Hard disk specifications error CD012 Encryption ASIC setting error CD013 Encryption ASIC mounting error • The faulty of the installation of encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting. failure CEEE1 MSC undefined malfunction occurring CEEE2 Scanner Section undefined malfunction CEEE3 Engine Section undefined malfunction • An undefined malfunction occurs in the MSC of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). • Call responsible person of Konicaminolta. • Unformatted hard disk is connected. etc. 1. CE002 Message and Method parameter • Unspecified data or parameter is detected.). • An undefined malfunction occurs in the Engine Section (PWB-MC. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver. 2005 Description • Hard disk is faulty.

and connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition. 1. Malfunction code Code Item Relevant Electrical Components.0 Mar. • When the system program is aborted. Units.Field Service Ver. . option. 2005 16. and Options Rank • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C CF001 CT_SingleList Table Abnormal CF002 CT_DoubleList Table Abnormal CF003 CT_DoubleList Table Abnormal CF004 CT_Queue Full Abnormal CF011 ArrayLink Abnormal CF012 FAT Link Abnormal CF013 File Size Abnormal CF021 setDelayMessage Table OverFlow CF022 procSetBootParamTcpipAddress() injustice CF023 MsgQue OverFlow CF031 getJobPageToIPE() page number injustice CF032 getJobHDDPageToIPE() page number injustice CF033 setDivTbl() limitation over CF034 HDDQUEUE Over Flow CF041 getAPPPtrFromAPPID() abnormal CF042 getAPPIndexFromAPPID() abnormal CF051 CC_InputPageEntry:operator[] page injustice CF061 IdeCommand_Set() status Abnormal CF062 IdeCommand_Set() parameter Abnormal CF091 PCI ASIC1 ERROR CF092 PCI ASIC2 ERROR CF093 PCI ASIC4 ERROR CF101 SCAN TIME OUT CF111 Compress TIME OUT CF112 Compress Table OverFlow CF113 Compress Table check CF121 Expand TIME OUT CF122 Expand Table OverFlow CF123 Expand ExpandLine Abnormal CF131 Print TIME OUT CF201 startIRReadAnd Compress()Sequence 335 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 • The machine displays an abort code (CFXXX) on the Touch Panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software control. check the electrical component. unit.

16. 1. 2005 Relevant Electrical Components. Units. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver.0 Mar. and Options Rank • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board C C C C C C C C bizhub C450 CF202 startWorkSave()Sequence Abnormal CF203 convAPItoIJCParameter()page Abnormal CF204 calcCompresserUse()CmpExpID Abnormal CF211 setParameterBandColorPlane() Table OverFlow CF212 convAPItoIJCParameter()page Abnormal CF213 calcExpandUse() CmpExpID Abnormal CF221 startPrintOutput outputsize zero • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board CF222 Next request comes during • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board processing of startPrintOutput () CF223 Next request comes during processing of startWorkLoadOutput () CF300 IR Bus Check Timeout CF411 Parity error CF421 Overrun error CF431 Parity error + Overrun error CF441 Framing error CF451 Parity error + Framing error CF461 Overrun error + Framing error CF471 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF412 Parity error CF422 Overrun error CF432 Parity error + Overrun error CF442 Framing error • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board C • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CF452 Parity error + Framing error CF462 Overrun error + Framing error CF472 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF510 Parity error CF520 Framing error CF530 Parity error + Framing error CF540 Overrun error CF550 Parity error + Overrun error CF560 Overrun error + Framing error CF570 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF580 Frame distortion of ADF 336 .

Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Components...• MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board ing Command Queue CF754 File Memory Compression requesting Command Queue CF764 Panel instruction delete job Queue CF774 Warning delete job Queue • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board CF784 Application instruction delete job • MFP Control Board Queue CF794 Output page information for Duplex back side Queue CF7A4 Paper feed completion output pate information Queue CF7B4 Exposure compaction output page information Queue • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board CF7C4 Pre-discharge completion output • MFP Control Board page information Queue CF7D4 Touch panel coordinate data Queue CF7E4 Direct Key data Queue CF802 SIO Sending Port... PIC/PIC Terminal • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board/Engine • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board/Engine • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board C C C C C C C C C 337 Troubleshooting C bizhub C450 CF600 Report receiving of print start that is out of sequence • MFP Control Board/Engine ..Fiery CF915 SIO Receiving Port. PIC/PIC Terminal CF8ED SIO Sending Port..ENG CF806 SIO Sending Port... 1.IRC CF812 SIO Sending Port.ENG CF906 SIO Receiving Port.. and Options Rank C C C C C C • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Engine • MFP Control Board/Copier Board/Control Panel C C C C C C C C C C C C C CF601 Report receiving of paper feeding that is out of sequence CF604 Outside IF/Command Queue CF614 “Output sequence” Queue CF624 Panel LCD date Queue CF704 Common data “Delete-waiting HDD accumulated job ID” Queue CF714 IRC/Command Queue CF724 Engine/Command Queue CF734 Panel/Command Queue • MFP Control Board/Engine • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board CF744 File Memory Transfer start-wait..Fiery CF815 SIO Sending Port.0 Mar. Units... 2005 Code Item 16.....IRC CF912 SIO Receiving Port.Field Service Ver...EPNet CF902 SIO Receiving Port.

0 Mar. Units. 2005 Relevant Electrical Components.EPNet CFA01 getOneImgTransInfoFromTh() No applied thread CFA02 chkEnableAllocExec() default error CFA03 setTransBandAndRepeatNum() error CFA04 Application ID error CFA05 Thread selection image process.• MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board ing mode error CFA06 getOneImgIndexNumFromTh() No applied thread CFA07 setBufBandFromOut() No applied thread CFA08 chkStartOutput() No applied thread CFA09 rptReleaseMemResultACS() No applied thread CFA10 rptEndBandTrans() No applied thread CFA11 cancelTransExec() No applied thread CFA12 CC_ImgTransInfo:allocTransIndex CFA13 CC_MultiThreadProfile:rptBuf2 MemClrEnd CFA21 Outside image input start • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board CFA22 Inside image outside output start • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board CFA23 Engine Input start CFA24 Buffer memory -> File memory transfer Start CFA25 BTC compression/CMM start • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board Troubleshooting CFA26 Inside image PCIBridegDMA input/output start CFA27 File memory -> Buffer memory transfer Start CFA28 BTC extension start CFA29 JPEG compression start CFA30 JPEG extension start CFA31 Software resolution conversion start CFA32 Hardware resolution conversion start CFA33 Software rotating processing start CFA34 Other Sequence malfunction CFA35 Buffer Array malfunction 338 . 1. and Options Rank • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C bizhub C450 CF9ED SIO Receiving Port. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver...16.

cpp. 1.h CFA61 DMA A CFA62 DMA B CFA63 DMA C CFA64 DMA D CFA65 DMA E CFA66 DMA F CFA67 DMA G CFA68 DMA H CFA69 DMA I CFA70 DMA J CFA71 Interruption CFA72 Common register setting CFA73 PCIBridgeDMA CFA74 BTC compression/Extension device CFA75 CMM CFB52 DMA_A error interruption CFB53 DMA_B error interruption CFB54 DMA_C error interruption CFB55 DMA_D 0 error interruption CFB56 DMA_D 1 error interruption CFB57 DMA_D 2 error interruption CFB58 DMA_D 3 error interruption CFB59 DMA_E error interruption CFB5A DMA_F error interruption CFB5B DMA_G error interruption CFB5C DMA_H error interruption CFB5D DMA_I error interruption CFB5E DMA_J error interruption • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Engine • MFP Control Board/Engine • MFP Control Board/Engine • MFP Control Board/Engine • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board/Engine C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C CFB5F Watch Dog Timer Error interrup.h CFA42 pcbuf_inout.h CFA43 pcbuf_exoutput.0 Mar. and Options Rank CFA37 Input image height 0 CFA38 Output image width 0 CFA41 pcbuf_exinput. Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Components.• MFP Control Board tion CFB60 PCI slave error interruption CFB61 Local bus error interruption CFB6E Underrun at DMA_D 0 image output interface 1 • MFP Control Board/FAX Board/Local I/F Board/ Electronic sorting Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board 339 Troubleshooting C bizhub C450 CFA36 Thread Service malfunction • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board C .cpp.Field Service Ver. 2005 Code Item 16.cpp. Units.

16. 2005 Relevant Electrical Components. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver. Units. 1. CFC13 Image transfer control information acquisition malfunction • MFP Control Board/Copier Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board • MFP Control Board Troubleshooting CFD00 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_A0 CFD01 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_A1 CFD02 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_A2 CFD03 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_B0 C C C C 340 .0 Mar. and Options Rank • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C bizhub C450 CFB6F Underrun at DMA_D 1 image output interface 1 CFB70 Underrun at DMA_D 2 image output interface 1 CFB71 Underrun at DMA_D 3 image output interface 1 CFB72 Underrun at DMA_G image out.• MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board put interface 1 CFB73 Overflow at DMA_A/B image output interface 1 CFB74 Underrun at DMA_F ASIC 1 image output interface CFB75 Overflow at DMA_C ASIC 1 image input interface CFB76 Target abort CFB77 Master abort CFB78 Forced stoppage CFB79 Retry error detection of PCI master CFB7A Master read data parity error CFB7B Master write data parity error CFB7C System error CFB7D Slave read data parity error CFB7E Slave write data parity error CFB7F Address parity error CFC01 Color Number faulty CFC02 Thread Sequence malfunction CFC03 Thread Service Sequence malfunction CFC04 Thread Message Q malfunction CFC12 Output of output buffer 2 surpasses clear.

and Options Rank C CFD05 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_B2 CFD06 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_C CFD07 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_D CFD08 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_E CFD09 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_F CFD0A ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/External Control Interface DMA under operation and transBoard fer completion line=0: DMA_G CFD0B ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_H0 CFD0C ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_H1 CFD0D ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_H2 CFD0E ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA-I CFD0F ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Engine DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA-J CFD10 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA PCI Bridge CFD11 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA 19 ASIC1 • MFP Control Board CFD12 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA JPEG CFD13 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA NO C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 341 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 CFD04 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_B1 . Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Components. 2005 Code Item 16.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Units. 1.

2005 Relevant Electrical Components. and Options Rank C bizhub C450 CFE00 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_A0 CFE01 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_A1 CFE02 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_A2 CFE03 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_B0 CFE04 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_B1 CFE05 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_B2 CFE06 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_C CFE07 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_D CFE08 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_E CFE09 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_F CFE0A ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/External Control Interface DMA under operation and transBoard fer completion line≠0: DMA_G CFE0B ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_H0 CFE0C ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_H1 CFE0D ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_H2 CFE0E ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA-I • MFP Control Board/Engine CFE0F ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA-J C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting C C C C 342 . Units. Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver.16. 1.0 Mar.

Units. and Options Rank C CFE11 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA19 ASIC1 CFE12 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA JPEG CFE13 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA NO CFF00 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_A0 CFF01 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_A1 CFF02 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_A2 CFF03 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_B0 CFF04 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_B1 CFF05 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Copier Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_B2 CFF06 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_C CFF07 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_D CFF08 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_E CFF09 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_F CFF0A ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/External Control Interface Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_G CFF0B ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_H0 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 343 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 CFE10 ASIC10 Timeout Number of • MFP Control Board DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMAPCI Bridge .0 Mar. Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Components. 2005 Code Item 16.Field Service Ver. 1.

Malfunction code Code Item Field Service Ver. • Opening/Closing the front door • Turning main power switch OFF/ON Troubleshooting Rank B Rank C 344 .0 Mar. Units. * List of Malfunction Resetting Procedures Trouble Code Rank Rank A Resetting Procedures • Trouble Reset ☞ For details of Trouble Reset. 1. 2005 Relevant Electrical Components.16.5 How to reset • Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble code. and Options Rank C bizhub C450 CFF0C ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_H1 CFF0D ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_H2 CFF0E ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA-I CFF0F ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Engine DMA band preparation register setting:DMA-J CFF10 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA PCI Bridge CFF11 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board/Electronic sorting Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA 19 ASIC1 CFF12 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA JPEG CFF13 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of • MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register setting:DMA NO C C C C C C C 16. see Adjustment/ Setting.

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

16. Malfunction code

16.6 Solution
16.6.1 C0204: Tray 2 Elevator failure
Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor (PC105) Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z)

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — T to U-26 M-24 —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the M101 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of M101 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. PC115 I/O check M101 operation check Change PWB-Z.

— — PWB-Z PJ6Z-3 (ON) PWB-Z PJ4Z-4 to 5 —

16.6.2

C0211: Manual Bypass Paper Lifting Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

Bypass Lift-Up Sensor (PC115) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103)

Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z)

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the M103 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of M103 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. PC115 I/O check M103 operation check Change PWB-Z.

— — PWB-Z PJ7Z<A>-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ5Z-5 to 8 —

T to U-22 —

345

Troubleshooting

T to U-25

bizhub C450

16. Malfunction code 16.6.3
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C0301: Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Suction Fan Motor (M12)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — C to D-2 —

1 2 3 4

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M12 operation check Change PWB-MC

— — PWB-MC PJ13MC-7 (REM) PWB-MC PJ13MC-9 (LOCK) —

16.6.4

C0351: Paper Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Paper Cooling Fan Motor (M26)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — K-8 —

1 2 3 4

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M26 operation check Change PWB-MC

— — PWB-MC PJ7MC-8 (REM) PWB-MC PJ7MC-10 (LOCK) —

Troubleshooting

16.6.5

C2151: 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC29) Control Board (PWB-MC) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — C to D-3 C to D-2 —

1 2 3 4

Check the M13 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PC29 I/O check M13 operation check Change PWB-MC

— PWB-MC PJ24MC-9 (ON) PWB-MC PJ13MC-1 (REM) —

346

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.6 C2152: Image Transfer Belt pressure/retraction failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

16. Malfunction code

1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC12) Control Board (PWB-MC) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — C to D-22 K-7 —

1 2 3 4

Check the M11 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PC12 I/O check M11 operation check Change PWB-MC

— PWB-MC PJ20MC-6 (ON) PWB-MC PJ7MC-1 to 4 —

16.6.7 16.6.8 16.6.9 16.6.10 16.6.11

C2160: Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2161: Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2162: Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2163: Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2164: PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction
Relevant Electrical Parts

Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y Imaging Unit /K

High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) Control Board (PWB-MC)

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — — — —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the Imaging Unit contact and correct or clean as necessary. Check the HV1 contact and correct or clean as necessary. Change Imaging Unit. Change HV1. Change PWB-MC

— — — — —

347

Troubleshooting

bizhub C450

16. Malfunction code 16.6.12
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C2251: K PC Motor failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

K PC Motor (M7)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — H-2 C to D-18 —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M7 operation check Change PWB-MC.

— — PWB-MC PJ2MC-3 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ33MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ33MC-6 (LOCK) —

16.6.13

C2252: K PC Motor turning at abnormal timing
Relevant Electrical Parts

K PC Motor (M7)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal PWB-MC PJ33MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ33MC-6 (LOCK) —

Location (Electrical Component) C to D-18 —

1 2

M7 operation check Change PWB-MC.

16.6.14
Troubleshooting

C2253: Color PC Motor failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Color PC Drum Motor (M5)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — H-2 C to D18 to 19 —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M5 operation check (C0018) Change PWB-MC

— — PWB-MC PJ2MC-7 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ33MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ33MC-13 (LOCK) —

348

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.15 C2254: Color PC Motor turning at abnormal timing
Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Control Board (PWB-MC)

16. Malfunction code

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-MC PJ33MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ33MC-13 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) C to D18 to 19 —

1 2

M5 operation check Change PWB-MC

16.6.16

C2255: Color Developing Motor failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Color Developing Motor (M6)

DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — P-5 K-15 —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Check the PU-1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M6 operation check Change PU-1

— — PU1 PJ5PU1-11 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ3MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ3MC-6 (LOCK) —

16.6.17

C2256: Color Developing Motor turning at abnormal timing
Troubleshooting
Relevant Electrical Parts

Color Developing Motor (M6)

DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal PWB-MC PJ3MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ3MC-6 (LOCK) —

Location (Electrical Component) K-15 —

1 2

M6 operation check Change PWB-MC

349

bizhub C450

16. Malfunction code 16.6.18
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C2257: Cleaning Brush Motor's failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Cleaning Brush Motor (M22)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — H-2 K-3 —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the M22 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M22 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M22 operation check Change PWB-MC.

— — PWB-MC PJ2MC-9 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ37MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ37MC-6 (LOCK) —

16.6.19

C2258: Cleaning Brush Motor Turning at abnormal timing
Relevant Electrical Parts

Cleaning Brush Motor (M22)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal PWB-MC PJ37MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ37MC-6 (LOCK) —

Location (Electrical Component) K-3 —

1 2

M22 operation check Change PWB-MC.

16.6.20
Troubleshooting

C2351: Toner Suction Fan Motor/K's failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Toner Suction Fan Motor/K (M23)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — C to D-21 —

1 2 3 4

Check the M23 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M23 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M23 operation check Change PWB-MC.

— — PWB-MC PJ15MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ15MC-12 (LOCK) —

350

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.21 C2352: Toner Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts Toner Suction Fan Motor (M20) Control Board (PWB-MC)

16. Malfunction code

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — C to D20 to 21 —

1 2 3 4

Check the M20 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M20 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M20 operation check Change PWB-MC.

— — PWB-MC PJ15MC-1 (REM) PWB-MC PJ15MC-3 (LOCK) —

16.6.22 16.6.23

C2451: New Transfer Cleaner Unit resetting failure C3461: New Fusing Unit resetting failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — — Location (Electrical Component) — —

1 2

Reinstall Unit Change PWB-MC

351

Troubleshooting

bizhub C450

16. Malfunction code 16.6.24
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor
Relevant Electrical Parts

16.6.25 16.6.26

TCR Sensor/C (PWB-N3) TCR Sensor/M (PWB-N2) TCR Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4)

Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — C∼D-14 — — —

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low. Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Correct the TCR Sensor spring moving part if faulty. Clean the TCR Sensor LED if dirty Change TCR Sensor C/M/Y. M3, M4 operation check Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC.

— — — — — PWB-MC PJ8MC-1 to 4 PWB-MC PJ8MC-5 to 8 — — —

Troubleshooting

352

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.27 16.6.28 16.6.29

16. Malfunction code

C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor
bizhub C450

C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor
Relevant Electrical Parts

TCR Sensor/C (PWB-N3) TCR Sensor/M (PWB-N2) TCR Sensor/Y (PWB-N1)

Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — — —

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Clean the TCR Sensor LED if dirty Correct the contact and/or WIRING of the TCR Sensor if faulty. Change TCR Sensor C/M/Y. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC.

— — — — — — —

16.6.30

C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor
Relevant Electrical Parts

TCR Sensor/K (UN10) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3)

Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

1 2 3 4 5

Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low. M3 operation check Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC.

— PWB-MC PJ8MC-1 to 4 — — —

— C to D-14 — — —

353

Troubleshooting

Location (Electrical Component)

16. Malfunction code 16.6.31
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor
Relevant Electrical Parts

Imaging Unit /K TCR Sensor/K (PWB-N4)

Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — — — —

1 2 3 4 5

Correct the TCR connection on the underside of the Imaging Unit if faulty. Clean or correct each contact of the Imaging Unit if faulty. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC.

— — — — —

16.6.32 16.6.33 16.6.34

C2559: Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255A: Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255B: Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

TCR Sensor/C (PWB-N3) TCR Sensor/M (PWB-N2) TCR Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4)

Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — — — C to D-14 — — —

1

Troubleshooting

Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Clean the TCR Sensor LED if dirty Correct the contact and/or WIRING of the TCR Sensor if faulty. Reinstall Imaging Unit C/M/Y. M3, M4 operation check Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC.

— — — — PWB-MC PJ8MC-1 to 4 PWB-MC PJ8MC-5 to 8 — — —

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

354

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.35 C255C: Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure
Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /K

16. Malfunction code

Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — — — —

1 2 3 4 5

Correct the TCR connection on the underside of the Imaging Unit if faulty. Clean or correct each contact of the Imaging Unit if faulty. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC.

— — — — —

16.6.36 16.6.37 16.6.38 16.6.39

C2651: Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2652: Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2653: Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2654: Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error
Relevant Electrical Parts

Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y Imaging Unit /K

Control Board (PWB-MC)

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component)

2 3 4

Reinstall Imaging Unit C/M/Y/K. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC

— — —

— — —

355

Troubleshooting

1

Clean the connection between the Imaging Unit and the machine if dirty

bizhub C450

16. Malfunction code 16.6.40
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C2655: Cyan LPH correction data download failure C2656: Yellow LPH correction data download failure C2657: Magenta LPH correction data download failure C2658: Black LPH correction data download failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

16.6.41 16.6.42 16.6.43

LPH Assy/C LPH Assy/M LPH Assy/Y LPH Assy/K

LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Control Board (PWB-MC)

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — —

1 2 3 4 5 6

Correct the harness connection between LPH and PWB-LED if faulty. Correct the harness connection between PWBLED and PWB-MFPC if faulty. Change LPH Assy. Change PWB-LED. Change PWB-MFPC. Change PWB-MC

— — — — — —

16.6.44

C3101: Fusing Pressure Roller pressure/retraction failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC33) Control Board (PWB-MC) Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19) Fusing Unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — — C to D-6 — —

Troubleshooting

1 2 3 4 5 6

Check the M9 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PC33 I/O check PC33 operation check M19 operation check Change Fusing Unit Change PWB-MC

— PWB-MC PJ26MC-12 (ON) — PWB-MC PJ14MC-5 to 6 — —

356

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.45 C3201: Fusing Drive Motor’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Control Board (PWB-MC)

16. Malfunction code

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — H-2 C to D-17 —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the M2 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the Fusing Unit drive for possible overload and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. M2 operation check Change PWB-MC

— — PWB-MC PJ2MC-5 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ31MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ31MC-13 (LOCK) —

16.6.46

C3202: Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing
Relevant Electrical Parts

Fusing Drive Motor (M2)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal PWB-MC PJ31MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ31MC-13 (LOCK) —

Location (Electrical Component) C to D-17 —

1 2

M2 operation check Change PWB-MC

16.6.47

C3301: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /1’s failure to turn
Troubleshooting
Relevant Electrical Parts

Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M9)

DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — K-9 —

1 2 3 4

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M9 operation check Change PU-1

— — PWB-MC PJ6MC-4 (REM) PWB-MC PJ6MC-6 (LOCK) —

357

bizhub C450

16. Malfunction code 16.6.48
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C3302: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2, /3’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M15) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M16)

Control Board (PWB-MC)

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — —

1 2

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M15, M16 operation check

— — PWB-MC PJ15MC-4 (REM) PWB-MC PJ15MC-6 (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ15MC-7 (REM) PWB-MC PJ15MC-9 (LOCK) —

3

C to D-21

4

Change PWB-MC

16.6.49 16.6.50 16.6.51 16.6.52 16.6.53 16.6.54

C3451: Heating Roller warm-up failure C3452: Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up failure C3751: Heating Roller abnormally high temperature C3752: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high temperature C3851: Heating Roller abnormally low temperature C3852: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature
Relevant Electrical Parts

Fusing Unit

DC Power Supply (PU1) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Troubleshooting

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) —

1

Check the Fusing Unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). Check the Fusing Unit, PWB-MC and PU1 for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Change Fusing Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PU1.

2 3 4 5

— — — —

— — — —

358

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.55 C4705: Printer Time Out
Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC)

16. Malfunction code

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) —

1

Select “Service Mode” → “State Confirmation” → “Memory/HDD Adj.” → “Memory Bus Check” → “Memory→PRT.” Check the connectors on PWB-MFPC for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFPC.

2 3

— —

— —

16.6.56 16.6.57 16.6.58 16.6.59 16.6.60 16.6.61 16.6.62 16.6.63 16.6.64 16.6.65 16.6.66 16.6.67

C4761: Compression hardware timeout C4765: Extraction hardware timeout C4770: JBIG0 Error C4771: JBIG1 Error C4772: JBIG2 Error C4773: JBIG3 Error C4780: Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure C4781: Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure C4782: Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure C4783: Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection
Relevant Electrical Parts

MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — Location (Electrical Component) —

1

Change PWB-MFPC.

359

Troubleshooting

bizhub C450

— — PWB-MC PJ2MC-1 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ31MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ31MC-6 (LOCK) — — 16. 2005 C5102: Main Motor's failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor (M1) Control Board (PWB-MC) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — H-2 C to D-17 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check the M1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M1 operation check Change PWB-MC.16.69 C5103: Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor (M1) Control Board (PWB-MC) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-MC PJ31MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ31MC-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical Component) C to D-17 — — 1 2 M1 operation check Change PWB-MC.68 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.6. Malfunction code 16. Change PU1. Change PU1. 1. Troubleshooting 3 360 .6.

Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. 1. M18 operation check Change PWB-MC — — PWB-MC PJ6MC-1 (REM) PWB-MC PJ6MC-3 (LOCK) — 361 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 . M21 operation check Change PU-1 — — PU1 PJ10PU1-3 (LOCK) — 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.0 Mar.71 C5353: Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M10) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — K-8 — 1 2 3 4 Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.6.6. 2005 16.70 16.6.72 C5354: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M18) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — K-8 to 9 — 1 2 3 4 Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — M to N-1 to 2 — 1 2 3 4 Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. M10 operation check Change PWB-MC — — PWB-MC PJ7MC-6 (REM) PWB-MC PJ7MC-7 (LOCK) — 16.Field Service Ver.

16. Malfunction code 16.6.73
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C5355: Cooling Fan Motor/3’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M25)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — C to D-12 —

1 2 3 4

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M25 operation check Change PWB-MC

— — PWB-MC PJ40MC-1 (REM) PWB-MC PJ40MC-3 (LOCK) —

16.6.74

C5356: Cooling Fan Motor/1’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M24)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — C to D-12 —

1 2 3 4

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M24 operation check Change PWB-MC

— — PWB-MC PJ40MC-4 (REM) PWB-MC PJ40MC-6 (LOCK) —

Troubleshooting

16.6.75

C5370: MFP Control Board Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

MFP Control Board Cooling Fan Motor (M27)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — M-17 —

1 2 3 4

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M27 operation check Change PWB-MC

— — PWB-SIF PJ08SIF-3 (LOCK) —

362

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.76 16.6.77 C6102: Scanner Home Sensor malfunction

16. Malfunction code

Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Home Sensor (PC201) Scanner Motor (M201) Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — —

1 2 3

Correct or change the Scanner drive (cable, pulley, gear, belt) if it is faulty. Correct the Scanner Motor set screw if loose. Adjust “Image Position Leading Edge” and “Feed Direction Adjustment.” Check the PC201, M201, PWB-IC and PWB-C connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PC201 I/O check M201 operation check Change PWB-IC. Change PWB-C.

— — —

4 5 6 7 8

— PWB-C PJ11C-8 (ON) PWB-IC PJ3IC-1 (REM) PWB-IC PJ3IC-3 (LOCK) — —

— N-13 S-9 — —

16.6.78

C6301: Scanner Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn
Relevant Electrical Parts

Scanner Cooling Fan Motor (M202)

Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — N-10 —

1 2 3 4

— — PWB-C PJ81C-2 (REM) PWB-C PJ81C-3 (LOCK) —

Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M202 operation check Change PWB-MC

363

Troubleshooting

Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.

bizhub C450

C6103: Scanner overrun failure

16. Malfunction code 16.6.79
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

C6704: Scanner Time Out
Relevant Electrical Parts

MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Copier Board (PWB-CF)

Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) —

1

Select “Service Mode” → “State Confirmation” → “Memory/HDD Adj.” → “Memory Bus Check” → “Scanner→Memory.” Check the connectors between PWB-C and PWB-CF for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFPC. Change PWB-C.

2 3 4

— — —

— — —

16.6.80

C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

Scanner Assy

CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — —

1 2 3

Correct the harness connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary. Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty, or change Scanner. Change PWB-A. Change PWB-C.

— — — — — —

Troubleshooting

4 5 6

364

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.81 16.6.82 C9401: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON

16. Malfunction code

Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy Flat Cable Image Processing Board (PWB-C)

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — —

1 2 3

Check the flat cable for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Change Scanner Assy. Change PWB-C.

— — —

16.6.83

CA051: Standard Controller configuration failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component)

1

Check to see if the following setting has been correctly made: “Service Mode” → “System 2” → “Image Controller Setting.” If the setting is changed, be sure to turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. Check the connectors of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFPC.

2 3

— —

— —

16.6.84

CC001: Vendor connection failure
Relevant Electrical Parts

Control Board (PWB-MC)

Coin Vendor (Japan) Coin Vendor Kit (North America, Europe) WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — —

1 2 3

Check the Vendor connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MC

— — —

365

Troubleshooting

bizhub C450

C9402: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing

16. Malfunction code 16.6.85
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC) CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) CC154: ROM contents error upon startup (LPH)
WIRING DIAGRAM

16.6.86 16.6.87 16.6.88

Step

Action

Control Signal — —

Location (Electrical Component) — —

1 2

Check the ROM version. Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash card.

16.6.89

CC163: ROM contents error (PRT)
WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal — —

Location (Electrical Component) — —

1 2

Check the ROM version. Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash card.

16.6.90

CD002: JOB RAM save error
Relevant Electrical Parts

MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC)

Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — — —

1 2

Check the Hard Disk connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Format Hard Disk. Change Hard Disk. Change PWB-MFPC.

— — — —

Troubleshooting

3 4

366

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.91 16.6.92 16.6.93 16.6.94 16.6.95 16.6.96 16.6.97 16.6.98 16.6.99 CD004: Hard disk access error

16. Malfunction code

CD006: Hard Disk Error 2 CD007: Hard Disk Error 3 CD008: Hard Disk Error 4 CD009: Hard Disk Error 5 CD00A: Hard Disk Error 6 CD00B: Hard Disk Error 7 CD00C: Hard Disk Error 8

16.6.100 CD00D: Hard Disk Error 9 16.6.101 CD00E: Hard Disk Error A 16.6.102 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error
Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES) Hard Disk

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — — — —

1 2 3 4 5

Check the Hard Disk connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Reinstall the hard disk. Change Hard Disk. Change PWB-ES. Change PWB-MFPC.

— — — — —

367

Troubleshooting

bizhub C450

CD005: Hard Disk Error 1

16. Malfunction code 16.6.103 CD010: Hard disk unformat
bizhub C450
Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Hard Disk

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — —

1 2 3

Select “Service Mode” → “State Confirmation” → “Memory/HDD Adj.” → “HDD Format.” Change Hard Disk. Change PWB-MFPC.

— — —

16.6.104 CD011: Hard disk specifications error
Relevant Electrical Parts Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — — Location (Electrical Component) — —

1 2

Check the hard disk specifications. Change the hard disk.

16.6.105 CD012: Encryption ASIC setting error 16.6.106 CD013: Encryption ASIC mounting error
Relevant Electrical Parts Encryption ASIC Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) WIRING DIAGRAM

Troubleshooting

Step

Action

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — — —

1 2 3

Check the Encryption ASIC for proper installation. Change the Encryption ASIC. Change PWB-ES.

— — —

368

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16.6.107 CD201: File Memory mounting failure

16. Malfunction code

Relevant Electrical Parts Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES) Standard Memory (D_FILE0) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) —

1

Check to see if the standard memory (D_FILE0) on the Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES) is installed correctly. Change the standard memory (D_FILE0)) on the Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES). Change PWB-ES.

2 3

— —

— —

16.6.109 CD221: NVRAM initialization failure 16.6.110 CD222: NVRAM initialization failure 16.6.111 CD223: NVRAM initialization failure
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal — Location (Electrical Component) —

1

Call responsible person of Konicaminolta.

16.6.112 CE002: Message and Method parameter failure
Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal

1 2 3 4

Check the Hard Disk connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Format Hard Disk. Change Hard Disk. Change PWB-MFPC.

— — — —

— — — —

369

Troubleshooting

Step

Action

Location (Electrical Component)

bizhub C450

16.6.108 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy

16. Malfunction code

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

16.6.113 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring
bizhub C450
Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — —

1 2

Check the connectors on PWB-MFPC for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFPC.

— —

16.6.114 CEEE2: Scanner Section undefined malfunction
Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — —

1 2 3

Correct the connector connection between PWBA and PWB-C if faulty. Change PWB-C. Change PWB-A.

— — —

16.6.115 CEEE3: Engine Section undefined malfunction
Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action

Troubleshooting

Control Signal

Location (Electrical Component) — —

1 2

Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MC

— —

370

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

17. Power supply trouble

17. Power supply trouble
17.1 Machine is not Energized at All (PU1 Operation Check)
Relevant Electrical Parts Main Power Switch (SW1) Control Board (PWB-MC) DC Power Supply (PU1)

Step

Check Item Is a power voltage supplied across PJ1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1? Are the fuses (F1 and F2) on PU1 conducting? Is DC24 V being output from PJ5PU1-2 on PU1? Is DC5 V being input to PJ7PU1-1 on PU1? Is DC5 V being input to PJ1MC-7 on the Control Board? (LED on PWB-MC does not blink.)

WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) Q to R-4 to 5 — P-4 to 5 Q to R-6 I-13

Result NO

Action Check WIRING between the wall outlet and PJ1PU1. Change PU1. Change PU1. Change PU1. Change PU1. Change PWB-MC

1 2 3 4 5

NO NO NO NO YES

17.2 Control panel indicators do not light.
Relevant Electrical Parts Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Control Panel (UN201) DC Power Supply (PU1)

Step

Check Item Is the I/F cable between the Scanner and engine connected properly? Is a power voltage being applied across PJ1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1? Is the fuse (F1,F2) on PU1 conducting? Is DC5 V being output from PJ13PU1-1 on PU1 and DC24 V from PJ12PU1-1? Is PJ12C on PWB-C securely connected? Is CN1UN201 on UN201 securely connected?

WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) —

Result NO NO

Action Reconnect or change the I/F cable. Check the WIRING from the wall outlet to SW1 PJ1PU1. Change PU1. Change PU1. Reconnect. Reconnect. Change UN201. Change PWB-C.

1

2 3 4 5

Q to R-4 to 5 — P-6 to 7 Q to R11 to 12 Y-3 to 4 NO NO NO NO YES

6

371

Troubleshooting

bizhub C450

17. Power supply trouble

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

17.3 Fusing Heaters do not Operate
bizhub C450
Relevant Electrical Parts Upper Right Door Switch (SW5) Fusing Unit DC Power Supply (PU1)

Step

Check Item Is the power source voltage applied across PJ4PU1-1 and 3 on PU1? During this time, the Right Door should be closed. Is the power source voltage applied across CN44-1 and 3, or across 2 and 3?

WIRING DIAGRAM (Location)

Result NO

Action Check wiring from power outlet to SW5 to PJ4PU1. Fusing Unit Change PU1.

1

R-6

2

S-6

YES NO

17.4 Power is not Supplied to ADF
Step Check Item Is DC24 V being output from CN51-1 on DF601? Is DC24 V being output from PJ12PU1-4 on PU1? Is the fuse (F201) on PU1 conducting? 3 — WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) S-14 O to P-7 Result YES NO YES NO Action Malfunction in DF-601 Check wiring from PU1 to CN53 to ADF. Change PU1. Change F201. Malfunction in DF-601

1 2

17.5 Power is not Supplied to Duplex
Step Check Item Is DC24 V being output from CN42-1 on Duplex? Is DC24 V being output from PJ6PU1-1 on PU1? Is the fuse (F203) on PU1 conducting? 3 — WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) J-10 O to P-3 Result NO NO YES NO Action Malfunction in Duplex. Check wiring from PU1 to Duplex. Change PU1. Change F203. Malfunction in Duplex.

Troubleshooting

1 2

372

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

17. Power supply trouble

17.6 Power is not Supplied to Option
17.6.1 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet
WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) O-27

Step

Check Item Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connector CN28-1? Is DC24 V being output from PJ6PU1-2 on PU1? Is the fuse (F204) on PU1 conducting?

Result

Action Malfunction in Paper Feed Cabinet Check wiring from PU1 to CN48 to Paper Feed Cabinet. Change PU1. Change F204. Malfunction in Paper Feed Cabinet

1

NO

2

P-3

NO YES

3

NO

17.6.2

Finisher
WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) K-14 NO Check wiring from PU1 to Finisher. Change PU1. Change F202, F205. Malfunction in Finisher.

Step

Check Item Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to CN20-11 and CN20-1, respectively, of the Finisher? Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to PJ5PU1-9 and PJ10PU1-5 on PU1, respectively? Are there continuity in the 24-V fuse (F202) and 5-V fuse (F205) on PU1?

Result NO

Action Malfunction in Finisher.

1

2

P-5 R-7

YES — NO

3

373

Troubleshooting

bizhub C450

18. Image quality problem

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

18. Image quality problem
bizhub C450

18.1 How to read Element date
• As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for “State Confirmation” available from “Service Mode” can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem.

4037F4E509DA

18.1.1

Table Number

4037F4E511DA

Troubleshooting

Vdc-C Vdc-M Vdc-Y Vdc-K Vg-C Vg-M Vg-Y Vg-K

• • • • • • • • • •

Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced. Standard values: Around 390 V A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater. A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller. Relevant Components: Imaging Unit, High Voltage Unit (Developing Bias) Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced. Standard values: Around 500 V A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater. A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller. Relevant Components: Imaging Unit, High Voltage Unit (Developing Bias)

374

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 18.1.2 Level History 1

18. Image quality problem

4037F4E513DA

TCR-C TCR-M TCR-Y TCR-K IDC1 IDC2

• Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments). • Standard value: 7 ± 3 % • Relevant Components: LPH Unit, TCR Sensor K • • • • Shows the IDC bare surface output reading taken last (in 0.01 V increments). It should normally be around 4.3 V. The output range is 0 V to 5 V. “Reading taken last” means: Latest toner density When the Start key is pressed, the output value is displayed while a test print is being produced. • Relevant Components: IDC Sensor, Transfer Belt Unit • Shows the temperature of the Heating Roller (Temp-Belt) and the Fusing Pressure Roller (Temp-Press.) (in 5 °C increments). • Relevant Components: Fusing Unit

Temp-Belt. Temp-Press.

375

Troubleshooting

bizhub C450

18. Image quality problem 18.1.3
bizhub C450

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

Level History 2

4037F4E515DA

IDC Sensor Adjust 1 IDC Sensor Adjust 2

• • • • • • • •

Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value. It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255. The value becomes greater as the Transfer Belt Unit has been used more. Relevant Components: IDC Sensor, Transfer Belt Unit Shows the latest ATVC level (which varies according to the paper type). 300 V to 3000 V (ATVC-C/-M/-Y/-K) 300 V to 5000 V (ATVC-2nd) Relevant Components: Transfer Belt Unit, High Voltage Unit (Image Transfer, Neutralizing)

ATVC -C ATVC -M ATVC -Y ATVC -K ATVC -2nd

Troubleshooting

376

” 18. 1.0 Mar.1 Initial Check Items bizhub C450 Troubleshooting C A. Document Scan CCD Sensor Board PWB-A Scanner system Image Processing Board PWB-C I/F Cable Copier Board PWB-CF Printer system LED Drive Board PWB-LED MFP Control Board PWB-MFPC Test Print • Evaluation Procedure Image Problem Lines. Action Enter the Service Mode. Image quality problem 18. go to “Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem. Initial Check Items 2 • Let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem is attributable to the Scanner or printer system. bands Action From “Service Mode. 2005 18.” select “Test Mode” → “Halftone Pattern” → “SINGLE” → “HYPER” → “Gradation” → “C→M→Y→K” → “Density 64. first go through the “Initial Check Items” and. and between memory and printer. Result OK NG Next Step Initial Check Items 2 ☞ 364 (action as instructed) B. Initial Check Items 1 • Check first to see if image data is properly transmitted between Scanner and memory. if the cause is yet to be identified. Is image problem evident? Result YES Cause Printer Next Step Initial Check Items 3 ☞ NO Scanner 379 377 .” and produce a test print.” → “Memory Bus Check.2.2 How to identify problematic part • This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial Check Items” and “Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem.” • When an image quality problem occurs.” and select and carry out “Scanner→Memory” and “Memory→PRT” checks.Field Service Ver. select “State Confirmation” → “Memory/HDD Adj.

Initial Check Items 3 • If the printer is responsible for the image problem. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. Is image problem evident in each of all four colors? ☞ 408 ☞ 392 378 . 2005 bizhub C450 C.” select “Test Mode” → “Halftone Pattern” → “SINGLE” → “HYPER” → “Gradation” → “C→M→Y→K” → “Density 64. 1. let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors 4 Color Mono Color 4037F4C517DA Troubleshooting • Evaluation Procedure Image Problem Action Result YES NO Cause Printer. 4 colors Printer.” and produce a test print. bands From “Service Mode.18. single color Next Step Lines.0 Mar.

0 Mar. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Clean. Clean.3 Solution 18. Image quality problem 18. Original Pad is dirty. 379 . Clean. and colored bands in Sub Scan Direction bizhub C450 Troubleshooting A.1 IR System: white lines in Sub Scan Direction. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Shading sheet Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. 5 Mirror. Clean. lens. Clean. 1. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub Scan Direction White bands in Sub Scan Direction Color lines in Sub Scan Direction Color bands in Sub Scan Direction 4036fs4021c0 4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0 4036fs4024c0 B. 2005 18.Field Service Ver. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Readjust. Original Glass is dirty. Shading sheet is dirty. 6 7 YES Change Scanner Assy. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Exposure Mirror is dirty Lamp. white bands in Sub Scan Direction. and reflectors Lens is dirty Exposure Lamp is dirty Reflectors are dirty Machine → Scan Area → Image Position: Side Edge (Service Mode) The adjustment value for Image Position: Side Edge falls within the specified range.3. Change CCD Unit. The white lines/bands or colored lines/bands are blurry. colored lines in Sub Scan Direction.

Original Pad is dirty. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main Scan Direction White bands in Main Scan Direction Color lines in Main Scan Direction Color bands in Main Scan Direction 4036fs4025c0 4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0 B. 2005 Scanner System: white lines in Main Scan Direction. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Clean. Original Glass is dirty. and colored bands in Main Scan Direction A. white bands in Main Scan Direction. Change CCD Unit. Result YES YES YES Action Change original. Troubleshooting 380 . NO 4 Machine → Scan The adjustment value for Image Area → Image Position: Leading Edge falls within the specified range. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. colored lines in Main Scan Direction.18.2 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Readjust. 1. Image quality problem 18. Position: Top Edge (Service Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 4. 5 NO Change Scanner Assy.3.

Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth.3 Scanner System: color spots 18. Clean. 2005 18. Change CCD Unit. Change Scanner Assy. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3.0 Mar. Typical Faulty Images . Original Pad is dirty. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Original Glass is dirty.3. Image quality problem AA 4036fs4029c0 B.Field Service Ver. 381 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. 1. Result YES YES YES NO Action Change original.

Original Glass is dirty. The problem is eliminated when the image is produced in the Manual exposure setting. Exposure Lamp. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Basic Screen Quality/Density Original Glass Shading sheet Section Original Original Cover Check Item Original is damaged or dirty.4 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Change Scanner Assy. Original Pad is dirty. Clean. Clean. 11 NO Troubleshooting 382 . lens. 2005 Scanner System: fog A. Reflectors are dirty. Mirror.3. Lens is dirty. Mirror is dirty. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Clean.0 Mar. Clean. Clean. Change CCD Unit. and reflectors Exposure Lamp is dirty. Typical Faulty Images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 4036fs4030c0 B. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Image quality problem 18. Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken. Shading sheet is dirty. 1.18. Try another exposure level in Manual. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Original Cover does not lie flat. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 10.

Check original loading position.” Change Scanner Assy. NO 383 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. 1. Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken. 2005 18. Position Original Glass correctly. Original Cover does not lie flat.5 Scanner System: blurred image. blotchy image 18.3. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Check Item Original does not lie flat. 4 5 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 4. Typical Faulty Images . Result YES YES YES YES Action Change original. Image quality problem 4036fs4031c0 B. Perform “Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage” and “Scanner Position Adjustment. Original Glass tilts.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Scanner is not aligned with the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. Change CCD Unit.

NO Troubleshooting 384 . → Change Scanner Motor. 2005 Scanner System: incorrect color image registration. sync shift (lines in main scan direction) A. Adjust the Scanner Motor timing belt. Original Cover does not lie flat.6 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Foreign matter on rails. Image quality problem 18. 1. Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Slide rails Drive Cables Scanner Assy 5 Check Item Original does not lie flat. Clean and apply lubricant.18. Change CCD Unit. Correct or change. Cable kinks or is damaged.0 Mar. Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4032c0 B. Result YES YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Scanner moves smoothly.3. 6 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. → Change bushing.

3. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 2.0 Mar. Select “Text Mode or “Photo Mode”. YES 2 3 NO 385 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Image quality problem 4036fs4033c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Basic Screen Quality/Density Basic Screen Zoom Section Original Check Item Moire distortions recur even after the orientation of original has been changed. Change the zoom ratio. 2005 18. 1.Field Service Ver. Moire distortions recur even after the original mode has been changed.7 Scanner System: moire 18. Typical Faulty Images . Result NO Action Change the original mode (select one other than that resulted in moire).

8 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Check the original loading position. Scanner Assy is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.3. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Section Original Original Glass Check Item Original is skew. Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4034c0 B. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3. Reinstall the glass. 2005 Scanner System: skewed image A. Change CCD Unit. Image quality problem 18. Perform “Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage” and “Scanner Position Adjustment.18. YES 3 4 NO Troubleshooting 386 .” Change Scanner Assy.0 Mar. 1. Original Glass is in positive contact with the flat spring without being tilt. Result YES NO Action Reposition original.

0 Mar. Action 2 3 4 Scanner Motor NO NO 387 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Perform “Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage” and “Scanner Position Adjustment. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3.Field Service Ver. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Installation 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Check Item Machine is installed on a level surface. Scanner Motor turns smoothly.9 Scanner System: distorted image 18. 2005 18.” Change belt. Image quality problem ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4035c0 B. Scanner Assy is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. Typical Faulty Images . Change Scanner Motor.3. Change Scanner Assy. 1. Change CCD Unit. Result NO YES Reinstall.

Exposure Lamp is dirty. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Original Glass is dirty. Shading sheet is dirty. Clean. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7. Clean Exposure Lamp. Clean. 1. Troubleshooting 388 . → Change CCD Unit.10 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. rough image A. Reflectors are dirty.3. 2005 Scanner System: low image density. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth.18. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Lens is dirty. Mirror is dirty. lens. Image quality problem 18. Clean. Clean. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Section Original Original Glass Shading sheet Mirror. → Change Scanner Assy. Exposure Lamp.0 Mar. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Reposition original. and reflectors Check Item Original sticks to Original Glass.

3. Make manual settings according to the type of original. Typical Faulty Images . Image quality problem AA Colored Area of Original ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4037c0 Black-and-White Area of Original B.11 Scanner System: defective ACS 18. 1. Result YES Action Change the original loading direction.) 389 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Auto Color Level Adjustment (User Setting) 1 Check Item The problem persists even after the ACS Determination Level Adjust function has been changed. 2005 18. (If the original contains a colored area in one of its corners.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. the machine may fail to properly detect the colored area.

Typical Faulty Images Blank copy Black copy 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0 B. NO Reconnect.18. 4 5 Image Processing The problem is eliminated after Board (PWB-C) the I/F connection cable has been changed. Change I/F connection cable. 2005 Scanner System: blank copy. printer Image Processing Connectors on the Image ProBoard (PWB-C) cessing Board are connected properly. Troubleshooting 390 . Image quality problem 18. CCD Unit Test Mode (Service Mode) Connectors of the CCD Unit are connected properly. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Check Item Result NO Reconnect. The problem is eliminated as checked with the image on a test pattern produced. NO Change Image Processing Board.3. black copy A.12 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 2 3 NO NO Reconnect.0 Mar. Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Scanner and with no pins bent. 1.

Reinstall expanded memory. 2 NO NO Reconnect. NO NO 6 391 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Scanner and with no pins bent. Change MFP Control Board. MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC) Test Mode (Service Mode) Data on previous page is mixed with data on current page. MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Check Item Result NO Reconnect. 1. printer Image Processing Connectors on the Image ProcessBoard (PWB-C) ing Board are connected properly. The problem is eliminated as checked with the image on a test pattern produced.0 Mar. Change Image Processing Board. Typical Faulty Images .Field Service Ver. 2005 18.3. 5 Image Processing The problem is eliminated after the Board (PWB-C) interface connection cable has been changed. 3 NO 4 Change interface connection cable. Image quality problem ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4040c0 4036fs4041c0 ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Data on previous page AA 4036fs4042c0 Data on current page B.13 Scanner System: abnormal image 18.

colored lines in Main Scan Direction. colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction. Change Imaging Unit. Clean contact terminal and check terminal position.” Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever. Image check A white line or black line in sub scan direction is sharp.18. white bands in Main Scan Direction.3. white lines in Main Scan Direction. Image check The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 6. Image quality problem 18. Clean with cleaning jig. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7. → Change LPH Assy. Reconnect.” Change Imaging Unit. Clean. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result YES Action Select “Service Mode” → “Machine” → “LPH Chip Adjust” and run “LPH Chip Adjust.14 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 1. colored bands in Main Scan Direction A. LPH Assy The surface of the lens array is dirty. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. 2005 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Sub Scan Direction. 6 7 NO NO NO 8 392 . Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection.0 Mar. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub Scan Direction White bands in Sub Scan Direction Colored lines in Sub Colored bands in Sub Scan Direction Scan Direction 4036fs4021c0 4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0 4036fs4024c0 White lines in Main Scan Direction White bands in Main Scan Direction Colored lines in Main Colored bands in Main Scan Direction Scan Direction 4036fs4025c0 4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0 B. Clean contact terminals. Connectors and contact terminals make good connection between each IU and LPH Assy. 1 NO Troubleshooting 2 3 4 5 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Select “Service Mode” → “Machine” → “LPH Rank” and run “LPH Rank. white bands in Sub Scan Direction. YES YES YES NO Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside.

YES High image density original 2 Uneven density in Sub Scan Direction occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to 50 mm when a multi-copy cycle is run using an original with high image density (50% or more). Change IU. Monocolor uneven image (uneven high density) occurs. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 8. Uneven density of void area occurs.3. 7 Image Transfer Belt Unit 8 NO NO 9 393 Troubleshooting . Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of paper with no originals placed. Clean. Typical Faulty Images B. Slide out the IU and reinstall. → Change LPH Assy. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Image check 1 Check Item Result Action Check LPH Unit connector for proper connection. Check the LED Drive Board connectors for proper connection.0 Mar.15 18. → Change Copier Board. as the IU fails to keep up with a high demand for toner. 1. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Cam gear operates properly.” Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. LED retracting lever is locked in position. → Change LED Drive Board → Change LPH Unit. Image quality problem Printer Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction bizhub C450 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 4036fs4045c0 A. Dirty on the outside. → Change High Voltage Unit (Image Transfer. Change Imaging Unit. Clean using the LED Cleaning Jig. Select “Service Mode” → “Machine” → “LPH Rank” and run “LPH Rank. The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Neutralizing). YES 3 4 5 6 LPH Assy Imaging Unit NO YES YES YES YES LPH Assy Image check LED surface is dirty.Field Service Ver. 2005 18.

Change Imaging Unit.16 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Clean.18. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 LPH Assy Image check 4 Image Transfer Belt Unit Section Imaging Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Image quality problem 18. Clean with cleaning jig. Dirty on the outside. Cam gear operates properly. Select “Service Mode” → “Machine” → “LPH Rank” and run “LPH Rank. Neutralizing). The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 6.0 Mar. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 B. 5 6 NO NO NO Troubleshooting 394 . → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer.” Check and correct contacts. 7 Result YES YES YES YES Action Change Imaging Unit. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). 1. The surface of the lens array is dirty.3. Image Transfer Belt Unit makes positive contact with plates on rails. 2005 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction A. Monocolor uneven image (uneven high density) occurs.

Change gear. Hopper Unit Connectors are loose. Clean IDC Sensor. Cam gear operates properly. Go to step 14. Check and correct contacts. IDC output value is around 4. Gear is cracked. Check Image Transfer Belt for damage.3. 1. Go to step 8. Typical Faulty Images . Clean. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section State Confirm → Table Number (Service Mode) Check Item Check data for Vg and Vdc. Color Vdc: Around 390 V Vg : Around 500 V Black Vdc: Around 390 V Vg : Around 500 V Check TCR data. Image Transfer Belt Unit makes positive contact with plates on rails. Slide out the IU and reinstall. 2005 18. Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc TCR falling within specified range and low Vg and Vdc TCR falling within specified range and high Vg and Vdc YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy TCR Sensor window Image Transfer Belt Unit LED retracting lever is locked in position. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 State Confirmation → Level History 1 (Service Mode) Level History data check results NO NO Go to next step. Result NO Action Go to next step. The color TCR Sensor window on the LED Assy is dirty. Reconnect. Dirty on the outside. Clean. The surface of the lens array is dirty. Clean with cleaning jig.3 V. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. 395 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Go to step 14. Go to step 8.0 Mar. Clean. Image quality problem ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B.17 Printer Monocolor: low image density 18.Field Service Ver. Toner empty lever and/or detecting switch are defective.

if the problem persists. NO Go to next step. 18 YES Go to step 23. → Change MFP Control Board → Change LPH Unit.0 Mar. → Change Copier Board. 2005 Result NO Action Go to next step. Image quality problem Step Section Check Item Field Service Ver. Neutralizing). make adjustments of D Max Density. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 22. bizhub C450 17 Image Process Toner is properly supplied when Adjustment → TCR Toner Supply is run.18. TCR Toner Supply (Service Mode) Image Process The problem has been eliminated Adjustment → when T/C has been increased. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. TCR Level Setting (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment →Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → D Max Density (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) “Conv. Troubleshooting 396 . → Change LPH Assy. 1. NO Go to next step. 19 NO Go to next step. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight = 0 ± 60 The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of D Max. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. → Change LED Drive Board. 20 21 After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. → Change High Voltage Unit/ 1 (Image Transfer. → Change High Voltage Unit/ 2 (Developing Bias). NO 22 Change Imaging Unit. run Gradation Adjust.

18 Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure 18. Clean. 8 9 After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed.Field Service Ver. if the problem persists. 1. run Gradation Adjust. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight = 0 ± 60 The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of D Max. Image quality problem 4036fs4048c0 4036fs4049c0 B. Clean with cleaning jig. 6 YES 7 NO Go to next step.TCR Sensor window is dirty. Result NO YES YES YES YES NO Action Change screen pattern. 2005 18. dow State Confirma.0 Mar. tion → Level History 1 (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment →Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → D Max Density (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) “Conv.3 V. Clean. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. 397 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Dirty on the outside. make adjustments of D Max Density. TCR Sensor win. NO Go to next step. LED retracting lever is locked in position. Check Image Transfer Belt for damage. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 Section Photo/Density LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy Check Item Original type and screen pattern are selected properly. Slide out the Imaging Unit and reinstall. Typical Faulty Images .IDC output value is around 4. The surface of the lens array is dirty. Clean IDC Sensor.3. Go to step 11.

bizhub C450 10 Troubleshooting 398 . → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer.18. → Change MFP Control Board → Change LPH Unit. Image quality problem Step Section Check Item The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 9. → Change LED Drive Board.0 Mar. Field Service Ver. 2005 Result NO Action Change Imaging Unit. 1. → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. → Change Copier Board. Neutralizing). → Change LPH Assy.

Check Transfer Belt for damage. 12 13 “Conv. Clean. Clean. Typical Faulty Images .Field Service Ver.0 Mar. 1. Color Vdc: Around 390 V Vg : Around 500 V Black Vdc: Around 390 V Vg : Around 500 V Check TCR data.3 V. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. 2005 18. Slide out the IU and reinstall. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section State Confirmation → Table Number (Service Mode) State Confirmation → Level History 1 (Service Mode) Check Item Check data for Vg and Vb. Level History data Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc check results Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc TCR falling within specified range and low Vg and Vdc TCR falling within specified range and high Vg and Vdc LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy LED retracting lever is locked in position.The color TCR Sensor window on dow the LED Assy is dirty. Go to step 8. 399 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Clean with cleaning jig. Image Process Adjustment → Background Voltage Margin (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment →Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) The problem is eliminated after Background Voltage Margin has been adjusted. Go to next step. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 NO NO Go to next step. IDC output value is around 4. Go to step 12. Image quality problem ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 4036fs4030c0 B. YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES NO TCR Sensor win. The surface of the lens array is dirty.19 Printer Monocolor: foggy background 18. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight = 0 ± 60 YES Go to step 17. Clean IDC Sensor. Go to step 8.3. Result NO Action Go to next step. Go to step 12. Dirty on the outside.

The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 15. → Change LPH Assy. NO Go to next step. Troubleshooting 400 . bizhub C450 14 Image Process The problem has been eliminated Adjustment through the adjust of D Max. → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). 15 NO 16 Change Imaging Unit. make adjustments of D Max Density. → Change MFP Control Board → Change LPH Unit. → Change LED Drive Board. if the problem persists. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Neutralizing). → Change Copier Board. Image quality problem Step Section Check Item Field Service Ver.0 Mar. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer.18. 2005 Result NO Action Go to next step. run Gradation Adjust. → D Max Density (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. 1.

20 Printer Monocolor: void areas. Clean.Field Service Ver. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Check Check Item There are void areas at the front side or high density section.3. Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Remove foreign matter. 1.0 Mar. Is the atmospheric pressure at the installation site low? Result YES YES Action ☞ 395 Perform “Transfer Adjust” of “Image Process Adjustment” under Service Mode. white spots 18. Change Imaging Unit. NO 401 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. 2 3 4 5 YES YES YES YES 6 7 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 6. Make the following adjustment: “Service Mode” → “Image Process Adjustment” → “Dev. Dirty on the outside. Bias Choice. There is void area at the rear side section. Image quality problem Void areas White spots 4036fs4050c0 4036fs4051c0 B. Hopper Unit Installation environment Foreign matter or caked toner in the Toner Cartridge. 2005 18.” Change Imaging Unit. Typical Faulty Images .

1. Clean. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Imaging Unit Check Item Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection. Image quality problem 18. Dirty on the outside. Result NO YES YES NO Action Clean contact terminal and check terminal position. Change Imaging Unit. Troubleshooting 402 . The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3.21 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.3.0 Mar. Change Imaging Unit. Typical Faulty Images Colored spots AA 4036fs4052c0 B.18. The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. 2005 Printer Monocolor: colored spots A.

Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 LED Assy Section Image Check Check Item Image is distorted (stretched or shrunk). Change Imaging Unit. → Change LPH Unit. 2 3 4 5 NO YES YES NO 403 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A.3. Clean. Image quality problem blurred image 4036fs4031c0 B. 2005 18.22 Printer Monocolor: blurred image 18. Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside.Field Service Ver. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 4. Clean with cleaning jig. 1. → Change LPH Assy. LED retracting lever is locked in position. Typical Faulty Images . Result YES Action Select “Service Mode” → “Machine” → “Printer Area” → “Paper Feed Direction Adj. The surface of the lens array is dirty.0 Mar.” Slide out the IU and reinstall.

Typical Faulty Images Blank copy Black copy 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0 B. clean. 1. Neutralizing). NO NO 3 4 High Voltage Unit/ Connector is connected properly.3. Imaging Unit 2 Coupling of IU drive mechanism is installed properly. black copy A. Check and correct drive transmitting coupling. The PC Drum Charge Corona voltage contact or PC Drum ground contact of the Imaging Unit is connected properly. Neutralizing) The problem has been eliminated through the check of step4. Change IU. 404 . Check. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Image Check 1 Check Item A blank copy occurs. → Change MFP Control Board → Change Copier Board → Change LED Drive Board → Change LPH Unit.18. NO Reconnect. Image quality problem 18.0 Mar. NO 5 Troubleshooting Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. Check the LED Drive Board connectors for proper connection. or correct the contact. 1 (Image Transfer. 2005 Printer Monocolor: blank copy.23 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Result YES Action Check LPH Unit connector for proper connection.

1.Field Service Ver. Result NO YES Action Slide out the IU and reinstall.3. 405 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A.24 Printer Monocolor: 0. 2005 18.5-mm-pitch uneven image 18.5mm 4036fs4053c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section LPH Assy Check Item LED retracting lever is locked in position. Typical Faulty Images . Image quality problem 0. Change Imaging Unit.0 Mar.

0 Mar.3. Action Troubleshooting 406 . Result YES NO Clean. Typical Faulty Images 2 mm 4036fs4054c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Check Item The drive mechanisms for spent toner conveying and IU are dirty. 1.25 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 2005 Printer Monocolor: 2-mm-pitch uneven image A. Change Imaging Unit.18. Image quality problem 18.

Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit drive gear has chipped off. Image Transfer Roller is damaged. Correct. Reinstall or change the IU Motor.Field Service Ver. Change Imaging Unit. Typical Faulty Images . 1. There is play in the IU Motor. Image quality problem 94 mm 94 mm 94 mm 4036fs4057c0 4036fs4055c0 4036fs4056c0 B. Coupling of IU drive mechanism is installed properly. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. 2005 18. Change Imaging Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. 2 3 4 5 6 YES YES YES NO 407 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Check and correct drive transmitting coupling. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.26 Printer Monocolor: 94-mm-pitch uneven image 18. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Result YES NO Action Change Imaging Unit.3.0 Mar.

change Image Transfer Belt Unit. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.27 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Clean.0 Mar. Clean. Image Transfer Paper Separator Fingers are damaged or dirty. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. and colored bands in sub scan direction A. Clean with specified solvent. Cleaning Blade is not effective in removing toner completely. There is foreign matter on paper path. oil. 1. Clean. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.18. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub Scan Direction White bands in Sub Scan Direction Colored lines in Sub Scan Direction Colored bands in Sub Scan Direction 4036fs4021c0 4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0 4036fs4024c0 B. 11 Result YES Action Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever. (See Maintenance. Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover.3. white bands in sub scan direction. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty or damaged. 2005 Printer 4-Color: white lines in sub scan direction. Clean Cleaning Blade. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Change Fusing Unit. Clean or change. Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are dirty. Fingerprints. Remove foreign matter. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 10. → Change MFP Control Board YES 2 YES 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Troubleshooting 408 . colored lines in sub scan direction. Image quality problem 18. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Image Transfer Belt Unit Section Image Check Check Item A white line or colored line in sub scan direction.

Image quality problem A. Remove foreign matter. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. There is foreign matter on paper path.Field Service Ver. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. change Image Transfer Belt Unit. 10 Result YES Action Clean with specified solvent. white bands in main scan direction. Clean.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. 1. Clean.3. Clean Cleaning Blade. → Change MFP Control Board YES 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO 409 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 Printer 4-Color: white lines in main scan direction. (See Maintenance. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main Scan Direction White bands in Main Scan Direction Colored lines in Main Scan Direction Colored bands in Main Scan Direction 4036fs4025c0 4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0 B. Image Transfer Paper Separator Fingers are damaged or dirty.28 18. oil. 2005 18. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 9. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints. colored lines in main scan direction. and colored bands in main scan direction . Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty or damaged. Clean or change.0 Mar. Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are dirty. Clean or change. Cleaning Blade is not effective in removing toner completely. Change Fusing Unit.

Reinstall. Terminal is dirty. Clean. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints.29 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 2005 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Result YES Action Clean with specified solvent. YES 2 3 4 5 YES NO YES NO 6 Troubleshooting 410 . Image quality problem 18. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged.0 Mar. oil. 1. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched.3.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. (See Maintenance. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt.18. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 B.

Field Service Ver. 6 Result YES Action Clean with specified solvent.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Terminal is dirty. → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Reinstall. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Neutralizing). → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer.30 18. (See Maintenance. 1. Image quality problem Printer 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction bizhub C450 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 A. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. oil. Clean.0 Mar. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Typical Faulty Images B. Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. YES 2 3 4 5 YES NO YES NO 411 Troubleshooting . Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. 2005 18. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.3. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.

make adjustments of D Max Density. Neutralizing).18. Clean. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 8. if the problem persists. 2005 Printer 4-Color: low image density A. Go to step 10. Reinstall. 8 NO 9 Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Image quality problem 18. → Change MFP Control Board → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Paper is damp. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight: 0 ± 60 6 7 Troubleshooting The problem has been eliminated Image Process Adjustment through the adjust of D Max Den→ D Max Density sity. Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater. YES NO NO YES YES IDC Sensor Image Process Adjustment →Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) Sensor is dirty. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B.3.0 Mar. 2 3 4 5 Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Terminal is dirty. Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.31 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. NO Go to next step. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. run Gradation Adjust. “Conv. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. 1. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. NO Go to next step. 412 . Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Clean with blower brush.

Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.3. 2005 18. Image quality problem 4036fs4058c0 B. (Service Mode) NO Go to next step. Go to step 10.0 Mar. → Change MFP Control Board → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight: 0 ± 60 6 7 8 Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. YES NO NO YES YES IDC Sensor Image Process Adjustment → Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) Sensor is dirty. 2 3 4 5 Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Terminal is dirty. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. NO Go to next step. run Gradation Adjust. Reinstall. 413 Troubleshooting The problem has been eliminated Image Process Adjustment through the adjust of D Max Den→D Max Density sity. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 8.32 Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction 18. Typical Faulty Images . Neutralizing). Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater. make adjustments of D Max Density. if the problem persists. “Conv. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Clean with blower brush. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. NO 9 Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.Field Service Ver. 1. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Paper is damp. bizhub C450 A. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Clean.

) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.occurs. YES 2 3 NO YES 4 YES 5 6 7 8 9 YES YES NO YES YES Troubleshooting 10 YES 11 Perform “Color registration Adjustment.” If color shift is not corrected even with a correction of ± 1 dot. Clean. Slide out the IU and reinstall.0 Mar. LPH Assy Image Transfer Belt Unit LED retracting lever is locked in position. Reinstall. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. (See Maintenance.33 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. oil. Machine condi. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Warning display The maintenance call mark is displayed on the panel. Clean with specified solvent. → Change MFP Control Board NO 12 414 .18. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Check Item Result YES Action Take action according to the warning code shown on the State Confirm screen. 1. Drive coupling to the machine is dirty. tration Adjustment (Service Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 11. Change Imaging Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4032c0 B. 2005 Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration A. Imaging Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. port Speed (Service Mode) Machine Check the specific color in which → Color regis. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Turn OFF and ON Main Power Switch. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. go to next step. Brush effect or blurred image Machine → Fusing Trans. Image quality problem 18. Readjust Fusing Transport Speed.color shift occurs. Fingerprints.Vibration is given to the machine tion after main power switch has been turned ON. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched.3. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.

1. Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate is damaged or dirty. NO Result YES YES Action ☞ 413 Perform “Transfer Adjust” of “Image Process Adjustment” under Service Mode. Image quality problem Void areas White spots 4036fs4050c0 4036fs4051c0 B. YES Charge Neutralizing Cloth is not separated and ground terminal is connected properly. There are void areas in the trailing edge. There is foreign matter on paper path. Typical Faulty Images . or other foreign matter is evident on the Transfer Belt.3. Clean with specified solvent. Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints. 2005 18.34 Printer 4-Color: void areas. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Check Check Item There are void areas at the front side or high density section. 4 5 6 Paper path Transfer Roller Unit Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Paper Dust Remover Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. (See Maintenance.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change Transfer Roller Unit. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 9. white spots 18. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. 10 415 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. Clean or change. Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. 2 YES 3 YES 7 8 9 YES YES YES NO Remove foreign matter. oil. Correct or change. Clean or change. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Change Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged.

Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. 1. (See Maintenance. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Fingerprints. 2005 Printer 4-Color: colored spots A. Clean with specified solvent.35 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover.18. 2 YES 3 4 5 6 7 YES YES YES YES NO Troubleshooting 416 . Change Fusing Unit. oil. Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4052c0 B. Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched. Remove foreign matter. Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Clean or change. There is foreign matter on paper path. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt.3. Image quality problem 18. 8 Result YES YES Action Change Imaging Unit. → Change Fusing Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.0 Mar. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged.

Changing fusing temperature eliminates the problem of poor fusing performance and offset. Readjust Fusing Temperature. 2005 18. 2 3 NO Change Fusing Unit. Typical Faulty Images . Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Paper Machine → Fusing Temperature (Service Mode) Check Item Paper type does not match. Image quality problem Poor fusing performance Offset CF CF CF 4036fs4059c0 4036fs4060c0 B. 1.Field Service Ver. 417 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A.36 Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance.0 Mar. offset 18. Result YES YES Action Change the setting. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 2.3.

1. YES YES YES YES 5 6 NO Change Fusing Unit.0 Mar. 2005 Printer 4-Color: brush effect. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty.the problem of brush effect and blurred image. Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package. Machine Changing fusing speed eliminates → Fusing Trans. Change Fusing Unit. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Paper is damp. blurred image A.18. Readjust Fusing Transport Speed. 2 3 4 Fusing Unit Paper type does not match. port Speed (Service Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Image quality problem 18. Change the setting. Troubleshooting 418 .3.37 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater. Clean. Typical Faulty Images Brush effect Blurred image 4036fs4061c0 4036fs4031c0 B. Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched.

→ Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Image quality problem AA 4036fs4062c0 4036fs4063c0 B. Change Fusing Unit. Lower Fusing Roller is scratched or dirty. → Change Fusing Unit. (See Maintenance. Neutralizing).) Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. 2005 18. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is scratched or dirty. 5 NO 419 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A. oil. or other foreign matter is evident on the Transfer Belt.3. There is foreign matter on paper path. Clean with specified solvent. 1. Clean or change. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Fusing Unit Check Item Image Transfer Roller is scratched or dirty. Typical Faulty Images . 6 Result YES YES YES YES YES Action Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.38 Printer 4-Color: back marking 18. Remove foreign matter.

Image quality problem 18.3. 2005 Printer 4-Color: 204-mm-pitch uneven image A.0 Mar. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Fusing Unit Check Item The Fusing Belt is scratchy. Typical Faulty Images 204-mm-pitch uneven image 204 mm 4036fs4064c0 B.18.39 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 1. Troubleshooting 420 . Result YES Action Change Fusing Unit.

Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. 1. 2005 18. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 Section Imaging Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Typical Faulty Images . Correct. Result YES NO YES Action Change Imaging Unit. Image quality problem 94 mm 94 mm 94 mm 4036fs4057c0 4036fs4055c0 4036fs4056c0 B. Image Transfer Roller is damaged.Field Service Ver.3. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. The Image Transfer Belt Unit drive gear is intact.0 Mar. 421 Troubleshooting bizhub C450 A.40 Printer 4-Color: 94-mm-pitch uneven image 18.

18. 1. 2005 bizhub C450 Blank Page Troubleshooting 422 . Image quality problem Field Service Ver.0 Mar.

2005 19.1 ADF section [17] [16] [15] [14] [1] bizhub C450 [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [10] [9] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Exit Motor (M3-DF) Exit Cover Sensor (PC7-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) Document Size Volume (R1-DF) Tray Open/Close Sensor (PC8-DF) Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [13] [12] [11] [8] 4037F5C519DA Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Take-up Cover Sensor (PC3-DF) Transport Motor (M2-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) ROM (IC7-DF) 423 Appendix .1 Main unit 19.0 Mar. 1. Parts layout drawing 19.Field Service Ver.1. Parts layout drawing Appendix 19.

0 Mar.1. Parts layout drawing 19.2 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver. 1.19. 2005 IR section [1] [12] [11] [10] [2] [3] [4] [9] [5] [8] [6] [7] 4037F5E502DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Scanner Motor (M201) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Size Reset Switch (SW201) Inverter Board (PU201) Exposure Lamp (FL201) [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Scanner Home Sensor (PC201) Original Cover Angle Sensor (PC202) Original Size Sensor FD1 (PC203) Scanner Cooling Fan Motor (M202) Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) Original Size Sensor FD2 (PC204) Appendix 424 .

1.3 Engine section [18] [17] [16] [2] [1] 19.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Parts layout drawing [3] [15] [14] [13] [4] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [5] [6] 4037F5C503DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M9) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M15) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M16) Suction Fan Motor (M12) Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M24) Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M25) Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21) Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M18) Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] Standard Memory (D_FILE0) Standard Memory (D_FILE0) Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board Cooling Fan Motor (M27) Toner Suction Fan Motor (M20) Toner Suction Fan Motor/K (M23) Paper Cooling Fan Motor (M26) 425 Appendix Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M10) bizhub C450 . 2005 19. 1.

19. 2005 bizhub C450 [10] [11] [1] [2] [3] [9] [4] [8] [7] [6] [5] 4037F5C504DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] LAN Board (PWB-LAN) Copier Board (PWB-CF) IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (PC9) Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC33) IDC/Registration Sensor/1 (PC8) Temperature/humidity Sensor (PC7) [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Left Door Switch (SW3) Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) Work Memory (D_WORK0) NVRAM Board (PWB-NVR) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Appendix 426 . 1.0 Mar. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver.

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. Parts layout drawing [14] [13] [12] [1] [2] [3] [5] [6] [7] [11] [9] [10] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] LPH Assy/K (LPH K) LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) Main Erase Lamp/K (LA4) Main Erase Lamp/C (LA3) ATDC Sensor/C (PWB-N3) Main Erase Lamp/M (LA2) ATDC Sensor/M (PWB-N2) [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA1) ATDC Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor (PC32) Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC31) LPH Assy/Y (LPH Y) LPH Assy/M (LPH M) LPH Assy/C (LPH C) 4037F5C505DA [4] [8] 427 Appendix bizhub C450 . 2005 19.

19.0 Mar. 2005 bizhub C450 [27] [26] [25] [1] [3] [4] [5] [2] [24] [23] [7] [22] [6] [21] [20] [11] [19] [12] [10] [17] [15] [13] [18] [16] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [9] [8] 4037F5C506DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Registration Roller Clutch (CL3) Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) Toner Set Sensor/K (PC20) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/K (PC24) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/K (PC18) Toner Set Sensor/C (PC19) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/C (PC23) Toner Set Sensor/M (PC26) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/C (PC17) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/M (PC22) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/M (PC16) Toner Set Sensor/Y (PC25) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/Y (PC21) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Y (PC15) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) Developing Clutch/K (CL2) Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Color Developing Motor (M6) Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) K PC Motor (M7) Main Motor (M1) Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19) Appendix [12] [13] [14] 428 . Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 1.

1.0 Mar. Parts layout drawing [2] [3] [13] [4] [5] [6] [7] [12] [8] [9] [11] [10] 4037F5E534DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Right Door Switch (SW2) Fusing Paper Loop Control Solenoid (SL1) Control Panel (UN201) Fusing Paper Loop Sensor (PC4) Upper Right Door Switch (SW5) Main Power Switch (SW1) Counter/K (CNT1) [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] Bypass Paper Size Unit (VR1) Bypass Paper Pick-Up Solenoid (SL101) Front Door Switch (SW4) DC Power Supply (PU1) High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) Flickerless Resistor (R2) (220-240 V areas only) 429 Appendix bizhub C450 [14] [1] . 2005 19.Field Service Ver.

0 Mar. Parts layout drawing [15] bizhub C450 [14] [13] [12] [1] Field Service Ver.19. 1. 2005 [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] 4037F5C508DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Fusing Retraction Position Sensor (PC34) Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure /Retraction Sensor (PC29) OHP Sensor (PC27) Exit Sensor (PC30) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 (PC114) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 (PC113) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC111) [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC112) Bypass Paper Empty Sensor (PC110) K PC Drum Main Sensor (PC11) 1st Image Transfer Retraction (PC12) Color PC Drum Main Sensor (PC10) Color PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC35) K PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC36) Appendix 430 .

2005 19.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. 1. Parts layout drawing [1] [7] [6] [5] [2] [3] [4] 4037F5C509DA [1] [2] [3] [4] Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC2) Tray 1 CD Paper size Sensor (PC3) [5] [6] [7] Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) Tray 1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC13) Tray 1 Set Sensor (PC14) 431 Appendix bizhub C450 .1.4 Tray 1 19.

2005 Tray 2 [12] [13] [14] [7] [6] [10] [8] [11] [9] [15] [1] [2] [5] [4] [3] 4037F5C510DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor (PC106) Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor(PC105) Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2) Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) Tray 2 CD Paper Size Sensor/L (PC102) Tray 2 Set Sensor (PC103) [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Tray 2 CD Paper Size Sensor/S (PC101) Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) Tray 2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC104) Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) Bypass Lift-Up Sensor (PC115) Tray 2 Door Set sensor (PC109) Appendix 432 .5 bizhub C450 Field Service Ver.1.0 Mar.19. 1. Parts layout drawing 19.

1.Field Service Ver. Parts layout drawing [1] [2] [3] [4] [6] [5] 4037F5C520DA [1] [2] [3] Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor (in PWB-A) (Pl2-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (in PWB-A) (PI1-DU) [4] [5] [6] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) 433 Appendix bizhub C450 .6 Duplex section 19.0 Mar. 2005 19.1.

Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver.0 Mar.2 PC102/PC202 (Option) bizhub C450 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [23] [24] [22] [20] [21] [25] [26] [6] [7] [19] [8] [18] [17] [16] [15] [13] [14] [12] [10] [11] [9] 4037F5C511DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Tray 3 Transport Roller Motor (M120-PF) Door Set Sensor (PC111-PF) Tray 3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF) Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117PF) Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor (PC115-PF) Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor (PC124-PF) Tray 4 Lift-Up Sensor (PC123-PF) Tray 4 Transport Roller Motor (M121-PF) Tray 4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Tray 4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PF) [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] Tray 4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC122-PF) Tray 4 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC128-PF) Tray 4 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC127-PF) Tray 4 FD Paper Size Detection Board (PWB-I4 PF) Tray 4 Set Sensor (PC121-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) Tray 3 FD Paper Size Detection Board (PWB-I3 PF) Tray 3 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC118-PF) Tray 3 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC119-PF) Tray 3 Set Sensor (PC112-PF) Tray 3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC113-PF) Lift-Up Motor 1 (M124-PF) Tray 3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Appendix [10] [11] [12] [13] 434 . 1.19. 2005 19.

3 PC-402 (Option) [23] [24] [1] [2] [3] [21] [4] [5] bizhub C450 [6] [7] [19] [8] [9] [10] [22] [20] [18] [17] [15] [13] [14] [16] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Transport Roller Motor (M2-LCT) Right Lower Door Sensor (PC5-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) Upper Paper Empty Sensor (PC3-LCT) Paper Empty Board (PWB-E LCT) Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Shift Motor (M4-LCT) [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [11] [12] 4037F5C512DA Paper Descent Key (UN1-LCT) Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC9-LCT) Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCT) Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) Interface Board (PWB-H LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) 435 Appendix Tray Set Sensor (PC6-LCT) .0 Mar. Parts layout drawing 19. 2005 19.Field Service Ver. 1.

2005 19.0 Mar. 1. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver.19.4 FS-507 (Option) bizhub C450 [22] [1] [2] [3] [21] [4] [5] [6] [7] [19] [20] [18] [17] [8] [9] [10] [16] [15] [11] [14] [13] [12] 4037F5C514DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Upper Cover Sensor (PC18-FN) 1st Tray Full Sensor (PC6-FN) 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2FN) Front Door Sensor (PC17-FN) Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C FN) Elevator Motor (M7-FN) [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN) Shift Motor (M8-FN) Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) Elevator Tray Paper Sensor (PC8-FN) CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Lower Paddle Motor (M9-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) Appendix [10] [11] 436 .

1.Field Service Ver. Parts layout drawing [1] [18] [15] [16] [17] [2] [3] [4] [14] [13] [12] [11] [5] [6] [7] [8] [10] [9] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Punch Motor (M11-FN) Pinch Speed Sensor (PC15-FN) Entrance Motor (M1-FN) Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN) Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN) Set Switch (S1-FN) ROM (IC3-FN) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] Control Board (PWB-A FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) 4037F5C515DA Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) Upper Paddle Motor (M15-FN) Upper Paddle Solenoid (SL3-FN) Elevator Tray Full Sensor (PC7-FN) Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN) Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN) Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) 437 Appendix bizhub C450 .0 Mar. 2005 19.

0 Mar. 1. 2005 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver.19.5 JS-601 (Option) bizhub C450 [4] [1] [2] [3] 4037F5C513DA [1] [2] Job Tray Cover Sensor (PC21-FN) Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) [3] [4] Job Tray Full Sensor (PC20-FN) 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL-4) Appendix 438 .

Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Parts layout drawing 19.6 FS-603 (Option) bizhub C450 [3] [15] [14] [13] [5] [12] [11] [6] [4] [7] [8] [9] 4037F5C516DA [17] [16] [1] [2] [10] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Transport Motor (M1-FN) Entrance Motor (M9-FN) Saddle Clutch (CL1-FN) Joint Open Switch (MS2-FN) Front Door Open Switch (MS1-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) Front Aligning Motor (M4-FN) Staple Safety Switch (Front) (MS4-FN) Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] Shift Motor (M6-FN) Slide Motor (M8-FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Rear Aligning Motor (M5-FN) ROM (IC6-FN) Staple Safety Switch (Rear) (MS3-FN) Paddle Motor (M2-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) 439 Appendix . 1. 2005 19.

Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver.0 Mar. 2005 bizhub C450 [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [20] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [14] [13] [12] [7] [8] [11] [10] [9] 4037F5C521DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) Upper Cover Open Sensor (PI23-FN) Front Door Open Sensor (PI22-FN) Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4-FN) Finisher Tray Sensor (PI6-FN) Exit Tray Sensor (PI8-FN) Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] Saddle Tray Sensor (PI13-FN) Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN) Stack Full Sensor (PI24-FN) Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16-FN) Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5-FN) Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15-FN) Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN) Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) Appendix [10] 440 .19. 1.

Parts layout drawing 19.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. 2005 19.7 PK-501 (Option) [1] [10] [9] [5] [2] bizhub C450 [6] [7] 4037F5C517DA [3] [4] [8] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Punch Motor (M1P-PK) Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Motor Clock Board (PI3P-PK) Photo Sensor Board (PWB-C PK) LED Board (PWD-D PK) [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Side Registration Motor (M2P-PK) Punch Trash Full LED Board (PWB-F PK) Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board (PWB-E PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P-PK) 441 Appendix . 1.

2005 19.0 Mar.8 Horizontal Transport Unit bizhub C450 [4] [1] [2] [3] 4037F5C518DA [1] [2] Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-HO) Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) [3] [4] Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Horizontal Unit Door Sensor (PC4-HO) Appendix 442 .19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 1.

2005 20. 1 Not possible to confirm by removing external cover. CN61 CN45 CN44 CN39 CN99 CN40 CN41 CN98 Location D-12 R-3 R-3 D-14 D-11 to 12 M-1 to 2 U-10 to 11 D-12 443 Appendix bizhub C450 .0 Mar. Connector layout drawing Description Number of Pin ➀ Possible to confirm by removing external cover. CN54 CN19 CN18 CN9 CN8 CN10 CN58 CN6 CN4 Location N-13 D-25 to 26 D-23 to 24 E-13 to 14 E-13 E-14 R-16 D-4 to 5 D-4 No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] CN No. [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [10] [13] [12] [11] 4037F5C534DA CN No. Connector layout drawing 20. 1.Field Service Ver. [1] [17] [2] [3] [4] 3 2 [5] 14 14 3 6 [16] 3 6 3 2 2 6 2 6 4 14 [6] [7] [8] [9] 4 [15] [14] No.

[12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] CN No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] CN No. CN38 CN69 CN11 CN62 CN75 CN57 CN22 CN14 CN28 CN48 CN102 [14] Location D-8 D-21 D-20 M-18 M-17 M-17 I-8 D-19 N-27 M-22 S-22 [13] No. 1. CN101 CN103 CN108 CN106 CN25 CN29 CN7 CN32 CN31 CN35 Location S-22 R-22 S-25 S-24 D-2 D-1 to 2 D-15 D-20 to 21 D-20 R-9 Appendix 444 . Connector layout drawing [21] Field Service Ver.20.0 Mar. 2005 [1] bizhub C450 [20] [19] [2] [3] [4] 9 [18] 12 [5] 6 4 3 4 3 3 3 3 4 [6] 6 4 3 [17] 2 2 [16] 2 3 3 4 4 [9] [11] [10] 4037F5C535DA [7] [8] [12] [15] No.

2005 20. [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [10] [9] [8] 4037F5C536DA CN No.0 Mar. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] CN No. CN105 CN104 CN34 CN107 CN24 CN27 CN23 CN21 CN17 Location R-25 R-23 to 24 S-24 R-26 E-2 to 3 E-1 to 2 I-7 D-3 I-9 445 Appendix bizhub C450 [19] . 1. Connector layout drawing [18] [1] [2] [17] [3] 4 [16] 4 3 [15] 9 [14] 14 15 11 13 3 2 [4] [5] 3 2 2 2 12 6 2 2 [7] [6] 2 [13] [12] No. CN72 CN5 CN15 CN12 CN13 CN26 CN50 CN49 CN16 CN3 Location I-8 D-5 D-19 J-2 I-8 D-3 to 4 J-2 N-27 N-26 to 27 D-5 [11] No.Field Service Ver.

C Drum Charge Corona Bias K Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA1) Main Erase Lamp/M (LA2) Main Erase Lamp/C (LA3) Main Erase Lamp/K (LA4) TOD Signal 1st 2nd Original Original With reference to TOD Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3) Exit Sensor (PC30) Appendix 4037F5E537DA 446 . 2005 21.21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. M.0 Mar. 1. Timing chart bizhub C450 21.1 Main unit Print request received Main Motor (M1) Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) Color PC Drum Motor (M5) K PC Motor (M7) Color Developing Motor (M6) With reference to print request 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Developing Bias DC (Y/M/C/K) Drum Charge Corona Bias Y.

2005 1-sided mode /DSET DSET Signal Transmission off High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 86ms On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 21.21.2 Automatic Document Feeder Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW High CW Low 50ms Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 705ms 766ms off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid 705ms (SL1-DF) off Original Exchange Time 384ms Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms 21. Timing chart 900mm/sec=High 150mm/sec=Low 4037F5E538DA 447 Appendix bizhub C450 .0 Mar. 1.2.1 1st Original Preliminary Take-up Start Misted Original Detecting Signal Start 1st Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 1st Original Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Start 2nd Original Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on 104ms 61ms 104ms 61ms Field Service Ver.

1. Timing chart 3rd Original Exchange to Start /DSET CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 705ms 86ms On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] off on off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exchange Time 384ms Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms Field Service Ver. 2005 4037F5E539DA .Appendix bizhub C450 448 3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 2nd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Start on /SCEND off on off DSET Signal Transmission 104ms 61ms 21.0 Mar.

0 Mar. 2005 Take-up Motor 86ms (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor 82ms 181ms 315ms off 82ms 181ms 315ms CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) 705ms off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms Original Exit Time 1397ms Original Exchange Time Original Exchange Time 384ms 384ms Original Exit Time 1397ms 21. 1.3rd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exit to Start 4th Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Exit to Complete 4th Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Exit to Start 3rd Original Exchange to Complete 4th Original Preliminary Take-up Start 2nd Original Exit to Complete 4th Original Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Exit to Start on /SCEND off on DSET Signal Transmission 104ms 61ms /DSET off DSET Signal Transmission CW On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] 88ms Field Service Ver. Timing chart 4037F5E540DA 449 Appendix bizhub C450 .

1. Timing chart on /SCEND off on /DSET off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exit Time 1397ms Original Exit Time 1397ms Field Service Ver.Appendix bizhub C450 450 3rd Original Exit to Complete 4th Original Exit to Start 4th Original Exit to Complete 82ms 181ms 82ms 181ms 315ms 315ms 3rd Original Exit to Start 21.0 Mar. 2005 4037F5E541DA .

Timing chart 451 4037F5E542DA Appendix bizhub C450 . 2005 High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 61ms High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] 86ms On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] Mixed original detection mode Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW High CW Low 50ms Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) 705ms off on 705ms off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off 766ms Original Exchange Time 384ms Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms 21.2.21. 1.0 Mar.2 1st Original Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete 1st Original Preliminary Take-up Start Misted Original Detecting Signal Start on /SCEND off on 104ms 61ms 104ms /DSET DSET Signal Transmission off Field Service Ver.

Appendix bizhub C450 452 1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Exchange to Start 103ms 456ms 97ms 150ms 563ms 133ms 1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start 21.0 Mar. 1. 2005 4037F5E543DA . Timing chart on /SCEND off on /DSET off High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW High CW Low Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid Reverse side Original Exchange Time 1330ms Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on (SL1-DF) off Field Service Ver.

3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 2nd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exit to Start 2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start 2nd Original Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Exit to Complete on /SCEND off on 104ms 61ms /DSET off High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 86ms Field Service Ver. Timing chart 4037F5E544DA 453 Appendix bizhub C450 . 2005 High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 181ms 315ms On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] Exit Motor (M3-DF) off Low High CW Low High CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 705ms 939ms 20ms off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exchange Time 730ms Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms Original Exit Time 1365ms 21. 1.0 Mar.

0 Mar.Appendix bizhub C450 454 2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete 1st Original Exchange to Start 103ms 456ms 97ms 150ms 563ms 563ms 2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start 21. Timing chart on /SCEND off on /DSET off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor( ) off PC1-DF Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Reverse side Original Exchange Time 1330ms Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Field Service Ver. 1. 2005 4037F5E545DA .

3rd Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Exit to Start 3rd Original Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Exit to Complete 3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on /DSET off High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 86ms Field Service Ver. 2005 High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 181ms 315ms High CW Low Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 939ms 20ms off on (CL1-DF) Registration Clutch off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid Original Exchange Time 730ms Original Exit Time 1365ms (SL1-DF) off 21. 1. Timing chart 4037F5E546DA 455 Appendix bizhub C450 .0 Mar.

0 Mar.Appendix bizhub C450 456 3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Exit to Start 103ms 456ms 97ms 150ms 563ms 133ms 3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start on 21. Timing chart /SCEND off on /DSET off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Reverse side Original Exchange Time 1330ms Field Service Ver. 1. 2005 4037F5E547DA .

2005 CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor 181ms 315ms off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 939ms 20ms off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exit Time 1365ms 21.3rd Original Exit to Start 3rd Original Exit to Complete on /SCEND off on /DSET off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW Field Service Ver. Timing chart 4037F5E548DA 457 Appendix bizhub C450 .0 Mar. 1.

21. 1. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 2005 bizhub C450 Blank Page Appendix 458 .0 Mar.

0 . 1.03 Ver.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Standard Controller 2005.

.

• When a page revised in Ver. 3.After publication of this service manual. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 3. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . 2. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 2. Therefore. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0 Service manual Ver. 3. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. 2005/03 Date 1. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.0 deleted.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. • When a page revised in Ver. 2. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver. • To indicate clearly a section revised.0 are left as they are.0 has not been changed in Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.0 has been changed in Ver.

.

..................................................................2 Controller specifications ................................1 Checking the controller firmware version ......... 7..................... 1 Type ..........................4 Checking the system configuration .......................... 3................................................................... 15 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP..... 3.............................................. 15 Troubleshooting procedures .................... 1.................. 13 Troubleshooting 5............4 3.... 6..........................2 3...................................................................2..........................1.... 3 Writing into the Compact flash ...0 Mar......... 11 3.......................... 3 Firmware upgrade ........................................................................................ 15 Unable to print over the network........................................................Field Service Ver....2...................................................................1........... 1..................... 7 Updating method................... 2 Maintenance 2...2 7........... 10 Action When Data Transfer Fails...........1..................... 2005 Standard Controller Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General CONTENTS General 1.......... 3 Service environment ....... ........................................................1 7................................................................................................................1 3..................................................................................... 18 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E-Mail/ Scan to Internet FAX is completed.............................. 3 Application to be used............... 7..... 3 Preparations for Firmware rewriting.......2 Firmware rewriting ........ ......................... 10 Adjustment/Setting 4... 19 i ................................................1.........................1 1.................................. 17 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX........ ..............3 3....................................................................................................................... Checking the Image Controller Setting............. 1 Supporting client specifications ........................................1 3...........................................................3 7...........................................2 3. 3 Installing the Cygwin ............................ 15 Status codes ................................. .............

1. 200X .0 Mar.Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Standard Controller Maintenance General ii Blank Page Field Service Ver.

Ethernet II. Server2003 Software Accessories Page Scope Web Connection has been built into the controller firmware.3 SNAP) NetBEUI.2. ARP/ICMP. 802.1. HTTP 1.Field Service Ver. 6.. NetWare 4.30 °C 15 .0.3.x..1 Type Print Speed Controller specifications Type Built-in type controller B&W :45 ppm (A4 paper. Controller specifications Standard Controller Latin 80 Fonts Latin 136 Fonts General 1. and simplex or duplex) Color :35 ppm (A4 or 8-1/2 x 11 paper. Front Manager.0 Mar.x. FTP.x Network Print Service SMB RAW Port Printing (Port 9100: To be changed from Page Scope Light) IPP 1. TWAIN Driver. 1 General PCL5e/c Emulation PCL6 (XL 2. 1. BOOTP SLP.. and simplex or duplex) :44 ppm (8-1/2 x 11 paper. SNMP. TCP/IP SMTP. 802.x NDPS .1.0.85 % PCL PS Not available *1: The optional Local Interface Kit (EK-702) is required. standard paper size A3 Wide 600 × 600 dpi Shared with main unit 10 . 802. or IEEE 1284 *1 IPX/SPX (Auto. NetWare 4.x. 1. LPD Scan to FTP with URL Notification Scan to PC with URL Notification Scan to E-Mail Scan to HDD with URL Notification TWAIN Network Scan Functions Software Accessories PCL5c Printer Driver. NetWare 5. 5. BOX Utility (1) Drive CD OS: Windows98/98SE/Me.. 2000. NT4. and simplex or duplex) Printer Language CPU Program ROM RAM Hard Disk Host Interface PPC750 FX 600 MHz 64 MB 512 MB 40 GB Standard: Ethernet (10Base-T or 100Base-TX) Optional: USB 1.x Pserver (Bindery) .. USB 2.1 DHCP.. XP. 2005 1. Apple Talk Network Protocol Pserver (NDS) .1) Emulation PostScript 3 Emulation (3011) . POP3. 6. (2) Compatible Paper Size Resolution Power Requirements Operating Environmental Requirements Fonts Options Max.

NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.1. NetBEUI.5 or later (Java-compliant) Internet Explorer version 5. 1. Windows Me. 2005 1. Controller specifications Standard Controller Field Service Ver.x) Interface General With a parallel connection IEEE1284 (Compatible/Nibble/ECP)*1 Browser The following browser is required to use Page Scope Web Connection: Netscape Communicator version 4.x.2 PC RAM OS Supporting client specifications IBM PC and its compatible 64 MB or more (128MB or more for XP) Windows 98/98SE. Windows XP.x. 2 .5 or later (Java-compliant) *1:The optional Local Interface Kit (EK-702) is required. Windows NT 4. IPX/SPX (NetWare 4.0 Mar. 6. Windows Server 2003 With a network connection Connection method Protocols Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX TCP/IP. 5.0. Windows 2000.

1.1 3.3 Installing the Cygwin • The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC.1.exe] on CD-ROM in which Cygwin is stored. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Double click the [setup. 3. 3 .1. 2. Click [Next (N)]. 2.0 Mar. Checking the controller firmware version • The version of the controller firmware can be checked on the control panel of the machine.2 Application to be used • Cygwin (Free software) 3.” 3. 1. Touch “Firmware Version. 3. 2005 2.Field Service Ver. 1.1 Firmware upgrade Preparations for Firmware rewriting Service environment • OS: Windows2000 • Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash • Compact flash (with 128MB or more) Maintenance 4037F2C501DA 4037F2E545DA 3. Checking the controller firmware version Standard Controller Maintenance 2. Check the firmware versions.1.

Select “Install from Local Directory”.” 5. 1. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. and click [Next (N)]. Click [Next (N)]. 2005 3. Specify the folder for installation. Check to make sure that “Root Directory” is in default setting. [C:\cygwin]. • Do not change the setting value except “Root Directory. NOTE • Make sure to check that “Root Directory” is in default setting. 4037F2E546DA 4.0 Mar. Maintenance 4037F2E547DA 4 .3. [C:\cygwin].

Firmware upgrade Standard Controller 6. Specify the place of the data to be installed.0 Mar. Click [Next (N)]. 4037F2E550DA 5 .) 7. Click [Complete] to start installing. For installing from CD-ROM. 2005 3. 4037F2E548DA 8. 1. (Described below is the sample procedure when CD-ROM drive is E-drive.Field Service Ver. Click [Next (N)]. Maintenance 4037F2E549DA 9. select the [cygwin] folder in CD-ROM drive.

and click the “Environmental Variable” of “Advanced” tab.0 Mar. Maintenance 4036fs2620e0 12. Variable name CYGWIN HOME Variable value ntsec /home/username 4036fs2621e0 6 . 1. After installing.3. 11. Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable. Click the “New” in System Variable Setting. 2005 10. open the Property of “My Computer”. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver.

2005 3.exe. 1. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. (C:\C450 in the below figure) NOTE • The file name of Firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****. and specify the directory to be uncompressed. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller 1. 7 Maintenance 4037F2E541DA .Field Service Ver. delete it before uncompressing. Double-click the Firmware data. and then uncompress it.4 Writing into the Compact flash 3.0 Mar.1.” 2. 4037F2E542DA NOTE • When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed.

and check the Drive name.” (Input the C: \C450\card_work>mkcf f (Drive number): in the below figure. 2005 3. Specify the Drive of Compact flash. 6. which was recognized through the procedure 3.3. (F-drive in the following figure) 4036fs2623e0 4. and execute the “mksf. and push the “Enter”. which was recognized in the Windows.bat. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. 5.) Maintenance 4037F2E543DA 8 . Click “Start” → “Program” → “Accessories” → “Command Prompt” to open the Command Prompt. Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory. 1.0 Mar. Mount the Compact flash on the PC.

Upon completion of writing. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched. be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method. Remove the Compact flash from PC. NOTE • When removing the Compact flash.bat” is executed. 9 . 8. Once the “mkcf. 1. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance 7. data writing into the Compact flash is started. CHECKSUM is executed. 2005 3. 4037F2E544DA 9. “VERIFY OK” appears.0 Mar.Field Service Ver.

With the main power switch in the OFF position. 2. unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. 4037F2J517DA 10 . 3. Maintenance [2] [1] 4037F2C016DA 3. [3] 4037F2C017DA 4. 5. 6. 1. 2005 3. Up to six types of F/W will be displayed on the control panel. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. Plug the power cord into the power outlet and turn ON the main power switch.2. 1.0 Mar. Insert the Compact Flash card into the slot. Remove one screw [1] and the metal Blanking Plate [2].2 Firmware rewriting • The F/W is updated using the Compact flash.3.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON.

Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot.2. 1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again. 15. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller 7. If the procedure is abnormally terminated. 3. change the board that has caused “NG” and carry out data rewriting procedure. (At this time. 11. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated. Plug the power cord and turn ON the main power switch. 10. Turn OFF the main power switch. 2. 12. 14. MFP Controller MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) 11 Maintenance . 2005 3. 3. (The Start key blinks green. indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red). Unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Select “Firmware Version”.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails • If “NG” appears on the Touch Panel. the Start key starts blinking red. take the following steps. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.Field Service Ver. 1. Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly (“Downloading Completed”). 13. Check also the Check Sum value (“Check Sum XXXX”) shown on the Touch Panel. Press the Start key.) 8. change the memory card for a new one and try another rewriting sequence. Call the Service Mode to the screen.0 Mar.) 9.

0 Mar. 2005 Maintenance Blank Page 12 . Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. 1.3.

[Administrator Setting] . 2005 4.[Network Setting] . The change of the setting becomes valid when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON after the appropriate change has been made on the panel. <Control Panel on the machine> • Setting items included in [Network Setting] available from [Administrator Setting]. A. Note on returning the setting from “Controller 1” to “Controller 0. Check that “Controller 0” is selected in “Image Controller Setting. Touch “System 2”. Reset the following items as necessary when using the Internal Standard Controller.” NOTE • If the setting is changed.0 Mar.” • Selecting “Controller 0” will initialize the following settings made while “Controller 1” was selected.) • [Administrator Setting]-[User Authentication/Account Track]-[General Settings]-[External Server] • [Administrator Setting]-[System Connection]-[IS OpenAPI Setting] <PageScope Web Connection> • SSL/TLS 13 Adjustment / Setting . 3. Checking the Image Controller Setting • Whenever the controller is mounted. 2. be sure to turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch.Field Service Ver. it is necessary to select “Controller 0” in “Image Controller Setting. Checking the Image Controller Setting Standard Controller Adjustment/Setting 4.” 1. (Except [Status Notification Setting] and [Prefix/Suffix Setting] available from the following setting.[Detail Setting]. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1.

0 Mar. 1.4. 2005 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 14 . Checking the Image Controller Setting Standard Controller Field Service Ver.

out. Priority may be changed as necessary.0 Mar. Waiting its turn Is the print job displayed on the 1 machine control panel? Yes The job is locked. Enter the password to unlock the job. 1. 2005 5. Touch “User Setting” → “Printer Setting” → “Print Reports.” The correct division ID driver and try re-transhas not been entered. 1. mitting the job again. (access code) No Data is yet to be received. let the printer print a Configuration Page to check for system configuration. Checking the system configuration Standard Controller Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 5.” 3. Touch “Configuration Page” and press the Start button. Go to item 2. Status codes Code C-A051 C-A052 C-A053 Description Standard controller configuration failure Action Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). Enter the correct divi. Check Possible Cause Action Remark An error on machine side (paper running Correct the error. Checking the system configuration • When a malfunction occurs. Faulty controller hardware Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC).) Check the machine control panel for jobs in print queue. 15 . 6.Field Service Ver. etc. Controller start failure Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) if the problem occurs again when the Main Power Switch of the machine is turned OFF and ON. Press the Utility/Counter key. toner running out. see the C450 Main Unit Service Manual 7. ☞ For details of how to replace the MFP Control Board.See “User’s Guide sion ID in the printer [Print Operations]. See “User’s Guide [Copy Operations]” of the machine. 7.1 Troubleshooting procedures Unable to print over the network. 2.

No Network cable is disconnected or a relay device is faulty. Turn OFF and ON the machine main power switch. Printer driver incorrectly installed Is the response of 2 Ping sent from the PC to the machine? Field Service Ver. Set the correct IP address and subnet mask.board. Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Check Possible Cause The print destination port setting is wrong.7. Reconnect the cable Check with the conand restart or change troller network LED. PC operates erratically temporarily.” reinstall it properly. Troubleshooting 16 .0 Mar. Uninstall the printer driver through the See “User’s Guide proper steps and then [Print Operations]. 2005 Action Set the correct port. Remark See “User’s Guide [Print Operations]. Restart the PC. the faulty relay device. 1. IP address and/or subnet mask incorrectly set.” Yes Controller board (MFP Control Board) oper. See “TCP/IP Setting” in Installation Guide.Restart the controller ates erratically tempo. rarily.

The message “Failed to A directory not existing 1 connect to the destina. 17 Troubleshooting Check with the network administrator. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number.0 Mar. Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller 7. See “User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. specified. The FTP server hard disk becomes full during file transfer.” The timeout value depends on the network’s traffic conditions and load on the FTP server. Failed to log on to the FTP server because of the wrong user account. The message “Server 2 Connect error” appears. Port number is wrong. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct user name and password. 2005 7. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct directory.” Proxy setting is wrong.✻ .controller and FTP server nected during file trans. A timeout condition occurs. administrator. Set a longer value for “FTP Connection Timeout.2 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP. IP address of the FTP server is wrong. The FTP server stops during file transfer. 1.to check to see if both fer. Check with the network administrator and make the correct proxy setting. Check with the network administrator. Check Possible Cause Action Remark The FTP server is not in Check with the network service.in the FTP server is tion” appears.Field Service Ver. Send Ping from PC to the The network is discon. parties are connected to the network or not.

Troubleshooting 18 . 1. IP address of the SMTP server is wrong. 2005 7. sion as necessary so that the Operations]. The message 1 “Server Connect error” appears. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address.7. See “User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Action Check with the network administrator. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number. A timeout condition occurs. Set a longer value for “SMTP Connection Timeout. ✽ The message 2 “E-mail Size Over” appears. Check Possible Cause The SMTP server is not in service.0 Mar.” scan data does not exceed the Maximum E-Mail Size.” Remark Port number is wrong.” The timeout value depends on the network’s traffic conditions and load on the FTP server. Send Ping from PC to the controller and SMTP server to The network is disconnected check to see if both parties are during file transfer.3 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX. connected to the network or not. Decrease resolution to make small the data size or change The size of the scan data the setting for Scanned File See “User’s Guide exceeds the upper limit value Separation and Binary Divi[Network Scanner set for Maximum E-Mail Size. Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Field Service Ver.

Check Yes Possible Cause The destination mail address is wrong. 2005 7. Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller 7. mail stored in the POP3 server.Field Service Ver. The receiving end is being unable to receive.0 Mar.4 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E-Mail/Scan to Internet FAX is completed. 19 Troubleshooting . Remark See “User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Action Enter the correct mail address. 1.” An error message 1 is returned from the mail server. No or is not receiving.

Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Field Service Ver.7. 2005 Blank Page Troubleshooting 20 . 1.0 Mar.

0 .03 Ver.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Automatic Document Feeder 2005. 1.

.

2.0 has been changed in Ver. 2005/03 Date 1. 3. • When a page revised in Ver.0 are left as they are.0 Service manual Ver. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. 3. 2.0 only are shown with those for Ver. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.0: The revision marks for Ver. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 2. Therefore.After publication of this service manual.0 deleted. • When a page revised in Ver. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3. 2. • To indicate clearly a section revised.

.

.....................................................5 2.............................................................................................. 11 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ................................................... 1 Type . 12 3........................................2 i .................................. 16 Service Mode setting procedure.............................................................. 5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ........ 1 Paper type .......................2 Adjustment/Setting 4............................................. 3 Machine specifications........................................ 16 ADF setting procedure.............................................8 Product specification ......1 5................ 9 Sensor Section......................................................7 1...................................................... 3 Operating environment ................2 1.................................................................................... 12 ADF.................................................................................. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General CONTENTS General 1................................................ 7 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller / Separation Roller ...5 1......................................................... 16 Original Stop Position.................................. 16 5................2 3..Field Service Ver......3 Other ......................................... 1..........................2.... 1...........................4 2..............................3 1.............0 Mar........................................6 1........................................... 15 Service Mode ..................... 12 Front Cover/Rear Cover ....... 5 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller ...............................................1.............................................................................................................1......... 5.........................7 2...........................1 2......... 2 Mixed original feed chart.....................................1....8 3......................................................................3.1....................................................1 3..4 1.........................1 1. 8 Exit Roller / Roll ............2 How to use the adjustment section ......................................................................... 16 Registration Loop Adj.........2......................................................................3......................... 2 Paper feed not guaranteed originals.................................... 4 Maintenance 2......................................................... 5 Transport Belt..............1 3.2 2....................................................................................... 5..6 2............................. 11 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items .............. 12 Disassembly/Assembly procedure...................................1................ 2........... 3...................3 2................. 1 Paper feed prohibited originals .............................. 6 Separation Roller ............... 9 2....................................................................................................1............................................................. 8 Registration Roller . 9 Turnover Roller...1..........................................................1 Periodical check ....... 1 Functions ....................................................1 5........................................................................................................................................1........................................

................................................................................3........................3 7.....................................1 Troubleshooting 7.. 36 ii ..................................................... 20 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position .....3...4......1 7..2 Maintenance 6.....................................................................2 6........................... 21 Adjustment of the document skew........................... 19 5..................... 2005 5....................................................2 7............................3........... 24 Auto adjust: Main Scanning Direction .....................3..............1 6................................ Sensor check list ....... 23 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side ........................................................ 19 Sensor Auto Adjust ................................................................0 Mar...................1 7......3 Jam Display........................................................... 20 Adjustment of the tray volume .........................3.......................5 5...............5 6................5 6................ 31 Misfeed display.3 6...............6 Adjustment of the registration loop value ...........................................3 6........ 28 Sensor auto adjustment .........3 5........................ 23 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side ...................................................................................................................................................2 5............................. 32 Transport section misfeed................. 22 Adjustment of the document stop position .................................................................................. 34 Transport Tray section misfeed ..............2................... 1....................4. 17 Sensor Check .....5 8........................2.......................4................4 5........... 17 Sensor check screen ....................... 27 General 6.............3.......... Set error detection ............................................................................................... 26 Manual adjust: Main Scanning Direction ...... 31 Solution ................................................................1 6....3 6.................... 18 Original Tray Width.................4.1 5....... 18 Mechanical adjustment .................................. 33 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed....3 Automatic Document Feeder Auto Stop Position Adjustment ......................................................2....3..........................................................................................2 7.....................1........................................................ 31 Sensor layout...3................................... 29 Adjustment / Setting Troubleshooting 7........................................................................ 7........4 6........................................................... 16 Paper Passage ............ 35 7.......................... 32 Paper Take-Up section misfeed ........4.............................................................................................. 25 Manual adjust: 1-Sided Set/ 2-Sided Set ...Field Service Ver......................................... 31 Misfeed display resetting procedure ... 32 Initial check items .........................4 6.....................................................4 7...

3 Paper type Standard Mode Plain Paper Type of Document Thick Paper Mode Plain Paper Mixed Original Detection Mode Plain Paper Detectable Document Size*1 Metric area: B6R to A3 Inch area : 5. 2005 1.Field Service Ver.5 × 8. 21. 1 General .25 to 29. Product specification Automatic Document Feeder Paper Take-Up from top of stack Endless Belt Transport Mode Loop Turnover Mode U-turn Turnover + Switchback U-Turn Turnover Mode (only in 1-Sided Mode) 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.75 lb) General 1.2 Functions Standard Mode Modes Thick Paper Mode Mixed Original Detection Mode 1. Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled Size Combination Table. 21.25 to 34 lb) 2-Sided Mode 50 to 110 g/m2 (13. 1.75 lb) Original Exit Tray: 38 sheets (210 g/m2.5R / 5. 1. 55.25 to 55.5 × 8.25 lb) Document Feed Table: 100 sheets (80 g/m2.25 lb) Document Feed Table: 38 sheets (210 g/m2.0 Mar.25 lb) Original Exit Tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m2.25 to 29.5 to 11 × 17 Standard Mode / Mixed Original Detection Mode Capacity Thick Paper Mode *1 For the Combined Original Detection Mode.25 lb) 1-Sided Mode 129 to 210 g/m2 (34. 55.1 Name Product specification Type Duplexing Document Feeder Paper Take-Up Transport Type Turnover Paper Exit Installation Document Alignment Document Loading Screw cramp to the main unit Center Face up 1.75 lb) 1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode 50 to 110 g/m2 (13.

transport failure Paper with many punched holes (e.1.25 lb) or more Sheets of 110 Mode g/m2 (29. damaged sheet Take-up failure. Sheets misfed Take-up failure. torn or wrinkled Sheets severely curled OHP Film (Transparency Film) Label Paper Offset Master Paper Sheets clipped or notched Sheets patched 1. take-up failure Image deficit Take-up failure 2 .5 Paper feed not guaranteed originals • If fed. Type of Original Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 . B4 or 11 × 17) Sheets with rough surface (e.15 mm) Heat Sensitive Paper Ink Jet Paper Sheets with smooth surface (Coated Paper) Intermediate paper Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Possible Trouble Dog-eared.0 Mar. damaged sheet Sheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in askew Take-up failure. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 1.4 Paper feed prohibited originals Type of Original Possible Trouble Take-up failure. defective drive mechanism due to jammed staples or clips Take-up failure. transport failure Take-up failure. loose leaf) limited Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes to vertical feeding Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Sheets two-folded or Z-folded (A3.g. Sheets misfed Take-up failure. transport failure Take-up failure.. exit failure Edge folded. Sheets misfed Damaged sheet. transport failure Take-up failure. Sheets misfed Patched part folded or torn sheet.25 lb) or more in 2-Sided General Sheets folded. damaged sheet. Sheets stapled or clipped together Sheets glued together Sheets of 211 g/m2 (56.. transport failure Take-up failure. Sheets misfed • If fed. letterhead) Sheets penciled Sheets folded Sheets other than detectable-size sheets Sheets of less than 35 g/m2 (9. trouble occurrence will be highly possible. Sheets misfed Take-up failure. Product specification Field Service Ver. Sheets misfed Take-up failure. image deformation Take-up failure Contamination Image deformation. 1. multi-page feed. paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible. exit failure.g.25 lb) Transport failure Transport failure.

5 × 8.6 Mixed original feed chart Max. 2005 1. Product specification Automatic Document Feeder General 1.5 × 11 OK OK OK* OK* NG NG 8.5 5.5 × 11R 5.25 lb) 3 .5 × 11 8.5 inch (D) × 5.25 inch (H) 14.5 × 14 8.5 × 8. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 60 W or less 586 mm (W) × 519 mm (D) × 135 mm (H) 23 inch (W) × 20. Original Size For Metric 297 mm A3 OK OK OK OK OK* NG NG NG A4 OK OK OK OK OK* NG NG NG 257 mm B4 OK OK OK OK OK* NG B5 OK OK OK OK OK* NG 210 mm A4R OK OK OK NG A5 OK OK OK NG 182 mm 148 mm B5R OK OK A5R OK Mixed Original Size 297 mm A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm For Inch Max.5 5.5 OK OK OK NG 5.5 8. Original Size Mixed Original Size 11 11 × 17 8.7 Machine specifications DC24V (supplied from the main unit) DC5V (generated within the Automatic Document Feeder) Power Requirements Max.5 5. Mixed Original Feed Can not Set Original Tilted with in 2 % or less is 80 % 1.2 kg (31.5 × 14 OK OK OK NG 8.5R OK OK NG * Mixed Original Feed available (Tilted with in 1.5 8.5 × 8.Field Service Ver.0 Mar.5 × 8.5 % or less) NO.5R 11 × 17 OK OK OK* OK* NG NG 11 8.5 × 11R OK OK OK NG 5. 1.

1.8 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 1. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. General 4 .0 Mar.

Pull out and remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy [4].Field Service Ver.1. Remove two C-clips [1]. 2. Replacing procedure 1. 2005 2. Remove two screws [5]. 4582fs2503c0 [6] [5] [5] 4.1 Transport Belt A. ensure that the Transport Belt Roller Assy is set exactly to the connection belt. and pull up the Roller Section [6]. NOTE • In reassembling. [1] [1] 4582s2501c0 [2] [3] 2.0 Mar. 4582fs2504c0 5 Maintenance . 4582fs2502c0 [4] 3.1 Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 1. Periodical check Automatic Document Feeder Maintenance 2. Remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy [2] from the belt [3] connected. 2.

To reinstall. 4582fs2508c0 6 . and remove the Paper Take-up Section Guide [3]. and remove the Pick-up/ Paper Take-up Roller Assy [6]. Automatic Document Feeder [7] 4582fs2505c0 2. Remove the screw [4] (on the rear side) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller Assy shaft positioning plate and two C-clips [5] (at both ends) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller Assy shaft. 1.0 Mar. Remove the Transport Belt [7]. and remove the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller connecting section [9] from the shaft [10].1. reverse the order of removal. Replacing procedure 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1]. 6. Remove four C-clips [7] of the Pickup Roller and the gear-fixing C-clip [8] (black) of the Pick-up/Paper Takeup Roller connected Belt.2 [2] Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller A. 4582fs2507c0 [9] [10] [8] [7] [7] [11] 3. 2005 5. press inward and unlock the locking claws [2] at both ends of the Paper Take-up Section Guide (the Inner Cover).2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4. [3] Maintenance [1] 4582fs2506c0 [5] [6] [5] [4] 2. Remove the Pick-up Roller [11].

Field Service Ver. NOTE • Be careful not to lose the Pick-Up/ Take-Up Roller fixing pin. [3] 4582fs2524c0 7 . and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [12]. Remove C-clip (black) of the Paper Take-up Roller. Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “ADF Feed.1. Replacing procedure 1. NOTE • The Separation Roller Assy is of a set-in type. Pinch the roller shaft at both ends and pull out the Separation Roller Assy upward. 2005 2. reverse the order of removal.” Automatic Document Feeder Maintenance [12] 4582fs2509c0 2.3 Separation Roller [1] A. Remove the Separation Roller Assy [2]. 7. reverse the order of removal. To reinstall. Unlock the Separation Roller Cover locking claws. 6.0 Mar. To reinstall. 4582fs2511c0 [5] [4] 3. Remove the Holder [3] and the shaft [4]. and remove the Separation Roller Cover [1]. 1. Periodical check 5. 4582fs2510c0 [2] 2. and remove the Separation Roller [5]. 4.

4 Automatic Document Feeder [2] Field Service Ver.1. Cleaning procedure 1. Wet a cloth with alcohol. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1]. 2. Remove the Wire Harness Saddle [4] and the screw [5] from the Registration/Timing Sensor mounting plate [3]. and use it to wipe up the Registration Roller [6].0 Mar. [6] 4582fs2514c0 8 . [4] 4582fs2513c0 4.5 Registration Roller [2] [1] [2] Maintenance A.1. 2005 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller / Separation Roller [1] A. Paper Take-up Roller [3] and Separation Roller [4].2. and use it to wipe up the Pick-up Roller [2]. 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1]. 4582fs2512c0 [5] [3] 3. 2. Cleaning procedure 1. [3] [4] 4582fs2523c0 2. Periodical check 2. Wet a cloth with alcohol. Remove four screws [2] from the Registration Roller Cover.

and open the Turnover Guide Plate [2]. Cleaning procedure 1. Cleaning procedure 1. 1. Cleaning procedure 1.6 Exit Roller / Roll [3] [1] 2.1.0 Mar. Clean the Registration [1]/Timing Sensor [2] with a blower brush or the like.1.8 Sensor Section [1] [2] A. and use it to wipe up the Turnover Roller [3].Field Service Ver. and use it to wipe up the Exit Roller [2]/Roll [3]. [1] [2] 4582fs2516c0 [3] 2. [2] 4582fs2515c0 2. Wet a cloth with alcohol. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover [1]. Remove the Registration/Timing Sensor mounting plate. Wet a cloth with alcohol.7 Turnover Roller A. 4582fs2517c0 2.1. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover [1]. 2. 4582fs2522c0 9 . Periodical check Automatic Document Feeder Maintenance A. ☞ 8 2. 2005 2.

Automatic Document Feeder [3] 4582fs2519c0 5. Remove the Registration Roller Cover.0 Mar. 1.2. [4] Maintenance 4582fs2520c0 10 . 6. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover. 2005 3. Clean the Paper Exit Sensor [4] with a brush or the like. Periodical check Field Service Ver. Clean the Paper Empty Sensor [3] with a brush or the like. ☞ 8 4.

Removal of PWBs NOTES • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. 3.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. • Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions. the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment. 2005 3. 1. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. 11 . you should make adjustment.1 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. set. D. or removed in the field. be sure to ground your body. Paint-locked Screws NOTE • Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted. Red Painted Screws NOTES • When the screws are removed. Other Automatic Document Feeder Maintenance 3. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. B. C.

3. 2. Other Field Service Ver.3. Remove the Front Cover [4] by removing two screws [3].3.2 ADF 1. Remove the connector for ADF [1] from the machine. Remove the Rear Cover [6] by removing two screws [5].3. 3. 1.0 Mar.3 3.2 No 1 2 3 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Exterior Parts Unit Front Cover Rear Cover ADF Part name Ref. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 3. page ☞ 12 ☞ 12 ☞ 12 3. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1] and the Paper Exit Section Cover [2].1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Front Cover/Rear Cover [5] [6] [2] Maintenance [3] [1] [3] [4] 4582fs2521c0 1. [1] 4037F2C512DA 12 .

Remove two screws [2]. Other Automatic Document Feeder 2. Remove the ADF [3]. 3. Open the ADF.0 Mar. 2005 [2] [2] 3. 4037F2C513DA [3] 4. 1.Field Service Ver. 4037F2C514DA 13 Maintenance .

0 Mar. 2005 Maintenance Automatic Document Feeder Blank Page 14 .3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.

Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. The Original Glass. How to use the adjustment section Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting Adjustment/Setting 4.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. PC Drum. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. 1. 5. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. etc. 10. Toner is not running out. The units. the following advance checks must be made.Check to see if: 1. 3. direct sunlight. Correct paper is being used for printing. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 2005 4. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. or related part is dirty. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. levelness of the installation site.g. 6. etc. 2. 8. A..) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. slit glass. and supplies used for printing (developer. 4. parts. B. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. high humidity. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. 15 . 4. The power supply is properly grounded. ventilation.. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. The density is properly selected. 6. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 9. 2. 7. The power supply voltage meets the specifications.

Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the document stop position for the second side. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. • To adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Registration Rollers.0 Mar. 1. • Upon replacement of the ADF ☞ 24 C. Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the document stop position for the first side.2 5.1 ADF setting procedure Original Stop Position • To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in each of the ADF modes.2. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure ☞ 26 Registration Loop Adj. 5.2.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure ☞ 28 Auto Stop Position Adjustment 5.2.3 A. • Upon replacement of the ADF ☞ 23 B. Main Scanning Direction Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the start position for image scanning • Upon replacement of the ADF ☞ 25 16 . 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 5. • When a document misfeed or skew occurs. 5. • Check for skew. 5.1 Service Mode Service Mode setting procedure ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen.5. • When “Auto Adjust Stop Position” is NG. Service Mode Field Service Ver.

• When a document misfeed occurs. NOTES • After starting the operation by pressing the Start key. the operation will be resumed. Touch the “ADF” key. Touch the “Sensor Check” key. and closure failure condition). the test will be forced to end. 2. 4. the Paper Through Test ends.2. 2. Set the mode to the Service Mode. Upon the completion of all Originals passed through. Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely. • All Originals set in the Take-up Tray are passed through. 2005 5. 6. • If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation. <Procedure> 1. <Procedure> 1.0 Mar. No paper detected: 0) 17 . • If there is no Original set in the Take-up Tray. Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like. “1-Sided Mixed Orig” and “2-Sided”. Touch the “Paper Passage” key. 5. 3. 5. (Paper detected: 1. malfunction.Field Service Ver. A. Select the Paper Passage Mode to be tested from “1-Sided No Detect”. and check the screen display. Touch the “ADF” key. The operation starts. Service Mode Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting Paper Passage • To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes.2. Set the Original in the Take-up Tray. The Start key color changes from orange to green. 1. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed. the operation will be suspended. if the Start key is pressed during the operation. the Start key will not work.4 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 5.5 Functions Use Sensor Check • To check sensors on the paper path. Set the mode to the Service Mode. 4. if the Start key is pressed again during the suspension. Then. Press the “Start” key. • Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document misfeed occurs. 3.

5. Service Mode Field Service Ver. A. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 5.0 Mar. 4037F3E515DA • Note with care that the Take-up (Feed) Section Open / Close Sensor. The “20 Degree” on the IR. The ADF up to 20 degree open when sensor (PC202) detected.1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit. <Output display of Width S> • The operation of the sensor can be checked whether it is normal or faulty by changing the guide width of the Document Take-up Tray to change the output value. the Transport (Convey) Section Open / Close Sensor. 1.3. the Exit Section Open / Close Sensor and the Middle Tray Open / Close Sensor are displayed as Faulty Set Detected when they are opened.3 5. Sensor monitor Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PC4-DF PC3-DF PC7-DF PC202 PC8-DF PC1-DF PC6-DF PC5-DF PC2-DF R1-DF Empty Original Take-Up Unit Inter lock Exit Cover Transport Convey Middle Tray Registration Exit Section Reverse Timing Width Empty Sensor Take-up Cover Sensor Exit Cover Sensor Original Cover Angle Sensor Tray Open/Close Sensor Registration Sensor Exit Sensor Turnover Sensor Pick-up Sensor Document Size Volume Paper not present OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present 0 Paper present CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Adjustment / Setting Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name 18 .

Field Service Ver. • When the sensor is replaced. • When a document misfeed occurs. 1.3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure ☞ 29 19 Adjustment / Setting . 2005 5. • When an original size is erroneously detected ☞ 20 Sensor Auto Adjust • To make an automatic adjustment of the sensor. 5. • When a document misfeed occurs.3.0 Mar. Service Mode Automatic Document Feeder Original Tray Width • To set the maximum and the minimum width for the width sensor.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 5.3.

Touch “ADF. Touch “Original Tray Width. Press the “Start” key. Confirm that the Result is “OK. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Adjustment procedure 1. 1. Widen the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to their maximum width. 6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.6.” A. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 6.” 3.0 Mar. [2] 4582fs3506c0 20 . 1.” [1] 4582fs3504c0 3.” Adjustment / Setting 4582F3E501DA 4. 2.1 Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the tray volume • Read out the value of maximum width and minimum width of the document width detection volume interlocked with the Document Take-up Tray Edge Guide. 2. Width. Touch “Max. Narrow the width across the edge guides [2] by sliding them to their minimum width.

0 Mar. wrong wiring to the volume and failure of the PWB-A DF. 7. [2] 4582fs3510c0 21 . Touch “END.Field Service Ver. A. Touch “Exit” on the Service Mode screen. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting 5. 4. 2005 6. Make recheck. Confirm that the Result is “OK. Adjustment procedure 1. If the crease deviates on the side of B. 6. If the crease deviates on the side of A. Touch “Min. 4582F3E502DA If the Result is “NG”: • Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection volume (R1-DF). Press the “Start” key. 5. move the tray to the front.2 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position Adjustment standard: Displacement of the document edge should be within 4 ± 1 mm to the Feed Direction scale. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up). use the following procedure to make an adjustment. Set up the following functions: • Auto Paper • 1-sided original / 1-side copy 4582fs3508c0 [1] A B 4582fs3509c0 3. Specifications: ± 2 mm from the center • If the deviation falls outside the specified range. check to see if the arrow is on the side of A or B.” 8. With reference to the crease. 2. Loosen screw [2] (two on the front side and three on the backside) on the document feeding tray. 6. Width.” 6. move the tray to the rear. Fold the copy in half. 1.” 7. Press the “Start” key.

4. move the Document Feeder toward the front.0 Mar. [3] 4582fs3511c0 Adjustment / Setting [4] 4582fs3512c0 22 . Loosen two front screws [4] on the right hinge. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 7. Check in which direction. [2] or [3]. If the image tilts in direction of [2]. Specifications: Tilt 3. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up).3 Adjustment of the document skew Adjustment standard: Skew should be ± 1.6. Make recheck. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 6. 6. • If the image tilts more than the specifications. 2.0 mm max. If the image tilts in direction of [3]. Set up the following functions: • Auto Paper • 1-sided original / 1-side copy 4582fs3508c0 [1] [2] 3. the image tilts on the copy fed out of the machine. Tighten two screws [4]. 5. move the Document Feeder toward the rear. 8. 1. 1.0 mm for document of A4 size.0 % or less with respect to the document length. Press the “Start” key. within 3. perform the following steps to make the adjustment.

2005 6.0 Mar. 4582fs3508c0 23 . 1. 6.4. 3.1 A.Field Service Ver.” Touch “Auto Stop Position Adjustment.” [1] 5. 4037F3E525DA 6. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting 4037F3E527DA 6. Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen.” Touch “Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side. 1. 2. Touch “ADF. The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode.4 Adjustment of the document stop position • Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually (by entering numbers). Press the “Start” key. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up). 4.

2005 Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen.” 6. • Manually correct the value of “2-Sided Set. NOTE • Make sure that the blank surface of the chart faces up. • Manually correct the value of “1-Sided Set.2 A. Touch “ADF. Touch “END. 1. Make sure that Result is “OK. 3.” 9. 4. Press the “Start key.” Touch “Auto Stop Position Adjustment. Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side Field Service Ver.” 8.” Then.” Touch “Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side.” 4582fs3508c0 7. 2.” 9. 1.6.4. Touch “Exit” on the Service Mode screen. Mechanical adjustment 7.” 24 . Check that Result is “OK” and then touch “SET. touch “SET. If the Result is “NG”: • Check and correct the skew of the document.0 Mar. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder [1] in the document feeding tray.” 8. Touch “Exit” on the Service Mode screen. 6. Touch “END. If the Result is “NG”: • Check and correct the skew of the document.” Adjustment / Setting 4037F3E529DA [1] 5.

Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder 4037F3E531DA Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. • Manually correct the value of “Main Scanning Direction.” [1] 5. 6.4. Touch “ADF.” 25 . Press the “Start” key.0 Mar. Check that Result is “OK” and then touch “SET. If the Result is “NG”: • Check and correct the skew of the document. Touch “Exit” on the Service Mode screen.” Touch “Main Scanning Direction.” 8. Adjustment / Setting 4582fs3508c0 7. 1.3 A. 2005 6. 1. Touch “END.” Touch “Auto Stop Position Adjustment.Field Service Ver. Auto adjust: Main Scanning Direction 6. 3. 4. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).” 9.

6. set the code to +. 2.” 4037F3E533DA Adjustment / Setting E F 4582fs3517c0 4. 3. Touch “END. Select “1-Sided Set” or “2-Sided Set. set the code to -. 1.” 5. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the “+/-” key to change the +/code. 2005 Manual adjust: 1-Sided Set/ 2-Sided Set Adjusted range: -7 mm to + 7 mm A.” Touch “Original Stop Position.4.0 Mar. 1. Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch “ADF.4 Automatic Document Feeder Field Service Ver.” 26 .) • To shift the position in the direction of F. • To shift the position in the direction of E. 6. Mechanical adjustment 6.

6. 3. • To shift the image in the direction of D. 2005 6. Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen.” C D 4582fs3518c0 27 Adjustment / Setting 4.4. (Press the “+/-” key to change the code. 1. set the code to -.” .” Touch “Original Stop Position.Field Service Ver.” 5. Touch “ADF. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder 4037F3E533DA Adjusted range: -3 mm to + 3 mm A. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. set the code to +. 2.0 Mar.) • To scan the image in the direction of C.5 Manual adjust: Main Scanning Direction 6. 1. Select “Main Scanning Direction. Touch “END.

Touch “END. 4. Touch “ADF.value. 4037F3E535DA Adjustment / Setting 5. and too little loop value may result in askew document. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. 1.” Touch “Registration Loop Adj. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 6.code.” Select the registration loop value. • Too much loop value may result in dog-eared document.” 28 .5 Adjustment of the registration loop value Adjusted range: -5 mm to + 5 mm Default value: 0 (Loop value: 5 mm) • The loop value is increased by the entered + value and decreased by the entered .6. A. 3. 2. (Press the “+/-” key to change the +/.0 Mar. Adjustment Procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen.) 6.

1.” 4037F3E537DA 4.Field Service Ver. 29 .” Press the Start key.0 Mar. A. replace it if necessary.” Touch “Sensor Auto Adjust. 2. 6.” or “ADF Sensor Auto Adj. 2005 6.” and “ADF Sensor Auto Adj. If the result is “OK” touch the “END” key on the panel. Select “Initialize and Sensor Auto Adj. • The adjustment has two modes: “Initialize And Sensor Auto Adj. 1. If the result is “NG” check the influencing sensor. Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen. and then make readjustment. 3. 5. Touch “ADF. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting 6.6 Sensor auto adjustment • The detection level of the document through path sensor is automatically adjusted. 7.” • Make this adjustment as appropriate after the replacement of the Control Board (PWB-A DF) or in case of the document detection error.

2005 Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 30 . 1.6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.0 Mar.

0 Mar. 1. message. Code 6401 6403 6402 6404 Misfeed location Paper Exit / Turnover section Transport section Paper Take-Up section Transport Tray section Misfeed access location Paper Exit section Cover Paper Take-Up section Cover Paper Take-Up section Cover Paper Exit section Cover Action ☞ 34 ☞ 33 ☞ 32 ☞ 35 7. 7. 2005 7. 7.2 Sensor layout [4] [1] [3] [1] Exit Sensor [2] Turnover Sensor PC6-DF PC5-DF [3] Pick-up Sensor [2] 4582fs4502c0 PC2-DF PC1-DF [4] Registration Sensor 31 . misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. clear the sheet of paper misfeed.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door.1. and close the door.1 Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs. Jam Display Automatic Document Feeder Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 7.Field Service Ver.

7. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 7. wavy.0 Mar.3. the Pick-Up Sensor B. first perform the following initial check items.7. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. Detection timing Type Misfeed due to paper not reached the Registration Sensor Description Misfeed is detected if the Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started normal rotation. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary.2 Paper Take-Up section misfeed A. deformed. deformed. 1. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Set as necessary. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. Jam Display Field Service Ver. sensor check PC2-DF I/O. sensor check M1-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement 32 . Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.3 7. Action Relevant electrical parts Troubleshooting Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A DF CN7A-9 (ON) PWB-A DF CN7A-12 (ON) PWB-A DF CN5A-1 to 6 — Location (Electrical components) — ADF G-5 ADF G-5 ADF B to C-6 — 1 2 3 4 5 Initial check items PC1-DF I/O. Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned ON within a prepaper not reached set time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse rotation.3.1 Solution Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. or damp? Replace paper. Correct or replace the defective actuator. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. Replace paper.

sensor check PC5-DF I/O.0 Mar.Field Service Ver.3 Transport section misfeed 7. 1. Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned OFF within a paper remaining at preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse rotation. Jam Display Automatic Document Feeder A. Action Relevant electrical parts Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Transport Motor (M2-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A DF CN7A-12 (ON) PWB-A DF CN9A-3 (ON) PWB-A DF CN5A-1 to 6 PWB-A DF CN4A-1 to 6 — Location (Electrical components) — ADF G-5 ADF C-4 ADF B to C-6 ADF B to C-6 — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC2-DF I/O. 2005 7. B. the Pick-Up Sensor Misfeed due to paper not reached the Turnover Sensor Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Transport Motor (M2-DF) started.3. sensor check M1-DF operation check M2-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement 33 Troubleshooting .

the Exit Sensor B.7. 1.3.0 Mar. sor Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor (in the 2-Sided Mode) Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) was turned ON in the 2-Sided mode. Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper remaining at Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned OFF within a the Turnover Sen. sensor check PC6-DF I/O. Jam Display 7.preset time after the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) was tuned ON.4 Automatic Document Feeder Field Service Ver. Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Exit Motor (M3-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A DF CN9A-3 (ON) PWB-A DF CN9A-6 (ON) PWB-A DF CN3A-1 to 6 — Location (Electrical components) — ADF C-4 ADF C-4 ADF B to C-7 — 1 2 3 4 5 Initial check items PC5-DF I/O. 2005 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed A. Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned OFF within a preset paper remaining at time after the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) was tuned ON. sensor check M3-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement Troubleshooting 34 .

If a sensor adjustment error occurs through this procedure.5 Transport Tray section misfeed 7. Detection timing Type Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor (in the 1-Sided Mode) Misfeed at the Transport Tray Description Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after exit operation started in the 1-Sided Mode. 2005 7. Jam Display Automatic Document Feeder Troubleshooting A. Misfeed is detected if the difference between the paper feeding size measured at the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) and that measured at the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is 20 mm or more.3. B. sensor check PWB-A DF replacement NOTE • Each sensor is automatically adjusted when the Main Power Switch is turned ON as special means for detecting a paper misfeed. 35 . sensor check PC6-DF I/O. a misfeed is detected as paper remaining misfeed at the corresponding sensor. Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A DF CN9A-3 (ON) PWB-A DF CN9A-6 (ON) — Location (Electrical components) — ADF C-4 ADF C-4 — 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC5-DF I/O. 1.0 Mar.Field Service Ver.

When the Main Power Switch turn ON. [3] [2] [1] 4582F4E502DA <Panel display and detection timing for each> Panel display [1] Description of error Paper Exit section Cover set error Transport Tray section Cover set error Paper Take-Up section Cover set error ADF set error Detection start When the Main Power Switch turn ON. When the Main Power Switch turn ON. Set error detection • When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected. Set error detection Field Service Ver. When the document is set in the ADF Detection timing Paper Exit section Open/ Close Sensor (when lightblocked) Transport Tray Open/Close Sensor (when light.0 Mar. 2005 Automatic Document Feeder 8.blocked) Paper Take-Up Section Open/ Close Sensor (when lightblocked) Size Reset Switch on the main unit (when turned ON) [2] [3] - Troubleshooting 36 . 1. the Panel of the main unit will have the following display.8.

SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Automatic Duplex Unit 2005. 1.03 Ver.0 .

.

3. 2005/03 Date 1.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 Service manual Ver. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0 deleted. • When a page revised in Ver. • To indicate clearly a section revised. Therefore. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. 2. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision .0 are left as they are.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.After publication of this service manual. • When a page revised in Ver. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 3.0 has been changed in Ver. 2. 2. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised.0 has not been changed in Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. 3.

.

. 3 Transport Roller / Roll 1 ............... 3 Transport Roller / Roll 2...................................................1.................... 7 Sensor check..............1 i ..........................................................3.........................................................1 Adjustment/Setting 4........................................................................................ 2........... 1............................................................................ 11 Solution...1 2.................................................................................................................... 5 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ........................................................... 1 Maintenance 2.......................0 Mar............... 2005 Automatic Duplex Unit Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General CONTENTS General 1................................................1 5............................................................2 3.................. 7... 8 5.......................... 5...................................... 5 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............2 How to use the adjustment section ...................................... 8 Check procedure .................................................................. 1 Machine specifications.................................................................. 1 Type .............1 Periodical check .....................4 Product specifications .................... 6................... 1 Paper type ...................................................................................................... 9 Troubleshooting 7... 5........................................................................................................................................... 11 Misfeed display resetting procedure .3 Jam Display.....1 7.......... 9 Adjusting the paper reference position .......3 3..................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ...................................................2....................................2 2.................... 3........3 1............. 11 Sensor layout ...................................................................................................................................3......................................................1........ 4 2......1 1...................................................................................... 3 .........................................................................1 7........................................................................ 6 Duplex Unit........ 12 Initial check items............. 3 Ventilation Section............................ 6 3..............1 5..2 6.................... 12 7. 1.... 8 Sensor check screen...................................3 Other .............Field Service Ver...........................................2..........2 1........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 Sensor check list ........................................ 8 Sensor check list....... 11 Misfeed display .................1 Mechanical adjustment .............1......................................................................................2 7............1.. 6 Disassembly/Assembly procedure........... 1 Operating environment .............................1 3...................................................................................................................

.....0 Mar.............................. 1.. 2005 Automatic Duplex Unit 7.........Field Service Ver..3.........2 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed .. 13 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General ii ...

25 inch (W) × 17.25 inch (D) × 13.5 × 8. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.7 to 311. 5.2 mm (5.1 Name Type Installation Document Alignment Product specifications Type Duplex Unit Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit Mounted on the right side door of main unit Center 1. 2005 1.5R to 12 × 18 width length 1.25 inch) 176.0 to 457.5 x 12.5 lb) 1. 1.4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.2 mm (7 x 18 inch) General 1.3 Machine specifications DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V ± 5 % (supplied from the main unit) Power Requirements Dimensions Weight 109 mm (W) × 440 mm (D) × 344 mm (H) 4. 1 General . 1.9 kg (6.2 Paper type Plain paper Paper Type Paper Size Print paper size A5R to A3 Wide. Product specifications Automatic Duplex Unit 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb) 139.Field Service Ver.0 Mar.5 inch (H) 2.

0 Mar.1. 2005 General Blank Page 2 . Product specifications Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. 1.

0 Mar. wipe the Transport Roller / Roll 1 [1] clean of dirt.1 Transport Roller / Roll 1 [1] A. 6 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 3 [3] clean of dirt. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.Field Service Ver. Periodical check Automatic Duplex Unit Maintenance 2. wipe the Transport Roller / Roll 2 [2]. 3 A. Cleaning procedure Remove the Duplex Unit.1. 1. 2005 2. Cleaning procedure 1. 2. ☞ 2. 1. [2] [1] [3] 4535fs2502c0 3 .1 Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2. Open the Duplex Unit Door [1].1. Maintenance 4535fs2501c0 2.2 Transport Roller / Roll 2.

[1] [2] 4535fs2503c0 [2] Maintenance [3] 2. 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Cleaning procedure 1. wipe the outside of the Ventilation Section [1] clean of dirt.0 Mar. Open the Duplex Unit Door [2].3 Ventilation Section A. Periodical check Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. 3.1.2. 4535fs2504 c0 4 . Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the inside of the Ventilation Section [3] clean of dirt. 2005 2.

refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. or removed in the field. 5 . only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. be sure to ground your body. the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required.0 Mar. Removal of PWBs NOTES • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. C. set. • Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened. B. Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment. Red Painted Screws NOTES • When the screws are removed. 3. you should make adjustment. 2005 3. D. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Paint-locked Screws NOTE • Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions.1 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A.Field Service Ver. 1. Other Automatic Duplex Unit Maintenance 3.

2005 3. 1. 2.0 Mar. ☞ For details of how to remove the wiring cover.2 No 1 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Unit Duplex Unit Part name Ref. Open the Duplex Unit Door [2]. 6 . Remove the wiring cover. Other Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [3]. see the Maintenance of the main unit service manual.3.1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Duplex Unit 1.3. 4. and remove the Duplex Unit [4]. page ☞ 6 3. [1] 4535fs3503c0 Maintenance [4] [3] [2] [3] 4535fs3502c0 3. Unplug two connectors [1].3 3.

or related part is dirty. ventilation. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.g. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 6. 6. The Original Glass. Correct paper is being used for printing. 2. the following advance checks must be made. A. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. 1. PC Drum. 8. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. B. parts. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. direct sunlight. 3. 9. levelness of the installation site. and supplies used for printing (developer. 5. 10. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. 3. The power supply is properly grounded. 4. high humidity. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. 4. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 2.Field Service Ver. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures..Check to see if: 1. 7. How to use the adjustment section Automatic Duplex Unit Adjustment/Setting 4. The density is properly selected. Toner is not running out. slit glass. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 2005 4. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. The units.0 Mar. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. etc.. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. etc. 7 Adjustment / Setting . 5.

<Procedure> 1. and closure failure condition).1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.2 Sensor check list A.2. Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PI2-DU PI1-DU PC1-DU Set Paperpassage 1 Paperpassage 2 Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 OPEN Paper present Paper present 0 CLOSE Paper not present Paper not present Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name 8 . 2005 5. 1.5. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed. Adjustment / Setting 4535F3E504DA 5. Touch the “State Confirmation” key.0 Mar. Set the mode to the Service Mode. 3. 2. 5. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen.1 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely. 5.2 5. malfunction.2. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Touch the “Sensor Check” key. Sensor check Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver.

Touch “1st. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 6.0 mm 5. enter the correction value.” 4535F3E505DA 3. 1. 2005 6. A test print will then be produced. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Produce another test print and check for width A.0 mm ± 1.Field Service Ver. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Duplex Unit Adjustment / Setting 6.0 Mar. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. Measure the width of printed reference line A.” and then press the “Start” key. 4535fs3506c0 9 . 4535F3E506DA A 4. Specifications: 3. 6.1 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position 1. Touch “Machine”→“Printer Area”→ “Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge. 2.

1. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. 2005 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 10 .6.0 Mar.

1 Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs. misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. 7. and close the door. 7. Code 9201 9301 Misfeed location Duplex Unit transpor section misfeed Duplex Unit pre-registration section misfeed Misfeed access location Duplex Unit Door Action ☞ 13 7. Jam Display Automatic Duplex Unit Troubleshooting 4535fs4502c0 Troubleshooting 7. 1. clear the sheet of paper misfeed.2 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] [1] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 [2] Synchronizing Roller Sensor PI1-DU PC28 [3] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1-DU 11 .1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door. message.Field Service Ver. 2005 7.0 Mar.1.

deformed.7. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. 2005 7. Correct or replace the defective actuator.0 Mar. Troubleshooting 12 .3 7. 1. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. or damp? Replace paper. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. Set as necessary. wavy. deformed. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. Replace paper. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty.1 Solution Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. first perform the following initial check items. Jam Display Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver.3. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

Duplex Unit transport section misfeed detection B.3. sensor check M1-DU operation check M2-DU operation check PWB-A DU replacement PWB-MC replacement 13 . 1. Detection of paper remaining in the Duplex Unit transport section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) are blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. Action Relevant electrical parts Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-MC PJ24MC-6 (ON) — — PWB-A DU PJ3A-1 to 4 PWB-A DU PJ2A-1 to 4 — — Location (Electrical components) — C450 C to D-3 — — Duplex Unit C to D-5 Duplex Unit C to D-5 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Initial check items PC28 I/O.2 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed 7. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is blocked by the paper. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.Field Service Ver. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is blocked by the paper. 2005 7. a door or cover is opened and closed. sensor check PI1-DU I/O. Detection timing Type Description The Synchronizing Roller Sensor(PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Duplex Paper Take-up sequence started. sensor check PC1-DU I/O.0 Mar. Jam Display Automatic Duplex Unit Troubleshooting A. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is blocked by the paper.

0 Mar.7. 1. Jam Display Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. 2005 Blank Page Troubleshooting 14 .

0 .03 Ver.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE PC-102/PC-202 2005. 1.

.

3. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.0 only are shown with those for Ver.0 are left as they are. 2.After publication of this service manual. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.0 has not been changed in Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 2. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . 2. 3.0 deleted. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. • To indicate clearly a section revised.0 Service manual Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. Therefore.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 has been changed in Ver. 2005/03 Date 1. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 3. • When a page revised in Ver. • When a page revised in Ver.

.

............................................ 6 2............................................................... 12 Adjustment/Setting 4............................................. 8 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts).............2 2.....................................Field Service Ver....................................... 11 Paper Take-up Roller........ 12 Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General PC-102/PC-202 CONTENTS ... 9 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover..................................................... 6..........................................2....2 3....... 1 Paper type ..............................2 3.....4 Product specifications ................................1 3............................................ 5......................... 1 Machine specifications.............3..............2 1...................................................................................................1 2.........................................4.... 16 i Troubleshooting Pick-up Roller.................1 3...................................... 13 Sensor check.......4.................................... 2............................................ 10 Rear Cover............................................................... 11 3.. 3.....................................................................................................1 5......................................................................3 3.........................................2 How to use the adjustment section ............2 Other .....4. 9 Cleaning parts list ................................................................. 1.................... 3 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy.................. 8 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ....................... 1 Operating environment ... 16 Adjusting the paper reference position ........... 4 Replacing the Pick-up Roller......4 Disassembly/Assembly procedure......................0 Mar.................................................... 1....3 1................................2 6............. 11 Vertical Transport Roller...........1 1......................... 3 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller...................................2.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1 Maintenance 2........................ 10 Cleaning procedure ........................... 2005 General 1.3.................. 14 Sensor check screen.................. 5........................2.. 9 Disassembly/Assembly parts list............................................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ...............1 Mechanical adjustment .2........................................................................4 3.......................................1 Periodical check .................... 10 Separation Roller ...................1.....................................1 5..........1....................................................................................2 3...................3 3.................................................................................1 3..... 15 5.............................................................................................................4.......................................1 3...............3 3................... 14 Check procedure ...............1...... 1 Type ......................... 14 Sensor check list...................... 14 Sensor check list ...................................................................

..........................................................................................................................1 8.......................................... 1.................................... 22 Tray4 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-202) .........................1 PC-102/PC-202 Print Positioning: Side Edge .... 19 Misfeed display resetting procedure .........................................................2 Troubleshooting 7........................ 17 6.........................1.........................................................................................................................................4...........1 Adjustment / Setting Troubleshooting ii ..3...............1..... 7.......................................1 7....1 7.......3 8..3 7....................2 8......................................................... 25 C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure ......................................... 24 Trouble code list........................... 2005 6......... 19 Misfeed display...............................................................................1.......................... 21 Initial check items .....................................................................................................1 General 7.....2 7.................................. 24 Trouble code display ......... 25 8.......................... 21 Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-102/PC-202) .................................................3 8...........................................4 Maintenance Trouble code ...........................................................3..............................................................2 Jam Display.............................................. 8...... 23 7.............................. 24 Solution ............. 19 Sensor layout.... 20 Solution ........................... 16 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge.................................................................................Field Service Ver..............................3...0 Mar.............................................. 24 How to reset ...

21.3 Machine specifications DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V ± 5 % Power Requirements Max. 5. Product specifications 1.9 kg (57 lb) 1.25 inch (H) × 21.1 Name Type Product specifications Type 2 way Paper Take-Up Cabinet Front loading type 2 way paper take-up device Desk type Center Installation Document Alignment 1.5R to 11 × 17 3rd Drawer 4th Drawer 500 sheets (80 g/m2.5 × 8.Field Service Ver.0 kg (48.5 inch (W) × 10.4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.5 inch (D) PC-102:22. 1 General PC-102/PC-202 General . 1. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 75 W or less 570 mm (W) × 263 mm (H) × 548 mm (D) 22.25 lb) 500 sheets (80 g/m2.2 Paper type Plain paper Recycled paper 56 to 256 g/m2 (15 to 68 lb) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) Paper Type Paper Size Capacity A5R to A3. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. 1. 21. 2005 1.25 lb) 1.0 Mar.5 lb) PC-202:25.

1.0 Mar. 1. 2005 General PC-102/PC-202 Blank Page 2 . Product specifications Field Service Ver.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer. the Guide [9]. and remove the Separation Roller Assy [10]. [2] [1] [1] 4348fs2611c0 [4] [3] [3] 4348fs2612c0 [7] [5] [6] [5] 4061F2C501DA 4. 2005 2.1. Remove the C-ring [8]. 1. Periodical check 2.0 Mar. and remove the Paper Separation Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [7]. NOTE • Be careful not to lose spring at this time. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2]. Remove the Right Door.Field Service Ver. 6. ☞ 10 2. 2. 4061F2C502DA 3 Maintenance 3. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [4].1 Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) Replacing the Separation Roller Assy 1. Remove two C-rings [5] and the shaft [6].1 2. PC-102/PC-202 Maintenance . [10] [9] [8] 5.

(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from two wire saddles. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. 4 . 2005 PC-102/PC-202 NOTES • Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. ☞ 3 4. Remove the Tray3.) 3.1.) ☞ 10 2. Remove the Rear Right Cover. Maintenance 2. 4348fs2623c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. (Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row. 1. Periodical check Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.2. 5. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. [3] [2] [2] [2] 4348fs2603c0 [4] [4] [5] 4348fs2604c0 6.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller [1] 4348F2C502DA 1.0 Mar. • Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed.

Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left. [9] 4348fs2606c0 [10] 9. [14] [13] 4348fs2608c0 5 Maintenance PC-102/PC-202 7. .Field Service Ver. 1. Remove the C-ring [8] and remove the bushing [9]. and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12]. Periodical check [7] [6] 4348fs2605c0 [8] 8. [12] [11] 4348fs2607c0 [15] 10. and remove the shaft Assy [15].0 Mar. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. 2005 2. the bushing [14]. Remove the C-ring [13].

) 3.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller [1] 4348F2C502DA 1.) ☞ 10 2.(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. [20] 4348fs2610c0 Maintenance NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from two wire saddles. Remove the Rear Right Cover. ☞ 3 4.2. 2. Remove two E-rings [16] and the bushing [17]. and remove the Pickup Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [18]. Remove the Tray3. 2005 11. 1. Periodical check [16] [18] [16] Field Service Ver. 5.0 Mar. 13. Remove the C-ring [19] and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [20]. [3] [2] [2] [2] 4348fs2603c0 6 .1. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. Repeat steps 1 to 11 similarly for the 4th Drawer. (Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. PC-102/PC-202 [17] 4348fs2609c0 [19] 12.

Repeat steps 1 to 8 similarly for the 4th Drawer.0 Mar. and remove the Pick-up Roller Assy [10]. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [5] together with frame. [5] [4] 4348fs2617c0 [7] 7. 7 Maintenance [8] 8.Field Service Ver. 10. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12]. [6] 4348fs2605c0 [8] [9] [10] [9] 4348fs2618c0 [11] [12] 9. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. Periodical check 6. Remove two C-rings[8]. two bushings [9]. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. PC-102/PC-202 [4] . 4348fs2619c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. 2005 2. 1.

8 .0 Mar. Maintenance C. D. B. Removal of PWBs NOTES • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. • Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened. the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. or removed in the field. 3. you should make adjustment. 2005 PC-102/PC-202 3. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. Other Field Service Ver. 1.3. set. Red Painted Screws NOTES • When the screws are removed. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment. be sure to ground your body. Paint-locked Screws NOTE • Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted.1 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions.

2.Field Service Ver.0 Mar.2 3. page ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 3.2. 2005 3. Other 3. 1. page ☞ 11 ☞ 11 ☞ 12 Maintenance ☞ 12 9 PC-102/PC-202 .2 No 1 2 3 4 Cleaning parts list Section Separation Roller Paper feed section Paper Take-up Roller Pick-up Roller Transport section Vertical Transport Roller Part name Ref.1 No 1 2 3 4 5 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Right Door Rear Right Cover Exterior parts Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Part name Ref.

0 Mar. 4.2 [1] [1] [2] 4348fs2622c0 1. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3]. 2005 3.1 [2] [3] [6] [5] [4] 4348fs2621c0 Maintenance 1. Open the Right Door [1].3.3 PC-102/PC-202 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover [7] [1] 3. 2.3. 1. Other Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5]. 10 . Remove the Right Door [1]. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7].3. 3. 5. Rear Cover 3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].

Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer.4.4 Cleaning procedure PC-102/PC-202 Maintenance 4348fs2612c0 NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. 1. ☞ 10 2. Remove the Tray3. [3] [3] [5] 4.2 Paper Take-up Roller [1] 4348fs2601c0 1. Repeat steps 1 to 4 similarly for the 4th Drawer. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 3.0 Mar. Remove the Right Door. 2005 3. ☞ 3 3. wipe the Separation Roller [5] clean of dirt. 5.Field Service Ver.(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row. wipe the Paper Take-up Roller [1] clean of dirt.4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2].1 Separation Roller 1. Other 3. 11 .) 2. [2] [1] [1] 4348fs2611c0 [4] 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [4]. 4348fs2613c0 3. 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

4348fs2602c0 3.4 [1] [1] Maintenance Vertical Transport Roller 1. wipe the Pick-up Roller [1] clean of dirt. Remove the Tray3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 2005 Pick-up Roller 1.0 Mar. 1. 4.3 PC-102/PC-202 [1] Field Service Ver. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer. 2. Open the Right Door.3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. ☞ 3 3.4. 4348fs2620c0 12 . wipe the Vertical Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt.) 2.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Other 3.(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row.

If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. The units.Field Service Ver. levelness of the installation site. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 5. 6. parts. PC Drum. etc. 8. slit glass. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. high humidity. The power supply is properly grounded. Correct paper is being used for printing. B.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. and supplies used for printing (developer. 1. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. How to use the adjustment section 4. 3. 2005 4. 7. The Original Glass.Check to see if: 1. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 6. 2. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 13 Adjustment / Setting PC-102/PC-202 Adjustment/Setting . or related part is dirty.g. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. direct sunlight. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. 4. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. ventilation. 3.0 Mar... 2. A. Toner is not running out. 9. the following advance checks must be made. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 10. 5. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. 4. etc. The density is properly selected. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.

5. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.1 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely. 2005 PC-102/PC-202 5. malfunction. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed. Sensor check Field Service Ver. Adjustment / Setting 4061F3E502DA 14 .2. Touch the “Sensor Check” key.0 Mar. 3.2 5. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen.1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit. 1. and closure failure condition). Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch the “State Confirmation” key. <Procedure> 1. 2.5. 5.

2005 5.2. 1.2 Sensor check list 5.0 Mar. Sensor check A.Field Service Ver. Sensor monitor 1 (PC-102/PC-202) Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PC112-PF Device Detection PC115-PF Paper Empty PC113-PF Near Empty PC117-PF Vertical Transport S PC116-PF Take-Up PC114-PF Upper Limit PC121-PF Device Detection PC124-PF Paper Empty PC122-PF Near Empty PC126-PF Vertical Transport S PC125-PF Take-Up PC123-PF Upper Limit Tray3 Set Sensor Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor Tray3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor Tray4 Set Sensor Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor Tray4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray4 Lift-Up Sensor Set Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present Raised Position Set Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present Raised Position 0 Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not raised Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Not raised 15 Adjustment / Setting Paper not present PC-102/PC-202 .

6. Touch “Print Positioning: Side Edge” → “3rd. A 4348fs3509c0 16 . ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. 5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. enter the correction value.0 Mar.0 mm 6. perform adjustment according to the following procedure. Specification: 3. 2. 6. 7. 1. When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Measure the width of printed reference line A. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range. When the LPH Unit has been replaced.1.1 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE • Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Touch “Machine” → “Printer Area.1 Print Positioning: Side Edge 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.0 mm ± 1. • If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value. 2005 PC-102/PC-202 6.” Adjustment / Setting 4061F3E504DA 4. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range.” 3.6.

• If width A is smaller than the specified value. 1. Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge Adjustment / Setting 6. Mechanical adjustment 8.” 4061F3E506DA 4. [1] 4348fs3601c0 [4] [3] 4348fs3602c0 10. 12. 11. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range. move the Edge Guide toward the front. 2.” 3.1. move the Edge Guide [4] in the rear. Slide out the drawer [1] and unload paper from it. 14. move the Edge Guide toward the rear.0 Mar. 9.2 1. • If width A is greater than the specified value. Watching the graduations [3] provided in the drawer. 13. Tighten the adjustment screw.Field Service Ver. Loosen three screws [2] at the center of the Paper Lifting Plate. 2005 [2] 6. 17 PC-102/PC-202 . Touch “Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge” → “3rd. Repeat steps 1 to 15 similarly for the tray4. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Touch “Machine” → “Printer Area. Call the Service Mode to the screen.

7. enter the correction value. 1. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range.6. Specification: 3.0 Mar. Repeat steps 1 to 7 similarly for the tray4.0 mm 6. 8. 4348fs3509c0 PC-102/PC-202 A Adjustment / Setting 18 . 2005 5.0 mm ± 1. Measure the width of printed reference line A.

[1] [2] Code 1301 2001 1401 2001 Misfeed location Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Section Tray 3 Paper Vertical Transport Section Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Section Tray 4 Paper Vertical Transport Section Misfeed access location Right Door Right Door Action ☞ 22 ☞ 23 7. message. and close the door.0 Mar.Field Service Ver.1. Jam Display 7. 2005 7. 1. [1] [1] [2] [2] 4061F4C501DA No.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door. 19 Troubleshooting PC-102/PC-202 Troubleshooting . 7. clear the sheet of paper misfeed.1 Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs. misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.

0 Mar. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.2 PC-102/PC-202 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 4061F4C502DB [1] Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor [2] Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor [3] Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC108 [4] Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126-PF PC125-PF PC117-PF [5] Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC116-PF Troubleshooting 20 . 2005 7.7.

first perform the following initial check items. Set as necessary. 1.Field Service Ver. 21 Troubleshooting . Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.3. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty.3 7.0 Mar. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Correct or replace the defective actuator. or damp? Replace paper. deformed.1 Solution Initial check items PC-102/PC-202 • When a paper misfeed occurs. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. Replace paper. Jam Display 7. deformed. 2005 7. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. wavy. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.

or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. sensor check M122-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement Troubleshooting 4 5 6 22 . The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. Action Relevant electrical parts Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-8 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) — — Location (Electrical components) — PC202 C-4 PC202 C-4 C450 T to U-27 — — 1 2 3 Initial check items PC116-PF I/O. Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) is energized.2 PC-102/PC-202 Field Service Ver. sensor check PC108 I/O. Jam Display 7. sensor check PC117-PF I/O. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.7.3. a door or cover is opened and closed. The Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC117-PF has been blocked by a paper. a door or cover is opened and closed. Tray3 Paper TakeUp section/Vertical transport section misfeed detection Tray3 detection of paper remaining B. 1. 2005 Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-102/PC-202) A. The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) has been blocked by a paper.0 Mar.

or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) is energized. 2005 7. 1.0 Mar. Jam Display A. The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126PF) has been blocked by a paper. sensor check PC126-PF I/O. a door or cover is opened and closed.3 7. Tray4 Paper TakeUp section/Vertical transport section misfeed detection Tray4 detection of paper remaining B.3. Action Relevant electrical parts Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-8 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2 PF-2 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ9C2 PF-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical components) — PC202 G to H-6 PC202 G to H-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC125-PF I/O. a door or cover is opened and closed. sensor check PC117-PF I/O. The Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. sensor check M123-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement PC202 G to H6 to 7 — 23 Troubleshooting PC202 C-4 PC-102/PC-202 Tray4 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-202) .Field Service Ver. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC126-PF has been blocked by a paper.

3 How to reset • Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. Troubleshooting 24 . gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel. 4061F4E504DA 8.8. 1.0 Mar. Trouble code Field Service Ver.1 Trouble code Trouble code display • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. 8. 2005 PC-102/PC-202 8.2 Code C0206 C0208 Trouble code list Item 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Failure 4th Drawer Lift-Up Failure Description • The Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer began. 8. on detecting a malfunction.

sensor check M124-PF operation check M125-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement PWB-MC replacement PU1 replacement — 2 — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 — PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-3 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-3 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ4C2 PF-4 to 5 PWB-C2 PF PJ8C2 PF-12 to 13 — — — — PC202 C-3 PC202 G to H-5 PC202 C-5 PC202 G-3 to 4 — — — 25 Troubleshooting PC-102/PC-202 . sensor check PC123-PF I/O. Check the connector of each motor for proper drive coupling. PC114-PF I/O.4. 1. and correct as necessary. Check the PU1 connector for proper connection. and correct as necessary.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. Trouble code 8. and correct as necessary.1 Solution C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure Relevant electrical parts Lift-Up Motor 1 (M124-PF) Tray4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PF) Tray3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF) Tray4 Lift-Up Sensor (PC123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) main unit Control Board (PWB-MC) main unit DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.4 8. 2005 8.

2005 PC-102/PC-202 Blank Page Troubleshooting 26 .0 Mar.8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.

03 Ver. 1.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE PC-402 2005.0 .

.

0 deleted.0: The revision marks for Ver. • To indicate clearly a section revised. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . • When a page revised in Ver.0 has not been changed in Ver.0 has been changed in Ver. 2005/03 Date 1. 3. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. 2. 3.0 Service manual Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. • When a page revised in Ver. Therefore. 2. 2. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. 2. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 3.0 are left as they are. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. show 1 to the left of the revised section.After publication of this service manual. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised.0: The revision marks for Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.

.

.................................................................................................................................................1 2...........................3..2..................................................................3 1................................3 3.................................................................................................................... 14 Adjustment/Setting 4........................................................................ 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) .......................................Field Service Ver........3............... 1............................0 Mar.............. 6 2................................ 5.....1 5..................................................................................................................................4............................................................ 14 Paper Take-up Roller......................4 3...............1 3...............1 Periodical check ................................................................. 2005 CONTENTS General 1........... 3 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller....................................................... 4 Replacing the Pick-up Roller................ 9 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover.....4 3............................... 14 Vertical Transport Roller..................... 9 Cleaning parts list ................................................... 1..................................................................................................... 18 Check procedure .................................................. 1 General PC-402 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance Maintenance 2.................................................................................1 3.............................................. 1 Paper type ...............................................................2 1................. 8 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)........................4 Product specification ...........................................2 3...................4..................1..............................1..............................2 i .2.2 3................................................................................... 15 3...............1 3.............. 14 Pick-up Roller................... 10 Rear Cover................................ 9 Disassembly/Assembly parts list................ 1 Operating environment ...1..........................................3........... 3.1 3.......................................... 1 Type .................................. 1 Machine specifications................................................................ 8 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items .....................................................4......................................................1 1.............. 18 Sensor check list.......2................................2 2........................1 5............................ 11 Wire................3 3..........................4......... 10 Drawer...........................3 3.......2..........................2 3...........2 Other ...... 2.......2 How to use the adjustment section ............................3......... 17 Sensor check......................................................................... 11 Separation Roller ..4 Disassembly/Assembly procedure............... 19 5................................... 3 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy.......... 18 Sensor check list ............ 5............. 10 Cleaning procedure .............................................................................3 3.......... 18 Sensor check screen.................

................................................................................................................ 29 Trouble code display ............... 33 C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure .............................. 29 Trouble code list...............................3 8.........2 6.................................................2 Maintenance 8............................... 6................2........................ 32 C0209: LCT Elevator Motor Failure ................................. 20 Adjusting the paper reference position ..................................................................................................................................................................................1 Adjustment / Setting 8.............................. 34 C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure ...........................1 7....1 7.........2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment ..................................................3...................... 33 C0212: LCT Lock Release Failure ........................................ 1...........1 8.........5 8..............3................... 34 C0214: LCT Shift Failure ........................................................................................3.... 35 Solution ............ 25 Misfeed display resetting procedure .................. 27 Initial check items ................................................................................4 8.............. General Jam Display........... 20 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge..... 2005 6.....1 6.....................3........3..................1....................................................................Field Service Ver...................... 32 C0210: LCT Lift Failure...... 25 Misfeed display...............3....................................................................................................................1 7.3 7.......................................................... 32 8............................................2 7.... 8.....................................................3.1.................................. 22 Troubleshooting 7.........................0 Mar.3 Trouble code .............2 8............................................................... 28 7..... 20 Print Positioning: Side Edge ...............................................................................................1 8............ 27 LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed .................... 26 Solution ............. 31 C0001: LCT communication error...........7 Troubleshooting ii ..3............. 22 6.1........6 8....... 25 Sensor layout............................................................................................. 30 How to reset....3..2 8............................1 PC-402 Mechanical adjustment ........................................

5 inch (W) × 10.4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit. Product specification General 1.0 Mar.25 lb) 1. 8. 21. 2005 1. 1.5 inch (D) 25.2 Paper type Plain paper Recycled paper 56 to 256 g/m2 (15 to 68 lb) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) Paper Type Paper Size Capacity A4.1 Name Type Installation Document Alignment Type Large Capacity Cabinet Front loading type LCC Desk type Center 1.9 kg (57 lb) 1.5 × 11 2500 sheets (80 g/m2.Field Service Ver. 1 General PC-402 1.3 Machine specifications DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V ± 5 % Power Requirements Max.25 inch (H) × 21. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. Product specification . Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 45 W or less 570 mm (W) × 263 mm (H) × 548 mm (D) 22.

1. 2005 General PC-402 Blank Page 2 .0 Mar. 1. Product specification Field Service Ver.

1 2. Remove the C-ring [6]. [5] [3] [3] [4] 4348F2C503DA [8] [7] [6] 4.1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) Replacing the Separation Roller Assy [2] [1] [1] 4348fs2509c0 1. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [2]. 2005 2.Field Service Ver. the Guide [7]. 1. Remove the Right Door.1. Periodical check . and remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing Bracket Assy [5]. and remove the Separation Roller Assy [8]. 4348F2C504DA 3 Maintenance 3. Remove two C-rings [3] and the shaft [4]. ☞ 10 2. Periodical check Maintenance 2.0 Mar. PC-402 2. NOTE • Be careful not to lose spring at this time.

Remove two screws [4] and remove the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. Maintenance 2. 3. 4348F2C501DA [3] 5. 1. [2] [2] [2] 4348fs2502c0 [5] [4] [4] 6. • Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed. 4348fs2503c0 4 .0 Mar. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover. 2005 PC-402 NOTE • Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine. ☞ See the procedures 1 to 2 in page 3 “Separation Roller Assy. Periodical check Field Service Ver. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. Disconnect the connector [1] from the Main Control Board. ☞ 10 2.” 4. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. 4348fs2623c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. Remove the Tray3.2.1.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller [1] 1. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.

10. [8] [8] [9] 4348fs2505c0 [10] 9. Remove two C-rings [8] and remove the bushing [9]. PC-402 [7] [6] [6] 4348fs2504c0 8. Remove the shaft Assy [10].0 Mar. [12] [11] 4348fs2506c0 5 Maintenance . 2005 2. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left.Field Service Ver. and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12]. 1. Periodical check 7. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7].

[2] [2] [2] 4348fs2502c0 6 . [13] PC-402 [13] [14] 4348fs2507c0 [16] [17] 12. 1. 4348fs2508c0 Maintenance NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy.0 Mar. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. Remove the Tray3. 4348F2C501DA [3] 5.” 4. Disconnect the connector [1] from the Main Control Board. and remove the Pickup Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [15]. Periodical check [15] Field Service Ver. Remove the C-ring [16] and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [17]. 2. ☞ See the procedures 1 to 2 in page 3 “Separation Roller Assy. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller [1] 1. 3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.1. ☞ 10 2. Remove two E-rings [13] and the bushing [14]. 2005 11.2.

Remove two screws [4] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [5] together with frame. two bushings [9]. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. 7 Maintenance 8. 1. [12] 4348fs2518c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. 2005 [4] [4] 2. Periodical check 6. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12]. PC-402 . Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. [5] 4348fs2516c0 [7] [6] 7. Remove two C-rings [8]. [6] [8] 4348fs2515c0 [8] [9] [10] [9] 4348fs2517c0 [11] 9. and the Pick-up Roller Assy [10].

only one representative screw may be marked with red paint. • Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. Removal of PWBs NOTES • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. PC-402 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items 3. Maintenance C. Paint-locked Screws NOTE • Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted. 1.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions.0 Mar. Red Painted Screws NOTES • When the screws are removed. B. 8 .3. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. set. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.1 A. Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment. 2005 3. D. Other Field Service Ver. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. or removed in the field. you should make adjustment. be sure to ground your body. the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required.

2.1 No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) PC-402 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Right Door Rear Right Cover Exterior Parts Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Unit Drawer Wire Part name Ref. page ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 3.2 No 1 2 3 4 Cleaning parts list Section Separation Roller Paper feed section Paper Take-up Roller Pick-up Roller Transport section Vertical Transport Roller Part name Ref. Other 3.0 Mar. 1.2. 2005 3.Field Service Ver.2 3. page ☞ 14 ☞ 14 ☞ 15 Maintenance ☞ 14 9 .

Remove the Right Door [1]. Rear Cover 3. 10 .3 PC-402 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover [7] 3. 5.2 [1] [2] [1] 4348fs2521c0 1. Open the Right Door [1].0 Mar.3. 2. 1. 3. 2005 3.1 [1] [2] [3] [5] [4] 4348fs2520c0 [6] Maintenance 1.3. Other Field Service Ver.3. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7]. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3]. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2]. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5]. 4.

NOTE • When removing the Connector Board. Remove the Drawer. NOTE • Do not peel off pulley protective mylar sheet. Unplug the connector [3]. [7] 4348fs2524c0 3. Other [2] [3] [1] 4348fs2522c0 1. Remove the Drawer. 4348fs2523c0 [7] NOTE • To prevent injuries. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Front Cover Assy [2]. 3.0 Mar. ☞ 11 2.Field Service Ver. press the guide rail [7] inside the machine. 2. Press the Drawer Eject Button [1] and slide out the drawer [2]. 3. Remove two screws [4] and the Inner Cover Assy [5]. 2005 3. Remove two screws [4]. Remove the paper. the connector [5]. 1. [4] [4] [5] [6] 4. and remove the Connector Board [6]. Remove four screws [3] and slide out the drawer [2].3. 4348fs2526c0 11 Maintenance PC-402 .3 Drawer [3] 3. [4] [5] [4] 4. 5.4 Wire [3] [1] [2] [1] 4348fs2525c0 1.3. use care not to drop the drawer from the guide rail.

[15] [16] [15] [16] [16] [15] [14] 8. be sure to engage rib of gear 1 [10] with convex section of gear 2 [11]. Remove four Pulley Covers [15]. 9. 4348fs2529c0 [13] [12] [12] 4348fs2530c0 7. Remove two C-clips [14].0 Mar. [8] 4348fs2528c0 Maintenance [10] [11] NOTE • When assembling. 2005 5. PC-402 [7] [6] 4348fs2527c0 [9] 6. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Driver Cover [7]. Other Field Service Ver. [15] [14] 4348fs2531c0 12 . Remove three screws [8] and remove the Driver Mounting Plate Assy [9]. 10. Unhook four pulleys [16]. Remove three screws [12] and remove the Reinforcement Bracket Assy [13]. 1.3.

16. Remove four screws [22] and remove the Front Trailing Edge Assy [23]. Remove two C-rings [28]and the Take-up Drum [29]. [20] 4348fs2533c0 [23] [22] 4348fs2534c0 [24] [27] [25] [26] [24] [24] [26] 4348fs2535c0 15. 13 Maintenance [22] 14. NOTE • Use care not to bend the wires. and two gears [26]. Remove four Cable Holding Jigs [18] and remove the Main Drawer [19]. Remove the Take-up Drum Assy [27]. • When reinstalling the Take-up Drum. • Install so that cut parts [30] at both ends of shaft face up. 4348fs2532c0 [21] [20] 13.Field Service Ver. the bushing [25]. NOTES • Take care not to lose fixing pins. Remove the Ground Plate [17]. 12. PC-402 . Other 11. [28] [29] [29] [28] [30] 4348fs2536c0 17. 1. check that the direction of the wire coming from both Take-up Drums are the same.0 Mar. 2005 [18] [18] [19] [18] [18] [17] 3. Remove three C-rings [24]. Remove four screws [20] and remove the Rear Trailing Edge Assy [21].

wipe the Pick-up Roller [1] clean of dirt.4 PC-402 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.3. 14 . Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 3.2 Paper Take-up Roller [1] 4348F2C502DA 1. Remove the Tray3. ☞ See the procedures 1 to 2 in page 14 “Cleaning of Separation Roller. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 4348fs2510c0 3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [2]. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.4.3 Pick-up Roller [1] 4348fs2513c0 1. wipe the Paper Take-Up Roller [1] clean of dirt.4. [3] Maintenance 3.1 Separation Roller [2] [1] [1] 4348fs2509c0 1. ☞ 10 2. 2. ☞ See the procedures 1 to 2 in page 14 “Cleaning of Separation Roller. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2005 3. Remove the Tray3.” 3. 1. Remove the Right Door. Other Field Service Ver.0 Mar.4. 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the Separation Roller [3] clean of dirt.” 3.

2005 3.4 Vertical Transport Roller 3.4. Other 4348fs2519c0 15 Maintenance PC-402 [1] 1. .Field Service Ver. Open the Right Door.0 Mar. wipe the Vertical Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 1. 2.

Other Field Service Ver.0 Mar.3. 2005 Maintenance PC-402 Blank Page 16 . 1.

The power supply is properly grounded.0 Mar. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. parts. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field.Check to see if: 1. etc. or related part is dirty. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. ventilation. Correct paper is being used for printing. 7. 6.. the following advance checks must be made. slit glass. 4. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. PC Drum.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. Toner is not running out. and supplies used for printing (developer. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. A. etc. 3. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 2. high humidity. 9. 10. The Original Glass. 8. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. How to use the adjustment section 17 . Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 4. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. 2. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 5. 1. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. B. The density is properly selected. 5. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. direct sunlight. PC-402 Adjustment / Setting 4. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures..Field Service Ver. levelness of the installation site. 3. 2005 4. The units.

2. Touch the “Sensor Check” key. Call the Service Mode to the screen. <Procedure> 1.1 • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely.2 5. 3.1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.0 Mar.5. 1. 2005 5. PC-402 Sensor check Check procedure 5. Adjustment / Setting 4061F3E702DA 18 . and closure failure condition).2. Touch the “State Confirmation” key. Sensor check Field Service Ver. malfunction. 5. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed.

Sensor check list 5.Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar.2.2 A. Sensor check Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Not raised Not lowered Not at home Not at return position Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Symbol PC4-LCT PC13LCT PC12LCT PC11LCT PC1-LCT PC2-LCT PWB-E LCT PC3-LCT PC9-LCT PC7-LCT UN1-LCT PC14LCT PC6-LCT PC8-LCT PC10LCT Panel display Lift-Up Upper Lift-Up Lower Shift Tray Home Shift Tray Stop Part/Signal name Tray Upper Limit Sensor Tray Lower Position Sensor Shifter Home Position Sensor Shifter Return Position Sensor Raised Position Lowered Position At home Return position Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present malfunction ON At home Set Blocked Blocked Take-Up Vertical Transport Paper Empty Main Tray Empty Shift Tray Empty Lower Over Run Manual Button Down Division Board Position Cassette Open Shift Motor Pulse Elevator Motor Pulse Paper Feed Sensor LCT Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Empty Board Upper Paper Empty Sensor Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Lower Limit Sensor Paper Descent Key Shift Gate Home Position Sensor Tray Set Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor OFF Not at home Out of position Unblocked Unblocked 19 Adjustment / Setting operational PC-402 . 2005 5.

7.0 mm 6. • If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen.6.1 NOTE • Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. enter the correction value. perform adjustment according to the following procedure. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.1. 5. When the LPH Unit has been replaced.0 mm ± 1.1 Print Positioning: Side Edge 1. Touch “Machine” → “Printer Area. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range. 1. Touch “Print Positioning: Side Edge” → “3rd. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.0 Mar. 6. 2005 6. When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction.” 3. 2. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. Specification: 3.” Adjustment / Setting 4061F3E704DA 4. A 4348fs3509c0 20 . Call the Service Mode to the screen. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. PC-402 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position 6. Measure the width of printed reference line A.

Perform another test print and check the reference deviation. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range. 21 Adjustment / Setting 4348fs3512c0 PC-402 . 10. NOTE • Do not damage the passage surface of the Right Door. 4348fs3511c0 • If width A is greater than the specified value Turn screw D counterclockwise. Open the Right Door. 1.0 Mar. Mechanical adjustment 8. 12. 4348fs3513c0 11.Field Service Ver. 13. 2005 6. • If width A is smaller than the specified value Turn screw D clockwise. Press the Drawer Release button [1] and then slide out the drawer [2] from the Paper Feed Cabinet. Tighten the adjustment screw. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] and turn screw D [4] to make the adjustment. [2] [1] 4348fs3510c0 [3] [4] 9.

Mechanical adjustment 6. Touch “Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge” → “3rd. Touch “Machine” → “Printer Area. 2005 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge 1.” 3. Measure the width of printed reference line A.2 PC-402 Field Service Ver. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Specification: 3. 2.2 [1] Shifter movement timing belt adjustment 1. and remove two screws [2] fixing the Shift Tray.” 4061F3E706DA 4.0 mm ± 1. enter the correction value. Slide out the Drawer and remove it. 4348fs3501c0 [2] [2] 22 . Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range.1. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 7. NOTE • When reinstalling. Lift the Main Drawer [1].0 Mar. use caution because the wire of the Main Drawer comes off easily. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. A Adjustment / Setting 4348fs3509c0 6. 1.0 mm 6. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.6. 5.

4348fs3504c0 23 Adjustment / Setting . Remove two screws [3] and remove the Shifter [4]. [3] PC-402 [4] [3] 4348fs3502c0 [5] [6] 4.0 Mar. Mechanical adjustment 3. 7. After moving the Shifter. Push the tab [6] of the Shift Tray [5] as shown on the left and release the lock. 2005 6.Field Service Ver. 1. 4348fs3503c0 [7] 6. Loosen the screw [7] fixing the Tension Pulley Assy as shown to the left and move it in the direction of the arrow. tighten the fixing screw [7]. Remove the Shift Tray [5]. 5.

2005 PC-402 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 24 . 1.6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.0 Mar.

25 Troubleshooting . and close the door. No.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door.1 Misfeed display PC-402 [1] [1] 4061F4C701DA 7. misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. message. 2005 7.0 Mar. Jam Display Troubleshooting 7.Field Service Ver. Jam Display • When misfeed occurs. clear the sheet of paper misfeed. [1] Code 1501 2001 Misfeed location LCT Paper Take-Up section LCT Paper Vertical Transport Section Misfeed access location Right Door Action ☞ 28 7.1. 1.

2 PC-402 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] 4061F4C702DB [1] Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor [2] LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 PC2-LCT [3] Paper Feed Sensor PC1-LCT Troubleshooting 26 .0 Mar. 2005 7.7. 1. Jam Display Field Service Ver.

deformed. or damp? Replace paper. 1. 2005 7. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Correct or replace the defective actuator.0 Mar. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. deformed. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty.1 Solution PC-402 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs.Field Service Ver. wavy. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger.3. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. Set as necessary.3 7. 27 Troubleshooting . Jam Display 7. Replace paper. first perform the following initial check items.

sensor check M1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement Troubleshooting 3 4 5 6 28 .7. Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) or the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) is energized. The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC1-LCT has been blocked by a paper. a door or cover is opened and closed. The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. sensor check PC108 I/O. a door or cover is opened and closed. 1. LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical transport section misfeed detection The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) has been blocked by a paper. sensor check PC2-LCT I/O. The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC2-LCT has been blocked by a paper.0 Mar. LCT detection of paper remaining B. Action Relevant electrical parts Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-2 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-5 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical components) — PC-402 C-8 PC-402 C-7 C450 T to U-27 PC-402 C-8 — 1 2 Initial check items PC1-LCT I/O.2 PC-402 Field Service Ver.3. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. 2005 LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed A. Jam Display 7.

on detecting a malfunction. Trouble code 8. 4061F4E704DA 29 . 2005 8.1 Trouble code PC-402 Troubleshooting Trouble code display • The main unit's CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. 8. 1. gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel.0 Mar.Field Service Ver.

0 Mar. • The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation began. 2005 8.. C0210 LCT Lift Failure C0212 LCT Lock Release Failure Troubleshooting C0213 LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure • The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor (M3LCT) began with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) set to L. • The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower). • The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-down operation began. • The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) is energized after the lowering operation is finished.2 PC-402 Code C0001 C0209 Trouble code list Item LCT communication error LCT Elevator Motor Failure Description • Due to a software malfunction. • The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operating. the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed. • The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-down operation began. • The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up operation began. • The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up operation began.8. 30 . Trouble code Field Service Ver. etc. • The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) is blocked while the paper lift-down operating. 1. • The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-down operation began.

31 Troubleshooting PC-402 . C0215 LCT Shift Motor Failure 8.1 How to reset • Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. Trouble code • The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began (shift to the right).2. • The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). 1. • The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return operation began (shift to the left). • The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began (shift to the left).0 Mar.Field Service Ver. • The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return operation began (shift to the left). • The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor (M4-LCT) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower). 2005 Code C0214 Item LCT Shift Failure Description 8. • The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation began (shift to the right).

PWB-C1 LCT replacement 8.1 Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — — Location (Electrical components) — — 1 2 Turn the main unit off. Trouble code Field Service Ver. and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. 2005 8. PC10-LCT I/O.2 C0209: LCT Elevator Motor Failure Relevant electrical parts Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Interface Board (PWB-H LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.3. sensor check M5-LCT operation check PWB-H LCT replacement PWB-C1 LCT replacement — 2 — PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-5 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-6 to 7 — — — 3 4 5 PC-402 G to H-5 PC-402 G to H-6 — — Troubleshooting 6 32 . 1.8. and correct as necessary.3 PC-402 Solution C0001: LCT communication error Relevant electrical parts 8.3.0 Mar. then on again.

0 Mar.3 C0210: LCT Lift Failure 8. SL1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — PWB-C1 LCT PJ7C LCT-4 (ON) — 33 Troubleshooting PC-402 Relevant electrical parts . sensor check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C LCT-15 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-9 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-5 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-2 (ON) — 8. 2005 8. sensor check PC10-LCT I/O.4 C0212: LCT Lock Release Failure Relevant electrical parts Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — PC-402 C-8 — 1 2 3 Check the SL1-LCT connector for proper connection. sensor check PC7-LCT I/O.3. and correct as necessary. and correct as necessary. PC4-LCT I/O.Field Service Ver.3. Trouble code Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — PC-402 C-7 PC-402 G to H-3 PC-402 G to H-5 PC-402 G to H-5 to 6 — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check the sensor connectors for proper connection. 1. sensor check PC13-LCT I/O.

sensor check PC11-LCT I/O. and correct as necessary.5 PC-402 Field Service Ver. PC8-LCT I/O. and correct as necessary. 1. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. 2005 C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure Relevant electrical parts Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.3. PC14-LCT I/O.6 C0214: LCT Shift Failure Relevant electrical parts Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — PC-402 G to H-5 PC-402 G to H-4 PC-402 G to H-4 — 1 Check the sensor connectors for proper connection. sensor check PC12-LCT I/O. Trouble code 8.8. sensor check M3-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — 2 — PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-1 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-2 to 3 — — 3 4 5 PC-402 G to H-6 PC-402 G to H-6 — 8. and correct as necessary.3.0 Mar. sensor check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-3 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-7 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-8 (ON) — Troubleshooting 2 3 4 5 34 .

3. sensor check M4-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — 2 — PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-3 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-4 to 5 — — 3 4 5 PC-402 G to H-5 PC-402 G to H-6 — 35 Troubleshooting PC-402 Relevant electrical parts .0 Mar. 2005 8. and correct as necessary.7 C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure 8. Trouble code Shift Motor (M4-LCT) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. 1. and correct as necessary.Field Service Ver. PC8-LCT I/O.

0 Mar. 1.8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 2005 PC-402 Blank Page Troubleshooting 36 .

03 Ver. 1.0 .SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE FS-507 2005.

.

3. 2005/03 Date 1. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . 2. 2. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. Therefore. show 1 to the left of the revised section.0 has not been changed in Ver.After publication of this service manual. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised.0: The revision marks for Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0 Service manual Ver. • When a page revised in Ver. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. • To indicate clearly a section revised.0 only are shown with those for Ver. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. • When a page revised in Ver. 3.0 are left as they are.0 deleted. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0 has been changed in Ver. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3. 2.

.

.............................................. 12 Sensor check list..................................................2 2...........2 Adjustment of the solenoids............... 15 i .....................................3 Other ....................... Group offset ....... 5 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ...............................................2 1.......................................................2 5........... 6 Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover............ 2005 CONTENTS General 1..........4 1.........................................................3............................................................................................................ 5 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ........... 14 Check/Adjustment of the Punch Hole positions.......................................................2 2..............................................3............................3.......................................................................................................................... 3 Hole Punch ....................................................................3..............................7 1.................... 12 Sensor check list .............8 Stapling......................................... 8 Job Separator JS-601 (Option) ...3 2.............................2..................................................................... 1 Paper type ............................................................................................... 3 Operating environment ........................................................................... 1 Type .............................................................................. 14 Adjustment of the punch hole position ........................... 2 Sort and staple capacity ..2............. 2........................0 Mar.......3....1 2......................................................................................1 Mechanical adjustment .........................1 2............ 1.................... 6 Punch Unit ................1 4.....3.........................Field Service Ver.... 8 2.........................................................2 1....................................................5 1.......................................... 14 5. 1.....................2 5............ 2 Sort staple/Group staple .....2 How to use the adjustment section ................................................ 6 Disassembly/Assembly procedure................................................... 1 Sort...........1 4............................... 2 General Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance FS-507 1...................................................................................1.................................................... 1 Group..................................................................................................................................................................... 7 Stapling Unit.............................................................................6 1.... 3 Machine specifications...................................... 1 Functions ...........3 Product specification ................... 14 Checking the punch hole position ...... 5.......... 3 Maintenance 2................................3 1........... 4......................1 5..................... 4............................................................................................... 12 Check procedure .................................. Sort offset............................1....3.......................4 Adjustment/Setting 3.............. 12 Sensor check screen................. 12 4................................ 11 Sensor check........1 1................1 1.....

....................3........9 7...............................5 7...... 20 Primary paper output tray Exit ....Field Service Ver.........2.....................6 7................... 17 Board switch ..........4 7...... 27 Transport section misfeed................................... 15 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor .......................................................................................11 7................................... 1.....................2 FS-507 Adjustment of the Upper / Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN).....3........................5 ii ................. 22 Punch Hole 2/3 Switching.............2 8...........................3.3........1...............1 Maintenance 7. 7.................................................. 15 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2-FN) ............................2 7...............................3..... 21 Stapling Unit CD Movement............. 22 Punch Hole Operation ......3 5..3....................................................................... 20 Finisher Tray Exit .................................................3. 21 Aligning Plate Operation ......................................................................................3 7.....................................................1 8......3....3........... 16 5................1 5..........3.................. 25 Misfeed display..........................3.........................................12 7...3....3........13 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 8.......2............... 22 Elevator Tray Operation .........................3 Jam Display............................................ 19 Test mode setting procedure ......2....................................................3 5..........3................................ 15 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Timing Belt ......................... 16 Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3-FN) Timing Belt .....3..0 Mar...... 23 Sensor Test.. 29 Secondary Paper Output Tray Exit section misfeed...............................................................3 7.......................................................................................1 5.... 18 Test mode ..................1 8....................................................... 8.... 20 Shifting Operation .. 2005 5......... 30 8............................................................................................................ 23 General 6..................................................................................... 22 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing ................................................................................3 8.............. 19 Operation in each test mode operation ...........3.........3........................................3....................................8 7......7 Adjustment / Setting 7............2 5............10 7.... 26 Solution .....2 8.................................. 15 Adjustment of the 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL4) ................3......... 25 Misfeed display resetting procedure . 7.............2 7.................3.......................................... 21 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing ........... 15 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Timing Belt ........................................................................................................................ 28 Primary Paper Output Tray Exit section misfeed .......................................................................................3 5...............3..........................................1 7........... 25 Sensor layout.... 27 Initial check items ...........................................................................1 8.................................................4 Timing belt tension adjustment....................... 20 Third tray exit . 19 Test mode operations .............................. 20 Secondary paper output tray Exit ...........................................4 8......................... 29 Third Tray Exit section misfeed (JS-601) .

...................6 9................................. 2005 8........................... 36 C11B0: Stapling Unit Moving Motor drive malfunction............Field Service Ver..............2..........................................8 9............ 34 C1183: Elevator Motor drive malfunctions .. 9............... 33 C1182: Shift Motor drive malfunctions ........ 35 C11A2: Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction................. 36 C11B2: Stapling Motor drive malfunction 1...................3.10 iii ...................2 9........................5 9.......2 9..............9 9..............................3..... 1..........................................................................6 8.................... 37 C11C4: Hole Position Selector Motor drive malfunction ............... 37 C11C0: Punch Motor drive malfunction ....................3...................................... 32 Trouble code list.............................................1 9......................................3.........3 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed.. 34 C1190: CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction .............................................7 9.......3......... 30 Stapler section misfeed.......................3......3...................0 Mar............................4 9........3... 37 C11B3: Stapling Motor drive malfunction 2........................... 35 C11A1: Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction ..........3.....3.......... 31 Horizontal Transport section misfeed .....................................................................................1 9.................................................. 34 9........ 38 Solution...........1 9........ 32 Trouble code display .............................7 8..... 31 FS-507 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General Trouble code.... 32 How to reset ...........................................3..............................8 9...............................3........3 9..............................3.........................

Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting FS-507 Maintenance General iv Blank Page Field Service Ver. 2005 .0 Mar. 1.

Group staple Group Punch. Product specification . Group Offset. of Sheets to be Stapled - Paper Type Plain paper Thick paper OHP Film Translucent paper Envelope Label paper Letterhead 1 General FS-507 1. of Holes Modes 1. Sort Offset. Sweden Punch Kit (PK-506) 1. 2005 1.1 Group.0 Mar. Sort Staple. 1. Normal Punch Group. Sort Staple Punch No. Product specification General 1.3 Paper type • Remove the Finisher off the machine for feeding the long paper.5 × 8. Group Offset Punch.5 × 8. Inch: 2holes / 3holes.1 Type Installation Document Alignment Supplies Option Type Multi Staple Finisher Freestanding Center Staple Cartridge Job separator (JS-601).3.5R/ 5. Group offset Paper Size B5R/B5 to A3 Wide 5. Sort Offset Punch.2 Functions Metric: 4holes.Field Service Ver.5 to 13 × 19 Weight 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb 60 to 256 g/m2 16 to 68 lb 20 sheets Tray Capacity 250 sheets Exit Tray 1st paper exit tray No. Sort Punch. • The maximum loading capacity shown is for when loading the single type of paper (80g/ m2 ) 1. Sort.

A3.25 × 10. (Color Wise 3: 20 sheets x 20 sets) *3 : 35 sheets when using Color Copy 90 paper.5 lb. of Sheets to be Stapled - Paper Type Plain paper Thick paper General 1.5 × 11. B5R. A4R. 11× 17 B5. 1.000 sheets (A4R.5 × 11R.3. 24. 8. 8.5 × 11R or smaller). 8.25 to 55. 2005 Sort. 8. of Sheets to be Stapled 50 sheets *2.91 to 209 g/m2.5 × 11. adjust it in parallel or diagonal according to the length in CD direction.25 × 10. 8. Sort offset Paper Size B5R/B5 to A3 Wide 7. Product specification 1.5 lb Tray Capacity 3.5 × 11R or smaller).000 staples) Available (Nearly Empty: 20 remaining staples) Rear: Diagonal 45 ° 1 point Front: Diagonal 45 ° 1 point Rear: Diagonal 28 ° 1 point Front: Diagonal 28 ° 1 point Rear: Parallel 1 point Front: Parallel 1 point Side: Parallel 2 points A4R. A3 8. *1 1.5 to 13 ×19 Weight 60 to 209 g/m2 16 to 55.5R/ 7.75 2 .5 × 14 or larger) Exit Tray 2nd paper exit tray No.3 Sort staple/Group staple Paper Size B5R/B5 to A3 7.000 sheets 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb (A4R. B4 8. 8.5 Diagonal: CD direction 216 to 297 mm.2 FS-507 Field Service Ver.5 × 14 or larger) *1 : Cover Mode . *3 Paper Type Plain paper 3. 11× 17 A4.4 Stapling Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (5.25 × 8. 8.5 × 14.5 to 11 × 17 Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray 2nd paper exit tray No. A5R 8.5 × 14 A4.0 Mar.5 × 11R.3. 1. 8.500 sheets (B4.25 × 10.5 × 11.5R/ 7.1. B5. B4 Staple Filling Mode Staple Detection Stapling Position *1 Manual Staple None *1 : For 1 point stapling.25 × 10. Parallel: CD direction 182 to 216 mm. *2 : The number of Sheets to be Stapled is limited for high-density images. 1. 7.500 sheets (B4.

A.8 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit. of Holes Punch dust full detection 1.5 lb) Power Requirements Max. Inch: 2holes / 3holes non No. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 1. of Sets 100 sets 80 sets 60 sets 40 sets 60 sets 60 sets 60 sets No. Product specification 1. of Sheets 200 Sheets 400 Sheets 600 Sheets 800 Sheets 1800 Sheets 2400 Sheets 3000 Sheets 1. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 pages 3 to 5 pages 6 to 10 pages 11 to 20 pages 21 to 30 pages 31 to 40 pages 41 to 50 pages No.7 Machine specifications DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V (generated by Finisher) 63 W or less 538 mm (W) × 978 mm (H) × 637 mm (D) 21.5 inch (H) × 25 inch (D) 39.6 Hole Punch Metric: 4holes.0 Mar. Number of stacked paper No.2 kg (86. 3 . NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.5 Sort and staple capacity FS-507 General • (Reference: Actual value) Determined by number of Sets or number of Sheets based on number of bindings. 1.Field Service Ver. 2005 1.25 inch (W) × 38.

0 Mar. 1. 2005 General FS-507 Blank Page 4 . Product specification Field Service Ver.1.

Other Maintenance 2. set. Red Painted Screws NOTES • When the screws are removed. • Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.Field Service Ver. 5 Maintenance . the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions. Removal of PWBs NOTES • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. Other A. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items FS-507 2. Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment.0 Mar. B. Paint-locked Screws NOTE • Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted. or removed in the field. you should make adjustment. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. 1. be sure to ground your body. D. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. C. 2005 2. only one representative screw may be marked with red paint.

5.2. 2005 2. 1. 6 .0 Mar. Other Field Service Ver. page ☞ 6 ☞ 6 ☞ 6 ☞ 6 ☞ 7 ☞ 8 ☞ 8 2.1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover Maintenance [1] [1] [5] [4] [4] [2] [2] [3] 1.3 2. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Lower Front Cover. Remove four screws [4] and remove the Rear Cover. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Upper Front Cover.2 FS-507 No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Upper Cover Exterior Parts Upper Front Cover Lower Front Cover Rear Cover Unit Option Punch Unit Stapling Unit Job Separator JS-601 Part name Ref. 2. 4. Open the Upper Door [5] Remove four screws [1] and remove the Upper Cover.3. 3.

1. Remove two screws [2]. Removal Procedure Remove the upper cover.Field Service Ver. 2005 2. insert the Gear of the Finisher [4] into the Gear of the Punch Unit [5]. ☞ 2. Other Punch Unit A. and remove the Punch Unit [3]. FS-507 4683F2C501DA [2] 3. [5] 4683F2C503DA 7 Maintenance . 1. [2] [2] 4683F2C502DA [4] NOTE • When installing the Punch Unit.0 Mar.2 [1] 2. 6 Remove the connector [1].3.

[1] 4684fs2501c0 [4] 2.2. and remove the front cover of the Job Separator [2]. Other 2.3. Holding both sides of the cover [1]. 1.3 FS-507 Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [2]. 2005 Stapling Unit 1. Remove three claws [1]. Remove three claws [3]. lift the cover up and take it off. and remove the Stapling Unit [4] from the moving cradle.4 Job Separator JS-601 (Option) 1. [2] [3] 4684fs2502c0 Maintenance 2. unplug the connector [3]. [4] [3] 4683F2C505DA 8 .0 Mar. [1] [1] [2] 4683F2C504DA [3] 2.3. and remove the rear cover of the Job Separator [4].

Other 3. 1.Field Service Ver. 2005 [5] 2. Remove two screws [5] and the connector [6]. [6] [7] Maintenance 4683F2C506DA 9 FS-507 .0 Mar. and remove the Job Separator [7].

0 Mar. 1. 2005 Maintenance FS-507 Blank Page 10 . Other Field Service Ver.2.

B. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. etc. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 3.. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. 7. Correct paper is being used for printing. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. 6. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by boldface. direct sunlight. The units. 2005 3. The Original Glass. How to use the adjustment section 11 . 6. 5. parts. 4. 2. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot.. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field.Check to see if: 1. etc. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g. 5. 10. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature.0 Mar. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. ventilation. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. levelness of the installation site.Field Service Ver. or related part is dirty. slit glass. The power supply is properly grounded. high humidity. PC Drum. A. FS-507 Adjustment / Setting 3.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. the following advance checks must be made. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 3. 4. 2. Toner is not running out. 9. 8. The density is properly selected. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. 1. and supplies used for printing (developer.

☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. 2005 4. Sensor monitor 3 Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PC1-FN PC19-FN PC3-FN PC4-FN PC2-FN Exit (Non-sort1) Exit (Non-sort3) Exit (Finisher) Upper Paper Pass Transport Lower 1st Tray Exit Sensor Job Tray Exit Sensor Storage Sensor Upper Entrance Sensor Lower Entrance Sensor Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present 0 Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name 12 .2. 3.2 Sensor check list A. Adjustment / Setting 4683F3E502DA 4. malfunction. FS-507 Sensor check Check procedure 4. 2.2. and closure failure condition). 1. Touch the “State Confirmation” key.1 • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Touch the “Sensor Check” key. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed.4. Sensor check Field Service Ver. Call the Service Mode to the screen.1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit. <Procedure> 1.2 4. 4.0 Mar.

) Empty (Elev. Sensor check Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Unblocked Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Symbol PC6-FN PC20-FN PC7-FN PC5-FN PWB-D FN PC8-FN PC9-FN PC14-FN PC12-FN PC13-FN Panel display Full (Non-sort1) Full (Non-sort3) Full (Elev.) Home (CD-Align) Staple Stanby Home (Store roller) Home (Exit roller) Punch2/3 Position SW Punch Speed Part/Signal name 1st Tray Full Sensor job Tray Full Sensor Elevator Tray Full Sensor Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ Elevator Tray Paper Sensor CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Paper present Blocked Paper present Paper present Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked PC11-FN S2-FN S3-FN PC10-FN Shift Speed Elevate Tray Raised/ Lowered Home (Shift) Stapler 1 Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch Shift Home Position Sensor Unblocked ON Blocked Blocked OFF - Home Staple Empty Self Priming Stapler 2 Staple Home 1 Staple Empty 1 Staple Self Priming 1 Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked - Home Staple Empty Self Priming Staple Home 2 Staple Empty 2 Staple Self Priming 2 Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked 13 Adjustment / Setting Unblocked FS-507 . 2005 4.0 Mar. Tray) Empty (Finisher) Surface (Elev.Field Service Ver. 1.

3. Select Punch “2-Hole. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.2 Adjustment of the punch hole position [2] [3] [1] 1. Move the green handle [3] back and forth to adjust the punch holes. 2005 5. adjust the punch hole position.” 5. Load the Tray 1 with A4 paper. If the specified range is not met. Make another sheet of sample copy [1] to check that the punch holes are aligned. ☞ 14 4683F3C503DA 14 . Specifications: 0 ± 2 mm 6.1 4683F3E507DA [1] 4683F3C503DA 4. 2. Close the upper cover [1]. Fold the sample copy fed out of the machine in half and check that the punch holes are aligned with each other. and press the Start key. 4. Tighten the set screw [2].0 Mar.5. Place the A4 original (Blank paper acceptable) on the original tray. 3.1. Adjustment / Setting 5. Open the upper cover [1]. 2.1.1 5. and loosen the set screw for the Punch Hole Guide Plate [2]. FS-507 Mechanical adjustment Check/Adjustment of the Punch Hole positions Checking the punch hole position 1. 1. 4683F3C504DA [1] 5. Touch “Finishing” on Basic Screen.

At this time.1 [2] Timing belt tension adjustment Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Timing Belt [3] 1. 2.3 Adjustment of the 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL4) 1. Move the mounting bracket [2] and tighten the screw [1] so that the center of the screw [1] on the upper right side is located at the marked position [3] of the mounting bracket [2].3 5. 2. [2] [1] 4684fs2504c0 5.2 5.Field Service Ver. tighten the screw [1]. Move the solenoid [2] up and down and lower the lever [3] downward.3. tighten the screw [1]. when dimension B measures 3. [1] 4684fs2505c0 [1] 15 . 2. Move the solenoid [2] to the right or left and. 2005 5. Loosen the screw [1] that secures the solenoid in position.0 Mar. FS-507 Adjustment / Setting Adjustment of the Upper / Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) [3] [1] [2] 4684fs2503c0 5. tighten the screw [1]. when dimension C measures 4.1 Adjustment of the solenoids 1. 1. Mechanical adjustment 5. Then. [2] [1] 4683F3C506DA 5.0 mm. 2. Loosen two screws [1].2.2.5 mm or less. Move the solenoid [2] to the right or left and.6 mm. Loosen the screw [1] that secures the solenoid in position. Loosen the screw [1] that secures the solenoid in position.2 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2-FN) 1.2. find a position at which the clearance at portion A becomes 0.

1. 2. Tighten three screws [1] so that the distance D between the upper end face of the head of screws [1] and the upper end face of the slot in the mounting bracket [2] measures about 0. Move the mounting bracket [2] and. when the belt deflects 2 mm at C. tighten two screws [1].3 Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3-FN) Timing Belt [1] [1] 1. 2. 2005 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Timing Belt 1.5 mm.3. Mechanical adjustment 5. Loosen two screws [1].3. [1] [1] 4684fs2506c0 5.5.2 FS-507 [2] Field Service Ver. Loosen three screws [1]. [1] [2] 4684fs2507c0 Adjustment / Setting 16 .0 Mar.

slowly turn VR1 clockwise and stop turning it as soon as the LED turns OFF. If it stays ON.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. 1. 4. Mechanical adjustment 5. . 3. Using a sheet of paper. Set up the sensor test mode. Check that LED4 on PWB-A FN turns OFF. block the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C FN).4 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor FS-507 [1] [2] 4684fs2509c0 17 Adjustment / Setting 1. 2. 2005 5. Turn VR1 on PWB-A FN fully counterclockwise.

6. Used to run the Test Mode operation. FS-507 Board switch [4] [1] [2] [3] Symbol [1] S1 S2 S3 LED1 to 4 Description Used to run the Test Mode operation.0 Mar. 1. Board switch Field Service Ver. DIP switch used to set the Test Mode operation. 2005 6. Turn ON or OFF. 4684fs4503c0 Adjustment / Setting [2] [3] [4] 18 . or blink to indicate a specific condition during Test Mode operations.

Turn ON the Main Power Switch of the main unit. After the replacement procedure has been completed.2 Test mode operations Test mode operation DIP Switch (S3) 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 2 3 4 1 ● ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ ● ❍ ● ❍ ● ❍ 2 ❍ ● ❍ ● ❍ ● ● ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ LED 3 ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● Primary paper output tray exit Secondary paper output tray exit Third tray exit Finisher Tray exit Shifting operation Aligning Plate operation Stapling Unit CD movement Exit Roller/Rolls spacing Storage Roller/Rolls spacing Elevator Tray operation Punch Operation Punch Hole 2/3 Switching Sensor test Indicates sensor state ●:Blinking ❍:OFF NOTE • Whenever the Control Board (PWB-A FN) is to be replaced. 7.Field Service Ver. 2005 7. Test mode 7. <Resetting Procedure> • Flip all keys of the DIP switch to their respective initial positions and turn OFF. This sets the Finisher into the corresponding Test Mode operation. take note of the initial positions of all keys of the DIP switch. be sure to flip all keys of the DIP switch on the new Control Board (PWB-A FN) to their respective initial positions. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit. 19 Adjustment / Setting . then ON. Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF position as necessary. 2.) 3.0 Mar. 1. (See Table below.1 Test mode FS-507 4 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ❍ Test mode setting procedure <Setting Procedure> 1. 4. the Main Power Switch of the main unit. 7.

Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN). Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) Motors and solenoids: Deenergized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN).2 Secondary paper output tray Exit S1-FN:ON Motors: Energized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN). 1.4 Finisher Tray Exit S1-FN:ON Motors and solenoids: Energized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN).3. Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN).7. 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN) S2-FN:ON 7. Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN).1 Motors and solenoids: Energized Entrance Motor (M1-FN). Exit Motor (M3-FN).3 FS-507 Operation in each test mode operation Primary paper output tray Exit S1-FN:ON 7. Upper/ Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN).3. Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN). 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL4) Motors and solenoids: Deenergized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN). Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN). Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) S2-FN:OFF 20 .0 Mar. Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN). 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN). Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN). 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL4) S2-FN:ON 7. Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN). Exit Motor (M3-FN). Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN). Exit Motor(M3-FN) Motors: Deenergized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN). Upper/ Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN). Test mode Field Service Ver. Exit Motor (M3-FN) S2-FN:OFF 7. Upper/ Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN).3.3 Adjustment / Setting Third tray exit S1-FN:ON Motors and solenoids: Energized Entrance Motor (M1-FN). 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN) Motors and solenoids: Deenergized (Entrance Motor (M1-FN). 2005 7.3. Upper/ Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN). Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN). Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN). 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN).

3. 7. 2005 7.3. Test mode The Elevator Tray shifts to the front. 1. S2-FN:ON The Elevator Tray shifts to the rear.6 Aligning Plate Operation S1-FN:ON At the home position S1-FN:ON At a position to align A4 paper S1-FN:ON At a position to align Letter paper S1-FN:ON At a position to align A4R paper S1-FN:ON At a position to align Letter paper Adjustment / Setting 7.0 Mar.5 Shifting Operation S1-FN:ON 7.Field Service Ver.3.7 Stapling Unit CD Movement S1-FN:ON At home position S1-FN:ON At a position for A4 corner stapling S1-FN:ON At home position S1-FN:ON At a position for A4R corner stapling 21 FS-507 .

7.3.3. Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is unblocked.0 Mar.9 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing S1-FN:ON Pressed S2-FN:ON Separated 7. Test mode 7.10 Elevator Tray Operation S1-FN:ON Goes up until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is blocked.3.11 Punch Hole Operation S1-FN:ON Punch Motor (M11-FN) drive S1-FN:ON Punch Clutch ON S2-FN:ON Punch Motor (M11-FN) halt 22 . 2005 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing S1-FN:ON Pressed S2-FN:ON Separated 7.3. Adjustment / Setting S2-FN:ON 7.8 FS-507 Field Service Ver. 1.

1.12 Punch Hole 2/3 Switching 7. 2005 7. Test mode Switch to 2 holes S2-FN:ON Switch to 3 holes 7.0 Mar.3.13 Sensor Test Sensor State Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked LED 1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ● 2 ❍ ❍ ● ❍ 3 ❍ ● ❍ ❍ 4 ● ❍ ❍ ❍ Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) Lower Entrance Sensor(PC2-FN) Upper Entrance Sensor(PC4-FN) ●:ON ❍:OFF 23 Adjustment / Setting FS-507 S1-FN:ON .3.Field Service Ver.

Test mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar.7. 2005 FS-507 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 24 .

2005 8. message.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door. 1. Jam Display Troubleshooting 8.1. misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. [7] [2]~[6] No. clear the sheet of paper misfeed. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Code 7403 7401 7402 7404 7405 7406 7402 Misfeed location Horizontal Transport section Transport section Primary Paper Output Tray Exit section Paper Stack Exit section Stapler section Third Tray Exit section (JS-601) Misfeed access location Action Horizontal Transport section ☞ 31 Cover Front Door Front Door Front Door Front Door Secondary Paper Output Tray Exit section Front Door ☞ ☞ ☞ ☞ 28 29 30 30 ☞ 31 Troubleshooting Job separator Upper Cover ☞ 29 8. Jam Display • When misfeed occurs.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. and close the door. 25 .1 Misfeed display FS-507 [1] 4683F4C501DA 8.

1.2 FS-507 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] 4684fs4502c0 [1] Job Tray Exit Sensor [2] 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC19-FN PC1-FN PC4-FN PC2-FN PC6-HO [6] [7] [8] Paper Sensor Storage Sensor Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC1-HO PC3-FN PC5-FN Troubleshooting [3] Upper Entrance Sensor [4] Lower Entrance Sensor [5] Turnover Empty Sensor 26 .8. 2005 8. Jam Display Field Service Ver.0 Mar.

Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. deformed.0 Mar. or damp? Replace paper. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty.3 8. wavy. deformed. 2005 8. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Correct or replace the defective actuator.3. Set as necessary. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. 27 Troubleshooting . or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. first perform the following initial check items. 1. Jam Display 8. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. Replace paper.Field Service Ver.1 Solution FS-507 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled.

sensor check PC2-FN I/O. The Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit. sensor check PC3-FN I/O. Transport section misfeed detection B. Action Relevant electrical parts Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) Entrance Motor (M1-FN) Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN PJ14A-6 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ19A-6 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ15A-4 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ20A-9 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ19A-8 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ20A-3 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ9A-1 to 4 PWB-A FN PJ9A-5 to 8 PWB-A FN PJ9A-9 to 12 — Location (Electrical components) — FS-507 B-4 FS-507 B-8 FS-507 B-5 FS-507 H-6 FS-507 B-8 FS-507 H-7 FS-507 B-2 FS-507 B-2 FS-507 B-2 — 1 2 Initial check items PC19-FN I/O. sensor check PC1-FN I/O. sensor check PC1-HO I/O. 2005 Transport section misfeed A. Jam Display 8.3. Detection timing Type Description The 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit. The Job tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit. sensor check PC4-FN I/O. sensor check M1-FN operation check M4-FN operation check M2-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement Troubleshooting 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 28 .8. The Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit. 1.2 FS-507 Field Service Ver.0 Mar.

Detection timing Type Description Primary paper outThe 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a put tray exit section given period of time after it has been blocked.3. Jam Display A. sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 29 Troubleshooting FS-507 . 2005 8.3 Primary Paper Output Tray Exit section misfeed 8.4 Third Tray Exit section misfeed (JS-601) A.0 Mar.3. Action Relevant electrical parts Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN PJ14A-6 (ON) — Location (Electrical components) — FS-507 B-4 — 1 2 3 Initial check items PC19-FN I/O. 1. sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 8. tion (JS-601) B. Detection timing Type Description Third tray exit secThe Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a tion misfeed detecgiven period of time after it has been blocked. misfeed detection B. Action Relevant electrical parts 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN PJ19A-6 (ON) — Location (Electrical components) — FS-507 B-8 — 1 2 3 Initial check items PC1-FN I/O.Field Service Ver.

1. sensor check M3-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement 8.0 Mar.3.period of time after it has been blocked. Action Relevant electrical parts Troubleshooting Exit Motor (M3-FN) Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN PJ25A-2 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ8A-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical components) — FS-507 H-3 FS-507 B-1 — 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC5-FN I/O.5 FS-507 Field Service Ver.3. Detection timing Type Description Secondary paper output tray exit sec.6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Paper stack exit section misfeed detection Description The Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) remains activated when a copy stack. sensor check M3-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement 30 . is fed out. tion B. B. 2005 Secondary Paper Output Tray Exit section misfeed A. which has been stapled together. Action Relevant electrical parts Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN PJ20A-3 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ8A-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical components) — FS-507 H-7 FS-507 B-1 — 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC3-FN I/O.The Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given tion misfeed detec.8. Jam Display 8.

1.3. Horizontal Transport section misfeed detection B.The Stapler does not return to its home position within a given period of time after feed detection the forward drive of the Stapler has been started.0 Mar.3. sensor check PC6-HO I/O. 2005 8.7 Stapler section misfeed 8. The Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO). Detection timing Type Description The Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has unblocked the Paper Exit Sensor of the main unit. sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 31 Troubleshooting FS-507 . sensor check M6-FN operation check Stapling Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement 8. B. Action Relevant electrical parts Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — — PWB-A FN PJ15A-4 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ15A-12 (ON) — Location (Electrical components) — — FS-507 B-5 FS-507 B-6 — 1 2 3 4 5 Initial check items Horizontal Transport section gear check PC1-HO I/O.8 Horizontal Transport section misfeed A.Field Service Ver. Action Relevant electrical parts Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN PJ22A-3 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ10A-1 to 4 — — Location (Electrical components) — FS-507 H-5 FS-507 B-3 — — 1 2 3 4 5 Initial check items PC14-FN I/O. Jam Display A. Detection timing Type Description Stapler section mis.

2 Code C1182 Trouble code list Item Shift Motor drive malfunctions Description • The Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8-FN has been energized (to start returning the Elevator Tray to its home position). • The Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M12-FN has been energized (to start spacing/pressure sequence).9. 2005 9. gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel. on detecting a malfunction. Trouble code Field Service Ver.1 • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that.0 Mar. • The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M13-FN has been energized (to start spacing/pressure sequence). C1190 C11A1 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction C11A2 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction 32 . 4683F4E504DA 9. FS-507 Trouble code Trouble code display 9. 1. • The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) or Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN) is actuated after M7-FN has been energized. • The Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8-FN has been energized (to start moving the Elevator Tray for job offset). C1183 Troubleshooting Elevator Motor drive malfunctions • The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is not activated even after the lapse of a given period of time after M7-FN has been energized (to start raising the Elevator Tray). CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction • The CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M5-FN has been energized (to return the Aligning Plate to its home position).

0 Mar.A. 33 Troubleshooting FS-507 . and Canada) 9. • The Punch Speed Sensor (PC15-FN) does not go from LOW to HIGH.1 How to reset • Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. C11B2 Stapling Motor drive malfunction 1 Stapling Motor drive malfunction 2 Punch Motor drive malfunction C11B3 C11C0 C11C4 Hole Position Selector Motor drive malfunction (U.S. Trouble code • The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M6-FN has been energized (to return the Stapling Unit to its home position). or vice versa. 2005 Code C11B0 Item Stapling Unit Moving Motor drive malfunction Description 9. 1. even after the lapse of a given period of time after M11-FN has been energized.2. • Stapling Motor 1 is not deenergized even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been energized (to start a stapling sequence).Field Service Ver. • Stapling Motor 2 is not deenergized even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been energized (to start a stapling sequence). • The Hole Punch Position Switch (S4) is not actuated or deactuated even after the lapse of a given period of time after M14 has been energized.

Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling.1 Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN) Shift Motor (M8-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. sensor check M8-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 6 — PWB-A FN PJ25A-12 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ25A-14 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ5A-3 to 4 — — FS-507 H-2 FS-507 H-2 FS-507 H-7 — 9. and correct as necessary. PWB-D FN I/O. sensor check PC11-FN I/O. and correct as necessary.0 Mar.3 FS-507 Solution C1182: Shift Motor drive malfunctions Relevant electrical parts 9.3. PC10-FN I/O. 2005 9. 1.2 C1183: Elevator Motor drive malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN) Elevator Motor (M7-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — Troubleshooting 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.3. sensor check S2-FN operation check S3-FN operation check M7-FN operation check PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 6 7 — PWB-A FN PJ21A PWB-A FN PJ4A-1 PWB-A FN PJ4A-4 PWB-A FN PJ5A-1 to 2 — — FS-507 G to H-6 FS-507 H-8 FS-507 H-8 FS-507 H-7 — 34 . and correct as necessary. and correct as necessary.9. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. Trouble code Field Service Ver.

and correct as necessary.3.3. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 — PWB-A FN PJ25A-6 (ON) — FS-507 H-3 4 PWB-A FN PJ11A-5 to 8 FS-507 B-3 5 — — 9. Trouble code CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. 2005 9. 1. and correct as necessary.0 Mar.Field Service Ver.3 C1190: CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction 9. and turn ON the Main Power Switch. sensor check Turn OFF the Main Power Switch. PC9-FN I/O. and correct as necessary. sensor check M13-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. — FS-507 Relevant electrical parts .4 C11A1: Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN) Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 2 3 4 5 Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. PWB-A FN replacement — PWB-A FN PJ19A-15 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ16A-1 to 2 — — FS-507 B-9 FS-507 B-6 — 35 Troubleshooting 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. and correct as necessary. Operation check of the CD aligning Motor (M5-FN) at this time. move the Aligning Plate out of its home position. PC13-FN I/O.

0 Mar. and correct as necessary. Operation check of the Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) at this time. 2005 C11A2: Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. sensor check Turn OFF the Main Power Switch. PC14-FN I/O. PC12-FN I/O. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. and correct as necessary.5 FS-507 Field Service Ver. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN PJ20A-6 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ8A-5 to 6 — — FS-507 H-6 FS-507 B-2 — 9.6 C11B0: Stapling Unit Moving Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. and correct as necessary. and correct as necessary. sensor check M12-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON.3. move the Stapling Unit out of its home position. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling.3. Trouble code 9. PWB-A FN replacement — Troubleshooting 2 3 — PWB-A FN PJ22A-3 (ON) — FS-507 H-5 4 PWB-A FN PJ10A-1 to 4 FS-507 B-3 5 — — 36 . 1.9. and turn ON the Main Power Switch.

Check the connector of Stapling motor for proper drive coupling. — 2 — — 9. and correct as necessary. PC15-FN I/O. and correct as necessary. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN PJ13A-8 (ON) PWB-A FN PJ6A-1 to 2 — — FS-507 H-1 FS-507 H-2 — 37 Troubleshooting FS-507 WIRING DIAGRAM . sensor check M11-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. and correct as necessary. and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. and correct as necessary.3. and correct as necessary. Check the connector of Stapling motor for proper drive coupling.0 Mar.Field Service Ver.3. Trouble code Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the Stapling motor connectors for proper connection.9 C11C0: Punch Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Punch Speed Sensor (PC15-FN) Punch Motor (M11-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. 1. 2005 9. — 2 — — 9.8 C11B3: Stapling Motor drive malfunction 2 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the Stapling motor connectors for proper connection.7 C11B2: Stapling Motor drive malfunction 1 9.3.

3. and correct as necessary.10 FS-507 Field Service Ver. Punch Unit replacement PWB-A FN replacement — — — Troubleshooting 38 .9. Trouble code 9. 2005 C11C4: Hole Position Selector Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Punch Unit Hole Punch Position Switch (S4) Hole Position Selector Motor (M14) Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — — — 1 2 3 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. 1.0 Mar.

0 .03 Ver. 1.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE FS-603 2005.

.

A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. • When a page revised in Ver. 2. show 1 to the left of the revised section.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.0 has been changed in Ver. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver.After publication of this service manual. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. • When a page revised in Ver. • To indicate clearly a section revised. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. Therefore. 2005/03 Date 1. 3.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. 2.0 deleted.0 Service manual Ver.0 are left as they are. 3. 2.

.

.......3........................7 2............. 7 Exit Tray .................................................... 9 Side Guide ....................................................3.....................................................................................................3........ 7 Rear Cover............ 8 Upper Cover............. 6 Disassembly/Assembly procedure.................... 2 No................................................................................... 10 Stapler............. Sort offset.... 3 Machine specifications................3.................................................3...... 11 Finisher Tray......................5 1.... 11 Paddle Section ...............................................1 2...............3.............. Group offset ..............................3..............................................4 1.....17 i ...................10 2.......................................................................................................................................................................................2 1............................................4 1.................3 2....................................................3........................................................................ 2005 CONTENTS General 1....................................................................................... 1 Sort staple..................................................................3............. 17 Transport Roller............3........................................................................................ 18 2............................ 3 Operating environment ................................................................................................... 14 Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt ............................................................................6 2....................3 Other ...... 12 Exit Roller (Upper) .............................................. 1......................................................................................... 2.......3..........3......................3......................... 2 General Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance FS-603 1...3..................................... 5 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ........................... 3 Maintenance 2.... 1 Functions .....11 2... 1 Group............. 2 Center Staple & Fold. 1 Type ................................................................ 1 Sort..............................14 2....................................7 Stapling........................................................3.......................4 2................. 7 Upper Door ................................................................................................. 1 Paper type ......... 10 Saddle Section.......................13 2..........9 2........................3............................................. 14 Paddle .3.. 5 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) .....3................................................ 9 Middle Transport Unit ...2 2.............................3 1.........................1 1.....................................................................................................................15 2.................................... 7 Front Cover ....0 Mar............................16 2.........................................2 2...............Field Service Ver......3............ 8 Finisher Tray Upper Cover . 15 Stapler/Folding Drive Unit .....................................................1 2...........................3 Product specification . 1............................. of sheets to be stapled (sort staple) ......3..............2 1......3.................................................1 1................................................................6 1..............................12 2................................................................................................................................8 2.....5 2..............................

...............................1...................................................................................................................................... 21 Punch Control Board .................................................................................................................................. 26 Adjustment procedure...3.................4............2 6.......20 2.........................1 Troubleshooting 6...............................1.............. 30 Adjustment of the Folding Position ............21 2.............................................. 32 Adjustment procedure......... 4.......................... 24 Sensor check screen ............................2 6.................................................................... 24 Sensor check list ........................Field Service Ver....... 39 Board switch ....................................................... 26 Adjustment procedure............ 36 Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment ................3...............................................................................1 5...3............................. 22 Middle Transport Motor .....................................3............22 2.............1 5..........................2 5.... 24 Check procedure ....... 26 Adjustment of the stapling position..... 1....2 6.........................................................1 PWB-B PK (Punch Control Board) .............. 36 Stapler Phase Adjustment.............................. 47 Punch center position adjustment......................................................................................2 How to use the adjustment section ...........2..........2........................................ 22 2..18 2...... 43 Adjustment of the sensor output .................................................................. 40 Adjustment of the folding positions ............25 General Adjustment/Setting 3...........................3................................................3......................................... 2005 2....................... 42 Adjustment of the Alignment Plate position ...........................................................................................1 5............1.3............. 5.............1 4..............................................................................2....... 28 Adjustment of height and inclination....................1 Adjustment / Setting 5............... 23 Sensor check .24 2...................... 20 Finisher Control Board....................0 Mar.4 5........................... 41 Adjustment of the center stapling position ........5 5............................................................................ 45 ii .......................................... 24 Mechanical adjustment ....................................3 5........ 28 Adjustment of the folding position.... 4...................5.........6 6.....................3....................................................... 22 Punch Motor .............................................2......................................................................................... 19 Punch Unit ............................................................................2....................................... 21 Transport Motor Unit ..................4 5.................2..................................................1 6............................... 46 Registration of the number of punch holes .....................1.................... 40 PWB-A FN (Finisher Control Board) ...3 6........... 46 Procedure after replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002)....19 FS-603 Middle Transport Roller........... 22 Side Registration Motor ............................................................ 32 Adjustment procedure...........................3 6..... 47 6........ 5..............1 Maintenance 4..................................................23 2............................1 6.............

................ 60 8...............................................................................Field Service Ver... 51 7.. 68 Solution..........3.................................................... 62 C11A4: Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions....3 8....3........................3........2 7..... 59 C1180: Transport System Drive malfunctions..6 8...........................12 8.....................................3......3......... 54 Folding position section misfeed ..................................................................... 56 Trouble code list...........................................1 8................13 iii ...... 60 C1183: Elevate Mechanism malfunctions ..................................... Jam Display......................................... 8.................................................3................................3............................ 60 C1181: Paddle Motor malfunctions ....1 8.....5 8............................................................................................................................................1.......7 8........................................................................................................................................................................3.....................................................3........... 2005 Troubleshooting 7..8 8. 66 C11C3: Punch Motor malfunctions .........3......11 8............. 67 C1401: Backup RAM malfunction .........2 8.......................................................3.... 61 C1193: Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions .......3..2....3............3..........................3................................ 65 C11C2: Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions .........................................3.........................................................................................10 8......3 Trouble code.............................................. 51 Sensor layout .................................................... 56 Trouble code display .. 53 Horizontal Transport section misfeed ...........................9 8.................. 52 Solution............................................................... 53 Initial check items.......3 7...1 7..............1 7.................1 7..................................1 8................ 51 Misfeed display resetting procedure ................. 66 C11C5: Punch Sensor malfunctions ....................... 63 C11B4: Stapler/Folding Motor malfunctions..... 53 Transport section misfeed ..................... 61 C1192: Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions............ 54 Stapler section misfeed...................5 8.....................................2 8..................................... 62 C11B1: Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions... 56 How to reset ........ 55 General Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance FS-603 7.......3 Misfeed display ...........................................................................3...............0 Mar...........2 7............................. 1............................................4 8..............................4 7.................3..... 63 C11C1: Punch Control Board malfunctions ................

0 Mar. 1.Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting FS-603 Maintenance General iv Blank Page Field Service Ver. 2005 .

Field Service Ver.5×11R 8. of Sheets to be Stapled - Controlled by whichever reached earlier 1 General FS-603 1.1 Type Installation Document Alignment Supplies Type Multi Staple Finisher with Saddle (Booklet) Freestanding Center Staple Cartridge 1. Product specification .5 × 8.2 Sort. of Sheets Height Paper Type Plain Paper Tray Capacity A4R / B4/ 8.3 Paper type • Remove the finisher off the machine for feeding the long paper.25 × 18 Envelop OHP Film Label Paper Thick Paper Weight 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb No.3.1 Group. Product specification General 1. Group offset Paper Size B5R/B5 to A3 wide 5.5×14 or or smaller larger 1000 150 mm Exit Tray 1st paper exit tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled - 500 75 mm 60 to 256 g/m2 16 to 68 lb 20 sheet *1: Controlled by whichever reached earlier 1.0 Mar. Sort offset Paper Size A5. Sort.5 to 12.3. of Sheet Height Plain Paper Tray Capacity *1 A4R / B4/ 8.5 × 11 to 11 × 17 Weight 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb No.5 × 11R/ 8. Group Offset Punch. Sort Offset. Sort Staple Center Staple & Fold Group Punch. Sort Punch. 2005 1. Sort Staple Punch 1.5R/ 5.5 × 8.5×11R 8.5×14 or or smaller larger 1000 150 mm 500 75 mm Exit Tray 1st paper exit tray No.2 Modes Functions Normal Punch (Option) Group. Group Offset. Sort Offset Punch. • The maximum loading capacity shown is for when loading the single type of paper (80g/ m2 ) 1.B5R/B5 to A3 8. 1.

5×11R 8. 40 pages) Paper Type Plain Paper 1.5 × 11 to 11×17 Weight Normal Mode 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb Tray Capacity A4R / B4/ 8.5× 11 to 11 × 17 Staple Filling Mode Staple Detection Stapling Position Front: Parallel 1 point Side: Parallel 2 points Center: Parallel 2 points Manual Staple Folding Mode Folding Position None Roller Pressure Folding Center of Paper 2 . (Color Wise: 20 sheets x 20 sets) 1. of Sheets Height No.5× 11R / 8. 60 pages) Other copy 2 to 10 sheets (Max.5× 8.3. of Sheets to be Stapled Normal Mode *1 A4R/ B4/ 8. 1. Product specification 1.4 Center Staple & Fold Paper Size A4R.5 × 11R/ 8. A3 8.5×14 11R or or larger smaller 2 to 50 2 to 25 1st paper exit tray General Cover Mode Controlled by whichever 60 to 209 reached earlier g/m2 16 to 55.1.5×14 or or smaller larger No. 2005 Sort staple Paper Size B5R/B5 to A3 8. of Sets 1000 150 mm 30 500 75 mm 30 Paper Type Plain Paper Cardboard Exit Tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled Black copy 2 to 15 sheets (Max.5 lb * The number of Sheets to be Stapled is limited for high-density images. of Sheets to be Stapled: 2 to 5 sheets) Exit Tray 2nd paper exit tray No. of Sheets to be Stapled: 6 to 15 sheets) 20 sets (No. B4.5 × 11R/ 11 × 17 Weight 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb Tray Capacity 10 sets (No.4 Stapling Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (5000 staples) Available (Nearly Empty: 40 remaining staples) Rear: Parallel 1 point B5R/B5 to A3.3.0 Mar. 8.3 FS-603 Field Service Ver.

3 General . Product specification 1. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 3 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 20 21 to 25 No. of Sets Rear: Parallel 100 80 60 30 30 Center: Parallel 40 40 40 30 30 30 sets or 1000 sheets B. of Sets Rear: Parallel 100 80 40 Center: Parallel 50 40 40 30 sets or 1000 sheets 1. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. 2005 1. 8.5 No. of sheets to be stapled (sort staple) FS-603 Front: Parallel 40 40 40 30 30 Front: Parallel 50 40 40 A.0 Mar.75 inch (H) × 23.6 kg (91. B4.75 lb) 1.6 Machine specifications DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V (generated by Finisher) Power Requirements Max.75 inch (W) × 36.75 inch (D) 41.7 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit. 8. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 65 W or less 601 mm (W) × 933 mm (H) × 603 mm (D) 23.Field Service Ver. 1.5× 11R or smaller No.5× 14 or larger No. A4R. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 3 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 20 21 to 30 31 to 50 No.

Product specification Field Service Ver. 2005 General FS-603 Blank Page 4 .1. 1.0 Mar.

or removed in the field. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. 5 Maintenance . the red paint is coated on the points where readjustment is required. Other Maintenance 2. 2005 2. Removal of PWBs NOTES • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. only one representative screw may be marked with red paint.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items FS-603 2. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. set. D.0 Mar. C. Paint-locked Screws NOTE • Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted. Red Painted Screws NOTES • When the screws are removed. you should make adjustment. B. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. 1. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions.Field Service Ver. Other A. Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment. • Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened. be sure to ground your body.

Other Field Service Ver.2 FS-603 No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Exit Tray Front Cover Exterior Parts Rear Cover Upper Door Finisher Tray Upper Cover Upper Cover Side Guide Middle Transport Unit Stapler Saddle Section Finisher Tray Paddle Section Unit Exit Roller (Upper) Paddle Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt Stapler/Folding Drive Unit Transport Roller Middle Transport Roller Punch Unit Finisher Control Board Punch Control Board Electrical Parts Transport Motor Unit Middle Transport Motor Punch Motor Side Registration Motor Part name Ref. 2005 2.2.0 Mar. 1. page ☞ 7 ☞ 7 ☞ 7 ☞ 8 ☞ 8 ☞ 9 ☞ 9 ☞ 10 ☞ 10 ☞ 11 ☞ 11 ☞ 12 ☞ 14 ☞ 14 ☞ 15 ☞ 17 ☞ 18 ☞ 19 ☞ 20 ☞ 21 ☞ 21 ☞ 22 ☞ 22 ☞ 22 ☞ 22 Maintenance 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 6 .

3. 3. and remove the Exit Tray [2]. and remove the Rear Cover [2].3 2.0 Mar. [6] 5.Field Service Ver. Other 2. Remove two screws [4]. Remove the screw [5].3. Remove four screws [1].1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure 1. [5] 4583fs2528c0 2. FS-603 Maintenance Exit Tray [2] [1] [1] 4583fs2526c0 2.3. ☞ 10 2. and remove the Front Cover [6].2 [1] Front Cover [4] [4] [3] [2] 4583fs2527c0 1.3 Rear Cover 1. Remove two screws [1]. Remove the Middle Transport Unit. 4. Remove the Middle Transport Unit. 10 Open the Front Door [1]. [1] 4583fs2529c0 [2] [1] 4583fs2530c0 7 . remove the Folding Jam Release Dial [3]. ☞ 2. 1. While pinching the claws [2]. 2005 2.

2. ☞ 3. ☞ 2. remove the Finisher Tray Rear Cover [6].4 FS-603 Field Service Ver. Remove the screw [5]. Unplug the connector [3] while holding up the Finisher Tray Upper Cover [2]. and remove the grounding wire. 4583fs2534c0 8 . and remove the Door Band Holder [2] by turning it clockwise.3. [6] [5] 4583fs2532c0 Maintenance 2. 7 Remove the Rear Cover. 7 Remove the Upper Door.0 Mar. 4583fs2531c0 [7] 4.3. 1. Other 2. [2] [3] 5. ☞ 4. 2005 Upper Door [1] [4] [3] [2] 1. 2. 3. Open the Upper Door [1]. 8 Unplug the connector [1]. Remove the screw [4]. and remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover [2]. and remove the Upper Door [7]. Remove the Door Band [3]. 4583fs2533c0 [1] Remove the Front Cover.5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover 1.

• After reassembly. Pull down the Side Guide [4] lightly. [2] [3] [1] 4583fs2536c0 2.and remove the Upper Cover [3].7 Side Guide 1. ☞ 4. ☞ 2. 7 Remove the Rear Cover. press each of these levers for several times to make sure of exact installation. 2005 2. Open the Upper Door[2]. and then remove the Side Guide [4]. 7 Remove two screws [1]. 7 Remove the Front Cover. ensure of exact installation with the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever (Rear) [5] set in the slot of the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever (Center) [6].6 Upper Cover 1. [3] [2] [3] [3] [3] [1] 4583fs2537c0 [5] [4] 4583fs2538c0 [5] [5] [6] 4583fs2539c0 [6] NOTE • In reassembling. 9 Maintenance FS-603 . Remove four screws [3]. 7 Derail the Exit Tray Support Plate (Front) [1] and the Exit Tray Support Plate (Rear) [2] to the outside off the respective rail grooves. disengage the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever (Rear) [5]. ☞ 2. 6. 1.3.Field Service Ver. 7 Remove the Rear Cover.0 Mar. 5. 4. ☞ 3. ☞ 3. Other Remove the Front Cover. Remove the Exit Tray. [1] 4583fs2535c0 2.3.

2. Remove two screws [6]. Other 2. Remove the Middle Transport Unit by sliding it upwards. Pinch the tie band [5]. [6] 4583fs2542c0 2.8 FS-603 [2] Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Pull out the Stapler [3] while pressing the Stop Lever [2]. 7. 4.3.9 Stapler [1] 1. Remove four screws [1].2. or displacement will be caused between the position to which the Staple Driver [4] (the lower unit of the Stapler) feeds staples and the position from which the Staple Clincher [5] (the upper unit of the Stapler) receives them. [5] [4] 4583fs2541c0 Maintenance [7] [7] 5. 6. Unplug two connectors [4]. Loosen two screws [7]. 4583fs2540c0 3.3. Hold up the Middle Front Cover [2] and the Middle Rear Cover [3]. [3] [2] 4583fs2502c0 [5] [4] 4583fs2503c0 NOTES • Do not remove the Stapler from the shaft of the stapler frame. Open the Front Door [1]. and remove it from the sheet metal. 1. and remove them while shifting them back and forth. 10 . 2. 2005 Middle Transport Unit [3] [1] [1] 1.

and remove the Lever [5]. Remove two screws [4]. ☞ 8 2. Unplug two connectors [10]. ☞ 9 3. and pull out and remove the Saddle [13].3. Turn the Folding Jam Release Dial [6] to move the Paper Pressure [7] inside.Field Service Ver. Remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover. ☞ 2.10 Saddle Section 2. 4. Remove the Front Cover. and remove the Right Stay [3].and unplug six connectors [2]. Other [2] [1] [4] 4583fs2544c0 [7] 6. 1. ☞ 3. [12] 4583fs2520c0 2. Remove three screws [12]. remove two screws [2]. Remove the Stapler[11]. 7 Remove the Rear Cover. ☞ 10 10. Open the Jam Access Cover [1]. 8. 5. 4583fs2519c0 [11] [12] [13] 9. 7 Remove the Punch Dust Box.0 Mar.11 Finisher Tray [2] [1] [1] [2] [2] [2] 4583fs2546c0 1. 4583fs2518c0 [10] [9] [8] 7. Remove two screws [1].3. . Remove the C-clip [8]. 2005 2. 11 Maintenance [6] FS-603 [3] [5] [2] 1. Remove the Side Guide. and remove the Belt [9].

[18] [17] 4583fs2525c0 2. 2005 4. FS-603 [6] [4] [5] [4] [3] 4583fs2522c0 5. Remove the Motor Harness [8] from two Harness Saddles [7]. Remove two screws [17]. Place the Finisher Tray [1] as shown in the figure. Remove the Finisher Tray. Pull out the Finisher Stopper Base [3].2. and remove the Harness [16] from the Wire Saddle [15]. Other Field Service Ver. and remove the Belt [13] from the Gear [12]. and remove the spacer [11]. 6. NOTE • Be careful not to damage the Aligning Plate [2]. 1. and disengage the front claw [5] and the rear claw [6] of the Finisher Stopper [4].12 Paddle Section [1] [2] [2] 4583fs2548c0 1. Unplug three connectors [9]. 12 . Remove the C-clip [10].3. and remove the Finisher Tray [18] by sliding it to the far side and lifting it. 9.0 Mar. ☞ 11 2. 8. [8] [7] Maintenance [9] 4583fs2523c0 [12] [13] [11] [10] [6] [14] [16] [15] 4583fs2547c0 7. Unplug the connector [14].

. Remove the Belt [3]. [5] 4583fs2550c0 13 Maintenance FS-603 [4] [3] 3. Separate the section into the Tray Section[5] and the Paddle Section [6].0 Mar.Field Service Ver. and remove two screws [4]. 1. 2005 2. Other [4] 4583fs2549c0 [6] 4.

6. [1] 4583fs2551c0 14 . Push up the Exit Roller (Upper) [4] from the bottom to release it from the shaft [5]. 2005 Exit Roller (Upper) 1. Turn up the Exit Roller (Upper) [6]. [4] [5] 4583fs2553c0 [7] [6] 5.3. and then push it down to remove it.0 Mar. Remove the front Exit Roller (Upper) [7] as well in the same way. [3] [2] 4583fs2552c0 Maintenance 4. ☞ 12 2. Place the Paddle Section [1] as shown in the figure. Remove the Paddle Section.2. Turn the gear [2] in the direction indicated by an arrow to move up the Exit Roller (Upper) section [3]. Place the Paddle Section [1] as shown in the figure. [1] 4583fs2551c0 3.14 Paddle 1. Remove the Paddle Section.3. ☞ 12 2. Other 2.13 FS-603 Field Service Ver. 1. 4583fs2554c0 2.

Field Service Ver.3. Remove the Tray Section. [1] [3] [2] 4583fs2559c0 15 Maintenance 5. 4583fs2558c0 2. 1. 2005 2. ☞ 12 2.0 Mar. Turn the gear [2] in the direction indicted by an arrow to move up the Exit Roller (Upper) section [3]. Other 3. Push up the Safety Guide [4] from the bottom to release it on one side from the shaft [5]. Slide the Aligning Plate (Front) [2] and the Aligning Plate (Rear) [3] outside to remove them from the Tray [1]. Remove the Paddle [6]. [3] [2] 4583fs2555c0 4. Push up the Safety Guide [4] from the bottom to release it from the shaft [5] and remove it. 7.15 Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt 1. [5] [4] 4583fs2556c0 [4] [5] 4583fs2557c0 [6] 6. FS-603 . Remove the other Paddles as well in the same way.

and remove the Exit Roller (Lower) section [15] by lifting it. Remove two Holders [4].0 Mar. Remove the screw [9]. Remove the screw [6].2. and move two bushings [13] inside. Remove four screws [14]. Remove two C-clips [12]. Other Field Service Ver. respectively. [15] [14] 4583fs2564c0 16 . and remove the Finisher Tray Stopper [5]. 1. [13] [12] [12] [13] 4583fs2563c0 [14] 7. and remove the Paper Guide (Front) [8] while disengaging two claws [7]. and remove the Paper Guide (Rear) [11] while disengaging the claw [10]. [11] [10] 4583fs2562c0 6. [7] 4583fs2561c0 Maintenance [9] 5. 2005 3. FS-603 [4] [4] [5] [6] 4583fs2560c0 [8] 4.

Remove screw [3].0 Mar. 7. 4583fs2569c0 17 Maintenance . Remove the Harness from seven Harness Saddles[5]. and unplug the connector [7]. and slightly pull out the stapler section [2]. and remove the interface cable presser [4]. Open the Front Door [1]. Remove the Exit Roller (Lower) [16] and two Paper Exit Belts [17]. 5. and unplug two connectors [6]. 2005 [17] 2.3. Remove the Rear Cover. align the edge of claws of the Paper Exit Belt [18]. and unplug two connectors [8].Field Service Ver. ☞ 7 2. Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle. [1] 4583fs2567c0 [6] [5] [5] 3. 4. FS-603 [16] 4583fs2565c0 [18] NOTE • When installing. 4583fs2566c0 2. Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle.16 Stapler/Folding Drive Unit [2] 1. [4] [8] [3] [5] 4583fs2568c0 [7] 6. 1. Remove the Harness from the Harness Saddle. Other 8.

Unplug two connectors [12]. [12] [12] 4583fs2571c0 Maintenance 10. [1] [2] 4583fs2576c0 18 . ☞ 2. Other Field Service Ver. ☞ 3. 9 Remove two screws [1]. [13] [13] [13] 4583fs2572c0 11. 8 Remove the Upper Cover. Remove the screw [9]. 1. Remove three screws [13]. and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle.0 Mar. Remove the screw [14].2.3. and remove the Stapler/Folding Drive Unit [15]. and remove the Upper Cover Unit [2].17 [1] Transport Roller 1. [14] [15] 4583fs2573c0 2. FS-603 [9] [10] [11] 4583fs2570c0 9. and remove the claw of Harness Guide [11] from the square hole [10] in the base plate. Remove the Upper Door. 2005 8.

Other Remove the Transport Motor Unit. [6] 4583fs2577c0 [12] [11] [9] [8] 4583fs2578c0 11.18 Middle Transport Roller 1.0 Mar. ☞ 10 2. 22 Remove the screw [3]. [1] [1] [2] 4583fs2581c0 19 Maintenance [10] [7] 8. Remove two screws [6]. and remove the Paper Guide (Lower) [12]. 7. Remove the Middle Front Cover and the Middle Rear Cover. and remove the Middle Upper Cover[2]. 2005 4. Remove the Transport Roller [13]. ☞ 5. Remove the screw [11]. Remove Two screws [1]. 6. 9. Remove the gear 1 [7]. NOTE • Be careful not to lose the gear pin. FS-603 . and remove the gear 2 [8] while disengaging the claw. Remove the C-clip [4]. [13] 4583fs2579c0 2. [3] [4] [5] 4583fs2575c0 2. 1.Field Service Ver. and remove the bushing [10]. Remove the C-clip [9].3. 10. and remove the bushing [5].

Unplug the connector [8]. [4] [5] 4583fs2587c0 [6] [8] 6. FS-603 [3] [4] 4583fs2582c0 [8] [7] [6] [5] 4. Other Field Service Ver. 5. 4583fs2583c0 Maintenance 2. Remove the Harness from the Harness Guide [2]. Shift the Shaft Assy in the orientation as shown on the left.2. Remove the Punch Trash Box. and remove the base cover [10]. Remove two screws [9]. 5. [2] 4583fs2586c0 [3] 4. 1. Unplug the connector [3].3.19 Punch Unit [1] 1. 2005 3.0 Mar. the bushing [7]. and remove the bushing [4]. 3. the Gear [6]. 7. Remove the screw [4]. Remove the screw [6] and the washer [7]. 2. Remove the C-clip [5]. and remove the Middle Transport Roller [8]. [10] [9] [7] 4583fs2588c0 20 . Unplug the connector J1005 [1]. Remove the C-clip[3]. and remove the Sensor Support Plate [5]. 8.

Remove the Punch Unit [16] from the Side Registration Motor section [15]. [11] [12] [11] [11] [13] [11] 4583fs2589c0 [15] [16] 10.Field Service Ver.3. [2] [1] [2] [1] 4583fs2591c0 21 Maintenance [14] FS-603 . Remove two screws [1]. Remove the Rear Cover.3. Other 9. Release the PCB support [2]. Remove the spring[14]. and remove the Sensor Unit (Upper) [12] and the Sensor Unit (Lower) [13]. Unplug all connectors on the Board. [3] 4583fs2592c0 2. ☞ 7 2. and remove the Punch Control Board [3]. 2005 2. 1. Unplug seven connectors [2]. and remove the screw [1]. Remove four screws [11].20 [1] Finisher Control Board [2] 1.0 Mar. and remove the Finisher Control Board [3]. 2. 4583fs2590c0 2. 3. 11.21 Punch Control Board [3] [2] [2] 1.

2005 Transport Motor Unit [4] [5] [1] 1. [3] [1] 4583fs2584c0 Remove the Upper Cover.0 Mar.3. ☞ 2. 3. 9 Remove two screws [1]. 3. and remove the Side Registration Motor [4]. 1. Remove the harness from the Wire Saddle [1].3.23 Middle Transport Motor 1. 3. Remove the harness from the Harness Guide [2]. and remove the Harness Guide [3]. Remove three screws [4]. Remove the Middle Rear Cover.3. 7 Unplug the connector [1]. ☞ 2. 4. Maintenance [3] [3] [1] [2] 4583fs2580c0 2. 3. Remove two screws [3]. 4. Other 2.25 [3] Side Registration Motor [3] [1] [4] [2] 4583fs2585c0 1. Unplug the connector J1001 [1]. 22 .22 FS-603 [4] Field Service Ver.3.24 Punch Motor [2] 1. [4] [2] [3] 4583fs2574c0 2. 2. ☞ 10 2. Remove two screws [3]. and remove the punch motor [3]. and remove the Transport Motor Unit [5]. Unplug the connector [2]. Remove screw [2]. Unplug the connector [2]. 2. Remove the Rear Cover.2.

6. How to use the adjustment section 23 . or related part is dirty. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. and supplies used for printing (developer.Field Service Ver. 6. etc. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. 1. 10. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. direct sunlight. PC Drum. 4. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. ventilation. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. The Original Glass. 8.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.g. The density is properly selected. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 2. FS-603 Adjustment / Setting 3.Check to see if: 1. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 2. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. The units. high humidity. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. B.. The power supply is properly grounded. slit glass. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. A. etc.. levelness of the installation site. Toner is not running out. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. 5. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. Correct paper is being used for printing. 2005 3. the following advance checks must be made.0 Mar. 3. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 7. 4. parts. 9.

Touch the “Sensor Check” key. and closure failure condition). PK-501) Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Paper not present Symbol PI1-FN PI2-FN PI3-FN PI4-FN PI5-FN PI6-FN PI7-FN Panel display Entrance Paddle Home Bundle Roller Home Front Align Back Align Alignment Tray Home (Exit Belt) Part/Signal name Entrance Sensor Paddle Home Position Sensor Swing Guide Home Position Sensor Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Finisher Tray Sensor Exit Belt Home Position Sensor Paper present HP HP HP HP Paper present HP Paper not present 24 . 2005 4. Call the Service Mode to the screen.1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit. <Procedure> 1. malfunction.2. 3. Sensor check Field Service Ver.1 • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely. FS-603 Sensor check Check procedure 4. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen.2 4. Touch the “State Confirmation” key. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Adjustment / Setting 4583F3E502DA A. Sensor monitor 4 (FS-601. 2. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed.0 Mar.4. 1. 4.

Field Service Ver. MS3-FN MS4-FN PI21-FN PI22-FN PI23-FN MS1-FN Stapler Safety SW Self Prime Front Door Upper Cover Front Door SW Remain in Reverse Section Staple Safety Switch (Rear) Staple Safety Switch (Front) Self-Priming Sensor Front Door Open Sensor Upper Cover Open Sensor Front Door Open Switch OPEN CLOSE READY CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN OPEN OPEN HORIZONTAL MS2-FN Joint SW Punch Depth 1 Punch Depth 2 Punch Depth 3 Punch Depth 4 Punch Dust Punch Timing Joint Open Switch CLOSE OPEN FULL PI3P-PK PI1P-PK PI2P-PK PC4-HO Punch Motor Clock Punch (Home) Punch Depth (Home) Horizontal Transport Door Punch Motor Clock Sensor Punch Home Position Sensor Side Registration Home Sensor Horizontal Unit Door Sensor Blocked HP HP Blocked Unblocked Unblocked 25 Adjustment / Setting DETECTE D FS-603 .0 Mar. 1. Sensor check Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Paper not present Paper not present Symbol PI10-FN PI13-FN PI11-FN PI12-FN PI14-FN PI8-FN PI9-FN PI15-FN PI16-FN PI17-FN Panel display Crease Position Crease Tray Crease Home Crease Roller Home Crease Clock Paper Paper Surface Lift Raised Position Lift Lowered Position Lift Clock Lift Middle Part/Signal name Folding Position Sensor Saddle Tray Sensor Folding Home Position Sensor Folding Roller Home Position Sensor Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor Exit Tray Sensor Exit Tray Home Position Sensor Shift Upper Limit Sensor Shift Lower Limit Sensor Shift Motor Clock Sensor Paper present Paper present HP HP Paper present DETECTE D UPPER LIMIT LOWER LIMIT Paper not present FULL Slide Home Position Sensor Staple Drive Home Position Sensor Staple Detecting Sensor HP SUPPLIED EMPTY HP PI18-FN PI19-FN PI20-FN Slide Home Stapler Home Staple Stapler Connect. 2005 4.

NOTE • In checking the deviation.1 • The stapling position is adjusted by aligning the stapling position to the folding position. refer to “Board switch.” Adjustment / Setting 4583F3E506DA 8. FS-603 Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the stapling position 5. Touch “Finisher”. Press the “Start” Key.5. 4. Touch “Center-Staple Position Adj.1 Adjustment procedure 1. Set five sheets of A3 or 11 x 17 original (blank paper acceptable) in the Original Tray. Check the deviation of the stapling position from the newly folded position. refer not to the folded position by the Finisher but to the newly folded position. • This adjustment is made in the Service Mode of the main unit. Set the mode to the Service Mode. • These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation.” ☞ 40 Adjustable range: . see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Renew the center folding of the finished copies. • For the effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm.1. this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1mm or more. Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm. 2005 5.” 9. ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. Take the top surface of the finished copies as “A”. 1.” 3.7 to + 7 mm (Increment: 1 mm) 5. Touch these keys in this order: “Fold & Staple” → “OK. 2. Set A3 or 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray. 6. 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.0 Mar. and the under surface as “B. 5. 26 .

Touch “END. When the stapling position is shifted to the direction A: Adjust the value to the . 27 Adjustment / Setting FS-603 <To .Field Service Ver.0 Mar. Press the “Clear” Key. 2005 Standard:0 ± 2 mm 5. Mechanical adjustment A A A B B B 4583fs3501c0 10. Make the copy and check again.side. 1.side> <Standard> <To + side> .” 4583F3E508DA 13. 11. When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B: Adjust the value to the + side.Keys. Adjust with the +/. 12.

1 Adjustment procedure 1. Touch these keys in this order: “Fold & Staple” → “OK.” 7. Set five sheets of A3 or 11 x 17 original (blank paper acceptable) in the Original Tray. Touch “Finisher. and the under surface as “B.2.” 3.2 FS-603 Adjustment of the folding position • The folding position is adjusted by aligning the folding position to the stapling position. • For the effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm. 6. 5. refer to “Board switch. Take the top surface of the finished copies as “A”. Set the mode to the Service Mode. this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1mm or more.” Standard: 0 ± 2 mm <To + side> A A <Standard> A <To . ☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. Set A3 or 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray. • This adjustment is made in the Service Mode of the main unit. Press the “Start” Key. Touch “Half-Fold Position Adj.” Adjustment / Setting 4583F3E510DA 8. Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm. 2005 5. • These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation.” ☞ 40 Adjustment range: .side> B B B 4583fs3502c0 28 .5.7 to + 7 mm (Increment: 1 mm) 5. 1. 4. 2. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. Check the finished copies for deviation of the stapling position of from the newly folded position. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.0 Mar.

29 Adjustment / Setting FS-603 .side. 1.0 Mar. When the stapling position is shifted to the direction A: Adjust the value to the + side. Touch “END. 2005 5.Field Service Ver. 11. Adjust with the +/. Press the “Clear” Key.When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B: Adjust the value to the . Mechanical adjustment 9. Make the copy and check again.” 4583F3E512DA 12. 10.Keys.

5. Mechanical adjustment

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

5.3
FS-603

Adjustment of height and inclination
1. Gently move the finisher toward the machine and check for following. • Is the positioning pin aligned with the hole in the finisher?

4583fs3503c0

A B

• Does the horizontal transport unit run excessively slantwise? • Does the clearance at A equal that at B? • If the finisher is not at the same height as the machine, adjust the machine as follows.
4583fs3504c0

[1]

2. Remove the Finisher [1] from the main unit, and remove two caster covers [2].

Adjustment / Setting

[2] [3] [3] [3]

4583fs3505c0

[3]

3. Remove four adjusting screw covers [3].

4583fs3506c0

30

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

5. Mechanical adjustment 4. Loosen four caster fixing screws [4]. (4 points)
FS-603
4583fs3507c0

[4]

[4]

[4]

[4]

[5]

[5]

4583fs3508c0

31

Adjustment / Setting

5. Turn the adjustment screw [5] to make adjustment. • To heighten: Turn the screw counterclockwise. • To bring down: Turn the screw clockwise. 6. Fasten the caster fixing screws. 7. Install the caster covers and the adjustment screw covers.

5. Mechanical adjustment

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

5.4
FS-603

Adjustment of the Folding Position

• Folding position is adjusted by adjusting the Tray Section and the Saddle Section. • Adjust the folding position by aligning the Tray Section. Adjust the position of the Saddle Section if the position is still not proper. <Deviation amount which will be adjusted>
Amount of deviation which will Paper Size be adjusted by aligning the Tray Section A3 A4 B4 Ledger Letter 0.55 mm 0.4 mm 0.5 mm 0.55 mm 0.35 mm Amount of deviation which will be adjusted by aligning the Saddle Section position 0.55 mm 0.4 mm 0.5 mm 0.55 mm 0.35 mm Total amount which will be adjusted 1.1 mm 0.8 mm 1.0 mm 1.1 mm 0.7 mm

5.4.1

Adjustment procedure A. Checking the deviation amount 1. Load the Paper Take-up Tray with A3 paper. 2. Select “Fold & Staple” and touch “OK.” 3. Place the A3 Original (Blank paper acceptable) to the original tray, and press the Start key. 4. Check the fed out copy to see if there is any deviation.

Deviated downward

Deviated upward

Adjustment / Setting

Exit direction

Exit direction

4583F3E525DA

[1]

B. Adjusting the folding deviation 1. Turn main power switch OFF, and remove the Finisher from the machine. 2. Remove the cable, and remove the Horizontal Unit [1].

4583F3C518DA

32

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005
[2]

5. Mechanical adjustment 3. ☞ 4. ☞ 5. Remove the Middle Transport Unit. 10 Remove the front cover. 7 Loosen two screws [2] on the Tray Section.

4583F3C519DA

[3]

6. Move the Tray Section [3] back and forth, and move the positioning dowels [4] right and left to adjust.

[4] Adjustment / Setting
4583F3C520DA

33

FS-603

5. Mechanical adjustment

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 • If it is deviated downward <A>, move the positioning dowels to the left. • If it is deviated upward <B>, move the positioning dowels to the right. NOTE • The folding line will move along with the staples.

<A> FS-603

<B>

4583F3C523DA

[5]

[5]

[5] Adjustment / Setting

7. Carry out the test copy to see if there is any folding deviation. If the deviation is not adjusted, repeat the procedure from Step 8 to adjust the Saddle Section position. 8. Loosen three set screws [5] on the Saddle Section.

4583F3C521DA

34

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005
[6]

5. Mechanical adjustment 9. Move the two positioning dowels [6] to adjust.
FS-603

[6]

4583F3C522DA

<C>

<D>

4583F3C524DA

35

Adjustment / Setting

• If it is deviated downward <C>, move the positioning dowel to the left. • If it is deviated upward <D>, move the positioning dowel to the right. NOTE • Only the folding line will move. 10. Feed out the test copy and check if there is any folding deviation.

5. Mechanical adjustment

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

5.5
FS-603

Stapler Phase Adjustment
• Make phase adjustment of the Stapler following the procedures given below whenever the Gear or Timing Belt in front of the Stapler has been replaced or removed for some reason, since such replacement or removal will cause mistiming between the staple driving by the Staple Driver (the lower unit of the Stapler) and the staple clinching by the Staple Clincher (the upper unit of the Stapler).

4583fs2504c0

5.5.1

Adjustment procedure 1. Remove the Stapler. ☞ 10 2. Remove the E-Ring [1], and remove the Jam Release Dial 1[2]. 3. Remove the Jam Release Dial 2 [3]. 4. Remove the three screws [4], and remove the Stapler Front Cover [5].

[1]

[3] [4]

[4]

[2]

Adjustment / Setting

[4]

[5]

4583fs2543c0

[8] [10] [7]

[9] [6]

5. Remove the Gear Cover [7] from the Staple Driver [6]. 6. Remove the E-Ring [8], and remove the Side Cover [10] from the Staple Clincher [9].

4583fs2505c0

[12] [13] [11] [16] [14] [15] [17]

4583fs2506c0

7. Remove two E-Rings [11], and remove the Staple Jam Release Gear [12], the Timing Belt [13] and the Middle Gear 1 [14]. 8. Remove the spacer and the spring located behind the Staple Jam Release Gear. 9. Remove the screw [15] and the spring [16], and remove the Belt Tension Roller [17].

36

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

5. Mechanical adjustment 10. Remove the Timing Belt [18]. 11. Remove the E-Ring [19], and remove the Staple Position Confirm Gear [20].

[18]
4583fs2507c0

12. Turn the Gear [21] to position the hole [22] in the Gear of the Staple Driver to the hole behind.
[21]

[22]
4583fs2508c0

13. Insert a pin of approx.φ2 [23] (alternatively, 2 mm hexagonal wrench or the like can be preferably used) into the hole, and fix the Gear.
[23]

[24]

14. Turn the Gear [24] to position the hole [25] in the Cam of the Staple Clincher to the hole behind.

[25]
4583fs2510c0

[26]

15. Insert a pin of approx.φ2 [26] (alternatively, 2 mm hexagonal wrench or the like can be preferably used) into the hole, and fix the Cam.

4583fs2511c0

37

Adjustment / Setting

4583fs2509c0

FS-603

[20]

[19]

5. Mechanical adjustment

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 16. Set the Timing Belt [27] to the Gear [28] and Gear [29] with the Gear and the Cam in the fixed condition.

FS-603

[28] [29] [27]

4583fs2512c0

[31]

[30] [32]

4583fs2513c0

Adjustment / Setting

17. Install the Staple Position Confirm Gear [32] in such a way that the blue mark [30] of the Gear comes face to face with the hole [31] in the frame. NOTE • The position in which the blue mark meets face to face with the hole is the home position for stapling. If the Staple Jam Release Gear is turned for some reason, this home position will shift and the Staple Cartridge will not come off. In this case, the Staple Position Confirm Gear plays a role of resuming the stapling home position by referring to the blue mark. Therefore, the Gear should be set in place correctly. 18. Remove the pin fixing the Gear and the Cam to release them. 19. Set the spring [33], the spacer [34], the Staple Jam Release Gear [35], the Timing Belt [36] and the Middle Gear 1 [37], and fix them with two ERings [38].

[33]

[36] [37]

[34] [35]

[38]

4583fs2514c0

38

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

5. Mechanical adjustment

5.6

Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment
FS-603 Adjustment / Setting

• Whenever the Gear in front of the Saddle or the Folding Roller has been replaced or removed for some reason, make gear phase adjustment following the procedures given below. A. Adjustment procedure
[2] [1]

1. Remove the Saddle. ☞ 11 2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the Saddle Gear Cover [2].

[1]

4583fs2545c0

[4] [3]

3. Set the Folding Roller [3] and Saddle Cam [4] within the Saddle as shown in the figure. 4. With the Folding Roller and the Saddle Cam positioned as shown in the Left figure, set the gears as shown in the figure in the following way.
4583fs2515c0

[5] [6] [7]
4583fs2516c0

NOTE • The mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear [5] (either of the two marks) comes face to face with the mark on the Middle Gear [6] (the mark on the semi spherical part with narrow gear face width). 5. With the Saddle Cam Drive Gear [5] and the Middle Gear [6] positioned as above, the mark on the Middle Gear [6] (the mark on the other semi spherical part) meets face to face with the rib of the Folding Roller Drive Gear [7].

39

6. Board switch

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

6.
FS-603

Board switch
PWB-A FN (Finisher Control Board)

6.1

6 CN8 3 CN1

1 4 CN6

1 5 CN22

1 1 21 CN18

12 1 CN10 CN3

10 1 CN13 CN7

6 1

73 19 1 15 CN4 CN20

Adjustment / Setting

Symbol 1 2 3 SW1 PSW1 PSW2

1 5 CN14 1 1 CN17 4 1 CN12 5 1 CN16 12 1 PSW2 PSW1 CN2 4 1 CN21 11 1 SW1 CN9 9 7 CN11 1

[3]

[2] [1]

CN5

LED2 LED1

CN19 CN15

1 12 1
4583fs3509c0

Description Used to adjust the folding position, adjust the center 2-point stapling position and adjust the alignment plate position. Used to adjust the folding position, adjust the center 2-point stapling position and adjust the alignment plate position. Used to adjust the folding position, adjust the center 2-point stapling position and adjust the alignment plate position.

40

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 6.1.1 Adjustment of the folding positions

6. Board switch

NOTE • Depending on the type of paper, both the folding position and the stapling position may be inaccurate. In this case, make adjustment independently from the Finisher. In this independent adjustment from the Finisher, set the adjustment value of “Center Stapling Position” and “Folding Position” in the service mode to ± 0 mm on the main unit. 1. Set SW1 on the Finisher Control Board as shown on the Left figure.
ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

4583fs3510c0

- direction

+ direction

4583fs3523e0

2. Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Control Board for the required times to adjust the folding position. One pressing of the switch moves the folding position by approx. 0.16 mm. • Press PSW1 to move the folding position in the “-” direction. • Press PSW2 to move the folding position in the “+” direction. • Press PSW1 and PSW2 simultaneously to clear the present set adjustment value.

3. After setting the adjustment value of the folding position, set all bits of SW1 on the Finisher Control Board to OFF. 4. Perform the “Booklet Creation” on the main unit, and confirm that the folding position has been correctly adjusted. If not, redo the adjustment.

41

Adjustment / Setting

FS-603

• When a folding position is adjusted, adjust the folding position to the stapling position. Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the folding position must be changed for some reason.

6. Board switch 6.1.2
FS-603

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

Adjustment of the center stapling position

• When a stapling position is adjusted, adjust the stapling position to the folding position. Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the stapling position must be changed for some reason. NOTE • Depending on the type of paper, both the folding position and the stapling position may be inaccurate. In this case, make adjustment independently from the Finisher. In this independent adjustment from the Finisher, set the adjustment value of “Center Stapling Position” and “Folding Position” in the service mode to ± 0mm on the main unit. 1. Set SW1 on the Finisher Control Board as shown on the Left figure.
ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

4583fs3512c0

- direction

+ direction

4583fs3523e0

2. Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Control Board for the required times to adjust the stapling position. One pressing of the switch moves the stapling position by approx. 0.14 mm. • Press PSW1 to move the stapling position in the “-” direction. • Press PSW2 to move the stapling position in the “+” direction. • Press PSW1 and PSW2 simultaneously to clear the present set adjustment value.

Adjustment / Setting

3. After setting the adjustment value of the stapling position, set all bits of SW1 on the Finisher Control Board to OFF. 4. Perform the “Booklet Creation” on the main unit, and confirm that the stapling position has been correctly adjusted. If not, redo the adjustment.

42

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005 6.1.3 Adjustment of the Alignment Plate position

6. Board switch

A. Alignment procedure NOTE • When failing to follow the steps properly, turn main power switch OFF/ON and repeat the step from Step 1. 1. Turn main power switch OFF, and remove the Finisher from the machine. 2. Remove the rear cover form the Finisher. ☞ 7 3. Check to make sure that all SW1 on the Finisher Controller Board are set to OFF. NOTE • When not all of them are OFF, write down the switch status and turn them OFF. 4. With the rear cover of the Finisher removed, install the Finisher to the machine, and turn main power switch ON. 5. When the initial operation of the Finisher is complete, turn on the following switches of SW1. When adjusting with A4: 3, 5 When adjusting with Letter: 3, 6

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

4583F3C514DA

<A4>
ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

<Letter>
ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8
4583F3C515DA

[2]

[1]

LED2 LED1

PSW2 PSW1 CN2 1 4 1 CN21 11

SW1

4583F3C516DA

6. After the initial operation of the Finisher, press the PSW1 [1] on the Finisher Control Board and make sure that the alignment plate moves to the selected paper size area. 7. Adjust the Alignment plate position with PSW1 [1] or PSW2 [2]. When adjusting inward: Press PSW1. When adjusting outward: Press PSW2. The alignment plate will move 0.367mm every time the push switch is pressed. Alignment range is ± 2.936 mm.

43

Adjustment / Setting

FS-603

• Alignment plate should be adjusted when there is a faulty alignment, the staple position deviates.

CN17 4 1 CN12 5 1 CN16 12

6. Board switch

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Mar. 2005

FS-603

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

8. When the adjustment is complete, turn switch 8 of SW1 ON to set the adjustment value. 9. Turn all adjustment switches OFF. 10. Turn main power switch OFF. NOTE • When not all SW1 are OFF in step 3, return to the original condition according to the written note. 11. Return the Finisher to the original status.
4583F3C517DA

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Adjustment / Setting

44

Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output. J1002 J1001 41 1 1 2 [1] J1006 45 Adjustment / Setting FS-603 . Board switch 6.0 Mar.Field Service Ver. 1.2 PWB-B PK (Punch Control Board) 13 J1007 1 J1005 4 91 SW1001 [2] [3] SW1002 SW1003 LED1001 LED1002 LED1003 J1003 1 5 5 J1004 1 4583fs3514c0 Symbol 1 2 3 SW1001 SW1002 SW1003 Description Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output. 2005 6. Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output.

Press SW1003 on the Punch Control Board twice. the following display changes in the descending order shown below: Number of punch holes 2 (Punch Unit J1) 2/3 (Punch Unit K1) 4 (Punch Unit G1) 4 (Punch Unit H1) LED 1001 ON ON OFF OFF LED 1002 OFF ON ON OFF LED 1003 OFF OFF OFF ON 3. • The pressing of SW1003 changes the steady lighting of the LED to flickering. Set all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF. 4. Board switch 6. ON 1 2 3 4 4583fs3515c0 6.2. Set the bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure. Adjustment / Setting ON 1 2 3 4 4583fs3516c0 2. Set all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF. such number of punch holes is registered in the IC on the Punch Control Board. 1.2. This completes the registration. the Side Registration Sensor (Photosensor Board or LED Board) or the Punch Dust Full Sensor (Punch Dust Full Sensor Board or Punch Dust Full LED Board). • However. and the pressing of SW1003 again changes the flickering of the LED to steady lighting.2 Registration of the number of punch holes • In order for the Finisher to recognize the number of punch holes that can be achieved by the installed Punch Unit. 46 . the adjustment has been completed. LED1002 and LED1003 light up. 1.6. 1. Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Control Board. Set the bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure. 2005 Adjustment of the sensor output • Be sure to make this adjustment after replacing the Punch Control Board. Make this registration whenever the Punch Control Board has been replaced. this registration is not necessary if the EEP-ROM used on an old board has been reinstalled to a new board. • When all LED1001. 2. Press SW1002 on the Punch Control Board to select the number of punch holes. 3. • Each time SW1002 is pressed.0 Mar. The sensor output will be automatically adjusted. The number of punch holes will be registered in the Punch Control Board.1 FS-603 Field Service Ver.

Adjust the sensor output. Turn ON keys 4. Set the bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure. 1. ☞ 2-7 3. 4.Field Service Ver. • This will initialize the EEP-ROM. 5. 2. LED1002 and LED1003 light up. Board switch ON 1 2 3 4 4583fs3517c0 1. and register the number of punch holes.2. 6. Check that all keys of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board are OFF. 6. and 7 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. Remove the Rear Cover.Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Control Board simultaneously.3 Procedure after replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002) 6. 1. Set all bits of DIP SW 1001 to OFF. • Use the following procedure to clear the adjustment of the Punch lateral movement. 2005 6. Turn ON key 1 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. all LED1001. Turn ON the Main Power Switch of the main unit and wait until the Finisher completes its initial operation. After the initialization.4 Punch center position adjustment • This adjustment is made when the Punch lateral movement is changed from the lateral registration motion (automatic through end face detection) to fixed system based on the paper size. Press PSW1 and PSW2 of the Finisher Control Board at the same time. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit. 5. 3. 2.2.0 Mar. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4583fs3523c0 ON 1 4583fs3524c0 ON 6. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 4583fs3525c0 47 Adjustment / Setting FS-603 . 7. 4.

Turn OFF key 1 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. • When the adjustment procedure has been completed.0 Mar. 12. 9. • Each press of PSW1 or PSW2 moves the position 1 mm. • Pressing PSW2 moves the punch position to the rear. 15. FS-603 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4583fs3526c0 4583fs3529c0 10. REAR SIDE FRONT SIDE Adjustment / Setting 4583fs3528e0 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4583fs3527c0 ON 14. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit. and 7 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. Board switch Field Service Ver. 6. use the following procedure to finish the adjustment mode. Specifications:0 ± 2 mm • If the specified range is not met. • Pressing PSW1 moves the punch position to the front. 13. Feed one sheet of paper through the machine.6. Turn OFF keys 5. Fold the copy fed out of the machine in half and check that the punch holes are aligned with each other. 2005 8. If the punch hole position is not properly adjusted. 1. Wait until the machine becomes capable of paper feed. Turn OFF key 4 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. use the following procedure to adjust the Punch center position. The adjustment range should be within ± 5 mm. Press PSW1 or PSW2 of the Finisher Control Board once according to the direction of deviation. make the adjustment once again. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 4583fs3523c0 48 . 11. Feed another sheet of paper.

switching ON or OFF must be performed properly. The adjustment range is ± 5 mm. ☞ 2-7 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4583fs3530c0 NOTE • The procedure must be carried out as specified. 2005 6.Field Service Ver. • This adjustment is applicable only to the punch position center adjustment. • To return the setting back to the lateral registration motion. Adjustment / Setting 49 FS-603 . stop the procedure immediately. turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch and start the procedure over. In particular. Reinstall the rear cover. • If a step or steps are wrongly performed in mid procedure. 18. 17.0 Mar. It does not adjust for variations in the punch hole positions. 1. Board switch 16. Turn ON the Main Power Switch of the main unit. NOTES • Flipping ON key 7 of SW1 validates the setting made to the fixed system based on the paper size as changed from the lateral registration motion (automatic through end face detection). Turn ON key 7 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board. Then. flip OFF key 7 of SW1.

Board switch Field Service Ver.0 Mar. 2005 FS-603 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 50 . 1.6.

misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. Troubleshooting 51 . clear the sheet of paper misfeed. [1] [4] [3] No. 2005 7. and close the door.Field Service Ver. Jam Display • When misfeed occurs. [1] [2] [3] [4] Code 7401 7403 7407 7405 Misfeed location Transport section Horizontal Transport section Folding Position section Stapler section Misfeed access location Front Door Horizontal Transport Cover Front Door Front Door Action ☞ ☞ ☞ ☞ 53 54 54 55 7. 1.1. Jam Display Troubleshooting 7.0 Mar. message.1 Misfeed display FS-603 [1] [2] 4583F4C501DA 7.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door.

7.0 Mar.2 FS-603 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] [4] 4583fs4521c0 [1] Turnover Empty Sensor [2] Entrance Sensor PC6-HO PI1-FN [3] Folding Position Sensor [4] Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI10-FN PI19-FN Troubleshooting 52 . 1. 2005 7. Jam Display Field Service Ver.

2 Transport section misfeed A. 7. 2005 7.0 Mar.1 Solution FS-603 — FS-603 B-8 — Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. Correct or replace the defective actuator. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Jam Display 7.5 sec. deformed. after the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) has received the paper exit signal from the main unit. 1. wavy.3. 1. Set as necessary. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. 2 sec.3 7. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty. Detection timing Type Description The Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) does not detect paper even after the lapse of approx. Transport section misfeed detection B.Field Service Ver. Paper is not removed from the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) even after the lapse of approx. Replace paper. or damp? Replace paper. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. after the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) has detected paper edge. sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 53 Troubleshooting .3. deformed. Action Relevant electrical parts Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN CN16A FN-11 — Location (Electrical components) 1 2 3 Initial check items PI1-FN I/O. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. first perform the following initial check items. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled.

Detection timing Type horizontal transport section misfeed detection Description The Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO). after the Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) has been driven during stapling operation. 2005 Horizontal Transport section misfeed A. Jam Display 7.0 Mar. 1. Detection timing Type Description The Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) does not detect paper even after the set period of time after the paper has been fed from the Transport Booklet Tray to the stapling position during stapling operation.5 sec. B. Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN CN21A FN-5 — Location (Electrical components) — FS-603 G-7 — 1 2 3 Initial check items PC6-HO I/O.3.3. sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 54 .4 Folding position section misfeed A. Paper is not removed from the Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) even after the lapse of approx.7. sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 7. Folding position section misfeed detection B. Action Relevant electrical parts Troubleshooting Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A FN CN16A FN-2 — Location (Electrical components) — FS-603 8-B — 1 2 3 Initial check items PI10-FN I/O. 10.3 FS-603 Field Service Ver.

0 Mar.3. sensor check PWB-A FN replacement 55 Troubleshooting FS-603 . 2005 7. B.Field Service Ver.5 Stapler section misfeed 7. 1. Detection timing Type Description The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) is not turned OFF or does not Stapler section misreturn to its home position even after the set period of time after the stapler has feed detection been driven. Action Relevant electrical parts Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — — — Location (Electrical components) — — — 1 2 3 Initial check items PI19-FN I/O. Jam Display A.

• The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from its home position. • The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from a position not the home position. 2005 8.8. FS-603 Trouble code Trouble code display 8.2 Code C1180 Trouble code list Item Transport System Drive malfunctions Description • The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from its home position. C1181 Paddle Motor malfunctions Troubleshooting 56 . • The Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from a position not the home position.0 Mar. on detecting a malfunction. gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel. 8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.1 • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. • The Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from its home position. be sure to turn OFF the main power switch of the machine. • The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from a position not the home position. 4583F4E504DA NOTE • Before starting the troubleshooting in relation to the Punch Mechanism C11CX.

• The Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from a position not the home position. 57 Troubleshooting FS-603 . • The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an initial operation. • The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position. • The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an ordinary operation.• The Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) is not tions unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from its home position. 1.0 Mar. • An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during operation of the tray. • The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position. C1192 C1193 Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions C11A4 Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions C11B1 Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunc. • The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position. 2005 Code C1183 Item Description 8. Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions • The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position. • The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an ordinary operation. Trouble code Elevate Mechanism malfunctions • The Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray has started moving up.Field Service Ver. • The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an initial operation.

• The 24 V power source of the Punch Unit is OFF when an operation request is made from the Finisher.5 V or more when the illuminating voltage is set to 0 V. • No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during initial communications. • An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a folding operation. • No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during ordinary communications. • The Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from its home position.8. • The setting value calculated during the initial operation falls outside the threshold value range.0 Mar. • There is no match in the checksum values of the backup data as checked twice. FS-603 C11C1 Punch Control Board malfunctions C11C2 Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions Troubleshooting C11C3 Punch Motor malfunctions C11C5 Punch Sensor malfunctions 58 . 1. • The Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from a position not the home position. • An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a clinch operation. 2005 Description • The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the clinch operation has started. Trouble code Code C11B4 Item Stapler/Folding Motor malfunctions Field Service Ver.4 V. • An encoder clock input is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time during operation of the Punch Motor.5 V or less when the illuminating voltage is set to 4. • The light receiving voltage is 2. • The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started during an ordinary operation. • The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started and the sensor has been unblocked during an ordinary operation.4 V or more after the adjustment has been made. • The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Unit has started moving from a position out of the home position during an initial operation. • The home position is not detected within a given period of time after the Punch Motor has been rotated a half turn. • The illuminating voltage setting is 4. • The light receiving voltage is 2.

Trouble code • Data written in the Backup Memory differs from what is recorded in it and writing operation is not correctly performed even with two retry sequences (a total of three writing sequences).Field Service Ver. 59 Troubleshooting FS-603 .1 How to reset • Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. NOTE • The Punch Unit detects punch-related malfunctions and notifies the Finisher of any malfunction detected. 8. 1. 2005 Code C1401 Item Backup RAM malfunction Description 8.2.0 Mar.

1 Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) Transport Motor (M1-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor connectors for proper connection. and correct as necessary. Trouble code Field Service Ver. PI2-FN I/O.0 Mar.3. sensor check M1-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. and correct as necessary. 1.8. 2005 8. and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. sensor check M2-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PI12-FN I/O. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN CN16A FN-9 — — — G-3 — — 8.3 FS-603 Solution C1180: Transport System Drive malfunctions Relevant electrical parts 8. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling.3. sensor check PI3-FN I/O.2 C1181: Paddle Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) Paddle Motor (M2-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. PWB-A FN replacement — Troubleshooting 2 3 4 5 6 — PWB-A FN CN9A FN-2 PWB-A FN CN9A FN-8 PWB-A FN CN10A FN-9 to 12 — — FS-603 G-8 FS-603 G-9 FS-603 B-6 — 60 . and correct as necessary.

PI4-FN I/O. sensor check PWB-A FN replacement — PWB-A FN CN15A FN-12 — 8. Trouble code (1) Upper Limit Sensor Relevant electrical parts Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — FS-603 G-5 — 1 2 3 Check the sensor connectors for proper connection. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN CN4A FN-2 PWB-A FN CN3A FN-2 to 5 — — FS-603 G-6 FS-603 B-4 — 61 Troubleshooting FS-603 . PI15-FN I/O. and correct as necessary.4 C1192: Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4FN) Front Aligning Motor (M4-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.3.3. and correct as necessary.Field Service Ver. 2005 8.3 C1183: Elevate Mechanism malfunctions 8. sensor check M4-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON.0 Mar. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. 1. and correct as necessary.

PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN CN5A FN-15 PWB-A FN CN3A FN-7 to 10 — — FS-603 G-6 FS-603 B-4 — 8. sensor check M5-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. and correct as necessary.3. 2005 C1193: Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5FN) Rear Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. and correct as necessary. PI7-FN I/O. sensor check M3-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. 1.8. Trouble code 8. and correct as necessary.3. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN CN5 FN-6 PWB-A FN CN13A FN-3 to 6 — — FS-603 G-5 FS-603 B-4 — 62 . Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. PI5-FN I/O.0 Mar. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. and correct as necessary.5 FS-603 Field Service Ver.6 C11A4: Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Troubleshooting Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.

and correct as necessary. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN CN11A FN-3 PWB-A FN CN7A FN-3 to 6 — — FS-603 B to C-5 FS-603 B-5 — 8. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — — PWB-A FN CN6A FN-3 to 4 — — — FS-603 B-3 — 63 Troubleshooting FS-603 Relevant electrical parts . and correct as necessary. Trouble code Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) Slide Motor (M8-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.0 Mar. and correct as necessary. 2005 8. and correct as necessary. sensor check M7-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PI18-FN I/O.7 C11B1: Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions 8.8 C11B4: Stapler/Folding Motor malfunctions (1) Wiring Relevant electrical parts Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor connectors for proper connection.3. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. PI19-FN I/O. 1.Field Service Ver. sensor check M8-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling.3.

PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN CN9A FN-5 PWB-A FN CN6A FN-3 to 4 — — FS-603 G-8 FS-603 B-3 — (3) Home Position Sensor Relevant electrical parts Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. and correct as necessary. PI11-FN I/O. 2005 FS-603 Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. and correct as necessary. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 — PWB-A FN CN16A FN-6 PWB-A FN CN6A FN-3 to 4 — — FS-603 B-8 FS-603 B-3 — Troubleshooting 3 4 5 64 . Trouble code (2) Stapler/Crease Clock Sensor (Stapler Section) Relevant electrical parts Field Service Ver. PI14-FN I/O. sensor check M7-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. and correct as necessary.8. and correct as necessary. 1. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling.0 Mar. sensor check M7-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON.

PI14-FN I/O. Check the connection condition between the Punch Unit and PWB-A FN. and correct as necessary. PWB-B PK replacement PWB-A FN replacement 4 5 6 — — — — — — 65 Troubleshooting 3 — — FS-603 Relevant electrical parts . sensor check M7-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. and correct as necessary. 1. Trouble code Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling.3. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-A FN CN9A FN-5 PWB-A FN CN6A FN-3 to 4 — — FS-603 G-8 FS-603 B-3 — 8. 2005 (4) Stapler/Crease Clock Sensor (Saddle Section) 8.Field Service Ver. Is the voltage 24VDC? Initialize Punch Unit EEP-ROM.9 C11C1: Punch Control Board malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — — Location (Electrical components) — — 1 2 Turn OFF and ON the main switch. Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN14-3 (-) of the PWB-A FN.0 Mar.

11 C11C3: Punch Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P-PK) Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P-PK) Punch Motor (M1P-PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. PWB-B PK replacement — 2 3 4 5 — PWB-B PK J1006B PK-6 PWB-B PK J1006B PK-9 PWB-B PK J1002B PK-1 to 2 — — FS-603 H-2 FS-603 H-2 FS-603 H-1 to 2 — Troubleshooting 6 66 . and correct as necessary. and correct as necessary.0 Mar. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. PI1P-PK I/O.10 FS-603 Field Service Ver. sensor check PI3P-PK I/O. PI2P-PK I/O. sensor check M1P-PK operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON.3. 2005 C11C2: Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — FS-603 H-2 — 1 2 3 Check the sensor connectors for proper connection.3. sensor check PWB-B PK replacement — PWB-B PK J1006B PK-3 — 8. 1.8. and correct as necessary. Trouble code 8.

Check the connection condition between PWB-B PK and PWB-F PK. 1. Trouble code (1) Side Registration Sensor Relevant electrical parts Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — FS-603 H-2 — 1 2 3 Check the sensor connectors for proper connection. 2005 8.12 C11C5: Punch Sensor malfunctions 8. PWB-E PK replacement PWB-F PK replacement PWB-B PK replacement — — — — — 67 Troubleshooting FS-603 . sensor check PWB-B PK replacement — PWB-B PK J1006B PK-3 — (2) Wastes Full Sensor Relevant electrical parts Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board (PWB-E PK) Punch Trash Full LED Board (PWB-F PK) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 Check the connection condition between PWB-B PK and PWB-E PK. and correct as necessary.3.Field Service Ver. PI2P-PK I/O.0 Mar.

and correct as necessary. 2005 FS-603 Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN) Shift Motor (M6-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. PWB-A FN replacement — 2 3 4 5 6 — PWB-A FN CN5A FN-12 PWB-A FN CN15A FN-6 PWB-A FN CN6A FN-1 to 2 — — FS-603 G-6 FS-603 G-4 FS-603 B-3 — 8. and correct as necessary.8. 1. Check the connectors for proper connection on the PWB-A FN. PI9-FN I/O sensor check PI17-FN I/O sensor check M6-FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON. PWB-A FN replacement — Troubleshooting 2 3 — — — — 68 . Trouble code (3) Finisher Control Board Relevant electrical parts Field Service Ver.3.0 Mar.13 C1401: Backup RAM malfunction Relevant electrical parts Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Disconnect and then connect the power cord to turn OFF and ON the main switch.

Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information. Printed in Japan DD4037PE1-0800 . INC.© 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES.